Reference Architecture Design Guide Part 1-4

building a smarter, unified business foundation
Connect. Manage. Automate.
Panduit Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure

Reference Architecture Design Guide
Panduit
17301 S. Ridgeland Ave.
Tinley Park Illinois 60477 USA
www.panduit.com
Phone: 800-777-3300
Fax: 708-532-1811
www.panduit.com
Preface
Design + Implementation Guide
About PANDUIT Disclaimer
PANDUIT is a world- THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS INTENDED

class developer and AS A GUIDE FOR USE BY PERSONS HAVING TECHNICAL
provider of leading- SKILL AT THEIR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK, AND IS
edge solutions that help customers optimize the physical PROVIDED “AS IS.” PANDUIT DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES,
infrastructure through simplification, agility and operational INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF
efficiency. PANDUIT’s Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI) - MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
based solutions give enterprises the capabilities to connect, AND NONINFRINGEMENT, AND FURTHER NO WARRANTIES
manage and automate communications, computing, power, ARE CREATED WITH RESPECT TO ANY COURSE OF DEALING,
control and security systems for a smarter, more unified USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, IN CONNECTION WITH
business foundation. Strong relationships with technology INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR ITS IMPLEMENTATION.
leaders complemented with its global staff and unmatched PANDUIT AND ROCKWELL AUTOMATION DISCLAIM ANY
service and support, make PANDUIT a valuable and LIABILITY ARISING FROM ANY USE OF THIS DOCUMENT
trusted partner. OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, OR FOR THE
ABSENCE OF SAME. INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS
Copyright Information DOCUMENT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE THE TECHNICAL OR
OTHER ADVICE OF PANDUIT.
Copyright 2009, Panduit Corp.
Trademark Information
• Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.

and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.
• ODVA and EtherNet/IP are trademarks owned and
used by ODVA.
• Rockwell Automation and FactoryTalk are registered
trademarks of Rockwell Automation in the United
States and/or other jurisdictions.
• Stratix 8000™, Stratix 6000™, and Stratix 2000™ are
trademarks owned and used by Rockwell Automation
and its various subsidiary entities.
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Preface, Page 2
Preface: Design + Implementation Guide
Authorship Team
The Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure Reference PANDUIT wishes to thank and recognize the Rockwell
Architecture Design Guide is a direct result of an intensive, Automation Network & Security Services team for their
collaborative effort from numerous dedicated Panduit significant contribution to this guide.
professionals. This diverse group consists of research
engineers, product engineers, application engineers, control Rockwell Automation Network & Security Business
engineers, installers, technicians, product marketing Rockwell Automation Networks Business
specialist, technical writers, graphic designers and editors. The Network & Security Services team is truly a converged
organization made up of manufacturing engineers and IT
Panduit is fortunate to be able to tap into these individuals professionals. They provide a family of services to assess,
for their insights, creativity and experiences. This document design, implement, audit, and manage new and existing
also leveraged expertise of actual implementations, best industrial control and information networks and security
practices and hard fought lessons from our own global technology, policies and procedures for those networks and
manufacturing community. the personnel that use them.
Finally this Design Guide must also recognize the ongoing

support and guidance from our corporate leadership team.
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Preface, Page 3
Table of Contents
Design + Implementation Guide
Section 1: Introduction
1.1 GOALS OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 WHAT IS INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 WHAT IS “REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 PURPOSE OF THIS REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.6 END-TO-END ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.7 ORGANIZATION OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.7.1 Office Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.7.2 Industrial Physical Network Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.8 STANDARDS-BASED END-TO-END ENVIRONMENTAL
CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.9 ORGANIZATION OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Section 2: Organization of Control System Networks
2.1 THE IMPORTANCE OF THE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 PERA Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.2 ISA-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.3 ISA-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 MANUFACTURING ZONE NETWORK LAYERS AND CONVERGENCE . . 2-5
2.3.1 Layers of the Manufacturing Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.2 Connecting Manufacturing to Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.3 Enterprise Connectivity Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3.4 Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 ROCKWELL AUTOMATION AND CISCO SYSTEMS® REFERENCE
ARCHITECTURES FOR MANUFACTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.5 CONTROL ROOM AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.6 NETWORK DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.7 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.8 CONTROL PANEL AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2.9 ON-MACHINE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.10 PROCESS PLANT APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
2.11 SCADA APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.12 DISCRETE MANUFACTURING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2.13 PACKAGING / CONVEYING APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 TOC, Page 4
Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide
Section 3: Physical Infrastructure Project Phases
3.1 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR PROJECT PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 DETAILED CHECKLIST OF PROJECT STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 PROJECT PHASE DESIGN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Section 4: Physical Infrastructure Implementation
4.1 Copper Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.1.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1.1 Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1.2 Unshielded vs. Shielded Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.1.1.3 Media and Connector Selection for Noise Mitigation . . . . . 4-5
4.1.1.4 Pre-Terminated Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.1.2.1 Pathways and Spacing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.1.2.2 Cable Separation Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.1.2.3 Cable Pulling & Installation Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.1.2.4 Cable Management in theTelecommunications Room . . . . . 4-12
4.1.2.5 Cable Management in the Production Office Area . . . . . . . 4-12
4.1.2.6 Copper Jack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.1.2.7 Installation Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.1.3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.1.3.1 Channel Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.1.3.2 Alien Crosstalk Testing (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.1.3.3 Standards Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.1.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2 Fiber Optic Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.1.1 Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.1.2 Bandwidth and Reach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.1.3 Pre-Terminated Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.1.4 Harsh Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.1.5 Hybrid Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.2 Building the Fiber Optic Cable with Stratix Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.2.2.1 Selecting Stratix SFP Modules & Sepcifying Fiber Media. . 4-26
4.2.2.2 Specifying Fiber Patch Cables for Stratix Cabels
for Stratix SFP Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.2.3 Adapters for Legacy Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.2.4 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.2.4.1 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.4.2 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5.1 Cable Pulling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5.2 Terminating OPTICAM® Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.2.6 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.2.7 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.3 Grounding and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.3.1 End-to-End Grounding & Bonding System Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.3.1.1 Grounding Electrode System (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.3.1.2 Utility Entrance Facility/Grounding & Bonding Infrastructure 4-44
4.3.1.3 Telecommunications System Grounding
(Control Rooms & Data Centers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.3.1.4 Control System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.3.2 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.3.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.3.3.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.3.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.4 Racks and Cabinet Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4.4.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4.4.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.4.2.1 Physical Infrastructure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.4.2.2 Selection of Cabinets or Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.4.2.3 Selection of Vertical and Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . 4-68
4.4.2.4 Mounting Stratix Switches on DIN Rail or in Blanking Panels 4-70
4.4.2.5 Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.4.2.6 Thermal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.4.2.7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.5 Pathway Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.5.1 Selection: Control Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.5.2 Selection: Plant Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.5.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.5.4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.6 Wire Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.6.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.6.1.1 Abrasion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.6.1.2 Cable Ties and Installation Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.6.1.3 Adhesive Backed Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.6.1.4 Cable Accessories Product Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.6.2.1 Mount Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.6.2.2 Adhesive Backed Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.6.2.3 Dynamic Cable Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.7 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.7.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.7.1.1 Control Room Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.7.1.2 Network Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.7.1.3 Zone Cabling Enclosure Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.7.1.4 Control Panel Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.7.2.1 Label Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.7.2.2 Label Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.8 Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

4.8.1 Selection: Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4.8.1.1 Physical Infrastructure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
4.8.1.2 Keyed Connector Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4.8.1.3 Physical Network Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4.8.2 Selection: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.8.2.1 Data Access Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.8.2.2 LOTO Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.8.2.3 Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.8.3 Installation: Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4.8.3.1 Keyed Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4.8.4 Installation: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
4.9 Wireless Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4.9.1 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
4.9.1.1 Network Architecture Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
4.9.1.2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4.9.1.3 Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4.9.1.4 Effective Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.9.1.5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.9.2 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.9.3 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.10 Power over Ethernet (PoE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.1 Developing Industrial Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.10.2 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.10.3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4.10.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Section 5: Network & Security Services
5.1 Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1.1 Assess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Design and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.3 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.4 Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.5 Manage and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Security Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Assess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Design and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.4 Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.5 Managed Security Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Appendix A: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System

Technical Information
A.1 Conduit Fill Capacity Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.2 Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal Cable Fill Capacity Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.3 Approved Test Leads for PANDUIT Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.4 PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Product Specification Details . . . . . . . . . A-17
Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System

Technical Information ................ B-1
Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding/Bonding System

C.1 Example Grounding & Bonding System Specification Document for

GES Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 Example Grounding & Bonding System Specification Document
for Communications Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.3 Example Grounding & Bonding System Visual Inspection
and Documentation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Industrial Ethernet continues to move forward

towards the factory floor and occupies a solid
position at the control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Figure 1.1-2 Typical manufacturing infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1.1-3 Hybrid plant floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1.1-4 Home runs to each node back to telecommunication
room in an office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1.1-5 Distributed zone cabling enclosures dramatically
cut number of home runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1.1-6 Relationship of Physical Infrastructure to
Logical Network Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1.1-7 The MICE matrix defines environmental
classes in three levels and four parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1.1-8 An end-to-end channel solution often cuts
across several MICE environments, ranging
from environmentally controlled control rooms
to more rugged environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1.1-9 Correspondence of MICE Environments, control
network areas, and physical infrastructure elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 2.2-1 The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture

(PERA) Model for Industrial Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2.2-2 ISA-95 addresses the interface between
levels 3 and 4 of the PERA model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2.2-3 ISA-99 addresses manufacturing and control
systems electronic security for the PERA model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2.3-1 Schematic Overview of Common Areas of
Industrial Control and Network System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2.3-2 Manufacturing Zone Network Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2.3-3 Early Attempts at Control and Network System
Integration Led to Unacceptable Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2.6-1 Logical Diagram for network distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Figure 2.6-2 Physical Diagram for network distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 2.6-3 Detail diagram for network distribution physical infrastructure . . . . . 2-38
Figure 2.7-1 Logical Diagram for Network Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2.7-2 Physical Diagram for zone cabling enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2.7-3 Detail diagram for zone cabling enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2.8-1 Ethernet Switch and Panduit Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Figure 2.8-2 Coupled Noise on Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2.8-3 Signal and Noise Routing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2.8-4 Examples of Reference Designs (IEEE 1100 Emerald Book) . . . . . 2-61
Figure 2.8-5 Example Blockout Device to Support Network Security
Initiatives at Control Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Figure 2.8-6 Logical Diagram for control panel(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Figure 2.8-7 Physical Diagram for Control Panel overall layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Figure 2.8-8 Physical Diagram for control panel stratix mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Figure 2.8-9 Network Detail diagram of control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Figure 2.9-1 Logical diagrams for On Machine distributed networking . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Figure 2.9-2. Physical Diagram of On-Machine network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Figure 2.9-3. Network Detail design for On Machine distributed network . . . . . . . 2-78
Figure 2.10-1 Logical Diagram for Process plant network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Figure 2.10-2 Physical Diagram for Process plant network infrastructure . . . . . . . 2-91
Figure 2.10-3 Detail of Process Plant network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Figure 2.11-1 Logical Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Figure 2.11-2 Physical Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Figure 2.11-3 Detail Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Figure 2.12-1 Logical Diagram for discrete manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Figure 2.12-2 Physical Diagram for discrete manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Figure 2.12-3 Detail diagram for discrete manufacturing network
physical infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Figure 2.13-1 Logical Diagram for Packaging/ Conveying Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Figure 2.13-2 Physical diagram for packaging/conveying network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Figure 2.13-3 Detail diagram for Packaging/Conveying physical
network infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Figure 3.1-1 OSI 7-Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Figure 4.1-1 MICE boundaries can change at various points
across channel length as cabling channels pass
through multiple areas, as defined in TIA-1005
(Source: ISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4.1-2 Balanced Copper Media Types and Reac
/ Bandwidth Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4.1-3 Comparison of STP and UTP 10GBASE-T Compliant Cabling. . . . . 4-4
Figure 4.1-4 Coupled Common Mode Noise Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4.1-5 Signal and Noise Routing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4.2-1 Fiber Cable Un-spooling For Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4.3-1 Example Grounding and Bonding System in a

Control Room with Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4.3-2 Schematic View of a Generic Grounding Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Figure 4.3-3 Grounding Electrode System Graphical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Figure 4.3-4 Utility Entrance Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Figure 4.3-5 Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure
Requirements of the ANSI/J-STD-607-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Figure 4.3-6 Data Center Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Figure 4.3-7 Control Room Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Figure 4.3-8 Schematic Diagram of Typical Grounding and
Bonding of the Control Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Figure 4.3-9 Cabinet Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Figure 4.3-10 Rack Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Figure 4.3-11 Grounding washers can be used to create
electrical continuity in racks and cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Figure 4.3-12 ESD wrist straps and ports enhance
equipment protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Figure 4.3-13. Telecommunications room bonding topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Figure 4.3-14. Busbar Hardware and Armored Fiber
Grounding Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Figure 4.3-15 Example of Ground Loop caused by voltage
difference between equipment grounds at two
ends of a shielded cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Figure 4.3-16. Hybrid bonding using RC circuit that blocks low
frequency ground loop currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Figure 4.3-17 Ground Loop formed between patch panel and
switch due to ground voltage differences. The
hybrid bond at the device prevents ground loop
from patch to device for lower frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Figure 4.3-18 Insulated patch panel prevents ground loop at
switch and patch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Figure 4.3-19. The PANDUIT® StructuredGround™ System
for data center grounding provides robust
connections that have low resistance, are easy
to install, and are easily checked during inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Figure 4.3-20 PANDUIT Shielded Cable and Jack Module Termination . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Figure 4.3-21 Schematic Diagram of Control Panel Grounding and Bonding . . . . 4-62
Figure 4.3-22 Motor Cable Grounding Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Figure 4.3-23 Best Wiring Solution: Shielded input/output with
insulated jacket completely avoids ground noise
problems in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Figure 4.5-1 PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™
Routing System protects fi ber optic cables from
damage to support network reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Figure 4.5-2 PANDUIT® FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway with Spill-Out . . . . . 4-75
Figure 4.5-3 Schematic of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to
rack/cabinet transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Figure 4.5-4 Example installation of FiberRunner® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Figure 4.5-5 Example installation of FiberRunner® overhead
pathway to PANDUIT® NetAccess™ cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Figure 4.5-6 The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™
Under-floor Cable Routing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Figure 4.5-7 Schematic of under-fl oor wire basket
pathway to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Figure 4.5-8 Example installation of fiber optic trunk cable transitioning . . . . . . . 4-77
Figure 4.5-9 Example installation of GridRunner™ under floor wire basket
pathway with 2-post rack and vertical cable manager. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Figure 4.5-10 Overhead wire basket to four-post rack transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Figure 4.5-11 Schematic of overhead wire basket to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . 4-78
Figure 4.5-12 Example installation of transition from overhead wire basket . . . . . . 4-78
Figure 4.5-13 Example installation of overhead wire basket to 4-post rack . . . . . . 4-78
Figure 4.5-14 Overhead ladder rack with PANDUIT Waterfall Accessory . . . . . . . . 4-79
Figure 4.5-15 Schematic of overhead ladder rack to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . 4-79
Figure 4.5-16 Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack
transition with PANDUIT® Patch-Runner™ Vertical Cable Manager. . 4-79
Figure 4.5-17 Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack
transition with PANDUIT® Patch-Runner™ Vertical Cable Manager. . 4-79
Figure 4.6-1 Approximate Wire Outside Diameter Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Figure 4.6-2 PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Figure 4.6-3 Cable Ties Recommended for Control Panel and
On-Machine Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Figure 4.6-4 Cable Ties Recommended for Control Room,
Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling Enclosure Applications . . . 4-91
Figure 4.8-1 PIM systems optimize a consolidation
strategy and improve business agility by
achieving better port utilization through superior
management of network ports and IT assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Figure 4.8-2 The Panduit Keyed LC System provides a
superior level of security to fiber optic channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Figure 4.8-3 RJ45 Plug Lock-In device installed on patch
cords secures connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Figure 4.8-4 LC Connector Lock-In (left) and LC Duplex Adapter Blockout . . . . . 4-114
Figure 4.8-5 Data Access Ports manage risk in industrial
settings by providing access to the network
without opening the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Figure 4.8-6 Labels to meet NFPA 70E requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Figure 4.8-7 Label to meet UL508A identification requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Figure 4.9-1 ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162 - Generic (left ) and
Custom (right) Wireless Cell Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Figure 4.9-2 Physical Layout Showing AP Deployments
Powered by PoE Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Figure 4.10-1 Applications currently driving the adoption of PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Figure 4.10-2 Hybrid PoE / Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Figure 4.10-3 With the ongoing digitalization of security and
surveillance systems organizations today can
take advantage of Ethernet, Internet, or wireless
technologies as the backbone of their security
infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Figure 4.10-4 PoE-enabled RFID readers and IP-based
surveillance cameras provide additional security
to correlate asset movement and human interactions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Figure 4.10-5 AC Wiremap Testing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Figure 4.10-6 Example PoE Test Results from Fluke DTX-1800
Series Cable Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Figure 4.11-1 By capturing and transporting all operational
and services data over a physically converged
infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement
facility-driven policies that support business
requirements and tenant/customer demands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Figure 4.11-2 Connected Building Solutions deploy all building
systems along common pathways to multiple
zones where systems connectivity is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Section 1
Introduction
Manufacturing convergence helps companies reach their goals

1.2 Related Documents
for productivity, globalization, innovation and sustainability by
merging manufacturing and office systems with environments.
This document builds upon the work by Rockwell Automa-
The deployment of standard Ethernet-based Local Area Net-
tion and Cisco on Reference Architectures for Manufactur-
works (LAN) enables businesses to utilize real-time manufac-
ing. Reference Architectures for Manufacturing provides
turing information to make product, material, purchasing, and
education, design guidance, recommendations and best
resource decisions. The use of unmodified Ethernet for indus-
practices to help establish a robust and secure network
trial protocols, such as EtherNet/IP, improves communications
infrastructure that facilitates manufacturing and enterprise
between the manufacturing floor and enterprise systems to
network convergence. Reference Architectures for Manu-
achieve workflow efficiencies and a converged environment.
facturing incorporates the Rockwell Automation Integrated
Architecture and Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory. Reference
Deployment complexities associated with industrial Ethernet
Architectures for Manufacturing are built on technology and
such as environment, noise mitigation and logical segmen-
manufacturing standards common between IT and manufac-
tation must be overcome to achieve high availability and
turing, establishing a Manufacturing Framework of network
maintain data integrity in the manufacturing cell/area zones.
segmentation for traffic management and policy enforce-
Poor decisions can result from a lack of understanding of both
ment, such as security, remote access, and Quality of Ser-
enterprise IT and manufacturing requirements and their differ-
vice (QoS). Other documents which support and inform this
ences. Without a strong, Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI)-
Guide in the specification, deployment, and testing of Indus-
based design strategy in place, organizations take on un-
trial Ethernet physical infrastructures include the following:
necessary risk. These risks include overfilled network closets,
cabinets that are difficult to service, disorganized industrial
• ANSI/TIA-1005: Telecommunications Infrastructure
enclosures, costly re-work, and increased machine downtime.
Standard for Industrial Premises (forthcoming, 2009)
In order to address these issues, PANDUIT has collaborated

• TIA/EIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications
with Rockwell Automation, Cisco and other industry leaders
Standard (2001)
to develop this Physical Infrastructure Reference Architec-
ture Guide for designing, deploying and managing the physi-
• TIA-569A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommu-
cal infrastructure for an Industrial Ethernet network.
nications Pathways and Spaces
1.1 Goals of this Guide

• ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A: Administration Standard for the Tele-
communications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
The following are goals for this guide:
• With criticality of infrastructure in plant operations, Rockwell
• ANSI-J-STD-607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements
Automation and PANDUIT are joining to ensure consistent
for Telecommunications in Commercial Buildings
practices are applied in the Physical Infrastructure design of
Industrial Networks
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard for Data Centers
• By applying proven, standards-based design approaches,
the organizations will deliver industrial networks with a desired
• Network Infrastructure for EtherNet/IP: Introduction and
state of transparency. The network, applications and controls
Considerations (ODVA, 2007)
hardware will operate in a choreographed manner.
• Industrial Ethernet on the Plant Floor: A Planning and

• By delivering optimum performance and verifiable, trace-
Installation Guide, by Robert Lounsbury (ISA, 2008)
able schematics that enable expedient maintenance and
repair, the organizations deliver unprecedented business
value to plant operations.
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Page 1-1
1.3 What is Industrial Ethernet? 1.4 What is Reference Architecture”?
Ethernet is the network transmission protocol, developed In their 2007 ODVA white paper “The Importance of
in 1973, that has evolved into the adopted standard for the Reference Architectures in Manufacturing Networks,”
overwhelming majority of office communication systems. Brian Batke (Rockwell Automation) and Paul Didier (Cisco)
While Ethernet was evolving, so were the networks for make a compelling case for the utility of reference designs
automation control. The development and growth of these that can be used to standardize the deployment of
two types of networks were based on significantly different industrial networks:
demands. Over the years many protocols, both open and
proprietary, have evolved for factory automation. This is A Reference Architecture is a fundamental organization of
problematic as industrial protocols are not interoperable, a system, the relationship between its components and
either between each other or the Ethernet in the front offices. the environment, and the principles governing its design
and evolution. Architectures provide customers with a
Industrial Ethernet solves this problem. Industrial Ethernet framework for optimizing their technical resources in support
was developed to provide a common platform to improve of business and technical requirements. … Reference
Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) processes among Architectures provide a way to deliver knowledge and
the various processing equipment manufacturers, as well as expertise in standard networking in an Automation and
to offer a seamless cross-transfer of critical data between Control context to increase confidence, spur take-up and
the plant floor and support offices. Within manufacturing, drive consistency in the Industrial Ethernet market.
Ethernet solutions ease the deployment of industrial
networks and automation control systems that enable
expansion of operations as well as increased collaboration
and productivity. On the factory floor, factors such as safety,
security, and compliance also become an important part of
physical infrastructure design (see Figure 1-1).
By integrating production, data acquisition, purchasing,

quality, logistics, sales, and building automation systems
onto a single common infrastructure, customers can improve
network efficiency, reduce operational costs, and increase
manufacturing productivity across several areas:
• Monitoring the manufacturing operations and processes

Figure 1.1-1. Industrial Ethernet continues to move forward towards
• Controlling the manufacturing operation and processes the factory floor and occupies a solid position at the control level.
locally and remotely
With a Reference Architecture, all involved stakeholders can
• Data acquisition for Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), increasingly focus on a common solution which reduces risk
production, purchasing, quality, logistics and sales of deployment by relying on known and tested solutions;
simplifies decision-making; enables more re-use; provides
• Transfer of design files or engineering parameters consistent models, capabilities, and equipment; improves
service and support; and helps customers deploy solutions
that meet their specific business issues.
According to Batke and Didier, the key attributes of a These realities include:
Reference Architecture are:
1. The development of hardened switches for deployment
• Compatibility with unique industrial protocols and the outside of a static control room environment and onto the
communication models they incorporate factory floor, requiring new cabling techniques to mitigate
the effects of heat, humidity, and noise over a multi-
• Performance (latency, jitter, minimal packet loss) connector cabling channel
and availability requirements of automation and
control applications 2. The use of distributed cabling topologies and patching
technologies, which enhances the flexibility and
• Logical segmentation of production and enterprise scalability of Industrial Ethernet networks to achieve
networks, allowing networks to safely and securely share greater operational efficiencies
data, services, and access from the production floor
without introducing security risks of the Internet and 3. The critical role played by a robust, testable grounding
enterprise network to the control system and bonding system to ensure system uptime and
availability by mitigating noise issues that can disrupt
• Physical requirements of the production floor communications and control.
• Automation and control network solutions must be A converged Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure
manageable by people who may not be trained experts in requires deploying control rooms with a greater level of IT
network technologies or administration technology to leverage the intelligence built into today’s
control systems for greater productivity and reliability. This
• Scalability to meet widely varying sizes of production convergence with IT technology necessitates greater
facilities and future growth. deployment of servers, firewalls and switching technology to
deliver the productivity benefits with a robust architecture as
1.5 Purpose of this Reference Guide described in the Rockwell, Cisco’s reference architecture.
The PANDUIT Physical Layer Reference Architecture Guide 1.6 Best Practice for Each
approaches manufacturing challenges as they relate to the Area and Application
physical infrastructure from a broad system-level view, one
that promotes manufacturing convergence. It also covers Today’s automation systems depend on industrial Ethernet
how enterprise IT and manufacturing systems stakeholders for real-time control, device configuration, data collection,
can properly connect, manage, identify, and secure cabling and even safety sub-systems. The productivity of the
throughout the physical infrastructure for an end-to-end manufacturing plant is built on layers of hardware and
physical implementation of the reference architectures software that comprise the automation system with the
recommended by Rockwell Automation and Cisco (see physical layer being the lowest, but most critical, layer. This
Figure 1.1-2). physical layer, comprised of the network media, connectivity,
enclosures, pathways, grounding/bonding, identification,
Like the Cisco-Rockwell Automation logical Reference and port locking devices provides the critical channels for
Architectures for Manufacturing before it, the purpose of communication to exist.
this Guide is to accelerate the convergence of standard
networking technologies with the industrial automation and
control environment. Specifically, this Guide focuses on
identifying physical layer reference solutions that reflect new
realities in the industrial space.
This document provides guidance on selecting, planning, However, these physical locations can have differing needs
installing and testing a physical layer that ensures based on the type of manufacturing operation. For example,
performance. The physical architecture for a typical a process line may have longer distances and higher
manufacturing enterprise is physically located in multiple security requirements than a small assembly operation.
areas that have unique environmental, security and
performance considerations. This document will describe the
physical infrastructure architectures recommended for each
NOTE:
of the following areas: Experts estimate that 50% - 90% of network
disruptions are due to problems with this
• Industrial Data Center / Control Room physical layer!
• Network Distribution
• Zone Cabling Enclosure
• Control Panel
• On Machine
Fig. 1.1-2. Typical manufacturing infrastructure is comprised of distinct areas with

differing environmental, performance, and security challenges.identified.
Fig. 1.1-3 Hybrid plant floor plan with example manufacturing zones identified.
The best practice recommendations for the physical The initial part of the plan starts with a floor plan to evaluate
infrastructure are described for a hypothetical-hybrid-plant the building layout and to determine the location of the
that has application zones for packaging/material handling individual network zones. These network zones and their
(discrete) mixing (process/batch) and material storage interconnection form the backbone of the network physical
(SCADA) operations. The physical architecture for the infrastructure. This is sometimes referred to as “lines-and-
networks that make this plant run overlay the factory floor boxes”. However lines–and-boxes are merely a logical
plan and should be planned as a robust infrastructure representation of the network. This guide helps map that
based on sound Rockwell/Cisco logical architectures that logical view onto the physical implementation.
are designed for performance, scalability, security, and
maintainability. Each of the following application zones This is a critical step, so it is worthwhile to understand
of this hybrid plant will be analyzed and described in this the trade-offs that are made for zone selection.
document:
• Discrete (e.g. Assembly and

Packaging/Material Handling)
• Process (e.g. Mixing )
• SCADA (e.g. Material Storage)
1.7 Zone Cabling Architecture Advantages 1.7.1 Office Example
Zone Cabling Topology provides a cost-effective alternative

to deploying your network infrastructure by increasing
the network’s flexibility, accessibility and scalability. This
concept originated in commercial wiring for offices, etc. but
can offer these same advantages for industrial applications.
Benefits include:
• Reduced home-run wiring
• Ease zone adjustments or expansions
• Reduces size of central closet

Fig. 1.1-4: Centralized Cabling:
Home runs to each node back to
telecommunication room in an office.

Fig. 1.1-5: Zone Cabling:
Distributed zone cabling enclosures
dramatically cut number of home runs.
1.7.2 Industrial Physical Network Zones
For industrial application, a zone cabling architecture can

provide these same important advantages in distributing
cabling to switches in control panels or on machine switches
and devices.
PNZ Physical Network Zone Fig 1.1-6: The diagram

ZCE Zone Cabling Enclosure above illustrates the
CP Control Panel basic concept of mapping
physical network zones to
your physical infrastructure.
The following describes
useful terms and rules
for layout of an industrial
automation network into
physical zones.
1. Physical Zone Network Key terms 2. Physical Zone Network Design rules
a. A Network is a collection of two or more end-points a. A PNZ may only wholly include other PNZ . And a
connected via a pathway. PNZ can only be inherited into one other PNZ. A PNZ
b. An end-point is a uniquely addressable device as may include multiple PNZ.
defined by the Network. b. Use dashed lines to represent logical collection and solid
c. A pathway is the unbroken media that data is line to mean a physical location (panel, floor area, machine)
broken when it is changes type or connector. c. The naming reference for zones shall follow [level1].
d. A Physical Network Zone (PNZ) is a collection of one [level2].[level3]…[Leveln]
or more end-points that share a common pathway.
This physical network zone cabling approach can be
employed for our hybrid factory example for great reduction
in home run cabling and improve manageability benefits.
tt • M1I1C1E1 describes a worst-case environment

1.8 Standards-based End-to-End
according to ISO/IEC 11801
Environmental Considerations
• M2I2C2E2 describes a worst-case light
Effective integration of Industrial Ethernet into an existing or industrial environment
new manufacturing or processing facility can be challenging.
Along with environmental protection, network stakeholders • M3I3C3E3 describes a worst-case
need to factor variables such as interoperability, deployment, industrial environment
security, reliability, electrical performance and cost into net-
work design and deployment. This system provides a method of categorizing the environ-
mental classes for decision-making on the level of harden-
To help stakeholders throughout the decision-making pro- ing required the network media, connectors, pathways and
cess, the ISO/IEC 24702 and TIA-1005 standards recom- enclosures. A higher MICE level means that your physical
mend use of the MICE (Mechanical, Ingress Rating, Climatic, infrastructure may need to be:
Electromagnetic) classification system. The MICE concept is
• Ruggedized for vibration
based on the assumption that cabling, even under the worst
conditions of an environmental class, is still protected and • Sealed for wash down
guarantees reliable network operation (see Figure 1-7):
• Fabricated with materials that can withstand
extreme temperatures
• Shielded for rejecting EMI noise.

Figure 1.1-7. The MICE matrix defines environmental classes in three levels and four parameters.
TIA-1005 defi nes terminology for the various levels of the An end-to-end channel solution often cuts across several
physical infrastructure so that the MICE levels required can be MICE environments, ranging from environmentally controlled
analyzed and specifi ed for each area. Industrial environment control rooms or enclosures where commercial grade
conditions can vary greatly depending on the type of manu- solutions and best practices can offer best value and
facturing, location of equipment, ambient conditions, installa- performance to more rugged environments where IP67 rated
tion standards, and building construction so there are no hard connectivity offers advantages (see Figure(s) 1-8 / 1-9).
rules about level of protection required for each zone. In many
cases, telecommunication rooms, factory floor, and work area Reference architectures for physical infrastructure provide a
levels can safely use commercial grade physical infrastructure roadmap for specifying, installing, testing, and documenting
if the MICE ratings show that there are no signifi cant hazards the connectivity that spans from the enterprise connection
present. For harsh environments though, specifying connectiv- down to the machine level. The physical infrastructure
itywith appropriate ratings to withstand wash down or shielded provides the means to ensure performance, security,
solutions in high EMI environments make sense. reliability and maintainability of the switches, servers, and
Fig. 1.1-8:
Fig. 1.1-9:

Figures 1-8 and 1-9. An end-to-end channel solution often cuts across several MICE environments,
ranging from environmentally controlled control rooms to more rugged environments
control devices that constitute a complete architecture. - Building out control rooms that leverage best practices
This infrastructure guidance requires a systems level view proven in data center applications worldwide
of grounding/bonding considerations, best practices for
mitigating noise concerns, security defense in depth, as - Network distribution that delivers top performance with
well as proven media and connectivity that can be installed security, scalability and fl exibility
and tested effectively.
- Control panel solutions engineered to mitigate noise
Reference architectures also provide roadmap for IT and concerns and provide testability of these critical links
Controls engineers to plan the infrastructure in light of the
environmental issues exposed by MICE analysis selecting - Distributed ‘On-Machine’ network installations requiring
appropriate hardening and form factors for the particular sealed connectors and other environmental measures.
level of the architecture (see Table 1-1). The reference
architecture provides guidance on:
Telecommunications Room Enclosures

Control Room Racks,
Pathways,
Grounding/Bonding
Physical Security
Typical MICE Range 1
(commercial grade)
Factory Floor
Network Distribution Fiber
Copper
Connectivity
Pathways
Typical MICE Ranges 1-2 from
commercial grade to light industrial
Work Area
Consolidation points Zone Enclosures
MUTOA
Physical Security
Typical MICE Ranges 1-2 from

commercial grade to light industrial
Automation island
Control Panels,On Machine (distributed) Copper
Fiber Patching
Wire management
Grounding/Bonding
MICE Ranges 1-3 from commercial Identification
grade to harsh environment rated Physical Security
Table 1.1-9. Correspondence of MICE Environments, Control Network Areas, and Physical
Infrastructure Elements
1.9 Organization of this Guide

The Vision: A Three-Phase Evolution
Benefiting both enterprise IT and manufacturing system Designs based on Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI)
stakeholders, this document describes project phasing principles intelligently unite physical and logical systems
considerations, application scenarios, and service options to help organizations manage risk within the physical
associated with the design, testing, and maintenance of the infrastructure. This approach ultimately allows organiza-
tions to increase safety and security in the workplace,
physical infrastructure.
manage systems more effectively, minimize downtime
and mean time to repair (MTTR), and satisfy regulatory
Section 1 introduces the goals and purpose of the Guide, compliance requirements to minimize network disruptions
and describes the basic components of an end-to-end UPI- and maximize performance.
based Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure solution
(see sidebar for a summary of the UPI vision). The degree of unification across the physical infrastruc-
ture can be defined in terms of three levels – Align,
Converge, and Optimize.
Section 2 presents a series of Reference Architectures for
industrial networks, which are divided into two types: • Align: The first phase involves deploying modular and
scalable passive, active and intelligent products, soft-
• Areas (control room, cabling and connectivity, control ware and tools that align and connect systems within
panel, distribution [i.e. “zone”] point, and on-machine) pres- individual areas.
ent detailed examples of the building blocks of the Industrial
• Converge: The second phase involves integrating
Ethernet physical infrastructure products, software and tools into a converged physical
infrastructure solution that extends across more than one
• Applications (process, SCADA, discrete manufacturing, and enterprise area.
packaging/shipping, which illustrate how physical layer Areas
can be combined to meet application-specific requirements • Optimize: The third phase involves optimizing the en-
tire physical infrastructure into a seamless interoperable
system across all critical systems and areas.
Section 3 reviews infrastructure project phases, recommend-
ing best practices (and identifying likely pitfalls) that are en- UPI-based solutions are tailored by industry and custom-
countered, from planning and design to testing and auditing. ized by application, and span all core systems necessary
to run a business from data center and facilities opera-
Section 4 organizes installation and testing information for tions to next-generation intelligent buildings and across
the factory floor. Examples include physical cable routing
each element of the physical infrastructure, from copper and
and management solutions designed to integrate with
fiber media selection to testing procedures for cabling and the reference architectures, untangle over-filled net-
grounding systems. The section concludes with a review of work closets and control room cabinets that are difficult
the benefits that several innovative technologies (Power over to service. Similarly designed bonding and grounding
Ethernet [PoE], wireless, and intelligent buildings) can offer measures defuse disruptive electrical “noise” before it
industrial networks. adversely impacts control system performance, and ID
and labeling solutions clearly identify system connections
as well as hazardous electrical areas to protect network
Section 5 is a guide to services and support. and worker safety.
By using a reference architecture based on UPI principles to Frequent interaction between IT and facilities manage-
integrate IT and manufacturing systems, organizations can ment teams helps to deliver a physical infrastructure that
improve network efficiency, reduce operational costs, and in- best fits the unique business needs of each organization.
This approach to designing and specifying physical infra-
crease manufacturing productivity to build a smarter founda-
structure technologies enables tangible improvements in
tion and drive successful manufacturing convergence. system efficiency and productivity along with a substan-
tial reduction in operational costs.
Section 2
Organization of Control System Networks
Networks and industrial automation systems have common Strong, Transparent Network Structure
challenges. Consideration has to be given to how products The network infrastructure can be compared to the steel
connect and interact together. In addition to physical attributes structure of a factory or plant. This skeleton is built to
like cabling and connectors, the communications methods weather the conditions by following established standards
needed between products are crucial to system stability and and a design based on the requirements for the use of the
integrity. How products exchange their data, the system structure. Regular inspections insure the structure is sound
throughput requirements, and the configuration, mainte- and identify any areas in need of repair. This assures the user
nance and expandability all demand careful consideration. they can go in their respective factories and plants without
considering the state of the structure. Essentially, the structure
Data requirements vary by device and application. The becomes transparent to its users. The original design is refer-
amount of data that needs to be moved effects bandwidth enced during moves, adds and changes to the structure.
and the optimal packet size. Another consideration for
industrial automation networks is the type of data that is The network infrastructure should also be transparent to its
being moved including I/O, polled, change-of-state, cyclic, users. Like our example, this can be accomplished through
program upload/download and diagnostics to mention a few. the use of standards and a design based on the require-
Real time control of I/O, drives, motion control and even ments from the users. Monitoring of the network ensures the
safety requires ensuring determinism and update frequen- transmission media, its paths and the software are operating
cies to deliver the desired repeatability and system perfor- at optimal performance. Network monitoring provides insight
mance of the industrial automation network. turning reactions into predictions when infrastructure upsets
occur. The network design, after implemented and audited,
Control system networks are not new having developed from becomes a living document during moves, adds and changes
proprietary schemes to today’s open systems. The explosive to the infrastructure. A clear view of the network goes a long
growth of Ethernet communications, faster microprocessors and way in intelligent decision making during troubleshooting
powerful computer software applications has driven or performance analysis. Conversely, a poorly designed,
the need to architect systems that deliver on the desired ef- installed and documented network will cause confusion
ficiency and standardized connectivity enabled by networked and hamper vision of those troubleshooting or analyzing a
resources while protecting the uptime and performance of critical system’s performance. A transparent network like a clean
automation systems. The following sections will examine the im- windshield provides your best view of the road ahead and
portance of the network infrastructure, review background on the reduces risks of problems.
architecture levels required for a highly integrated manufactur-
ing operation, review network topologies and convergence op- Evolution from Segregation to Convergence
tions, and finally introduce Cisco/Rockwell Automation Reference Commonly, automation assets were purposefully segregated
Architectures for Manufacturing which provide a framework for on proprietary or open networks that could effectively perform
building automation system that leverages network communica- data collection or control tasks but not capable of further
tions to deliver unprecedented efficiency, security, performance, integration. Islands of automation were isolated and con-
and maintainability to industrial operations. strained by networks with limited bandwidth, number of nodes
and overall length. Asset owners grew confident with these
2.1 The Importance of the networks mainly because of their relative simplicity and well
Network Infrastructure documented parameters. Information exchange between
the manufacturing and the enterprise zones though required
The network infrastructure is a path for information flow; it pro- expensive, customized hardware and software interfaces, if
vides connectivity between automation components and its users. available. For many though, disjointed systems were created
Network infrastructure includes the transmission media (to include that relied on a user’s reproduction of data stored on clipboards
fiber, copper and wireless), the hardware to control the transmis- or transcribed from operator interfaces into spreadsheets. This
sion paths (to include switches, routers and access points), and scenario lends itself to slow business decisions, higher error
the software that sends, receives and manages traffic. rates and limited availability to manufacturing information.
Section 2.2: Reference Architecture Terminology
Convergence is not a new concept, but used to be limited air, steam, etc. at a manufacturing site are reliable since these
by disparate networks and technology in the manufacturing utilities enable nearly every phase of manufacturing. Now,
zone. What were islands of automation are now enabled the Ethernet network infrastructure is just as important since
by protocols such as CIP and technology that promote it is a critical part of each level of the manufacturing space
convergence from the manufacturing zone upwards into the including safety, process, and control as well as for supervi-
enterprise zone. EtherNet/IP, a standard Ethernet technology, sory functions, MES and enterprise integration. The network
enabled users to unite control, communication and computa- infrastructure is critical for convergence and enabling timely
tion into a multidiscipline industrial network. Since Ethernet business decisions. The infrastructure, its design, policies and
is the prevalent network in the enterprise it became the procedures, audits and automated monitoring is what enables
common point of convergence. Through providing visibility of transparency and 99.99% uptime that drives an operation to
all layers of the manufacturing architecture to formulate key profitability in today’s competitive environment.
performance indicators (KPIs), convergence enables greater
business agility and opportunities for innovation. Instead 2.2 Reference Architecture Terminology
of business decision being held up by manually created
spreadsheet one can simply leverage technology used every The following section discusses the Purdue Enterprise
day to view KPIs such as a VoIP phone or smart phone. Reference Architecture (PERA) for Control System Functions,
ISA-95 and ISA-99 which provide important terminology
Ethernet networks quickly became accessible to users, both and conceptual models for describing a networked control
at home and work. With the promotion of COTS, commercial architecture. A thorough understanding of these application
off the shelf, and plug-n-play mentality, users were enabled models and standards allows for selection of a physical
with confidence that networking automation assets would be infrastructure architecture that delivers full value for automa-
as simplistic as a home Ethernet network. In other instances tion investments.
enterprise IT relied on established policies and procedures
to enlighten the manufacturing zone with Ethernet. Not 2.2.1 PERA Model
realized at first, but the requirements used to create enter-
prise policies and procedures for the enterprise zone were The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture is a common
not applicable and actually detrimental in the manufacturing and well understood model in the industry for organizing
zone. For example, network policies of pushing automatic control system functions and activities (see Figure 2A-1).
updates and patches that work well for office users can The model was developed by a collection of industrial and
cause disruptions to critical control systems that may not be academic representatives, and segments control devices
validated for use with the new update or patch. and equipment into hierarchical functions.
Why Does the Networking Infrastructure Matter? This model has been incorporated into many other models
Infrastructure allows disparate components to work together and standards in the industry. The Instrumentation, Systems
on a grand scale that should be easy for user to interact with, and Automation Society (ISA) ISA-95, Enterprise-Control
accomplishing goals that otherwise would be impossible to System Integration and ISA-99, Manufacturing and Control
achieve. With a well executed, transparent network infra- Systems Security have identified the levels and framework.
structure in place, the automation system architecture is
better understood resulting in greater confidence in operating The PERA model divides control system elements into
and maintaining highly integrated manufacturing systems. five levels:
The network’s physical infrastructure provides the foundation
for the layers of automation that enable great productivity Level 0 – Process
gains, improved performance, and enhanced safety. Level 0 is comprised of a wide variety of sensors and
devices to monitor and control both discrete and analog
Networking infrastructure can be thought of as a new critical variables. They perform the basic functions of monitoring
utility for the manufacturing plant. Tremendous resources and controlling the cell/area zone. Devices can be traditional
and planning ensure traditional critical utilities such as power, hard wired devices or more sophisticated networked
devices with take advantage of advanced configuration and Although important, these services are not considered as
status information. critical to the manufacturing zone. Because of the more
open nature of the systems and applications within the
Level 1 – Basic Control enterprise network, this level is often viewed as a source of
Level 1 consists of interfaces to the Level 0 devices (I/O, threats and disruptions to the manufacturing zone.
linking devices, bridges and so on) and controllers. Again,
controllers may be stand-alone in single controller appli- Level 5 – Enterprise Network
cations or multiple controllers on a peer-to-peer network. Level 5 is where the centralized IT systems and functions
The controllers may be PLC, traditionally used in discrete exist. Enterprise resource management, business-to-business,
applications as in discrete control, or a PAC which typically is and business-to-customer services are typically located here.
for analog control found in the process applications such as
continuous process or batch control. Controllers at this level
not only need peer-to-peer communications but also to Level
2 and beyond for operator interfaces, engineering worksta-
tions, MES and so on. The upper levels may also initiate the
communications by polling the controller for status and data
about the actual application being controlled as well as take
input for execution such as a batch cycle complete.
Level 2 – Area Supervisory Control

Level 2 represents the systems and functions associated
with the runtime supervision and operation of a cell/area
Figure 2.2-1. The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture
zone. Depending of the size and complexity of the applica-
(PERA) Model for Industrial Control Systems
tion these functions may also carry over to Level 3.
2.2.2 ISA-95
Level 3 – Site Manufacturing Operations and Control
The systems that exist in Level 3 manage the plant/manu-
Purpose
facturing wide functions. Levels 0 through 3 are considered
To create a standard that will define the interface between
critical to operations. These systems may communicate with
control functions and other enterprise functions based upon
controllers in Level 1, function as a staging area for changes
the Purdue Reference Model for CIM (hierarchical form) as
in the cell/area zone and share data with the enterprise
published by ISA. The interface initially considered is the
(Levels 4 and 5) systems and applications. Because these
interface between levels 3 and 4 of that model (see Figure
systems are primarily based on standard computing equipment
2-2). Additional interfaces will be considered, as appropriate.
and operating systems, they are more likely to communica-
The goal is to reduce the risk, cost, and errors associated
tion with standard networking protocols.
with implementing these interfaces. The standard must
define information exchange that is robust, safe, and cost
Level 4 – Site Business Planning and Logistics Network
effective. The exchange mechanism must preserve the
Level 4 is where functions and systems exist that need
integrity of each system’s information and span of control.
standard access to services provided by the enterprise
network. This level is viewed as an extension of the enter- Scope
prise network. The basic business administration tasks are • Multi-part effort
performed here and rely on standard IT services. These • Define in detail an abstract model of the enterprise,
functions and services include Internet access, E-mail, tions, and its information exchange.
Enterprise applications, and non-critical production systems • Establish common terminology for the description and
such as manufacturing execution systems and overall plant understanding of enterprise, including manufacturing
reporting (for example, inventory, performance, and so on). control functions and business process functions, and its
information exchange.
• Define electronic information exchange between the

manufacturing control functions and other enterprise
functions including data models and exchange definitions.
Publications
The ISA-95 committee has published the first three stan-
dards in a series that define the interfaces between enter-
prise activities and control activities:
• ANSI/ISA-95.00.01-2000, Enterprise-Control System

Integration, Part 1: Models and Terminology, provides
standard terminology and a consistent set of concepts and Figure 2.2-2. ISA-95 addresses the interface between levels 3 and
models for integrating control systems with enterprise 4 of the PERA model.
systems that will improve communications between all
parties involved. The models and terminology emphasize 2.2.3 ISA-99
good integration practices of control systems with enter-
prise systems during the entire life cycle of the systems. Purpose
The concept of manufacturing and control systems electronic
• ANSI/ISA-95.00.02-2001, Enterprise-Control System security is applied in the broadest possible sense, encom-
Integration, Part 2: Object Model Attributes, contains passing all types of plants, facilities, and systems in all
additional details and examples to help explain and industries. Manufacturing and control systems include, but
illustrate the Part 1 objects. are not limited to:
• ANSI/ISA-95.00.03-2005, Enterprise-Control System • Hardware and software systems such as DCS, PLC,
Integration, Part 3: Activity Models of Manufacturing SCADA, networked electronic sensing, and monitoring and
Operations Management, presents models and terminology diagnostic systems
for defining the activities of manufacturing operations • Associated internal, human, network, or machine interfaces
management. used to provide control, safety, and manufacturing opera-
tions functionality to continuous, batch, discrete, and other
For information on obtaining these published standards, processes.
click here.
Physical security is an important component in the overall
Current Work integrity of any control system environment, but it is not
ISA-SP95 is currently developing additional standards in the specifically addressed in this series of documents.
series, including Part 4: Activity Models of Manufacturing
Operations Management; and has recently completed Part 5: The ISA-99 Committee will establish standards, recommended
Business-to-Manufacturing Transactions. ISA-95 does much practices, technical reports, and related information that will
of its work electronically, but also holds periodic face-to-face define procedures for implementing electronically secure
meetings. manufacturing and control systems and security practices
and assessing electronic security performance (see Figure
For more information on ISA-95, contact Charley Robinson, 2-3). Guidance is directed towards those responsible for
ISA Standards. designing, implementing, or managing manufacturing and
control systems and shall also apply to users, system inte-
Reference: http://www.isa.org/MSTemplate.cfm?MicrositeID= grators, security practitioners, and control systems manufac-
285&CommitteeID=4747 turers and vendors.
Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence
The Committee s focus is to improve the confidentiality,

integrity, and availability of components or systems used
for manufacturing or control and provide criteria for procur-
ing and implementing secure control systems. Compliance
with the Committee’s guidance will improve manufacturing
and control system electronic security, and will help identify
vulnerabilities and address them, thereby reducing the risk
of compromising confidential information or causing Manu-
facturing Control Systems degradation or failure.
Scope
The ISA-99 Committee addresses manufacturing and control
systems whose compromise could result in any or all of the
following situations:
• endangerment of public or employee safety Figure 2.2-3. ISA-99 addresses manufacturing and control systems
• loss of public confidence electronic security for the PERA model.
• violation of regulatory requirements
• loss of proprietary or confidential information 2.3 Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence
• economic loss
• impact on national security A thorough understanding of the manufacturing zone and
convergence issues are important to selecting a physical
Publications infrastructure architecture that addresses performance,
ISA-SP99 completed the first editions of two key ISA security and maintainability requirements. Based on the PERA
technical reports in 2004: model ISA-99, the following areas can be described for the
• ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.01-2004, Security Technologies for manufacturing space which require network topologies to
Manufacturing and Control Systems converge and integrate (see Figure 2-4).
• ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.02-2004, Integrating Electronic Security
into the Manufacturing and Control Systems Environment Enterprise Zone. The manufacturing zone must integrate
with the enterprise applications to exchange production (ex.
Current Work Historical data) and resource data (ex. Recipe management).
Currently, ISA-SP99 is focused on completing the first two Direct access to the manufacturing zone is typically not re-
in a series of ANSI/ISA standards while, at the same time, quired, with the exception of partner access (remote access).
updating ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.01-2004 to reflect new informa- Access to data and the networks in the manufacturing zone
tion and technology. must be managed and controlled to maintain the availability
and stability of the plant or factory networks.
First ballots by the ISA-99 committee were completed on
the Part 1 and Part 2 draft standards on May 30 and June 5, Demilitarized Zone (DMZ). An area for computing
2006, respectively. resources that need to be shared between the Enterprise
and Manufacturing zone and that is designed with security
Reference: http://www.isa.org/MSTemplate.cfm?MicrositeID= measures to prevent direct access between the enterprise
988&CommitteeID=6821 and manufacturing equipment. This area provides an
important function for connecting the critical factory floor
equipment to data and services from the enterprise level.
Figure 2.3-1. Schematic Overview of Common Areas of Industrial

Control and Network System Integration
Manufacturing Zone. The manufacturing zone comprises

2.3.1 Layers of the Manufacturing Zone
the cell/area zone networks and site-level activities. It is
important because all the systems critical to monitoring the
To meet the needs of the industrial automation customer,
plant or factory operations are in this zone.
control systems network architecture has been separated
into three layers (see Figure 2-5). This three-layer archi-
Cell/Area Zone. The cell/area zones are the functional
tecture must be open from top to bottom. Open means that
areas within the plant or factory. Some of the cell/area zones
the independently managed technology is available without
within a plant or factory might include raw material handling,
restriction to all, both in terms of technology access and the
mixing, assembly and finished goods material handling. It
ability to contribute enhancements to the open standard.
may be as small as a single Process Automation Control-
ler (PAC) and its associated devices, or multiple controllers.
This openness provides freedom of choice, allowing custom-
Anything within the cell/area zones are involved in the real-
ers to choose the best-in-class products for their industrial
time control of a functional aspect of the plant or factory.
automation systems. The architecture must also be based
on globally accepted standards supported by a majority of
Safety Zone. The safety zone is considered highest priority in
companies in the control marketplace.
process or manufacturing. Historically, safety systems have
been hard-wired, difficult to maintain and do not accommodate
Taking careful consideration of communication needs of both
change easily. Safety networks provide all the advantages
simple and complex products, it becomes clear which layer
of traditional distributed I/O for complex safety systems thus
and which network is more appropriate for that product.
improving diagnostics and the ability to implement changes
programmatically.
Figure 2.3-2. Manufacturing Zone Network Layers
• The Information Layer is typically a backbone and a • The Device Layer network is typically used for connecting
management interface into the control system. This layer devices such as sensors and actuators, which historically
typically transfers data between supervisory devices and have been hard wired into the Control & Information Layer.
links into the manufacturing execution system (MES). These simple sensors and actuators continue to grow in
capability, and the Device Layer network makes it easier
• The Control and Information Layer is typically used for the to install and use these products, taking advantage of
transmission of time-critical control data between separate these extended capabilities.
manufacturing cells, where time-critical data delivery is
very important. Quite often, the Control and Information
Layer is used to link multiple device layer networks.
2.3.2 Connecting Manufacturing to Enterprise
Also, factory
floor network
traffic can
potentially flood
enterprise level.
Figure 2.3-3. Early Attempts at Control and Network System Integration Led to Unacceptable Risk
The desire to share data between manufacturing and As the need for more data increases in the Enterprise Zone
enterprise is very strong and leads to great improvements from the Manufacturing Zone for systems such as MES, the
in productivity. However, early attempts lead to problems Information Layer became skewed. With little or no con-
due to failure to consider the differences between these sideration to network architecture the Manufacturing Zone
zones and the resultant risks from connecting them together. was trusted into the Enterprise Zone with direct connections
Industrial automation networks have unique consideration made from manufacturing switches and devices to existing
from the traditional Enterprise Zone environments. office/enterprise networks. The results led to many problems
both with manufacturing system outages as well as disrup-
• Unique protocols and use of multicast traffic tions to office/enterprise networks.
• Determinism and real-time requirements
• Availability, security and safety considerations Early attempts at enterprise integration as shown in Figure
• Physical requirements of the factory floor is driving 2-6 left control cell/areas too exposed to enterprise risks.
unique products and topologies Several risks of directly connecting the manufacturing zone
• Need to provide and control vendor access to the enterprise zone include:
The three-layer network architectural model does not • Security: Risk of unauthorized changes
address these concerns. With significant growth in Ethernet- • Malware: virus, worm disruptions
based industrial automation protocols driving the need for • Management: Patching or network updates not
specific switching, routing, security and wireless design guid- appropriate for control devices
ance from non-traditional IT resources are often requested. • Traffic: Control network messages flooding enterprise
causing disruption
2.3.3 Enterprise Connectivity Options
The following tables and figures clearly articulate the pros (See separate charts on subsequent pages)
and cons for various approaches to factory integration from
totally isolated to fully secure connectivity:
A. Isolated
No connection to the enterprise
B. Integrated
Direct connection to enterprise without DMZ or VLAN
C. VLAN
Virtual LAN approach to segment and secure network
D. Firewall
Demilitarized Zone leveraging Hardware/software to
separate and secure levels
A. Isolated No connection to the enterprise
Pro Con
100% isolation No real time data transfer or remote access
most secure (if done properly) Difficult (additional time) and substantial
cost to:
• Administer
• Patch
• Update Virus Definitions
• Update/Install Software
No visibility to network operations

(and security issues)
B. Integrated Direct connection to enterprise without DMZ or VLAN
Pro Con
Connectivity is provided for data No isolation - events from one network ac-
cess/visibility impact the other
Administration is difficult without effecting

other networks/uptime
Control system exposed to the business

networks, corporate network and internet
Insecure - least secure
C. VLAN Virtual LAN approach to segment and secure network
Pro Con
Connectivity is scalable Difficult to secure - very high cost of

ownership (from security perspective)
Better isolation Excessive ingress and egress points
Current state Difficult to isolate in response to network

events
Scalability with security is very difficult
D. Firewall Demilitarized Zone leveraging Hardware/software to separate and secure levels
Pro Con
Best security/access trade off Expensive - drives additional costs in

networking hw and servers
Single ingress/egress point between Complexity (required special skill set)

networks
Easy to isolate in response to network

events
b. Linear or Daisy Chain

2.3.4 Topologies
Commonly used for Level 0 and Level 1
Topology refers to the network physical structure rather than

Pro Con
the layer or zone of the architecture. A wide variety of topolo-
gies have been developed over the history of networking that
• Traffic subject to the
address tradeoffs in cost, flexibility, robustness, and com-
“weakest link”
plexity. The advent of low cost embedded switch technology
• Multiple single points of
and wireless has allowed for a greater range of topologies
failure
for Ethernet than ever before. This section discusses the
• No redundancy
pros and cons of common topology options:
a. Bus
b. Linear or Daisy Chain
c. Star, Extended Star, Redundant Star
d. Ring, Dual Ring
e. Mesh, Partial Mesh
a. Bus
Commonly used for Level 0 and Level 1 for legacy networks
but not used in today’s switched Ethernet.
Pro Con
• Limited to half duplex

• Collisions are unavoidable
c1. Star (i.e., Hub and Spoke)
• Multiple single points of
Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 5
failure
• No redundancy
Pro Con
• All traffic between segments

must past through a central
point
• Single point of failure,
the “hub”
• No redundancy
c.2 Extended-Star (i.e., Hub and Spoke) d1. Ring

Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 3 Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 3
Pro Con Pro Con
• More resilient than a star • Redundancy • Possibly, convergence time

• No redundancy depending on technology
• No single point of failure • Ring can tolerate only one
failure at a time
c3. Redundant Star

Pro Con
• Redundancy • All traffic between segments

must past through a central
point
• No single point of failure
when the central point uses
redundant hardware
d2. Dual-Ring
Pro Con
• Redundancy • Possibly, convergence time

depending on technology
• No single point of failure • Ring can tolerate only one
failure at a time, depending
on failure
Section 2.4: Rockwell Automation & Cisco Systems®
e1. Full-Mesh e2. Partial-Mesh

Commonly used for Level 3 and Level 5 Commonly used for Level 3 and Level 5
Pro Con Pro Con
• Redundancy • Expensive; N(N-1)/2 where • Redundancy • Compromise fault tolerance

N is the number of devices, for cost
in this case switches where • High availability
the result is the number of • No single point of failure
links needed
• High availability
• No single point of failure
2.4 Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems®

Reference Architectures for Manufacturing
• EtherNet/IP™ Guidance for Selecting Cables
[PDF] – (ODVA)
The Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems® Reference
Architectures for Manufacturing provide a framework for
• Techniques for Infrastructure Deployment: Reference
implementing automation systems that leverage network
Architectures in Manufacturing Networks [PDF] – (ODVA)
communications to deliver unprecedented efficiency, security,
performance, and maintainability to industrial operations.
• Ethernet Network Design for IT and Manufacturing
The following diagrams show this network from a logical and
Automation – (Automation Fair 2008) Learn the Guidelines
switching perspective. Key concepts for this logical architec-
for designing Ethernet infrastructures, including topology
ture include setup of a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) for a se-
design, protocol selection, and media-switch router
cure connection of the factory floor to the enterprise through
technology. Both IT and manufacturing automation
firewalls, and segmenting zones for each cell/area. Redun-
considerations are included.
dant star topologies are the preferred solution but there are
cases where ring or bus approaches make sense.
Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems® Reference
Architectures for Manufacturing offers many suggested best
The full explanation of the Rockwell Automation and Cisco
practices which impact availability, security, and
Systems® Reference Architectures for Manufacturing can be
performance. A solid understanding of this advice will lead to
found at:
intelligent choices for the physical infrastructure.
http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html
Robust and Secure Network Infrastructure

• Enterprise Zone for IT networks
• DMZ as a buffer zone to securely share data

and services
• Manufacturing zone where critical production floor

systems exist
• Cell/Area zone where devices and controllers reside
Developed against tested and validated architectures

• Hierarchical approach to segment key network • Cisco Validated Design I
functions
• Network infrastructure services
• Multiple topologies
• Standard Ethernet, Standard IP, and EtherNet/IP
• Security built-in (Standard)
• High-availability options • Expandable for future functions
Industrial Ethernet Reference Architecture Best Practices
Manufacturing Zone best practices Security best practices

• Replicate critical services in the manufacturing zone, Implement network-wide security that is fully embedded into
consider the following: the network infrastructure, to protect against and prevent
- Domain Services e.g. LDAP or Active Directory who has network access and what they can do.
- Naming services e.g. DNS & WINS • Rockwell Automation Network & Security Services
- IP Address services e.g. DHCP – e.g. consulting and audits
- Time services e.g. NTP or PTP • Device Hardening
• Availability: apply redundant network routers/switches • Threat defense
and links to maintain overall network availability - Defending the edge
• Scalability: small sites use combined core and - Protecting the interior
distribution switches; larger or growing sites should - Guarding the endpoints
separate to avoid oversubscription on uplinks. • Manufacturing and Enterprise Zone barrier with
• Deploy Security and Network Management Demilitarized zone (DMZ)
• Routing: Use link-state routing protocols or EIGRP for
Layer 3 load balancing and convergence DMZ best practices
- Use EIGRP to simplify configuration • Only path to the Manufacturing zone
- If standard protocols are required, use OSPF • No Traffic traverses the DMZ.
or IS-IS - No common protocols in each logical firewall
No overlapping IP addresses with enterprise network. No • Set-up functional sub-zones in the DMZ to segment
redundant IP addresses (Network Address Translation is access to data and services (e.g. Partner zone)
maintenance overhead). • Be prepared to “turn-off” access via the firewall
• No Control Traffic into the DMZ
Cell/Area Zone Design best practices (or at a minimum not out of the DMZ)
• Design small Cell/Area zones in a VLAN to better • Limit outbound connections from the DMZ
manage and shape the traffic – devices that need to talk
to each other in one VLAN.
• Use Managed Switches
• Connect in Full-duplex mode to avoid collisions
• Use Gigabit Ethernet ports for trunks/uplinks for lower
latency & jitter
• Use IGMP Snooping/Querier functions to control CIP
multicast traffic volume
• Use resilient network topologies, Ring or preferably
Redundant Star. Use RSTP to manage loops, recover
from connectivity loss for network convergence.
• Apply port security to limit use of open ports.
• Enable Layer 2 security features to protect
Cell/Area zone.
Section 2.5: Control Room Area
2.5 Control Room Area
A highly competitive process industry is driving manufactur- A robust and adaptive industrial Ethernet network infrastruc-
ers to improve efficiency, productivity, and safety. At the ture is critical to the success of this implementation. There
forefront is the control room - the nerve center that links and are several key issues for control room architectures with
orchestrates manufacturing processes. Greater demands industrial Ethernet at the core, including:
are being placed on control room architectures to replace • Installation
outdated controls and labor-intensive manual processes. • Security
The goal? Increased output, less waste, higher availability, • Performance
and improved safety. • Maintainability.
Reference Architectures to be able to make key decisions on network architectures

Rockwell and Cisco have mapped out reference architec- and physical infrastructure component selection. The ‘hy-
tures that meet the specialized needs for a control room to brid’ resource can come from either the IT or control groups.
deliver process automation excellence. These architectures One of the primary tasks is to review a schematic layout of
describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of serv- the process system’s switches and control devices. This al-
ers, software, network switches, and control level devices lows the groups to make decisions on physical infrastructure
that meet the needs for performance and reliability from components to ensure security, performance and testability
software and device levels. In addition to this reference for each layer of the design.
architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture
is also crucial. The physical layer architecture refers to the This guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a
infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and typical topology with call outs indicating where physical se-
optimize the physical plant connectivity and installation. A curity for ports can be applied, where performance decisions
structured, engineered approach is essential for the physi- on media and connectivity need to be made, and where
cal layer to ensure that investments in a control room deliver it’s recommended to install patching for testability of criti-
optimum output. cal fiber or copper links. For industries commonly featuring
redundant networks and possibilities for sub networks from
Physical Layout Considerations several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these
When designing the physical layer for a control room, the physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent
key engineering considerations include the wiring back to problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of
the control room and wire management in the control room. appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over
Understanding the size of the operation, plant and control the distances and environmental factors is key for robust
room layout, environment, plant expansion potential, and operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across
network topologies will help establish the physical layer the plant, as well as in control plans, should be considered.
infrastructure back to the control room. The control room In order to reduce risks associated with installation and long
may pre-exist, constraining size and lacking features like a term performance, select fiber and copper connectivity solu-
raised floor. In addition, there may need to be coexistence tions that are engineered for high performance exceeding
with legacy wiring and devices while transitioning and during standard margins. A careful plan for deploying test points
the long term. Inside the control room, there is a complex will insure that the network distribution meets performance
synergy of servers, monitors, printers, control devices, targets before critical startups of equipment where delays
communication gear, etc. In fact, a modern control room can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventa-
is similar in architecture to a data center room. Over the tive maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation.
years, control rooms and data centers have been converg-
ing on networks, servers, and switches driven by the need to End to End Solution
integrate to the enterprise. Consequently, the best practices In summary, perform a thorough analysis and develop a plan
from data center rooms can be leveraged for enclosures, for the physical infrastructure for control room out to field
wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, devices. This will meet the critical needs for high availability,
power distribution, and thermal dissipation. The following security and performance. Use of reference architectures
solution matrix explores this in more detail. that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approach-
es for control room hardware, network distribution, network
Network Schematic Analysis connectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result
Since the control room is the hub between manufacturing in process control systems that enable the full benefit of the
and the enterprise systems, both the IT and control world investments made in advanced process control systems.
must be served equally. This leads to an opportunity to This guide provides information on selecting, installing, test-
leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunction with ing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for
process control system knowledge. Ideally, a partnership all levels of this architecture.
between IT and controls groups will emerge. One approach
is to develop ‘hybrid’ IT and engineering resources with skills
Control Room Physical Infrastructure 3. Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer
deploying a physical infrastructure for a Control Room. Nec- components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These
essary steps include: components include number of patch cords and horizontal
links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, la-
1. Define the logical architecture governing the layout of beling and identification schemes, cable management tools,
industrial systems and active devices. The logical architec- and safety and security tools.
ture should be based on logical layer reference architectures
developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
applicable topology diagrams.
4. Discuss the levels of the architecture in the diagram
2. Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, and identify solutions to address your system needs.
enclosures, rack systems and control panels. The following
diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
distribution. Materials and specify your infrastructure.
This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone

cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point,
and security considerations.
1. Define the Logical Architecture
2. Map Device Locations to Identify Physical

Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding
Requirements
• Enclosure systems designed for optimum cable manage- • Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to
ment for fiber and copper connectivity while allowing for communication disruptions
proper thermal management of critical servers and switches
• Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out
• Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and control connectivity
patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes that bypass
DMZ firewalls that separate office and control networks
3. Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify

Exact Physical Infrastructure Components
4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs
Zone Area Physical Infrastructure Control Room Issues Panduit Solution

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 )
Enterprise Data Center connectivity Future proof, High Availability, high perfor- Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solu-
mance connectivity tions
DMZ
Shared enclosure, rack areas Security: Control and Management of con- Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent
nections, patching crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in
connectors can secure connections in
switches or patching to control who can
make changes
Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect

patch panels
Manufacturing Zone (Level 3)

Control Room Performance: Noise issues Grounding/Bonding solutions for under
raised floor, cabinet systems
Performance: Cable/Connector perfor- Copper and Fiber solutions, installation

mance tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end
connectivity performance that exceeds
standards
Performance: Thermal management Enclosure systems and wire management
solutions that efficiently direct cooling to
critical servers and switches improving
robustness
High Availability: Redundant networks Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent
crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in
make changes
Maintainability: Cable management Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems,
wire management and identification prod-
ucts. PanView infrastructure management
Reliability: Power Superior termination with Panduit terminals

Wireless implementation Deploying wireless access points securely Utilize lockable, environmentally rated
without expensive power runs enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless
Access Points and antenna systems and
Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute
power
6. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure:
Server Cabinets and accessories
Panduit Part # Description

CS1 Server cabinet frame with top panel.
Single hinge perforated front door.
Two sets of cage nut equipment mounting rails.
45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts.
One set of POU mounting brackets.
Dimensions: 84.0”H x 31.5”W x 41.1”D (2134mm x 800mm x 1044mm)
CN1 Switch cabinet frame with top panel.
Dual hinge perforated front door.
Two sets of #12-24 tapped equipment mounting rails.
CMR19X84 2 Post Patching Rack with space identification Double-sided #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole
spacing. 24 #12-24 mounting screws included. Paint piercing washers included.
DPFP4 4RU filler panels. Direct airflow in cabinet applications. Mount to standard EIA 19” racks or cabi-
nets. #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included
NM1 Front and rear 1RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers,
#12-24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High
Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers
NMF2 Front only 2RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24
and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capac-
ity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers
and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capac-
ity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers
PRV8 8 inch wide vertical cable manager, includes four PRSP7 slack spools. Dimensions: 83.9”H x
8.0”W x 16.4”D(2131mm x 203mm x 417mm)
PRV6 6 inch wide vertical cable manager, spools are not included. Dimensions: 84”H x 6”W x 16.4”D.
(2133.6mm x 152.4mm x 416.6mm)
PRD8 8 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 8.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x
40mm)
PRD6 6 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 6.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x
40mm)
Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet Boxes
Panduit Part# Description

CBXD6BL-AY Surface mount box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Provides slots that accept cable ties for
strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover. Dimensions:
1.04”H x 4.95”W x 3.79”L (26.42mm x 125.73mm x 96.27mm)
CPP24FMWBLY 1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates: For use
with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules
CWPP12WBL Alternate 12-Port patch panel supplied with three factory installed CFFP4 snap-in faceplates with
integrated wall mount bracket
CJ688TG* Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module. *
add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR
(Orange), RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet)
UTPSP*M**Y 1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end. * for lengths 1 to 20
feet (Increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 foot lengths
** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL
(Violet)
Optional Keyed Jack Keyed Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module
Module
CJK688TG*
Optional Keyed Patch Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch
Cord for use with cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.
Keyed Jack Module
UTPKSP*^
Copper Jacks, Cable, Patch, Assemblies

Jacks
CJ6X88TGI* Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module
CJK6X88TG* Keyed Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module
CJ688TG* Mini-Com® Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module.
CJK688TG* Keyed Mini-Com® Category 6 UTP Jack Module
* add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange),
RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet). STP Shielded Jacks also available.
Horizontal Cable
PUR6X04** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable
PUP6X04** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable
PUR6004BU-UY TX6™ Cat6 CMR UTP Copper Cable
PUP6004BU-UY TX6™ Cat6 CMP UTP Copper Cable
PSR6004** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR U/FTP Copper Cable
PSP6004** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP U/FTP Copper Cable
** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL (Violet) STP Shielded Cable also available.
Patch Cords
UTP6X^** TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords
UTPK6X^** Keyed TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords
UTPSP*M**Y 1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end.
UTPKSP*^ Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch
cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.
** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL (Violet).
* for lengths 1 to 20 feet (Increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 foot lengths STP Shielded Patch
Cable also available
Patch Panels
DP**6X88TGY DP6™ 10Gig™ Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DPA**6X88TGY DP6™ 10Gig™ Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DP**688TGY DP6™ Category 6 Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DPA**688TGY DP6™ Category 6 Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
CPP**FMWBLY Mini-Com® 1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted face-
plates: For use with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules
CPPA48HDWBLY 48-Port angled high density patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates (space not avail-
able for component labels)
strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover.
** = Number of Jack Ports 24 or 48
24 = 1RU Rack Space
48 = 2RU Rack Space
QuickNet
QAPBCBCBXX** QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable (blue)
with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot incre-
ments in lengths from 10 feet to 295 feet (also available in Category 6 version)
QPP24BL 24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel
Adapters (48 port also available)
QPPACBAB07 QuickNet Plug Pack Cable Assembly made with Category 6A, CM Blue Cable with a 6-pack blue
plug pack on one end to modular plugs on the other end (also available in Category 6 version)
Punchdown System
GPKBW**Y GP6™ PLUS Punchdown System
** = either 144-Pair (36-Port) or 432-Pair (108-Port)
Fiber Products

FÊ10-10M*Y Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths). Replace ^ with X for 10Gig, 5 for
50/125um (OM2), 6 for 62.5/125um (OM1) or 9 for 9/125um (OS1). Replace the numbers for
specific connector type 10 = LC, 2 = ST, 3 = SC. * implies length. Can be ordered in any hybrid
configuration.
FAP*WAQ^^Z Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12).
AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying
solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phospho-
rous bronze split sleeves.
CFAPPBL* Fiber Patch Panel. Replace * with one or two depending on how many FAPs or cassettes are
necessary
CM*^^ZBL MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules. Replace * with a D or S for single or duplex, ^^ with color
(dependent on fiber type) and delete the Z for phosphorous bronze sleeves.
F^^MC* Opticam Connectors. Fiber optic connectors. Replace ^^ with connector type (LC, Keyed LC,
SC, or ST). Replace * with color (AQ, BL, EI)
FODR*^^Y Fiber Optic Distribution Cable. Replace * with X-10Gig, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9
for SM. Replace ^^ with fiber count (6,12,24,36,48,72,96,144,216,288)
FCXO-12-Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3). Available in MM (OM2), MM
(OM1) and SM (OS1) and in 6, 12 or 24 fiber options
FX12D5-5M1Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3). Replace X with,
5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1). Replace 5-5 (LC - LC) with connectors
required: 2-ST, 3-SC
FSPX*55F*A QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths. Replace
X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1)
FAP*WAQ^^Z Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12).
AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying
solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phospho-
rous bronze split sleeves.
Fiber Raceway Parts

FR4X4**6 FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Solid Wall Channel.
FRHC4**6 FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Snap-On Hinged Cover.
FRBC4X4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 QuikLock Coupler.
FRT4X4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Fitting.
FRTSC4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Cover.
FRFWC4X4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Fitting.
FRFWCSC4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Cover.
FRRA4X4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Fitting.
FRRASC4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.
FREC4X4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 End Cap.
FRSP** FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit.
FRSP4C** FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit Cover for 4x4 Channel.
FBC2X2** FIBERRUNNER 2x2 QuikLock Coupler.
FIDT2X2** Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5” ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.
FR6TRBN58 FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8” Threaded Rod
FR6TB12 FIBERRUNNER QuikLock Trapeze Bracket
** Replace with desired color, YL for yellow, BL for Black or OR for Orange
Gridrunner Wireway Parts

GR21X4X24PG GRIDRUNNER 21”W x 4”D x 24”L Wire Basket Section
GRFWC21PG GRIDRUNNER Universal Intersection
GRPBPG GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Bracket
GRCLAMPPG-X GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Clamp
GRBR4PG GRIDRUNNER Bend Radius Control Corner
Cable Routing/Management

CCH50-S10-C Heavy-Duty Fixed Diameter Clamps
CCS25-S8-C Standard Fixed Diameter Clamps
CH105-A-C14 Cable Holder
CLT100-C20 Corrugated Loom Tubing
CSH-D20 Cable Spacers
JP131W-L20 J-PRO™ Cable Support System
Cable Ties

HLM-15R0 * HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black
HLS-75R0 * HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black
HLB2S-C0 * 100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip Tie, 0.75” Width, Black
HLS3S-X0 * HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black
HLT2I-X0 * HLT Series 8” Loop Tie, Black
HLTP2I-X12 * HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon
HLSP3S-X12 * HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon
CBOT24K Cable Bundle Organizing Tool
PRPC13-69 Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device - Only used with select Panduit Power Outlet Units
PRPC13-60 (Natural and BLK color)
ERT2M-C20 8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability
Rating
ERT3M-C20 11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability
Rating
* Available in multiple colors
Control Room Grounding/Bonding

Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Parts
GB2B0314TPI-1 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) 1/4” x 2” x 24”, Solid Copper, Tin Plated.
HTWC250-250-1 H-Tap w/Cover Kit: Run 250kcmil - #2 AWG, Tap 250kcmil - #2 AWG
LCC3/0-38DW Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 3/0 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing
LCC2-38DW Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 2 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing
LCC4-12W Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 1/2’ stud hole, 1 3/4” spacing
LCC6-14AW Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 6 AWG, 1/4’ stud hole, 5/8” spacing
GUBC500-6 Universal Beam Grounding Clamp
GLMHK 1/2” Hardware Kit for Universal Beam Grounding Clamp
HDW1/4-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville (locking) washers
HDW3/8-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville (locking) washers
LTYK Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Label Kit
Use these Grounding Jumper Kits when go going directly from Rack/Cabinet to TMGB or TGB. Use with HDW hardware kits.
GJ672UH Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 72” (6’)
GJ6288UH Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 288’ “ (24’)
RGCBNJ660P22 Common Bonding Network Jumper Kit. 6 AWG from Rack/Cabinet to #6 AWG to #2 AWG
RGCBNJ660PY Common Bonding Network Jumper Kit. 6 AWG from Rack/Cabinet to #2 AWG to 250 kcmil.
For hanging grounding jumpers from ladder racks and bonding ladder rack sections together.
GACB-1 Auxiliary Cable Bracket
GACBJ68U Auxiliary Cable Bracket Jumper Kit, 8”
Rack and Cabinet Grounding and Bonding Components
RGS134-1Y Vertical Grounding Strip Kit, threaded equipment mounting rails
RGS134B-1 Vertical Grounding Strip Kit, Cage Nut equipment mounting rails
RGRB19U Horizontal Grounding Bus Bar kit, threaded equipment mounting rails
RGRB19CN Horizontal Grounding Bus Bar Kit, Cage Nut equipment mounting rails
RGESD2-1 ESD Port, #12-24 threaded rail
RGESDB-1 ESD Port, Cage Nut Rails
RGESDWS ESD Wrist Strap
GJS660U Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 60” (5’), one end factory terminated with straight two-hole compression connector.
RGTBSG-C Green Bonding Screws, #12-24, box of 100
CNBK Bonding Cage Nut, 50 pack
CNB4K Bonding Cage Nut, 4 pack
For bonding and grounding armor fiber cable.
ACG24K Armored Fiber Cable Grounding Kit, up to 0.84 diameter

ACG24K-500 Armored Fiber Cable Grounding Kit, up to 1.03 diameter
Identification Parts - LS8E printer items only shown

C200X100YPC Printable Label for Grounding Busbars
C200X100YPC Printable Label for Rack Identification
C200X100YPC Printable Label for Enclosure Identification
S100X160VAC Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification
S100X220VAC Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification
NWSLC-2Y Cable identification sleeve for 2mm fiber cable
NWSLC-7Y Cable identification sleeve for MTP fiber cable
S100X150VAC Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification
S100X225VAC Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification
T100X000VPC-BK Printable Label for Fiber Port Identification
C252X030FJC Printable Label for Copper 4 Port Identification
C100X000VUC-BK Printable Label for Pathway Identification
Section 2.6: Network Distribution
2.6 Network Distribution
There is a balancing act to connecting the manufacturing

zone control room to the cell/area zone. Users must
decide on architectures, physical media, and connectivity
that distribute networking that is cost-effective while also
possessing enough flexibility, environmental ruggedness
and performance headroom to hold up to current and future
manufacturing needs.
With the rapid pace of technological developments,

specifying network distribution can be confusing as there
are multiple categories of copper cabling and modes of fiber
media that address varying channel lengths, performance
targets, and EMI noise levels. A growing move to wireless
approaches also factor into decisions for connecting far flung
operations or those with challenging environmental issues.
Power over Ethernet technology distributes networking
and AC power sufficient for video cameras, sensors, and
wireless access points.
The selection of media and connectivity for network as spiral wrap or heat shrink tubing. Securing cabling may
infrastructure is best analyzed as a system design require weather-resistant cable ties and, in extreme cases,
encompassing the media, connectors, security, and rugged stainless steel wire management products.
installation products that will perform as a solution long
term. Certified designers and installers can ensure that Network Schematic Analysis
this technology is deployed appropriately and support the Industrial Ethernet implementations can leverage the
underlying reference architecture for the application. Key experience of traditional office Ethernet by partnering with IT.
issues for network distribution architectures with industrial This leads to an opportunity to apply best practices from the IT
Ethernet at the core include installation, reliability, security, world in conjunction with process control system knowledge.
production growth, and performance. The ideal is a partnering between IT and controls groups.
One approach is development of ‘hybrid’ IT and engineering
Reference Architectures resources with skills to be able to make key decisions on
Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference network architectures and physical infrastructure component
architectures that meet the specialized needs for network selection. The ‘hybrid’ resource can come from either the
distribution to deliver automation excellence. These IT or control groups. One of the primary tasks is to review a
architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell schematic layout of the network distribution to ensure security,
and Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition performance and testability for each layer of the design.
to this reference architecture level, the physical layer
reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing
architecture refers to the infrastructure required to achieve a typical topology with callouts that show where physical
the connectivity considering data throughput, environment, security for ports can be applied, where performance
wiring distances, and availability. A structured, engineered decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and
approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of
investments in network distribution deliver optimum output. critical fiber or copper links. For industries where redundant
networks are common and also have possibilities for sub
Physical Layout Considerations networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and
Key engineering considerations when designing the physical secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes
layer for network distribution include data through-put, and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance.
distance, reliability, and environment. Understanding the Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can
size of the operation, plant layout, harsh conditions, plant perform over the distances and environmental factors is key
expansion potential, and network topologies will help for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy
establish the physical layer infrastructure requirements. In across the plant as well as in control plans should be
addition, there may need to be coexistence with legacy considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions
wiring and devices while transitioning and long term. engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins
State-of-the-art technologies like fiber, deliver superior reduces risks associated with installation and long term
performance by handling high traffic volume, immunity to performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure
noise, and long distances. Reliable termination is essential that the network distribution meets performance targets before
to achieve excellent performance and reliability. Some critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as
possibilities include pre-terminated fiber connectors, or well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to
copper bulk head connectors like IP67 or M12. Redundant avoid loss of control during operation.
networks pose different challenges such as cross connection
or incorrect port connections. Color coded connectors and End-to-End Solution
Lock-in connectors can mitigate this risk. In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the
physical infrastructure for control room out to field devices
Cable routing poses other challenges. Cables may be exposed will meet the critical needs for high availability, security
to harsh environments such as extreme weather or vibration. and performance. Use of reference architectures that
Insulation and abrasion protection products shield cables such leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches
for control room hardware, network distribution, network 3. Detail Design

connectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact
in process control systems that enable the full benefit of the Physical Infrastructure Components
investments made in advanced process control systems.
This guide provides information on selecting, installing, Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a
testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer
for all levels of this architecture. components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These
components include number of patch cords and horizontal
Network Distribution Physical Infrastructure links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements,
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with labeling and identification schemes, cable management
deploying a physical infrastructure for network distribution. tools, and safety and security tools.
1. Logical Design NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.

Define the Logical Architecture
4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
Define the logical architecture governing the layout identify solutions to address your system needs.
of industrial systems and active devices. The logical
architecture should be based on logical layer reference 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, Materials and specify your infrastructure.
as well as on applicable topology diagrams.
2. Physical Design
Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure
Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements
Map out the physical locations of servers, switches,

enclosures, rack systems and control panels. The following
diagram shows how cable reach factors dictate whether
to use copper, single mode or multi-mode cabling. Zone
cabling approaches can also distribute cabling though
passive patch panels or active patch panels with switches.

1. Logical Design
Fig 2.6-1 Logical Diagram for network distribution
2. Physical Design
Fig 2.6-2 Physical Diagram for network distribution
- Copper Layer: Use for short reach (less than 328 ft, 100m).
• Choose Category 6 cable and connectors for
10/100/1000Mb performance.
- Fiber Layer:
• For Medium reach (328 to 1800 ft, 101m to 550m)
use Multimode fiber cable.
• For Long reach (Greater than 1800 ft) use Single
mode fiber
3. Detail Design
Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact
Physical Infrastructure Components
Fig 2.6-3 Detail diagram for network distribution physical infrastructure
4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and

Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs.
Zone Area Physical Infrastructure Network Distribution Issues Panduit Solution

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2)
Enterprise Data Center connectivity Futureproof, High Availability, high perfor- Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity
mance connectivity solutions
DMZ
Shared enclosure, rack areas Security: Control and Management of Color coded, keyed jacks can pre-
connections, patching vent crossing channels inadvertently.
Lock-in connectors can secure con-
nections in switches or patching to
control who can make changes
Lockable enclosure systems, cross

connect patch panels
PanView infrastructure management

Control Room Performance: Noise issues Grounding/Bonding solutions for un-
der raised floor, cabinet systems
Performance: Cable/Connector perfor- Copper and Fiber solutions, instal-
mance lation tools, and testing guidance for
end-to-end connectivity performance
that exceeds standards
High Availability: Redundant networks Color coded, keyed jacks can pre-
vent crossing channels inadvertently.
Lock-in connectors can secure con-
nections in switches or patching to
control who can make changes
Maintainability: Cable management Fiber runner, enclosure and rack sys-
tems, wire management and identifi-
cation products. PanView infrastruc-
ture management
5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of

Materials and Specify your Infrastructure:
Copper Jacks, Cable, Cable Assemblies
Jack Modules
CJ6X88TG* Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module
Horizontal Cable
PUR6X04** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable
PUP6X04** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable
PUR6004BU-UY TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable
PUP6004BU-UY TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable
PSR6004** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR U/FTP Copper Cable
PSP6004** TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP U/FTP Copper Cable
PUR6X04BU-UY High Performance Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable.
PSR6004BU-UGY Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-Pair U/FTP shielded copper cable.
PUR6004BU-UY High Performance Category 6 riser (CMR) cable 4-pair UTP copper cable.
PUR5504BU-W Category 5e riser (CMR) cable 4 pair UTP copper cable.
STP Shielded cable also available.

QuickNet
QAPBCBCBXX** QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable
(blue) with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot
increments in lenghts from 10 feet to 295 feet (Category 6 also available)
QPP24BL 24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel Adapters
Punchdown System
GPKBW**Y GP6™ PLUS Punchdown System
** = either 144-Pair (36-Port) or 432-Pair (108-Port)
Plug to Plug, Plug to Jack Cable Assemblies

UAPPBU25 Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UAPRBU25 Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UPPBU25Y Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UPRBU25Y Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UAJPBU25BL Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black
Mini-Com TX6A 10Gig UTP Jack Module on the other.
UAJRBU25BL Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black
UJPBU25BLY Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on one end and a black
Mini-Com TX6 PLUS UTP Jack Module on the other.
UJRBU25BLY Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on one end and a black Mini-
Com TX6 PLUS UTP Jack Module on the other.
Fiber Interconnection
FSDR606Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)
FSDR606Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)
FODRX06Y Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM3)
FSDR906Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)
FSPR606Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)
FSPR506Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)
FOPRX06Y Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM3)
FSPR906Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)
FSCR606Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
62.5/125μm (OM1)
50/125μm (OM2)
FOCRX06Y Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
50/125μm (OM3)
9/125μm (OS1)
FSGR606Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
62.5/125μm (OM1)
FSGR506Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)
FOGRX06Y Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
50/125μm (OM3)
FSGR906Y Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)
FSTN606 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
62.5/125μm (OM1)
FSTN506 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
50/125μm (OM2)

FOTNX06 Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
50/125μm (OM3)
FSTN906 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)
FSWN606 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)
FSWN506 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)
FOWNX06 Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,
50/125μm (OM3)
FSWN906 Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)
FOGPX^^^LNF***B 10 Gig LC to pigtail armored distribution cable with pulling eye on pigtail end and grounding kit for both
ends of cable (also available in SM) ^^ is fiber count to 288. *** Length in meters
FOGP9^^^LNF***B Singlemode LC to LC armored distribution cable with grounding kit for both ends of cable (also available
in 10Gig MM) *** length in meters
FÊ10-10M*Y Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths)
FAP*WAQ^^Z Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs)
CFAPPBL* Fiber Patch Panel
CM*^^ZBL MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules
F^^MC* Opticam Connectors
FODR*^^Y Fiber Optic Distribution Cable
FCXO-12-Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3)
FX12D5-5M1Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3)
FSPX*55F*A QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths

F^^MC* Opticam Connectors
Cable Ties
HLM-15R0 * HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black
HLS-75R0 * HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black
CBOT24K Cable Bundle Organizing Tool
PRPC13-69 Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device - Only used with select Panduit Power Outlet Units (Natural and BLK
PRPC13-60 color)
ERT2M-C20 8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating
ERT3M-C20 11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating
Fiber Raceway Parts

FRRASC4** FBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.
FIDT2X2** Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5" ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.
FR6TRBN58 FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8" Threaded Rod
FR6ALB FIBERRUNNER Adjustable Ladder Rack Bracket
Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items only shown

H100X044H1C Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification
Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure
Reference Architectures
2.7 Zone Cabling Enclosure
Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference
architectures that meet the specialized needs for network
Network architectures spread out over large areas can benefit
distribution to deliver automation excellence. These
from topologies that consolidate network infrastructure closer
architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell
to the areas where network drops are located. The basic idea
and Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition
is to move infrastructure such as switches and patch panels
to this reference architecture level, the physical layer
that might be housed in racks or enclosures in a control room
reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer
out to the manufacturing cell/area.
architecture refers to the infrastructure required to achieve
the connectivity considering data throughput, environment,
This approach, termed a “zone cabling” approach by the
wiring distances, and availability. A structured, engineered
cabling industry, can help facilitate a network design that
approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that
complies with Rockwell Automation and Cisco guidance for
investments in network distribution deliver optimum output.
cell/area zones concerning segmenting networks for each
automation cell to improve performance and robustness.
This zone cabling approach has many benefits including
cost savings, flexibility for machine moves/changes, and
improved availability. To distribute switches, patch panels,
POE equipment, and wireless requires designing enclosures
with appropriate environmental ratings, security features,
wire management, and identification.
The manufacturing zone and the cell/area zones that

comprise it are potentially home to several layers of
networking including critical automation networks linking

PAC systems, FactoryTalk servers, motion control as well as
networking required for PCs, displays, and printers that are
tied to the business network. These enterprise application
interfaces may be co-located near the machines or process
line so that the distribution of both of these networks may
be efficiently handled by one zone cabling enclosure. A
further complication is that there may be network drops
for building automation related systems such as security
cameras, environmental controls, HVAC or power systems.
Thus there may be 2-3 networks co-located in one area.
Consolidating the network drops from these different
network layers into one zone cabling enclosure can reduce
floor space, enclosure costs and maintainability if properly
managed. However, this converged approach can result
in serious outages and security breaches if not properly
secured and organized.
Reference Architectures Network Schematic Analysis

Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out Network schematics are important tools for control engineers
reference architectures that promote segmenting networks and IT personnel to review the physical infrastructure design
into cell/area zones at a logical level based on PERA and component selection. By reviewing the copper and fiber
models. In addition to this reference architecture level, channels implemented in the zone cabling enclosure, the
the physical layer reference architecture for a zone locations where testability, performance and security are
cabling approach is also crucial. The physical layout concerns can be highlighted and addressed.
and component selection for a zone cabling architecture
comprised of enclosures and zone cabling is critical for This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing
ensuring the desired logical architecture performs with the a typical topology with callouts that show where physical
desired level of performance and availability while also security for ports can be applied, where performance
ensuring security and maintainability. decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and
where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of
Physical Layout Considerations critical fiber or copper links. For industries where redundant
Zone enclosures can range in complexity from small networks are common and also have possibilities for sub
enclosures housing one Stratix switch with connectivity to networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and
a handful of devices in an area to larger 19” rack systems secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes
that consolidate wiring for dozens of control network drops during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate
as well as for business system and/or building system fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances
drops in the area. and environmental factors is key for robust operation.
Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant
The design principles for a small enclosure leverage control as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting
panel design principles utilizing DIN rail devices while the fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high
layout for a 19” rack system can employ rack-based patch performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks
panels for high-density network wiring management. In associated with installation and long term performance. A
either case, it’s advised to design the network infrastructure careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the
with security, performance, testability, and maintainability in network distribution meets performance targets before critical
mind. For control panel based designs, design tools such as startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as
Bentley’s promise can enable easy standardization on best on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid
practice designs leveraging reference designs. For 19” rack loss of control during operation.
designs, Visio based reference designs for layout of each
RU of the rack space with the appropriate patching, POR, End-to-End Solution
Cisco switch or Rockwell Automation Stratix switch can In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for
assist in providing designs that leverage best practices for the physical infrastructure for the zone cabling enclosure
wire management and connectivity. is key for ensuring its value and performance. Use of
reference architectures that leverage best practice physical
infrastructure approaches for zone cabling enclosures and
cabling will result in cost savings, flexibility and improved
performance and security. This guide provides information
on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this
critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this zone
cabling architecture.
Network Distribution Physical Infrastructure 3. Detail Design

This section defines the sequence of actions involved Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact
with deploying a physical infrastructure for a zone cabling Physical Infrastructure Components
enclosure system.
Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a
1. Logical Design reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer
Define the Logical Architecture components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These
components include number of patch cords and horizontal
Define the logical architecture governing the layout links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements,
of industrial systems and active devices. The logical labeling and identification schemes, cable management
architecture should be based on based on logical layer tools, and safety and security tools.
reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation
and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
2. Physical Design 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure identify solutions to address your system needs.
5. Review the recommended solution component List of
Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, Materials and specify your infrastructure.
enclosures, rack systems and control panels. This step
provides the opportunity to identify distributed (i.e., “zone
cabling”) topologies and plan out required patching, test
point, and security considerations. Physically layout the
zone cabling enclosure with switches, patching, and PoE
devices, as required.

1. Logical Design
Fig 2.7-1 Logical Diagram for Network Zones
2. Physical Design
Stratix 8000
Fig 2.7-2 Physical Diagram for Zone Cabling Enclosure
- Enclosure systems designed for optimum cable management

for fiber and copper connectivity while allowing for proper
thermal management of critical servers and switches.
- Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and control

patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes that bypass
DMZ firewalls that separate office and control networks.
- Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to

communication disruptions
\- Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block-

connectivity
3. Detail Design
Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact
Physical Infrastructure Components
Fig 2.7-3 Detail diagram for zone cabling enclosure
4. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and

Zone Area Physical Infrastructure Zone Issues Panduit Solution

Zone Cabling Security: Control of ports Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed
connectivity solutions can provide means
to segregate critical systems
Performance: Distance, Throughput Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions
Performance: Throughput, Latency Connectivity solutions that exceed stan-

dards for copper and fiber connectivity.
Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term
performance, reducing risk
Maintainability: Access Ceiling enclosures, racks, panels ideal for

mainframe or array storage
Maintainability: Cabling Pre-terminated MTP cassettes, fiber

adapter panel (FAP), or fiber optic adapt-
er modules and their associated trunk
cables, interconnect cables, connectors
and patch cords
Mixture of Office and IE network Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent
crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in
make changes
Testability: Verify during startup, Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and
preventative maintenance critical external connections. Pre-tested cop-
per and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Server Cabinets, Ethernet enclosures and accessories

CS1 Server cabinet frame with top panel. Single hinge perforated front door.
Two sets of cage nut equipment mounting rails. 45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts. One
set of POU mounting brackets.
CN1 Switch cabinet frame with top panel. Dual hinge perforated front door.
Two sets of #12-24 tapped equipment mounting rails.
CMR19X84 2 Post Patching Rack with space identification Double-sided #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole spac-
ing. 24 #12-24 mounting screws included. Paint piercing washers included.
DPFP4 4RU filler panels. Direct airflow in cabinet applications. Mount to standard EIA 19” racks or cabinets. #12-
24 and M6 mounting screws included
NM1 Front and rear 1RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-
24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity
WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers
and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity
and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity
PRV8 8 inch wide vertical cable manager, includes four PRSP7 slack spools. Dimensions: 83.9”H x 8.0”W x
16.4”D(2131mm x 203mm x 417mm)
PRV6 6 inch wide vertical cable manager, spools are not included. Dimensions: 84”H x 6”W x 16.4”D.
(2133.6mm x 152.4mm x 416.6mm)
PRD8 8 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 8.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)
IAEIP66 Industrial Ethernet enclosure 18.50”H x 18.50”W x 8.00”D, supplied with 115/230V to 24Vdc Power Sup-
ply. Ip 66/Nema 4x rated.
IAECGP Industrial Ethernet gland plate, with 14 industrial ethernet bulkhead fittings and patch cords. Attaches to
IAEIP66 enclosure.
IAEFKSC Industrial Ethernet SC fiber uplink kit. Terminates 4 SC connectors to two duplex fiber uplinks.
PZAEWM3 PanZone Active wall enclosure, 38.50”H x 27.92”W x 8.61”D
PZAEGK Structured Ground kit for PanZone enclosure.
PZC12S PanZone Wall mount cabinet for consolidation, 25.81”H x 25” W x 22.85”D
PZWIFIN Wireless Access Point, for Cisco Aironet, 13.75”H x 12”W x 4.75”D
PZNWE12 Wireless Access Point for Cisco Aironet, 13.56”H x 13.47”W x 6.56”D, Nema 4x/IP 66 rated.
PZNWE12S Wireless Access Point for Cisco Aironet, 13.56”H x 13.47”W x 6.56”D, Nema 4x/IP 66 rated. Includes
shielded connectivity kit for POE (power over ethernet) applications.
Copper Cables/Connectors/Patch/Assemblies
Jack Modules
CJ6X88TG* Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module
Patch Cords
UTP6A^** TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords
UTPK6A^** Keyed TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords
UTPSP*M**Y Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end, meter lengths.
UTPKSP*^ Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch
cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.
Patch Panels
DP**6X88TGY DP6™ 10Gig™ Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DPA**6X88TGY DP6™ 10Gig™ Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DP**688TGY DP6™ Category 6 Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
DPA**688TGY DP6™ Category 6 Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel
CPP**FMWBLY Mini-Com® 1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted
faceplates: For use with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules
CPPA48HDWBLY 48-Port angled high density patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates (space not
available for component labels)
** = Number of Jack Ports 24 or 48
24 = 1RU Rack Space
48 = 2RU Rack Space
strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover.
QuickNet
QAPBCBCBXX** QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable
(blue) with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot
increments in lengths from 10 feet to 295 feet (also available in Category 6 version)
QPP24BL 24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel
Adapters (48 port also available)
Plug to Plug, Plug to Jack Cable Assemblies

UAPPBU25 Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UAPRBU25 Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UPPBU25Y Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UPRBU25Y Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end
UAJPBU25BL Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black
UAJRBU25BL Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black
MPSI588T Category 5e, RJ45 shielded industrial plug with protective cover
IUTPCH*BLY Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable with
dust caps
ISTPCH*MBLY Category 5e STP patch cords constructed of industrial grade STP category 5e solid cable
with dust caps
IndustrialNet Products
IAEBH5E Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover
IAEBH5ES Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover
IAEBH6 Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover
IAEBH6S Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover
IAEBHC6 Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover
IEABHC5E Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover
MPI588T Category 5e, RJ45 industrial plug with protective cover
IUTPCH*BLY Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable with
dust caps
with dust caps
Fiber Products
Zone Cabling Enclosure
FÊ10-10M*Y Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths). Replace ^ with X for 10Gig, 5 for
50/125um (OM2), 6 for 62.5/125um (OM1) or 9 for 9/125um (OS1). Replace the numbers
for specific connector type 10 = LC, 2 = ST, 3 = SC. * implies length. Can be ordered in any
hybrid configuration.
FAP*WAQ^^Z Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8,
12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and
keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or
phosphorous bronze split sleeves.
CFAPPBL* Fiber Patch Panel. Replace * with one or two depending on how many FAPs or cassettes
are necessary.
FODR*^^Y Fiber Optic Distribution Cable. Replace * with X-10Gig, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1)
and 9 for SM. Replace ^^ with fiber count (6,12,24,36,48,72,96,144,216,288)
FCXO-12-Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3). Available in MM (OM2),
MM (OM1) and SM (OS1) and in 6, 12 or 24 fiber options
FX12D5-5M1Y QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3). Replace X
with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1) . Replace 5-5 (LC - LC) with con-
nectors required: 2-ST, 3-SC
FSPX*55F*A QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths. Re-
place X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1)
FAP*WAQ^^Z Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8,
12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and
keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or
phosphorous bronze split sleeves.
Cable Ties
HLM-15R0 * Hook and Loop HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black
HLS-75R0 * Hook and Loop HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black
ERT2M-C20 8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating
ERT3M-C20 11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating
Safety/Security Parts
PSL-DCPL Package of 10 RJ45 Plug Lock-In Devices and one installation/removal tool -- for standard jacks
PSL-DCPLR Package of 10 RJ45 Plug Lock-In Devices and one installation/removal tool -- for recessed jacks
PSL-DCJB Package of 10 RJ45 Blockout Devices and one installation/removal tool
PSL-LCAB Package of 10 LC Duplex Adapter Blockout Device and one installation/removal tool
FLCCLIW-X Package of 10 LC Duplex Lock-In Clips and one removal tool

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area
that has low impedance for high frequency noise currents.

2.8 Control Panel Area
This low impedance helps prevent noise from polluting
network communications
2. Separation and Segregation

One of the easiest and least expensive ways to prevent
noise problems is to lay out the control panel using
segregation and separation techniques. Segregation and
separation is the practice of physically separating noisy
circuits and devices from potential victims. When creating a
panel layout, it is best to identify physical areas in the panel
for clean and noisy circuits. The areas are defined by how
much noise is generated and the sensitivity of the devices
and circuits to noise. Two to three areas are created in each
panel, depending on the application:

• Very Noisy / Dirty (Right Side of the enclosure)
Control Panels are the enclosures that protect automation • Noisy/ Dirty (Right Side of the Enclosure)
components in a rugged NEMA rated enclosure specified • Clean / Sensitive (Left Side of the Enclosure)
for targeted environment. Control panels can vary greatly in
size and construction depending on the size, power rating, Higher voltage devices should be mounted in the upper
and application requirements. However, one common right-hand corner of the panel keeping as much distance
control panel need that has developed is for recommended as possible between the high voltage devices and any
best practices for installing the critical control panel Ethernet electronic devices such as Programmable Automation
switch and associated fiber and copper which provide Controllers (PACs), DC power supplies, and timers that
connectivity to devices internal to and connected from the should ideally be on the opposite left side of the panel. Also
control panels. maintain distance between motor power and encoder, I/O,
and analog cables.
This Ethernet physical infrastructure internal to the control
panel is critical to the performance of the automation 3. Filters and Suppression
system as Ethernet is now used for control and device Filters are used both to clean up signals or power entering
level communications as well as for information level the panel as well as to prevent noise from a noise source
and safety level. The control panel environment can be from spreading within the panel. Install close to noise
hostile to networking and can present very real problems source or panel entrance to minimize length of unfiltered
with communication disruptions or device failure so it cable in the panel. Avoid bundling line side and load of filter
is important to follow best practices for noise mitigation together so noise does not couple back from the dirty side
in control panel designs. The design of the physical to the clean side. Suppressors are also used to redirect
infrastructure needs to ensure the performance, security, unwanted energy to inhibit noise coupling to sensitive
and maintainability in an environment that can have serious circuits. They are recommended to be used across dry
EMI, thermal, and space challenges. contacts or inductive loads to short circuit the energy stored
Key considerations for panel layout to mitigate noise issues in relay or solenoid coils rather than allowing high voltage
include: noise spikes to be developed. The noise spikes from
opening a large coil can easily reach hundreds or thousands
1. Grounding and Bonding of volts and present a very real noise source that should be
Grounding and bonding is the foundation for controlling EMI suppressed at its source.
in control systems. Use of galvanized back panels and low
impedance braided bonding straps provide a ‘ground plane’
Physical Layout Considerations for

Industrial Ethernet in Control Panels Figure 2.8-1.
Industrial network planning for control panels requires Ethernet Switch and
more thought today than in the past. With the increase of Panduit Patch Panel
industrial networking applications, special considerations mounted on Side
are warranted to maximum protection from noise. Network Plane with PANDUIT
cables should be carefully segregated from noisy and very PanelMax™ Corner
noisy components, conductors, and zones. Duct
The key considerations for layout of Ethernet switches and

cabling systems in a control panel include:
• Panel space for Ethernet switch, patching, and

cable management
• Media and connector selection
• Design for testability, maintainability, safety
• Use of design tools
Panel space for Ethernet switch, patching, cable

management. Proper space allocation provides important
benefits for noise immunity for the switch as well as for the
cabling. The cabling needs to be routed away from noise
sources while also following recommended bend radius
control. NEC/NFPA 70 Article 800.133A recommends
communication wires and cables be separated at least 50
mm (2 in.) from conductors. For fiber, provide panel space
for installing fiber patching with slack management. For
copper cables that need to leave panel, it is recommended
to install patching so that the link can be tested.
Many cabinets can accommodate a side panel which

can provide adequate spacing for a well executed
industrial networking layer (see Figure 2.8-1). Use of wire
management products that maximize use of panel corners
can provide additional back panel or side panel space as
well as improve wire management and cable segregation.
Note that locating the Ethernet switch and patching well
away from any power devices or live conductors can
improve safety for any qualified technician working in the
control panel. Inadvertent contact with high voltage is a
cause of arc flash events or electrical shock events that are
life threatening as well as costing industry millions a year in
damages and litigation.
Avoid deforming the Ethernet cable by cinching too tight with
cable ties. Deforming the cable can cause increased return loss
and unbalance in the cable resulting in more noise pick up.
Media and Connector Selection: Copper Cabling. Figure 2.8-2 illustrates the allowed coupled common mode noise
Installation of copper Ethernet cabling near control panel signal in a 1000Base-T and 100Base-T system for a 100 meter
noise sources increases potential for common mode noise channel. Note that 100Base-T cable cannot tolerate more than
coupling that can result in bit errors and delays. Common- 0.5 volt of noise coupling near 100 MHz with the 1000BaseT
mode noise is the voltage that can develop on the entire tolerating much less only 0.1 V. A VFD, servo, or inductive load
LAN channel with respect to ground. Since Ethernet with spikes in hundreds of volts could easily couple in noise at
cabling system uses differential mode signaling, the voltage these low levels leading to disrupted communications.
difference within the two wires in a twisted pair defines the
signal so common mode noise should be subtracted out and The balance of twisted pair cables and RJ45 connectors is
not cause a problem. key to preventing common mode noise from being converted
to differential mode noise that corrupts communication (see
Figure 2.8-3). If the balance is
perfect, then the differential mode
measurements will be equal on
both conductors of the twisted pair
and thereby cancel out imposed
noise. Not all manufacturers design
their connectors for optimized
balance so it is important to review
this critical specification when
choosing a connector as well as
patch cable vendor.
Figure 2.8-2. Coupled Noise on Ethernet
Figure 2.8-3. Signal and Noise Routing Diagram.
In practice, a completely balanced system is unachievable Infrastructure design techniques that can improve noise
and a level of imposed noise is observed on one of the two rejection include maintaining proper bend radius and
conductors. The CMRR (Common-Mode Rejection Ratio) separation distance between conductors, avoiding over-
of a cabling system is a ratio, articulated in dB, of common- tightened cable ties, using shielded cables where possible,
mode noise rejected and prevented from converting to a observing good bonding practices for shielded and motor
differential mode voltage. IEEE and EIA/TIA defies the cables, and ensuring cable and connector balance using
minimum requirements for CMRR in term of TCL and best-in-class vendor connectivity solutions that exceed
TCTL which are power ratio measurements characterizing standards specifications. The key for unshielded copper
unbalance from transmit and receive ends. performance is to select connectivity with superior balance
that exceeds standard margins to minimize risks.
Design for Testability, Maintainability, Safety.

Tips for Industrial Ethernet Testability refers to the ability to verify
that the network links are functional
The following are key considerations that can improve noise rejection.
and can pass tests indicating that
• Separation distance from conductors
they meet the intended category or
• Cable balance
performance margin targets. A best
• Connector selection
practice recommendation is to install
• Maintain proper bend radius
patching locations in the control panel
• Avoid over tightened cable ties
so that these critical links can be tested
• STP use where possible
after installation and on periodic basis to
• Shielding bonding for STP
insure performance. The identification of
• Good motor cable bonding practice
cables, ports, devices, and panels are key
• Exceed standard connector and cabling specs
for maintainability. The identification aids in
cross-referencing to documentation and in
Media and Connector Selection: Copper Cabling interpreting/documenting test results.
Fiber inherently provides noise immunity
and supports longer runs than copper media. As control panels grow more sophisticated
Internal to the control panel, more devices network-wise and may require collabor-
are supporting direct fiber connectivity. ation from controls and IT people during
PANDUIT offers modular pre-tested patch troubleshooting and commissioning,
cords that can transition for legacy fiber it’s important to not lose sight of safety.
cable that may already be in your control Control panels can house dangerous
panel area. For example, patch cords and voltages and arc flash hazards that
surface mount boxes that would allow endanger life and limb. NFPA and OSHA
transitioning from SC to LC connectors regulations require that only qualified electricians are allowed
required for the Stratix switch interface. access to the control panel due to these extreme hazards. An
important safety tool in minimizing this risk is a data access port
Pre-polished termination solutions and application tools that provides safe access to a network port and utility outlet without
provide the ability to terminate fiber in the field without opening the control panel. Due to the dynamic nature of control
adhesive or polishing using an easy to use tool that provides panel devices and network connectivity that changes over time, a
visual indication that a quality termination was made. data access port that is modular and can be field upgraded offers
Electricians can be easily trained to install fiber rather than advantages in preserving its utility and safety function.
relying on outside specialists.
Use of Design Tools
Using reference designs and design tools can greatly aid

the control panel designer to conform to best practices to
achieve desired system life cycle cost savings. Reference
designs can include preferred arrangements for devices
PLCs, drives, power supplies, filters as well as for the critical
physical infrastructure of the control panel. The guidance
for a ‘defense in depth’ for noise mitigation is spelled out in
these reference designs where the control vendor shows
recommendations for the critical bonding, grounding
scheme for the system. These reference designs detail how
to lay out clean and dirty wireways in the control panel to
avoid noise coupling by providing recommended spacing
between different classes of conductors. There are also
recommendations for shielded cable practice as well as filter
location and wiring guidance.
Templates and Design tool area Related Standards, Information

Noise mitigation layout IEEE 1100 Chapter 10
Rockwell Automation GMC-RM001_-en-p.pdf
Industrial network practice ODVA PUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guide.pdf
ODVA PUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manual.pdf
Panel Layout UL508A Industrial control panels
Design tools http://www.bentley.com/en-US/Products/promise/Product-Resources.htm
Reference designs for industrial networking layer practice Network Schematic Analysis
in control panels are also available to provide examples of Industrial Ethernet implementations can leverage off of the
best practice recommendations for an industrial Ethernet experience of traditional office Ethernet by partnering with
layer designed for performance, testability, reliability and IT. This leads to an opportunity to apply best practices from
maintainability (see Figure 2.8-4). Cisco and Rockwell have the IT world in conjunction with process control system
provided design guides as well as organizations such as ODVA. knowledge. The ideal is a partnering between IT and
Design tools such as Bentley’s promisE provide control controls groups. One approach is development of ‘hybrid’
panel design tools with the ability for the user to develop IT and engineering resources with skills to be able to
their own template referencing the best practices for their make key decisions on network architectures and physical
industry and vendor list. This layout tool includes 3 D infrastructure component selection. The ‘hybrid’ resource
images of devices along with ability to layout wireways and can come from either the IT or control groups. One of the
cable routing. Thus you can leverage template designs that primary tasks is to review a schematic layout of the network
include all factors for good noise mitigation. distribution to ensure security, performance and testability for
each layer of the design.
Routing sensitive & noisy cables Routing very noisy cables
Figure 2.8-4. Examples of Reference Designs (IEEE 1100 Emerald Book)
Physical Security This Guide provides a reference schematic layout for

Physical security can prevent unauthorized devices from a control showing a typical topology with callouts that
being plugged into a critical network risking a control show where physical security for ports can be applied,
disruption and downtime. Lock-in products can keep where performance decisions on media and connectivity
connectors plugged into a PAC or other device unless need to be made, and where its recommended to install
removed by an authorized user with a special tool. Blockout patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For
products conversely can keep open ports from a switch from industries where redundant networks are common as well
being connected to unless the blockout device is removed as possibilities for sub networks from several vendors, it is
with a special key (see Figure 2.8-5). Keyed copper or fiber crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid
solutions can prevent different network classes or segments configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during
from being inadvertently crossed. Uplink ports can be keyed startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber
differently than links to devices for example. Color coding and copper media that can perform over the distances and
can assist in making network ports for various segments environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse
more readily identifiable and keying. pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well
as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber
Network Schematic Analysis and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high
Network schematics are important tools for control engineers performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks
and IT personnel to review the physical infrastructure design associated with installation and long term performance. A
and component selection. By reviewing the copper and fiber careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the
channels implemented in the zone cabling enclosure, the network distribution meets performance targets before
locations where testability, performance and security are critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as
concerns can be highlighted and addressed. well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance
to avoid loss of control during operation.
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 PAage 2-61
Figure 2.8-5. Example Blockout Device to Support Network Security Initiatives at Control Panel Locations
End-to-End Solution space for installing the Stratix switch and networking with
In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for proper bend radius, identification, and patching for testability
the physical infrastructure for the control panel needs to of links. A Data Access Port is critical for safe access to the
be made to deliver on goals for high availability, security internal networks internal to the panel.
and performance. Use of reference architectures that 3. Detail Design
leverage best practice approaches for noise mitigation, Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a
space optimization, grounding/bonding, safety, security, and reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer
industrial network media provide a clear path to control components required to deploy the Ethernet network to the
panel solutions that will support high performance networks control panel. These components include number of patch
and converged architectures. cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and
grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes,
Control Panel Physical Infrastructure cable management tools, and safety and security tools.
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with
deploying a physical infrastructure for a Control Panel. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
1. Logical Design 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
Define the logical architecture governing the layout of identify solutions to address your system needs.
industrial systems and active devices internal to the panel
and how these connect to the cell/area and manufacturing 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
zone. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer Materials and specify your infrastructure.
and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.
2. Physical Design
Map out the physical layout of the panel. This step provides
the opportunity to mitigate noise risks and provide enough
1. Logical Design : Define the Logical Architecture
Fig 2.8-6 Logical Diagram for control panel(s)
2. Map Device Locations to Identify Physical

Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding
Requirements
Fig 2.8-7 Physical Diagram for Control Panel overall layout
Fig. 2.8-8 Physical Diagram for control panel stratix mounting
- EMI noise considerations mitigated with grounding/ bonding

and segregation of cabling to prevent noise coupling
- Surface mount boxes and patching for optimum cable
management for fiber and copper connectivity and testability
- Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and
control patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes or
unauthorized changes.
- Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block
out connectivity
3. Detail Design
Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify
Fig 2.8-9 Network Detail diagram of control panel
4. The Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and

Zone Area Physi- Control Panel Panduit Solution

cal Infrastructure Issues
Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2)
Control panels Security: Control Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide
of ports means to segregate critical systems
Performance: Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/bonding, cable segrega-

Noise issues tion and separation to reduce risks
Performance: Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity.
Throughput, Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk
Latency
Testability: Verify Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-
during startup, tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks
preventative
maintenance
Reliability: Power Superior termination with Panduit terminals.
Safe access to Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity
networks without
exposing to shock,
arc flash
Arc Flash, Voltage Warning labels, lock out solutions

hazards identified
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 page 2-67
5. the Recommended Solution Component List of

Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet boxes

PUR6004BU-UY High Performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable.
PSR6004BU-UGY Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-Pair U/FTP shielded copper cable.
CBXD6BL-AY Surface mount termination box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Dimensions: 1.04”H x 4.95”W x
3.79”L (26.42mm x 125.73mm x 96.27mm)
CJ688TG* Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module
CJS688TGY Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black jack module with integral shield
UTPSP1MY 1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end
STP6X1MIG 1m Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP Patch Cord with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on each end
Optional Keyed Jack Module Keyed Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module
CJK688TG*
Optional Keyed Patch Cord for Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch cords
use with Keyed Jack Module contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.
UTPKSP*^
IAEBH6 Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. UTP type.
IAEBH6S Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. STP type.
IAEBHC6 Category 6, RJ45 bulkhead coupler, IP67/IP65 rated.
(Required for higher MICE levels.)
Fiber Optic Parts

FÊ10-10M*Y Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths)
CMDJAQLCZBL Fiber Optic adapter module, supplied with one LC Sr/Jr 10G fiber optic adapter.
CBXÎW-AY MiniCom® Surface Mount Box
IAEF7JMA Industrial LC fiber optic bulkhead adapter
IAEF617P-7PM1* Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to LC patch cord
IAEF617P-NM1** Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to pigtail
F^^MC* Opticam Connectors (^^=LC, SC or ST)
Duct Parts
DRD33WH6 PanelMax DIN Rail Wiring Duct (base, cover, rail fasteners),PVC,7.25” x 3.16”X6’,White
DRDWR3-X 3” wire retainer for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.
DRDCS-X 3” corner transition strip for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.
CWD3WH6 PanelMax Corner Wiring Duct Base,PVC,4.40” x 3.57”,White (use with C2WH6 cover)
C2WH6 Duct Cover, PVC, 2”W X 6’, White
F1X3WH6 Narrow slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,White
F1X3LG6 Narrow slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,White
C1LG6 Duct Cover, PVC, 1”W X 6’, White
F2X3LG6 Narrow slotted duct,PVC,2”X3”X6’,White
C2LG6 Duct Cover, PVC, 2”W X 6’, White
F3X3WH6 Narrow slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,White
F3X3LG6 Narrow slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,LGray
C3LG6 Duct Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Lgray
G1X3BL6 Slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,Black
C1BL6 Duct Cover, PVC, 1”W X 6’, Black
G3X3BL6 Slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,Black
C3BL6 Duct Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Black
SD3HWH6 Slotted Duct Divider Wall, PVC, 3”H X 6’, White
SD4HWH6 Slotted Duct Divider Wall, PVC, 4”H X 6’, White (for use with CWD3WH6)
DB-C Duct Divider Wall Mounting Base, PC
NR1 Duct Nylon Push Rivet For Mounting
CSPC3LG-Q 1” bend radius corner strip pre-cut for 3” wall height
FWR-C Duct Wire Retainer/Label, Type F or CWD
WR3-X Duct Wire Retainer, Type G or H, 3”
FL25X25LG-A Slotted Flexible Duct, Polypropylene,25X25X500mm,LG,Adh.
Cable Ties
PLT1M-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1” Bundle, Natural, miniature
PLT1.5M-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1.5” Bundle, Natural, miniature
PLT1.5I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1.5” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate
PLT2I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate
PLT3I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 3” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate
PLT2S-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural, Standard
PLC2S-S10-M Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural Clamp tie, Standard
PLC2S-S10-M30 Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, Clamp tie, Standard
PLT1M-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon,1” Bundle, Black, miniature
PLT2S-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 2” Bundle, Black, Standard
PLT4S-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 4” Bundle, Black, Standard
PLM2S-M Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Nylon, 2” Bundle, Natural Marker Tie
PLM2S-M30 Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 2” Bundle, Black Marker Tie
PFX-0 Marking Pen
PLWP1M-C Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon, 1” bundle, Natural, Wing mount, Miniature
PLWP2S-C Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon, 2” Bundle, Natural, Wing mount, Standard
PLWP1M-D30 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 1” bundle, Black, Wing mount, Miniature
PLWP2S-D30 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 2” Bundle, Black, Wing mount, Standard
PLT2S-M702Y Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 2” Bundle, Standard
PLT3S-M702Y Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 3” Bundle, Standard
GTS Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-SM,M,I,S
GTH Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-S,HS,LH,H
PTH Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic Install-S,HS,LH,H
PLT1M-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLT1.5I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLT2I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLT3I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLT2S-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLWP1M-D0 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLWP2S-C0 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon
PLT1M-C186 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene
PLT2S-C186 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene
Abrasion Protection/Mounting Products

CH105-A-C14 Cable Holder
CSH-D20 Cable Spacers
JP131W-L20 J-PRO™ Cable Support System
MTP3S-E6-C Standard Multiple Tie Plates
MTP4H-E10-C Heavy-Duty Multiple Tie Plates
PUM-071-2S-D30 Push Mount Assemblies
PUM100-D30 Push Mounts with Umbrellas
PW75F-C20 PAN-WRAP™ Split Harness Wrap
SE75P-CR0 Braided Sleeving
T50F-C Spiral Wrap
TA1S10-C Tie Anchor Mounts
TM3S8-C Cable Tie Mounts
TM3-X2-C0Y Swivel Mounts
ABDCM30-A-C Dynamic Cable Manager
ABM112-A-C Adhesive Backed Mounts
ABMQS-A-Q Multiple Bridge Adhesive Backed Mounts
ACC38-A-C Adhesive Cord Clip
BEC62-A-L Beveled Edge Clip
CPM87S-C Control Panel Mounts
LC5-A-C8 Adhesive Backed Latching Clips
LWC50-A-L Latching Wire Clip
MACC62-A-C Metal Adhesive Cord Clip
VCC25-A-C Vertical Cord Clip
HSTT50-C Heat Shrink Thin Wall
HSTT4A47-48-Q Heat Shrink (4:1)
T50F-C Spiral Wrap
MP250-C Marker Plates
Grounding/Bonding Parts
RGRB19U Grounding Busbar, 19”, tin plated, 20 mounting holes with #12-24 x 1/2” screws. For
terminating Ground wires from various components
PV*-14RX Ring Terminal, 1/4” stud hole, * PV14 to PV6 - 16awg-6awg. For terminating Ground
wires from various components. Other sizes and styles available
BS10**45U Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole
terminals, 3/8” bolt hole. For bonding multiple sub-panels together and other equipment.
** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches
BS10**45 Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole
terminals, 3/8” bolt hole, green/yellow insulation. For bonding of doors to enclosures and
where abrasion protection is required. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches.
RGW-100-1Y 3/8” bolt hole, Paint Piercing Grounding Washers, pack of 100. For bonding sub-panels
to enclosures at the mounting studs.
RGTBSG-C Green Bonding Screws, #12-24 x 1/2”, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted
flanges to sub-panels.
RGTBSM6G-C Green Bonding Screws, M6 x 15mm, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges
to sub-panels.
TRBSK Bonding Stud Kit, #12-24 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to sub-
panels, on-machine applications
TRBSM6K Bonding Stud Kit, M6 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to sub-
BGN-C Bonding Nuts, #12-24, box of 100. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-
machine applications
BGNM6-C Bonding Nuts, M6. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-machine
applications
RGTS-CY Thread Forming Screw, #12-24 x 1/2”
RGTSM6-C Thread Forming Screw, M6 x 12mm
PVS0305W2102Y Arc Flash Label, 3”x5”
PVS0305W2201Y Short Circuit Current Rating Label, 3”x5”
PSL-CBNT “No” Tool Circuit Breaker Lockout Device
PSL-P Individual Plug Lockout Device
PSL-WS Toggle Switch Lockout Device
PSL-4RED XENOY™ plastic body padlock with steel shackle
PSL-1 Lockout Hasp with 1” diameter jaw and overlapping tabs
PVT-41 “DO NOT OPERATE” Lockout/Tagout tag with cable tie
Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items shown only

C061X030FJC Printable Label for Single Port Identification
C100X000VUC-BK Printable Label for Duct Identification
Section 2.9: On-Machine Area
architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell and

2.9 On-Machine Area
Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition to this
reference architecture level, the physical layer reference
architecture is also crucial. The physical layer architecture
refers to the infrastructure required to achieve the connectivity
considering data throughput, environment, wiring distances,
and availability. A structured, engineered approach is essential
for the physical layer to ensure that investments in network
distribution deliver optimum output. The On-Machine
Device level networks typically utilize M12 connectivity rather
than RJ45 connectivity because of the need for improved
ruggedness. Rockwell Automation provides design tools in
Integrated Architecture Builder for layout of the network and
creating a bill of material for these M12 network connections
and related modular power solutions.
Physical Layout Considerations

The term “On-Machine” refers to automation components
Key engineering considerations when designing the physical
installed directly to the equipment so they are distributed
layer for network distribution for an On-Machine application
across a machine or process rather than in a protected
include environmental analysis and machine or process
control panel. Mounting control devices on machinery or
layout. Understanding the size of the operation, plant layout,
process equipment rather than in a panel offers many
harsh conditions, plant expansion potential, and network
advantages compared to mounting in a control panel. However,
topologies will help establish the physical layer infrastructure
it also requires devices and cabling systems that can take
requirements. Zone cabling architectures and enclosures
the environment as well as special considerations for wire
(see Section 2.7 of this Guide) can provide means to cost
management, identification, and maintainability. The
effectively and agilely distribute cabling for a wide area
advantages include enclosure cost savings, installation time
‘on-machine’ application like a process plant. The physical
savings, and less specialized expertise in wiring required.
layout of the machine will suggest locations for pathways
and ‘on-machine’ device mounting panels. Cable routing,
However, exposure to the machine/process environment
slack management and abrasion protection are important
typically means that there are more issues with dust, moisture,
considerations for on machine cabling that should be
shock, temperature, etc. than in a protected control enclosure.
considered once the machine layout is analyzed.
Thus, devices need to be sealed and ruggedized as do their
network and power connections. As there are many devices
Cables may be exposed to harsh environments such as
and cables consolidating on a machine, there are new
extreme weather or vibration. Insulation and abrasion protection
requirements for wire management and abrasion protection
products shield cables such as spiral wrap or heat shrink
as well as rugged identification that will ensure that the on
tubing. Securing cabling may require weather resistant cable
machine cabling and devices can be installed and maintained
ties and in extreme cases rugged stainless steel wire man-
efficiently. An analysis of the MICE levels (mechanical,
agement products. Food processing lines may require metal
Ingress, Climatic/Chemical and Electromagnetic conditions)
detectable wire management products for food safety.
will allow for selecting media, connectivity, and wire manage-
ment that performs reliably long term.
Network Schematic Analysis
This section provides a reference schematic layout showing
Reference Architectures
a typical On-Machine topology with callouts that show where
Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference
physical security for ports can be applied, where perfor-
architectures that meet the specialized needs for network
mance decisions on media and connectivity need to
distribution to deliver process automation excellence. These
be made, and where its recommended to install patching 2. Physical Design

for testability of critical fiber or copper links. Selection of Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, enclosures,
appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over rack systems and control panels. The following diagram shows
the distances and environmental factors is key for robust recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.
operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across
the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone
Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point,
for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces and security considerations.
risks associated with installation and long term performance.
A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the 3. Detail Design
network distribution meets performance targets before critical Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a
startups of equipment - where delays can be costly - as well reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer
as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to components required to deploy Ethernet network. These
avoid loss of control during operation. components include number of patch cords and horizontal
links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements,
End-to-End Solution labeling and identification schemes, cable management
In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the tools, and safety and security tools.
physical infrastructure for control room out to field devices
will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and For On-Machine applications it is important to leverage
performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage Rockwell Automation’s Integrated Architecture Builder tool
best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control for developing the machine connectivity bill of material for
room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, On-Machine devices, power cables, device cables and
control panels and on machine wiring will result in automa- associated M12 Ethernet cabling. PANDUIT physical infra-
tion systems that enable the full benefit of the investments structure solutions are available to implement the higher
made. This guide provides information on selecting, level zone or control panel architectures as well as products
installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical to help secure, protect, manage, and identify the wiring
infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. mounted on the machinery.
On-Machine Physical Infrastructure NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with
deploying a physical infrastructure for an On-Machine 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
distributed system. identify solutions to address your system needs.
1. Logical Design 5. Review the recommended solution component List of

Define the logical architecture governing the layout of in- Materials and specify your infrastructure.
dustrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture
should be based on logical layer reference architectures
developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as
on applicable topology diagrams.
1. Logical Design
Define the Logical Architecture .
Fig 2.9-1. Logical diagrams for On Machine distributed networking
2. Physical Design
Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements.
Consider locations to Identify, manage, secure and
protect the network and associated On-Machine cabling.
Fig 2.9-2. Physical Diagram of On-Machine network
• On-Machine wire management for slack management and

protecting cabling.
• Identification products should be applied to device and

network cabling
• Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to

communication disruptions
• Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock-in and blockout

connectivity in zone cabling enclosures and control panels
that connect to the On-Machine wiring
3. Detail Design
4. Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify

Fig 2.9-3. Network Detail design for On Machine distributed network
5. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram

and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs.
Zone Area Physical Zone Issues Panduit Solution

Infrastructure
On Machine Security: Control of ports Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity
solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems
Performance: ESD, Noise issues Bond machine sections and control panel systems for low
impedance ground plane.
Reliability: Mitigate failures due to Abrasion protection to prevent cable damage
vibration and motion
Maintainability Identification and wire management products that improve
ability to change, modify, debug
Performance: Throughput, Latency Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper
and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long
term performance reducing risk
Testability: Verify during startup, Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical exter-
preventative maintenance nal connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords
to mitigate risks
Deploying wireless access points Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures de-
securely without expensive power signed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna sys-
runs tems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Mixture of Office and IE network in Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks
zone cabling enclosures inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections
in switches or patching to control who can make changes
Maintainability: Dynamic production Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute
floor - equipment relocation, addi- cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and
tions, expansions, removal identification products. Expandable, high density patch
panels
Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified Warning labels, lock out solutions

Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet boxes

IAEBH6 Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. UTP type.
IAEBH6S Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. STP type.
IAEBHC6 Category 6, RJ45 bulkhead coupler, IP67/IP65 rated.
CM6PIW MuTOA 6-port outlet box for Mini-Com modules
Required for higher MICE levels
IndustrialNet Products
IAEBH5E Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover
IAEBH5ES Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover
IEABHC5E Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover
MPI588T Category 5e, RJ45 industrial plug with protective cover
IUTPCH*BLY Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable
with dust caps
with dust caps
Fiber Optic Parts

IAEF7JMA Industrial LC fiber optic bulkhead adapter
IAEF617P-7PM1* Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to LC patch cord
IAEF617P-NM1** Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to pigtail
Fiber Raceway Parts

FRRASC4** FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.
FIDT2X2** Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5” ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.
FR6TRBN58 FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8” Threaded Rod
FR6ALB FIBERRUNNER Adjustable Ladder Rack Bracket
Gridrunner wireway Parts

GRFWC21PG GRIDRUNNER Universal Intersection
GRPBPG GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Bracket
GRCLAMPPG-X GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Clamp
GRBR4PG GRIDRUNNER Bend Radius Control Corner
Duct Parts
DRD33LG6 PanelMax DIN Rail Wiring Duct (base, cover, rail fasteners),PVC,7.25” x 3.16”X6’,White
DRDWR3-X 3” wire retainer for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.
DRDCS-X 3” corner transition strip for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.
H3X3LG6 Hinged Cover Slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,LGray
HC3LG6 Hinged Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Lgray
CSPC3LG-Q 1” bend radius corner strip pre-cut for 3” wall height.
WR3-X Duct Wire Retainer, Type G or H, 3”
Cable Ties
PLT1M-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT1.5M-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT1.5I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT2I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT3I-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT2S-M Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLC2S-S10-M Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLC2S-S10-M30 Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT1M-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6,1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT2S-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT4S-M30 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLM2S-M Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLM2S-M30 Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PFX-0 Marking Pen
PLWP1M-C Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLWP2S-C Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLWP1M-D30 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
(Cable Ties continued next page)

PLWP2S-D30 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT2S-M702Y Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT3S-M702Y Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard
GTS Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-SM,M,I,S
GTH Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-S,HS,LH,H
PTH Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic Install-S,HS,LH,H
PLT1M-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT1.5I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT2I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT3I-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT2S-M0 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLWP1M-D0 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLWP2S-C0 Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT1M-C186 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT2S-C186 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT1M-M109 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT2S-M109 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT4H-TL109 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 4” Bundle Diameter Heavy
PLT1M-M76 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature
PLT2I-M76 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate
PLT2S-M76 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT4S-M76 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard
PLT4H-TL76 Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 4” Bundle Diameter Heavy
Abrasion/Mounting Parts
ABM112-A-C Adhesive Backed Mounts
ABMQS-A-Q Multiple Bridge Adhesive Backed Mounts
ACC38-A-C Adhesive Cord Clip
MACC62-A-C Metal Adhesive Cord Clip
LWC50-A-L Latching Wire Clip
BEC62-A-L Beveled Edge Clip
VCC25-A-C Vertical Cord Clip
HSTT50-C Heat Shrink Thin Wall
HSTT4A47-48-Q Heat Shrink (4:1)
T50F-C Spiral Wrap
CPM87S-C Control Panel Mounts
TM3S8-C Cable Tie Mounts
TA1S10-C Tie Anchor Mounts
PUM100-D30 Push Mounts with Umbrellas
PUM-071-2S-D30 Push Mount Assemblies
Grounding/Bonding
PV*-14RX Ring Terminal, 1/4” stud hole, * PV14 to PV6 - 16awg-6awg. For terminating Ground
wires from various components. Other sizes and styles available up to 1000 Kcmil
BS10**45U Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole
terminals, 3/8” bolt hole. For bonding multiple sub-panels together and other equipment.
** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches
BS10**45 Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole
terminals, 3/8” bolt hole, green/yellow insulation. For bonding of doors to enclosures and
where abrasion protection is required. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches.
RGW-100-1Y 3/8” bolt hole, Paint Piercing Grounding Washers, pack of 100. For bonding sub-panels
to enclosures at the mounting studs.
RGTBSG-C Green Bonding Screws, #12-24 x 1/2”, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted
flanges to sub-panels.
RGTBSM6G-C Green Bonding Screws, M6 x 15mm, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges
to sub-panels.
TRBSK Bonding Stud Kit, #12-24 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to sub-
TRBSM6K Bonding Stud Kit, M6 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to sub-pan-
els, on-machine applications
BGN-C Bonding Nuts, #12-24, box of 100. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-
machine applications
BGNM6-C Bonding Nuts, M6. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-machine applica-
tions
RGTS-CY Thread Forming Screw, #12-24 x 1/2”
RGTSM6-C Thread Forming Screw, M6 x 12mm
PVS0305W2102Y Arc Flash Label, 3”x5”
PVS0305W2201Y Short Circuit Current Rating Label, 3”x5”
PSL-CBNT “No” Tool Circuit Breaker Lockout Device
PSL-P Individual Plug Lockout Device
PSL-WS Toggle Switch Lockout Device
PSL-4RED XENOY™ plastic body padlock with steel shackle
PSL-1 Lockout Hasp with 1” diameter jaw and overlapping tabs
PVT-41 “DO NOT OPERATE” Lockout/Tagout tag with cable tie

H100X044H1C Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification
H100X084H1C Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification
C061X030FJC Printable Label for Single Port Identification
C100X000VUC-BK Printable Label for Duct Identification
M12 Connectivity - From Rockwell Automation
1585D-F4DC-SH Rockwell M12 EtherNet connector, 4 pin straight female, IP67, shielded
1585D-M4DC-SH Rockwell M12 EtherNet connector, 4 pin straight male, IP67, shielded
1585D-D4AC9-0M5 Rockwell M12 Ethernet receptacle, 4 pin female, IP67 with M16 x1.5 threads
1585D-DD4JD Rockwell Female M12 receptacle to right angle RJ-45 receptacle, Pg 9 threads
Required for higher MICE levels
Section 2.10: Process Plant Application
2.10 Process Plant Application
Process industries continue to show dynamic growth by industrial Ethernet network infrastructure. Key issues for
leveraging technology advancements for greater efficiency, process industries include high availability, security, perfor-
productivity, and safety in global deployments. Process mance, and maintainability.
plant control systems are now integrated solutions that lever-
age the capabilities that today’s computing and networking Reference Architectures
capabilities can bring to their operations. Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference
architectures that meet the specialized needs of the process
By replacing outdated analog control loops and labor inten- industry to deliver process automation excellence. These
sive manual steps with advanced process control strategies, architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrange-
fieldbus and asset management systems process plants ment of servers, software, network switches, and control
are realizing higher outputs, greater reliability, and improved level devices that meet the needs for performance and
safety. The successful implementation of these new archi- reliability from software and device levels. However, the
tectures and capabilities creates new dependencies on the area not fully addressed – an area that is critical for the
success of these architectures - is the physical layer. This
refers to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, in conjunction with process control system knowledge. This
secure, and optimize the connectivity and installation of requires partnering between IT and controls groups, de-
the devices in the physical plant. A structured, engineered veloping ‘hybrid’ engineering skills to be able to make key
approach is required for this physical layer to ensure that decisions on network architectures and physical infrastruc-
the investments in control software, controllers, servers, ture component selection. It is recommended that IT and
switches, and fieldbus devices actually startup and perform controls review a schematic layout of the process system’s
at peak output. switches and control devices to make decisions on physical
infrastructure components to ensure security, performance
Physical Layout Considerations and testability for each layer of the design.
To properly engineer the physical layer for a process plant
involves understanding the physical environment require- This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing
ments which includes size of the operation, plant and con- a typical topology with callouts that show where physical se-
trol room layout, environmental considerations, and network curity for ports can be applied, where performance decisions
topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architec- on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s
ture is the control room which requires server and switch recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber
enclosures. The performance and security of the critical or copper links. For process industries where redundant
control applications housed in this room can be optimized by networks are common and also have possibilities for sub-
leveraging best practices from data center rooms concerning networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and
enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes
security, power and thermal considerations. and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance.
Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can
The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone perform over the distances and environmental factors is key
area of the architecture which involves distributing network for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redun-
cabling to motor control centers, distributed valves and dancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be
sensors on fieldbus networks, instrumentation and control considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solu-
cabinets. Wireless use is growing, especially for sensors or tions engineered for high performance exceeding standard
actuators for which wired connectivity is too costly or failure- margins reduces risks associated with installation and long
prone due to harsh environment considerations. The physi- term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points
cal layer design should leverage zone cabling consolidation will insure that the network distribution meets performance
cabinet designs that reduce installation cost and time while targets before critical startups of equipment where delays
promoting improved manageability and flexibility. The media can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventa-
and connectivity selected should have performance that tive maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation.
exceeds TIA standard margin to ensure performance long
term. For connecting field devices in harsh MICE environ- End-to-End Solution
ments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide robust connec- In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the
tivity. Wire management and abrasion protection are key for physical infrastructure for process plants for the entire net-
reliability and maintainability for networks deployed ‘on-ma- work from the control room out to field devices will meet the
chine’ to connect to sensors or actuators in the process. A critical needs for process plants for high availability, secu-
well-engineered grounding/bonding system that mitigates rity and performance. Use of reference architectures that
noise considerations for communications is critical both leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for
for the control room as well as distributed cabinets and I/O control room hardware, network distribution, network con-
networks. nectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result in
process control systems that enable the full benefit of the
Network Schematic Analysis investments made in advanced process control systems.
As the network and computing resource requirements This guide provides information on selecting, installing, test-
become more important to the process control systems, ing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for
there is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world all levels of this architecture.
Process Plant Physical Infrastructure 3. Detail Design

This section defines the sequence of actions involved with Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a refer-
deploying a physical infrastructure to support Process Plant ence diagram) to identify the exact physical layer compo-
applications. nents required to deploy Ethernet network. These compo-
nents include number of patch cords and horizontal links,
1. Logical Design patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling
Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Pro- and identification schemes, cable management tools, and
cess Plant industrial systems and active devices. The logical safety and security tools.
architecture should be based on logical layer reference
architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for
as well as on applicable topology diagrams. physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of
Process Plant areas, in order for the network and industrial
2. Physical Design systems to withstand the identified range of environments
Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, con- throughout the industrial facility.
trol room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network
structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram
shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
identify solutions to address your system needs.
cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
and security considerations. Materials and specify your infrastructure.
1. Logical Design
Fig 2.10-1. Logical Diagram for Process plant network
1. Physical Design
Process Plant Physical

Infrastructure Reference
Architecture for Process Plants
• Zone architecture leveraging Fiber

runs to zone enclosures with Stratix
8000 Switches to distribute copper
and fiber to MCCs, control panels,
process instrumentation
• Control panels with Stratix 8000

switches for PACs, drives, instrumen-
tation both internal to panel and ‘on
machine’
• MCC enclosures with Stratix 8000

switches for internal networking
Wireless access point(s) driven from
zone enclosures with POE for
wireless networks
Fig 2.10-2. Physical Diagram for Process plant network infrastructure
• Coordinated grounding and bonding
to mitigate risks to communication
disruptions
• Control room featuring best

practices for FactoryTalk serv-
ers, Stratix switches, Cisco Level 3
switches, firewalls.
• Enhanced security with keyed jacks,

lock in and block out connectivity
3. Detail Design
Fig 2.10-3 Detail of Process Plant network
4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram


Infrastructure
Enterprise Data Futureproof, High Availability, high Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions
Center connectivity performance connectivity
DMZ
Shared enclosure, Security: Control and Management Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels
rack areas of connections, patching inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections
Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels
Control room Performance: Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet
Noise issues systems
Performance: Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing
Cable/Connector performance guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that
exceeds standards
Performance: Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that
Thermal management efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches
improving robustness
High Availability: Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels
Redundant networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections
Maintainability: Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire manage-
Cable management ment and identification products
Network Distribution Large system deployments require Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use
robust communications over long of fiber
distances
Network Cost effective consolidation with Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute ca-
Consolidation Points security and manageability bling with consolidation points
Wireless Deploying wireless access points Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures de-
implementation securely without expensive power signed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna sys-
runs tems and Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute power
Control panels Security: Control of ports Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity
solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems
Performance: Noise issues Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/
bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks
Performance: Throughput, Latency Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper
and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long
Cell Area Zone (Continued)

Infrastructure
Testability: Verify during startup, Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical exter-
preventative maintenance nal connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords
to mitigate risks
Maintainability Identification and wire management products that improve
ability to change, modify, debug
On-Machine Performance; ESD, Noise Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions
Maintainability
Safety Zone
Control Panel, Safe access to networks without Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular
On-Machine exposing to shock, arc flash connectivity
Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified Warning labels, lock out solutions
Security: Network connectivity Color coded, keyed jacks
5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List

of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure:
Solution Area Products Detailed Parts List

Control Room Racks Section 2.5
Enclosures Pages 2-19 to 2-32
Security
Connectivity
Grounding/Bonding
Pathways
Network Distribution Fiber Cable Section 2.6
Copper Cable Pages 2-33 to 2-43
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Zone Cabling Enclosures Section 2.7
Connectivity Pages 2-44 to 2-55
Cable Management
Security
Grounding/Bonding
Control Panel Connectivity Section 2.8
Cable Management Pages 2-56 to 2-73
Safety
Abrasion protection
Grounding/Bonding
On-Machine Connectivity Section 2.9
Abrasion protection Pages 2-74 to 2-85
Cable management
Safety
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Section 2.11: SCADA Application
2.11 SCADA Application
SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) rooms, and networking components are fielded present
applications are critical to many process applications including challenges for the physical infrastructure in regards to
oil/gas, water treatment, wind farms, solar, and many others. environmental ratings, cabling distances, wireless coverage
SCADA applications are characterized by control panels as well as requirements for high security, high availability,
distributed across a wide area linked by fiber optic cables and manageability.
or increasingly through wireless networks. Ethernet/IP
communications as well as embedded web servers provide Reference Architectures
access to the data, configuration, and control enabled by Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference
these remote systems. SCADA control panel data is then architectures that address the form factors, cost consider-
consolidated and converged with other on-site or off-site ations, security, and network topologies required for today’s
process data in a control room where servers and higher SCADA systems. These architectures describe the strategy
level switches are housed. These control rooms are some- for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network
times also deployed in harsh environments as a prefabri- switches, and SCADA RTU systems. However, the area
cated e-building wired off-site and then deployed in the field. not fully addressed that is critical for the success of these
The outdoor environments that the control panels, control architectures is the physical layer. This refers to the infrastructure
required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the con- tion with process control system knowledge. This requires
nectivity and installation of the networks, panels and control partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hy-
rooms required for these data collection and control systems. brid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on
A structured, engineered approach is required for this physi- network architectures and physical infrastructure component
cal layer to ensure that the investments in control software, selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review
controllers, servers, switches, and RTU devices actually a schematic layout of the SCADA system’s switches and
startup and perform at peak output. control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure
components to ensure security, performance and testability
Physical Layout Considerations for each layer of the design. With the growing use of wire-
To properly engineer the physical layer for a SCADA instal- less for SCADA systems, it important to engineer a robust
lation involves understanding the physical environment wireless access system by performing site surveys and
requirements including scale of the operation, control room leveraging vendor guidance.
layout, environmental considerations, and RTU network to-
pologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architecture This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing
for a SCADA operation is the control room which requires a typical topology with callouts that show where physical se-
server and switch enclosures. The performance and secu- curity for ports can be applied, where performance decisions
rity of the critical control applications housed in this room on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s
can be optimized by leveraging best practices from data recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber
center rooms concerning enclosures, wire management, or copper links. For SCADA where redundant networks are
grounding/bonding, physical security, power and thermal common and also have need for wireless access, it’s crucial
considerations. to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configura-
tion mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and
The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper
area of the architecture which involves distributing network media that can perform over the distances and environ-
cabling and wireless connectivity to the typically widely dis- mental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway
tributed RTU systems. For high availability, redundant fiber planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in
rings are often employed which require consideration for me- control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and cop-
dia selection for the distances and environments involved as per connectivity solutions engineered for high performance
well as physical security concerns. Distributed enclosures exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with
for fiber distribution and consolidation may also be employed installation and long term performance. A careful plan for
in certain architectures for cost-effective cabling to clusters deploying test points will insure that the network distribution
of RTU panels. The media and connectivity selected should meets performance targets before critical startups of equip-
have performance that exceeds TIA standard margin to ment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic
ensure performance long term. For connecting field devices basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of
in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets control during operation. Power over Ethernet approaches
provide robust connectivity. Wire management and abra- for wireless access points should be considered to minimize
sion protection are key for reliability and maintainability for deployment costs and to provide robust coverage.
networks deployed ‘on-machine’ to connect to sensors or
actuators in these harsh environment areas. A well-engi- End-to-End Solution
neered grounding/bonding system that mitigates noise con- In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the
siderations for communications is critical, both for the control physical infrastructure for SCADA operations for the entire
room and distributed cabinets and I/O networks. network from the control room out to RTU and field devices
will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and
Network Schematic Analysis performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage
As the network and computing resource requirements best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control
become more important to the SCADA systems, there is a room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity,
need to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunc- wireless distribution, RTU control panels and field device
wiring will result in SCADA operations that are more intelli- 3. Detail Design
gent and robust. This guide provides information on select- Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a refer-
ing, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical ence diagram) to identify the exact physical layer compo-
infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. nents required to deploy Ethernet network. These compo-
nents include number of patch cords and horizontal links,
SCADA Plant Physical Infrastructure patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with and identification schemes, cable management tools, and
deploying a physical infrastructure to support SCADA plant safety and security tools.
applications.
This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for
1. Logical Design physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of
Define the logical architecture governing the layout of the Process Plant areas, in order for the network and industrial
SCADA system. The logical architecture should be based on systems to withstand the identified range of environments
logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell throughout the industrial facility.
Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology
diagrams. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
2. Network Design 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, con- identify solutions to address your system needs.
trol room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network
structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram Materials and specify your infrastructure.
shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.

1. Logical Design
Fig 2.11-1. Logical Diagram for SCADA network
2. Physical Design
• E-building remote control rooms

leverage best practice grounding/
bonding and wire management for
FactoryTalk servers, Stratix
switches, Cisco Level 3 switches,
firewalls.
• Fiber ring connectivity from E-build-

ing to remote RTU. Use single
mode for long distance runs and
multimode fiber for shorter runs (see
table in section IV_
• SCADA RTU Control panels with

Stratix switches for PACs, drives,
instrumentation leverage fiber
connectivity
• Wireless access point(s) driven

from E-building with POE for
wireless networks
• Coordinated grounding and bond-

ing to mitigate risks to communica-
tion disruptions
Fig 2.11-2. Physical Diagram for SCADA network • Control room featuring best
practices for FactoryTalk
servers, Stratix switches, Cisco
Level 3 switches, firewalls.
• Enhanced security with keyed jacks,

lock in and block out connectivity
3. Develop Network
Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical
Infrastructure Components
Fig 2.11-3. Detail Diagram for SCADA network

physical infrastructure

Zone Area Physical SCADA Issues Panduit Solution

Infrastructure
Enterprise Data Center Future-proof, High Avail- Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions
connectivity ability, high performance
connectivity
DMZ
Shared enclosure, rack Security: Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels
areas Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in
connections, patching switches or patching to control who can make changes
Control Room Performance: Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet
Cable/Connector guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that
performance exceeds standards
Redundant networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in
switches or patching to control who can make changes
Cable management ment and identification products. PanView infrastructure
management
Mixture of Office and Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks
IE network inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in
Wireless implementation Deploying wireless access Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed
points securely without for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and
expensive power runs Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute power

Network Distribution Large system deployments Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use
require robust communica- of fiber
tions over long distances
Reliability: Impact of ex- Stainless and weather resistant wire management prod-
treme weather conditions or ucts. Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abra-
harsh environment sion products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)
Troubleshoot: Loss of PanView infrastructure management
network
expensive power runs Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Network Consolidation Cost effective consolidation Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute ca-
Points with security and manage- bling with consolidation points
ability
Control panels Security: Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity
Control of ports solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems
Performance: Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/
Noise issues bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks
Performance: Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper
Throughput, Latency and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long
Testability: Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical exter-
Verify during startup, nal connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to
preventative maintenance mitigate risks
Troubleshoot: PanView infrastructure management
Loss of network
Reliability: Stainless and weather resistant wire management products.
Impact of extreme weather Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abrasion
conditions or harsh environment products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)
On Machine Performance: ESD, Noise Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions
Reliability: Mitigate failures Abrasion and insulation protection to prevent severed
due to vibration and motion wires.
Reliability: Impact of ex- Stainless and weather resistant wire management products.
treme weather conditions or Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abrasion
harsh environment products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)
Safety Zone
Control Panel, On Machine Safe access to networks Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular con-
without exposing to shock, nectivity
arc flash
Arc Flash, Voltage hazards Warning labels, lock out solutions
identified
Security: Network connectivity Color coded, keyed jacks

of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure:

Security
Connectivity
Grounding/Bonding
Pathways
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Cable Management
Security
Grounding/Bonding
Safety
Abrasion protection
Grounding/Bonding
Cable management
Safety
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application
2.12 Discrete Manufacturing Application
Discrete Manufacturing refers to manufacturing operations increased regulatory and security requirements also are
that create products from a bill of materials from a sequence factors driving changes in automation deployments. The
of automated and manual steps rather than in a raw mate- rapid growth of Ethernet connectivity is making all this
rial flow as in a process plant. The automation required for connected manufacturing automation possible but is fraught
typical discrete manufacturing operations involves motion with problems if unsophisticated users attempt to ‘plug ‘n
control using servo and VFD drives, PAC controllers, pneu- play’ into existing networks with low cost, unmanaged
matics, robotics, vision systems, sensors, and other process- switches and cheap patch cords. Performance problems,
ing elements. startup delays, and production outages can occur from
networking infrastructure not specified or installed to meet
Today’s manufacturers are under pressure as never before the application requirements, environmental and security
to be globally competitive, which means configuring lean challenges of the manufacturing space.
operations that have world-class efficiency, quality and agility.
These needs are driving use of MES applications to link the The discrete manufacturing automation system now requires
ERP to the factory floor to provide visibility and automatic multiple levels of physical infrastructure for networked con-
setup of equipment. Global manufacturing operations and nectivity that spans different environments and cuts across
knowledge domains of control engineers and IT support staff. mistake proof can provide important benefits. Distributed
This infrastructure includes control rooms that resemble (i.e., zone cabling) enclosures for fiber or copper distribution
IT data centers with racks or enclosures housing multiple and consolidation should also be employed for cost-effective
servers, switches, patching and other devices. Networking cabling to cell/areas where control panels housing Stratix
needs to be distributed to cell/area zones in an efficient man- switches may be located.
ner that promotes high availability, maintainability, security,
and flexibility. Control panels and on-machine cabling The media and connectivity selected should have perfor-
systems need to be engineered to promote testability, performance that exceeds TIA standard margin to ensure per-
mance and security of the critical Ethernet communications formance long term. For connecting field devices in harsh
that enable automation systems to function. MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide
robust connectivity. Wire management and abrasion protec-
Reference Architectures tion are key for reliability and maintainability for networks
Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference deployed ‘on-machine’ to connect to sensors or actuators
architectures that address the form factors, cost consider- in harsh environment areas or when subjected to repetitive
ations, security, and network topologies required for today’s motion. A well-engineered grounding/bonding system that
discrete manufacturing operations. These architectures de- mitigates noise considerations for communications is critical,
scribe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, both for the control room as well as distributed cabinets and
software, network switches, and control systems. However, I/O networks.
the area not fully addressed that is critical for the success of
these architectures is the physical layer. This refers to the Network Schematic Analysis
infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and opti- As the network and computing resource requirements be-
mize the connectivity and installation of the networks, panels come more important to discrete automation systems, there
and control rooms required for control systems and MES is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world in con-
integration. A structured, engineered approach is required junction with automation system knowledge. This requires
for this physical layer to ensure that the investments in con- partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hy-
trol software, controllers, servers, switches, and on machine brid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on
devices actually startup and perform at peak output. network architectures and physical infrastructure component
selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review
Physical Layout Considerations a schematic layout of the discrete manufacturing system’s
To properly engineer the physical layer for a discrete manu- switches and control devices to make decisions on physical
facturing plant involves understanding the physical environ- infrastructure components to ensure security, performance
ment requirements which includes scale of the operation, and testability for each layer of the design.
control room layout, environmental considerations, and
cell/area topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing
architecture for a discrete plant operation is the control a typical topology with callouts that show where physical se-
room which requires server and switch enclosures. The curity for ports can be applied, where performance decisions
performance and security of the critical control applications on media and connectivity need to be made, and where
housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best it’s recommended to install patching for testability of criti-
practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, cal fiber or copper links. For discrete manufacturing where
wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, office/business networks are commonly deployed in the
power and thermal considerations. same general area as manufacturing networks, it is crucial to
identify and secure the critical control system physical links
The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems dur-
of the architecture, which involves distributing network ca- ing startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber
bling and wireless connectivity to each grouping of machines. and copper media that can perform over the distances and
Business/office networks may be co-located with the criti- environmental factors is key for robust operation.
cal automation networks so means to identify, secure and
Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant 2. Physical Design
as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, con-
fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high trol room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network
performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations,
associated with installation and long term performance. A and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram
careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the net- shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.
work distribution meets performance targets before critical
startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone
on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point,
loss of control during operation. Power Over Ethernet ap- and security considerations.
proaches for wireless access points should be considered to
minimize deployment costs and to provide robust coverage. 3. Detail Design
Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a refer-
End- to-End Solution ence diagram) to identify the exact physical layer compo-
In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the nents required to deploy Ethernet network. These compo-
physical infrastructure for discrete manufacturing opera- nents include number of patch cords and horizontal links,
tions for the entire network from the control room out to patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling
control panels and on-machine devices will meet the critical and identification schemes, cable management tools, and
needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of safety and security tools.
reference architectures that leverage best practice physical
infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, net- This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for
work distribution, network connectivity, wireless distribution, physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of
control panels and field device wiring will result in discrete Discrete Manufacturing areas, in order for the network and
manufacturing operations that are more intelligent and ro- industrial systems to withstand the identified range of envi-
bust. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, ronments throughout the industrial facility.
testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure
for all levels of this architecture. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
Discrete Manufacturing Physical Infrastructure 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with identify solutions to address your system needs.
deploying a physical infrastructure to support Discrete Manu-
facturing Plant layouts. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
Materials and specify your infrastructure.
1. Logical Design
Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Dis-
crete Manufacturing industrial systems and active devices.
The logical architecture should be based on logical layer
1. Logical Design
Define the Logical Architecture .
Fig 2.12-1 Logical Diagram for discrete manufacturing
2. Physical Design
• Control room featuring best practices • Robust cable management to secure

for FactoryTalk servers, Stratix switches, and isolate Ethernet and control ca-
Cisco Level 3 switches, firewalls. bling mounted on machine.
Fig 2.12-2 Physical Diagram for
discrete manufacturing • Control rooms housing enclosures/ • Grounding and bonding to equipment
racks with well engineered ground/ to mitigate risks to communication
bonding, power and thermal mgt. disruptions
• Zone cabling approach to distribute ca- • Enhanced security with keyed jacks,
bling efficiently to the machine/area/zone. lock-in and blockout connectivity
3. Detail Design
Fig. 2.12-3 Detail diagram for discrete manufacturing network physical infrastructure


Infrastructure
connectivity
DMZ
areas Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections
connections, patching in switches or patching to control who can make changes
management
IE network inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections

network
Numerous network drops to Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire manage-
controllers, HMIs, testers, ment and identification products. PanView infrastructure
printers, scanners, etc. management
Network Consolidation Cost effective consolidation Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute
Points with security and manage- cabling with consolidation points
ability
Wireless implementation Deploying wireless access Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures de-
points securely without signed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna sys-
expensive power runs tems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Safety: Tripping hazard to Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures de-
wire movable equipment signed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna sys-
tems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Control of ports solutions can provide means to segregate critical
systems
Verify during startup, nal connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords
preventative maintenance to mitigate risks
Loss of network
Mixture of Office and IE Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks
network inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in
Maintainability: Dynamic Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute
production floor - equipment cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and
relocation, additions, expan- identification products. Expandable, high density patch
sions, removal panels
On Machine Performance; ESD, Noise Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions
Reliability: Mitigate failures Abrasion protection to prevent severed wires
due to vibration and motion
Maintainability: additional Identification and wire management products that improve
and enhanced devices, ability to change, modify, debug
HMI, printers, etc.

Control Panel, Safe access to networks Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular
On Machine without exposing to shock, connectivity
arc flash
identified
Security: Network connec- Color coded, keyed jacks
tivity

of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure.

Security
Connectivity
Grounding/Bonding
Pathways
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Cable Management
Security
Grounding/Bonding
Safety
Abrasion protection
Grounding/Bonding
Cable management
Safety
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications
2.13 Packaging / Conveying Applications
Packaging and conveying areas of a typical manufacturing systems rely on MCC (Motor Control Centers) and distributed
enterprise feature a unique set of physical infrastructure re- I/O systems for conveying sections controlled by PAC
quirements that bring together aspect of discrete manufactur- systems for coordinated motion. The logistical needs to
ing, process, and business system integration. Packaging is a coordinate these steps are driving use of MES applications
dynamic industry due to the market impact and rapid to link the ERP layer to the factory floor to provide visibility
advancements in materials and strategies for ensuring pack- and automatic setup of equipment.
aging that is secure, green, and that earns consumer preference.
The rapid growth of Ethernet connectivity is making all this
Conveying systems are comprised of conveying sections, bar connected manufacturing automation possible but is fraught
code printers, readers, weigh scales, vision systems, pallet- with problems if unsophisticated users attempt to ‘plug ‘n
izers and other logistics components that allow shipping final play’ into existing networks with low-cost, unmanaged
products efficiently. The automation required for typical pack- switches and cheap patch cords. Performance problems,
aging operations involve motion control using servo and VFD startup delays, and production outages can occur from
drives, PAC controllers, pneumatics, robotics, vision systems, networking infrastructure not specified or installed to meet
sensors, and other processing elements. Conveying the application requirements, environmental and security
challenges of the manufacturing space.
The packaging automation systems and conveying opera- The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area
tions now require multiple levels of physical infrastructure for of the architecture which involves distributing network ca-
networked connectivity that spans different environments and bling and wireless connectivity to each grouping of machines.
cuts across knowledge domains of control engineers and IT Business/office networks may be co-located with the criti-
support staff. This infrastructure includes control rooms that cal automation networks so means to identify, secure and
resemble IT data centers with racks or enclosures housing mistake proof can provide important benefits Distributed
multiple servers, switches, patching and other devices. IT enclosures for fiber or copper distribution and consolidation
closets are replaced with industrial enclosures on the plant should also be employed for cost-effective cabling to cell/
floor. Networking needs to be distributed to cell/area zones in areas where control panels housing Stratix switches may be
an efficient manner that promotes high availability, maintain- located. The media and connectivity selected should have
ability, security, and flexibility. Control panels and on-machine performance that meets or exceeds TIA and ODVA stan-
cabling systems need to be engineered to promote testability, dards to ensure performance long term. For connecting field
performance and security of the critical Ethernet communica- devices in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated
tions that enable automation systems to function. cord sets provide robust connectivity. Wire management and
abrasion protection are key for reliability and maintainability
Reference Architectures for networks deployed on-machine to connect to sensors
Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference or actuators in harsh environment areas or when subjected
architectures that address the form factors, cost consider- to repetitive motion. A well- engineered grounding/bonding
ations, security, and network topologies required for today’s system that mitigates noise considerations for communica-
discrete manufacturing operations. These architectures tions is critical both for the control room as well as distributed
describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, cabinets and I/O networks.
software, network switches, and control systems. However,
the area not fully addressed that is critical for the success of Network Schematic Analysis
these architectures is the physical infrastructure. This refers As the network and computing resource requirements be-
to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and come more important to packaging systems, there is a need
optimize the connectivity and installation of the networks, pan- to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunction
els and control rooms required for control systems and MES with automation system knowledge. This requires partnering
integration. A structured, engineered approach is required for between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hybrid’ engi-
this physical infrastructure to ensure that the investments in neering skills to be able to make key decisions on network
control software, controllers, servers, switches, and on ma- architectures and physical infrastructure component selec-
chine devices actually startup and perform at peak output. tion. It is recommended that IT and controls review a sche-
matic layout of the manufacturing system’s switches and
Physical Layout Considerations control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure
To properly engineer the physical infrastructure for a packag- components to ensure security, performance and testability
ing/conveying operation involves understanding the physical for each layer of the design.
environment requirements including scale of the operation,
control room layout, environmental considerations, and This guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a
cell/area topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone typical topology with callouts that show where physical se-
architecture for a discrete plant operation is the control curity for ports can be applied, where performance decisions
room which requires server and switch enclosures. The on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s
performance and security of the critical control applications recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber
housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best or copper links. For packaging/conveying operations where
practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, office/business networks are commonly deployed in the
wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, same general area as manufacturing networks, it is crucial to
power and thermal considerations. identify and secure the critical control system physical links
to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems dur-
ing startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber
and copper media that can perform over the distances and 2. Physical Design
environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, con-
pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as trol room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network
in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations,
copper connectivity solutions engineered for high perfor- and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram
mance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associ- shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.
ated with installation and long term performance. A careful
plan for deploying test points will ensure that the network This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone
distribution meets performance targets before critical start- cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point,
ups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a and security considerations.
periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss
of control during operation. Power over Ethernet (PoE) ap- 3. Detail Design
proaches for wireless access points should be considered to Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a refer-
minimize deployment costs and to provide robust coverage. ence diagram) to identify the exact physical layer compo-
nents required to deploy Ethernet network. These compo-
End-to-End Solution nents include number of patch cords and horizontal links,
In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling
physical infrastructure for packaging/conveying operations and identification schemes, cable management tools, and
for the entire network from the control room out to control safety and security tools.
panels and ‘on-machine’ devices will meet the critical needs
for high availability, security and performance. Use of This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for
reference architectures that leverage best practice physical physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of
infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, net- Discrete Manufacturing areas, in order for the network and
work distribution, network connectivity, wireless distribution, industrial systems to withstand the identified range of envi-
control panels and field device wiring will result in discrete ronments throughout the industrial facility.
manufacturing operations that are more intelligent and ro-
bust. This Guide provides information on selecting, installing, NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently.
testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure
for all levels of this architecture. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and
identify solutions to address your system needs.
Packaging / Conveying Physical Infrastructure
This section defines the sequence of actions involved with 5. Review the recommended solution component List of
deploying a physical infrastructure to support Packaging/ Materials and specify your infrastructure.
Conveying Plant layouts.
1. Logical Design
Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Pack-
aging and Conveying industrial systems and active devices.
The logical architecture should be based on logical layer
1. Logical Design
Fig 2.13-1: Logical Diagram for Packaging/ Conveying Network
2. Physical Design
Fig. 2.13-2: Physical diagram for packaging/conveying network.
• Zone cabling approach to distribute cabling efficiently to

the machine/area/zone
• Robust cable management to secure and isolate
Ethernet and control cabling mounted on machine on
conveyor sections.
• Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks
to communication disruptions
• Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block
out connectivity
3. Detail Design
Fig. 2.13-3: Detail diagram for Packaging/Conveying physical network infrastructure


Infrastructure
connectivity
DMZ
areas Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections
connections, patching in switches or patching to control who can make changes
management
IE network inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections

network
Numerous network drops to Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire manage-
controllers, HMIs, testers, ment and identification products. PanView infrastructure
printers, scanners, etc. management
Network Consolidation Cost effective consolidation Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute
Points with security and manage- cabling with consolidation points
ability
expensive power runs Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Safety: Tripping hazard to Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed
wire movable equipment for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and
Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power
Control of ports solutions can provide means to segregate critical
systems
Verify during startup, nal connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to
preventative maintenance mitigate risks
Loss of network
Mixture of Office and IE Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks
network inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in
Maintainability: Dynamic Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute
production floor - equipment cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and
relocation, additions, expan- identification products. Expandable, high density patch
sions, removal panels
On Machine Performance; ESD, Noise Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions
Reliability: Mitigate failures Abrasion protection to prevent severed wires
due to vibration and motion
Maintainability: additional Identification and wire management products that improve
and enhanced devices, ability to change, modify, debug
HMI, printers, etc.

Control Panel, Safe access to networks Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular
On Machine without exposing to shock, connectivity
arc flash
identified
Security: Network connec- Color coded, keyed jacks
tivity

of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure.

Security
Connectivity
Grounding/Bonding
Pathways
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Cable Management
Security
Grounding/Bonding
Safety
Abrasion protection
Grounding/Bonding
Cable management
Safety
Pathways
Grounding/Bonding
Section 3
Physical Infrastructure Project Phases
ISO defined an Open System Interconnect 7 Layer reference To properly execute a robust industrial Network Physical
model for networks (see Figure 3.1). The Physical Layer Infrastructure based on Ethernet technology that addresses
which forms the foundation layer for the entire network these considerations requires solid project planning to
specifies the network media (copper, fiber wireless). The ensure that the decisions and actions are made at the
Network Physical Infrastructure includes the entire Physical right time and by the right people. If properly planned and
Layer and adds the entire mechanical infrastructure executed, the result is a robust, high performance Network
necessary to support the Physical Layer and other layers Physical Infrastructure that has enables fast startup of an
that collectively form the network. automation system that performs reliably long term in spite
of environmental issues and that can handle new devices or
The entire Network Physical Infrastructure is often system reconfiguration over time.
relegated to a contractor’s discretion based on outdated
specifications or past practices. To implement a Network This section of this guide makes recommendations on
Physical Infrastructure that supports a Rockwell Automation how to turn a potentially chaotic process into a predictable
and Cisco’s Reference Architectures for Manufacturing, controlled process that can be replicated globally.
more careful consideration must be given to the physical
architecture, component specification, installation practice, The following subsections will introduce:
testing, and documentation. 1. Basic considerations for project phases
2. Best practices and pitfalls to avoid for each phase.
3. Detailed checklist of steps to consider for each phase
and layer of a typical physical infrastructure project.
4. Design tools for those responsible for the major phases
of an industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure project.
APPLICATION
PRESENTATION
SESSION
TRANSPORT
NETWORK
LINK
PHYSICAL
Figure 3.1-1 OSI 7-Layer Model
Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases
100% testing of all connections following Panduit warranty

3.1 Basic Consideration for Project Phases
procedures. All testing is to be documented with copy to
Planning customer and Panduit for warranty records. All cabling must
The planning phase is the most critical phase of the physical be properly labeled with products suitable for long-life in
infrastructure installation process– changes after this stage the environment.
will normally incur additional costs and delays to the project.
A thorough project plan should be composed that identifies Every effort should be made to not deviate from design
tasks, responsibilities, and due dates for the design, without careful consideration of original intent and limitations.
installation, testing and documentation steps. Any changes to the design plan must be updated on CAD
drawings for customer retention. All change orders to
First step is to fully understand the existing system original design should be carefully reviewed so as to avoid in
including field verification of equipment and available ports. future work. As-built drawings and network documentation
Every effort should be made to understand types of traffic should be generated to provide important information for
and limitations of the existing physical infrastructure. The support and maintenance over the lifetime of the system.
reliability of existing system should also be investigated
and quantified.
The scope of the networking required for an automation

system needs to be fully described to formulate an effective
NOTE:
It can not be stressed enough that proper documentation
plan. The scope should include how the network will be
occurs during each phase. Keeping up to date documentation
used, in what type of physical atmosphere, code issues
for the entire network, including prints, mechanical hardware,
related to wiring, quantified amount and types of equipment
devices, IP Addresses and switch configuration is essential to a
on the network including POE, and potential future growth.
successful network installation and operation.
Every effort should be made to reduce disparate systems
operating on separate networks.
Designing
The design stage should include generating a Bill of
Materials, CAD drawings, and firm scope of work for permit
and bid use. When laying out the pathways for network
installation, factor in production/maintenance department
preference, ease of installation, and avoidance of harmful
atmospheres where possible. As with the planning, field
verification of routes should be performed to ensure no
interferences which can change design and add to cost.
Follow TIA, EIA, ANSI, Panduit Certified installers, tray fill
%, etc… for best design practices. Bills of material should
take into account specialty tools needed for installation and
amount of slack needed at both ends of pulls. Every effort
should be made to utilize pre-terminated products to reduce
installation time and reduce errors in the field.
Implementing/Testing/Documentation/Operations
The installation by certified installer should also include
Phase Best Practices Pitfalls To Avoid

Planning/Designing Understanding the environment Not planning the Infrastructure
Follow MICE Not taking environment into
consideration, using business network
specifications on the plant floor
Understanding the extent of the network, how it will be Not planning for future growth
used and by whom, who owns it, how changes will be Not understanding types of data traffic,
made, future growth how traffic interacts, and how to
separate when and where necessary
Written specification for networking components, es- Incompatible components or partial com-
tablishing consistency (cable, cable type, connectors, pliance to standards (i.e., using Category
enclosures, connection methods, etc.) 6 cable with standard connectors)
Understanding the networking layout, the different
types of traffic, limitations of the network
Fully document the network design showing device lo- Neglecting to fully document the design
cation, cable runs, pathways, label designations, color and to specify cable labels results in
codes, keying and segmenting for security mistakes during subsequent phases.
Implementing Network installation that will outlast the system,
planned for future growth and future enhancements,
ability to be used for future, faster network speeds
when necessary, keeping costs reasonable, balancing
future necessities with realistic costs
Certified installers with cable certification documentation
Installers, OEMs, system integrators having a stan- No structure or standard for OEMs /
dard to follow, no room for error integrators to follow, mix of hardware
makes for difficult maintenance
Using correct tool
Using pretested, modular solutions
Configuration for optimization Out of the box configuration
Create ‘As Built’ documentation showing cable routing, iden- No ‘as built’ corrections to document
tification, port assignments, and IP addresses assigned. results in confusion, wasted time
Planned additions to the network Adding in piecemeal
Testing Operational testing without unnecessary shutdown
Test each horizontal link and store test results for Neglecting to test links can result in
future reference. extended startup troubleshooting
Operations Regularly monitor network, assess before or after
changes made
Monitor physical degradation due to environmental factors
Keep documentation up to date as equipment moves,
adds, changes
Table 3-1. Project Phases Best Practices, Pitfalls to Avoid
Control Room Design

3.2 Detailed List of Project Steps
1. Determine number of servers and form factor. Determine
rack or enclosure space
The following section details considerations for each step of 2. Layout rack with higher level switches and
the project phases. associated patching
3. Layout demilitarized zone firewalls and
PLANNING associated cabling
1. Review applicable codes and standards for application a. Consider use of lockable enclosures, keyed
area and each level of the architecture fiber or copper jacks, lock in/block out connection
2. Review Application requirements, reference architecture technology to provide security
logical diagrams 4. Select appropriate fiber and copper patching solutions
3. Review/Create block diagram for system following appli- 5. Specify blanking panels for mounting switches in
cable Rockwell Automation/Cisco reference architecture 19 inch rack
4. Review site plan and building(s) floor plan to understand 6. Specify control room grounding bonding
the physical layout of equipment on a plant floor or grounds (See Section 2B, pages 2-37 and 2-38, Section 4C)
a. Identify cell/area zones a. Underfloor or overhead solutions
b. Identify existing control rooms and suitable 7. Specify fiber and copper pathway solutions for cabling
locations for expansion or new rooms as required. within room (see Section 2B, Section 4E)
5. Perform walk through area to identify and verify: a. Fiber runner for overhead system (Section 2B,
a. Existing cabling: location, category, media type page 2-35; Section 4E, pages 4-76 and 4-77)
b. Suitable pathway location for fiber or copper b. Grid runner for under-floor system (Section 2B,
media runs page 2-35 Section 4E, pages 4-78 and 4-79)
c. Cell/area zones and suitable locations for c. Transition points: Wire basket, Ladder Rack
consolidation points (Section 4E, pages 4-81 and 4-82)
d. Existing control room or networking rooms and 8. Review thermal management for enclosure systems
suitable location for new room if necessary (Section 4D page 4-73)
e. Identify MICE level of environments for each a. Consider wire management, ‘Cool Boot’ and
level of the architecture: other products to maximize cooling efficiency
f. Identify physical cable run distances between: 9. Review power conditioning and backup systems
I. Control Room(s) 10. Consider infrastructure management system to
II. Control Panel (s) monitor patching
III. On Machine 11. Specify pretested patch cable solutions
6. Review and document grounding/bonding scheme 12. Consider modular high density patching solutions
for building, control room, machine, cell or process between enclosures, racks
13. Use standards based identification schemes to mark
DESIGN enclosures, ports, cables. Consider color codes for
General Layout different network levels.
1. Layout plant floor locations for: 14. Determine Physical Security products to be used for
a. Control room racks/enclosures segregating VLANs, network segments and DMZ:
b. Zone cabling consolidation points a. Keyed jacks, patch cords,
c. Network drops b. Lock-in, blockout for desired ports
I. Single mode fiber for runs over 550m 15. If shielded cable is used, design bonding scheme
II. Multimode fiber for runs under 550m to avoid ground loops - use insulated patching approach,
III. Copper for runs under 100m evaluate hybrid bonding
2. Specify amount of cable for BOM including slack for
each end of run
Network Distribution Design Control Panel Design

1. Review channel length and decide on appropriate media 1. Address safety considerations for control panel
for each level a. Voltage and Arc Flash labels
2. Review performance and environmental needs and b. Provision for lockout/tagout
select category of copper horizontal runs c. Data Access Port for safe access to network
a. Choose media and connectors with performance without opening panel
margins over standard for improved noise 2. Ensure panel uses appropriate grounding/bonding
mitigation (see section 4A) scheme and panel layout for noise mitigation (see
3. Review performance and environmental needs of fiber section 4C pages 4-60 and 4-61)
horizontal runs a. Galvanized back panel for any drives panel
a. Select appropriate rated cable and number of b. Bond sub panels
fibers required c. Segregate clean and dirty signals in color-
4. Specify pathway products for each area: ladder rack, coded duct
j-hook, corrugated loom tubing, conduit, (see section 4E) 3. Specify location for Stratix switch and design
5. Use standards based identification schemes to mark installation details
enclosures, ports, cables (see section 4G) a. Route Protective Earth (PE) wire to switch
b. Location for patching and/or surface mount box
Zone Cabling Enclosure Design for fiber slack management
1. Determine environmental requirements and specify c. Segregate network cabling, and leave space for
suitable enclosure rating proper bend radius
2. If zone enclosure is designed to be active or passive: 4. Provide for ability to test links with appropriate test points
a. Determine switch to be housed: 19 rack or a. Surface mount boxes, patch panels
Stratix panel mount switch 5. Copper solutions (see section 4A)
b. Determine fiber/copper patching needs a. Choose quality copper jacks and media with
c. Determine Power over Ethernet (PoE) needs: performance margins over standard for improved
mount midspan injectors in enclosure. noise mitigation
3. Determine number of RackUnits (RU’s) required to b. Specify pretested patch cords
specify size of rack or enclosure 6. Fiber connectivity (see section 4B)
4. Layout enclosure RU’s with switches, patching, and a. Choose OptiCam pre-polished solution to
Power over Ethernet (PoE) speed installation and reduce risks since no field
5. Use standards based identification schemes to mark polish or adhesive required.
enclosures, ports, cables. Consider color codes for b. Specify pre-tested patch cords
different network levels. 7. Wire management (see section 4F)
6. Determine physical security products (keyed jacks, a. Specify abrasion protection and clips, clamps, and
patch cords, lock-in, blockout): ties engineered to protect cable and avoid over-
cinching cables risking performance degradation.
8. Identification (See section 4G)
a. Use standards based identification schemes to
mark devices, ports, cables. Consider color
codes for different network levels
On-Machine Design (See section 2F) On-Machine

1. Review scope of system and layout of machines 1. Use abrasion protection products to manage and
and process protect cables
2. Specify locations for zone enclosures to feed ‘on- 2. Consider use of duct for slack management
machine’ drops 3. Separate different classes of wiring for noise mitigation
3. Use M12 connectors or sealed RJ45 network 4. Identify devices, ports, cables, and address information
connectivity for ‘on machine’ devices for devices
exposed to high MICE level hazards (mechanical, TESTING
ingress, chemical exposures). 1. Test each copper link to ensure that it meets or exceeds
4. Review grounding/bonding for equipment and control Category ratings
panels to mitigate EMI noise and ESD risks 2. Test each fiber link to ensure it has desired performance
5. Design ‘on machine’ pedestals or panels with wire 3. Record baseline information on new system for
management and identification features later reference
a. Hinged duct for slack management 4. Verify grounding and bonding resistance, record for later
b. Clips and clamps for cable bundles reference, audit
c. Identification products for devices and cabling
d. Metal detectable wire management products for OPERATION
food industry 1. Periodically audit network performance
6. Safety design: lockout/tagout, warning signage 2. Periodically check grounding/bonding
integrity and resistance
INSTALLATION
Control Room, Network Distribution, Zone Cabling Enclosures
1. Certified installer using correct tools for fiber termination NOTE: REMEMBER TO DOCUMENT
2. Certified installer using correct tools for copper termination 1. Document Rack, port layout for switches in control room,
3. Install bonding, grounding with specified conductor sizes zone enclosure or control panels
and ensuring all paint piercing washers are used on 2. Make as built network diagrams and plant layout
painted surfaces, etc. to ensure adequate bonding. schematics showing fiber and cable drops
4. Ensure adequate bend radius
5. Identify cabling and devices per drawing
6. Avoid over-cinching or deforming cabling
Control Panels
1. Segregate wiring into color coded clean/dirty duct for
noise mitigation
2. Install bonding for all subpanels.
a. Use wide bonding straps rather than narrow
gauge wire for bonding
3. Install surface mount boxes, patch fields to aid in testing
4. Install security devices to lock-in, block out ports per drawing
5. Install Data Access Port where convenient for
troubleshooting in side of panel or on door
6. Use abrasion protection and dynamic cable mounts for
wiring on door of panel to manage and secure cabling
7. Identify IP addresses of critical devices (e.g. PAC
system, HMI, drives to allow connectivity for
configuration or troubleshooting)
3.3 Project Phase Design Tools
Phase Typically Responsible Tools

Plan Control Engineer, - Reference Architectures
IT Network Analyst/ - Design Guides
Engineer, Plant Engineer or - Project Management Software
Supervisor
Design Control Engineer, - Reference Architectures

IT Network Analyst/ - Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture Builder
Engineer - Panduit Design tool for Visio
- Bentley promisE Electrical CAD tools for panel layout,
network layout, documentation
Implement Contractor, Electricians, - Panduit installation tooling and kits

Network analyst - Panduit training
- Panduit Label Printing Systems
- Bentley promisE Electrical CAD tools for panel layout,
network documentation
Test Contractor, Electricians, - Panduit training

Network analyst - Fluke testing tools
Operate Regularly monitor - FactoryTalk Asset Center

network, assess before or - Panduit Panview patching infrastructure Monitoring
after changes made
Section 4
Physical Infrastructure Implementation
A network physical infrastructure implementation requires

the selection of connectors, media, pathways, enclosures,
identification and security components along with associated
installation methodologies (e.g. wire management, ground-
ing & bounding). The following section provides guidance on
specifying, installing, testing, and documenting these critical
components.
The physical infrastructure forms the foundation to support

the communication channels that connect a distributed
system tasked with real-time control, process data collection
and device configuration. Industrial networks require deter-
ministic performance. Therefore, the physical infrastructure Figure 4.1-1. MICE boundaries can change at various points
of the network channel must be specified with sufficient across channel length as cabling channels pass through multiple
performance margin, proper environmental rating, and areas, as defined in TIA-1005 (Source: ISA).
dependable security features to ensure that the network
performs consistently and reliably. To design an effective end-to-end solution that mitigates
environmental and EMI requires carefully analyzing the
Besides EMI noise coupling risks, the other factors that are control system communication requirements, device charac-
the most problematic for selecting, planning, and installing teristics, environmental conditions and transition points, as
the fiber and copper media are the environmental factors well as availability and security considerations. Designers
that can prevail in certain points of a communication channel. and specifiers are left to answer many questions regarding
These factors can range from extreme cold or hot tempera- these critical connectivity issues. What type of media? How
tures outdoors or in a process line to humidity or chemical much hardening do I need? What is cost effective? What is
exposure that can degrade insulation to vibration or shock overkill? What will meet today’s and tomorrow’s needs in
that can cause mechanical failures of connections. The the face of the new technologies …wireless, POE, VOIP?
MICE rating system allows these factors to be categorized The answer requires careful consideration of many factors.
and analyzed for mitigation. Products that can assist in miti- Reference architectures and environmental analysis tools
gation include armored fiber cable, IP67 rated connectors, like the MICE rating system can provide these answers.
and special grades of insulation. The following selection guide information will reveal products
that will allow implementing end to end connectivity that can
A further refinement in best practices related to managing meet these needs.
environmental concerns is described in TIA-1005 which al-
lows more than 4 connectors per channel to enable setting
up MICE boundary points (see Figure 4-1) along the channel
length as the media passes through different areas. This
approach can be very cost effective since only those limited
areas needing elevated protection require the more expen-
sive hardened infrastructure components. The areas that are
more protected can use standard solutions which are more
cost effective.
Section 4: Physical Infrastructure Implementation
STANDARDS and CODES at 10Gbit/sec. The data center is a fiber-rich environment

where fiber runs typically are less than 50 meters. Storage
ANSI/TIA-1005 / ANSI/TIA-1005-1 Area Network (SAN) components are nearly 100% cabled
Publication of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Stan- with fiber media, and fiber cabling is an increasingly popular
dard for Industrial Premises and its first addendum, cover- option as a high-speed server/switch interconnect.
ing Industrial Pathways and Spaces, is forthcoming is 2009.
The documents are based on the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ISO/IEC 11801
TIA-569-B series of standards, and include appropriate al- International standard ISO/IEC 11801 (Generic Customer
lowances and exceptions to those standards for industrial Premises Cabling) specifies general-purpose telecommu-
premises. They also include techniques to mitigate me- nication cabling systems that are suitable for a wide range
chanical, ingress, climate/chemical, and electromechanical of applications (analog and ISDN telephony, various data
(M.I.C.E.) effects across multiple areas. communication standards, building control systems, factory
automation). It covers both balanced copper cabling and
TIA/EIA-568-B fiber optic cabling. The standard was designed for use within
TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications commercial premises that may consist of either a single
Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both building or of multiple buildings on a campus.
balanced copper cabling and fiber optic cabling) for com-
mercial buildings, and between buildings in campus envi- 4.1 Copper Media
ronments. The bulk of the standards define cabling types,
distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable ter- 4.1.1 Selection
mination standards and performance characteristics, cable
installation requirements, and methods of testing installed When choosing Ethernet copper-based cabling solutions,
cable. Two common network architectures are described by the following criteria should be taken into consideration prior
this standard: hierarchal star and centralized fiber (FTTx). to installation to ensure system performance, reliability, and
scalability.
TIA/EIA-569-B
TIA/EIA-569-B (Commercial Building Standards for Telecom- 4.1.1.1 Media Type
munications Pathways and Spaces) provides requirements
for spaces (rooms or areas) and pathways into and through Several different kinds of twisted-pair copper cables are
which telecommunications equipment and media are available for deployment in Industrial Ethernet applications,
installed. This standard, along with Addendum 5 to TIA/EIA- depending on reach and bandwidth requirements (see Table
568-B, specifically addresses fiber to the enclosure (FTTE), 4.1-1). The following types of copper twisted-pair cable are
a method for network deployment under which active equip- most often deployed in industrial settings:
ment is typically centralized in a single location (such as a
control room), and fiber backbones are run to distributed Category 6A
enclosures located close to machinery and work stations. • Allows 10 Gb/s performance over 100m channel
This is the lowest cost and most flexible infrastructure. • Designed for the most bandwidth intensive applications:
• Converged networks – Data, VoIP, Stream Video,
TIA/EIA-942 Medical Imagery
TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard • Backbones serving increase network traffic
for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for Data Centers – Shared network storage,
the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and clusters/server farms
computer rooms. This standard differs from 568-B/569-B in • Future proofing for the certain growth and demand on
that it specifically recommends a particular fiber grade, laser- the network
optimized OM3, as the most reliable fiber media solution • Can deploy PoE without sacrificing high network throughput
Section 4.1: Copper Media
Category 6 Category 5e
• Ideal for critical applications where network up-time is • Expansion of existing Category 5e networks
extremely important • Expansion of short/limited life networks
• Provides guaranteed performance headroom • Cost critical installations where future proofing/longevity
• Compensates for: is not an issue
• Variations in installation practices
• Affects of future disturbance to the structured cabling system
• Allows limited 10 Gb/s applications (37 meters)
Parameter Category 5e Category 6 Category 6A

Standard • TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e • TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 • TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10
• ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2, Class D • ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2, Class E Augmented Category 6
• TSB-155 supports • ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2,
10GBASE-T applications up to Amendment 1 Class EA
37m channels
Specified Bandwidth 100 MHz 250 MHz 500 MHz
Insertion Loss @ 100MHz 24 dB 21.3 dB 20.9 dB
Cable Diameter 0.19 – 0.21 inch 0.23 – 0.25 inch 0.295 inch
POE Support Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Reach:
10G/1000BASE-T Category 5e Category 6 Category 6A
Gigabit Ethernet 100 m 100 m 100 m
10Gigabit Ethernet Not supported 37 m 100 m
10GBT low power mode Not supported Not supported 30 m
Fiber Channel Reach over Copper:

FC-BASE-T Category 5e Category 6 Category 6A
1G FC-BASE-T 100 m 100 m 100 m
2G FC-BASE-T 60 m 70 m 100 m
4G FC-BASE-T Not supported 40 m 100 m
Fig. 4.1-2. Balanced Copper Media Types and Reach / Bandwidth Characteristics
Ensuring 10Gb/s Performance.

The control room physical infrastructure can be leveraged For 10GBASE-T performance the IEEE requires Category 6
to support multiple generations of factory systems and electrical channel parameters to be extended from the cur-
equipment as machine cells are upgraded, reconfigured, or rent 250 MHz to 500 MHz, and introduces Power Sum Alien
extended. Also, links in the control room may need to carry Crosstalk requirements up to 500 MHz. While the standard
10 Gb/s in order to support convergence of disparate batch, recognizes that Category 6 cabling systems may support 10
continuous process, discrete, safety, motion, and drive Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances, only Category 6A
control industrial network technologies. For these reasons, a copper cabling systems will be able to support 10 Gb/s data
10-Gigabit ready cabling infrastructure is recommended, with rates for distances up to 100 meters.
Industrial Ethernet bandwidth and reach requirements favor-
ing the deployment of Category 6A copper links.
The IEEE also has determined that alien crosstalk is the cabling are that it
main electrical parameter limiting the performance of the is simpler to install,
structured cabling system when applied to 10 Gigabit quicker to terminate,
transmission lines. Alien crosstalk is a coupled signal in a and less expensive
disturbed pair arising from a signal in a neighboring cable. than STP cabling
Today’s digital signal processing (DSP) electronics are based on product
not as effective in canceling alien crosstalk as they are for and installation costs.
suppressing internal channel noise. Only through the use Also, within most
of innovative complementary design technologies that are regions, installers and
developed to work together as a system can true 10 Gigabit contractors are more
warranted performance be achieved. In order to support familiar with UTP
10 Gb/s data rates, new twisted-pair cable constructions cabling, including its
improve cable separation in bundles and new connectors proper installation.
are available to ensure that gains achieved by the cable For many markets,
improvements are not lost in the channel. Jack modules, a learning curve for
copper cable, patch panels and patch cords also must be STP cabling installa-
precisely tuned to achieve 10 Gigabit speeds. tions still remains.
4.1.1.2 Unshielded vs. Shielded Solutions While proper bonding and grounding methods should always
be followed, in practice there is often more confusion on how to
With the exception of some countries in Western Europe, the do this with STP cabling and how much additional cost will be
cable of choice throughout the world for structured copper incurred to meet these requirements. Also, attention to proper
cabling installations has been UTP. The IEEE 10GBASE-T grounding beyond the cabling itself to the electrical systems
specification, which defines 10 Gigabit Ethernet transmission must be implemented to eliminate the possibility of ground loops.
over copper twisted pair, permits both UTP and STP copper If the power cabling system is not properly designed and/or
cabling systems. There are advantages and disadvantages to installed, an electrical potential difference could result between
using either type (see Table 4.1-2). the two ends of an STP cabling link. This electrical potential
difference could result in a ground loop, which would likely
The main advantage of using a STP cabling system is the cause data rate errors. Thus, the overall integrity of the power
dramatic suppression of alien crosstalk. The containment of this and grounding system is very important to ensure 10GBASE-T
noise helps ensure better signal integrity than can be achieved date rate performance. This becomes less of an issue with UTP
with a UTP cabling system. The main advantages of UTP because UTP cabling systems are not closed ground loops.
Advantages of STP Advantages of UTP

Excellent alien crosstalk suppression (> 20 dB ANEXT headroom Installers and contractors are more comfortable installing UTP over
over the standard) STP systems which may lead to lower installation quotes
Field testing for alien crosstalk not necessary due to superior Additional step of bonding cable to connectivity components is not
headroom margin over the 10GBASE-T standard (estimated time required, no potential ground loop concerns
savings of 20-40 minutes per individual link)
Excellent immunity from devices that emanate EMI and FRI noise No cable preparation required when terminating jacks, less installa-
such as WLAN’s, cellular phones, TV broadcasting or radios tion time (Shielded jack termination takes 50% longer than UTP)
Increased patch cord cable manageability due to smaller cable Lower product and installation cost
(0.23 in. STP vs. 0.29 in. UTP)
UTP and STP patch cables have channel de-rating of 20% and
50% respectively, which allows for longer channel length in UTP
installation when using more than 8 meters of patch cords
Figure 4.1-3. Comparison of STP and UTP 10GBASE-T Compliant Cabling
of a cabling system is a ratio, articulated in dB, of com-

4.1.1.3 Media and Connector Selection for
mon-mode noise rejected and prevented from converting
Noise Mitigation
to a differential mode voltage. IEEE and EIA/TIA defies the
minimum requirements for CMRR in term of TCL and TCTL
Installation of copper Ethernet cabling near control panel
which are power ratio measurements characterizing unbal-
noise sources increases the potential for common mode
ance from transmit and receive ends.
noise coupling that can result in bit errors and delays.
Common-mode noise is the voltage that can develop on the
Infrastructure design techniques that can improve noise rejec-
entire LAN channel with respect to ground. Since Ethernet
tion include maintaining proper bend radius and separation
cabling system uses differential mode signaling, the voltage
distance between conductors, avoiding over-tightened cable
difference within the two wires in a twisted pair defines the
ties, using shielded cables where possible, observing good
signal so common mode noise should be subtracted out and
bonding practices for shielded and motor cables, and ensur-
not cause a problem.
ing cable and connector balance using best-in-class vendor
connectivity solutions that exceed standards specifications.
Figure 4.1-2 illustrates the allowed coupled common mode
noise signal in a 1000BASE-T and 100BASE-T system for
a 100 meter channel. Note that 100Base-T cable cannot
tolerate more than 0.5 volt of noise coupling near 100 MHz
with the 1000BaseT tolerating much less only 0.1 V. A VFD,
servo, or inductive load with spikes in hundreds of volts
could easily couple in noise at these low levels leading to
Figure 4.1-5. Signal and Noise Routing Diagram
disrupted communications.
4.1.1.4 Pre-Terminated Solutions
Pre-terminated cabling solutions are ideally suited for quick

deployment in dense control room areas. The pre-tested
modular construction of these cable assemblies offer several
key advantages over using multi-connector cables that
require time-consuming punchdown and testing:
• The primary benefit of using pre-terminated solutions is

that they offer consistently high and precisely known
Figure 4.1-4. Coupled Common Mode Noise Signal
levels of performance for improved network integrity.
This level of reliability is crucial in all environments,
The balance of twisted pair cables and RJ45 connectors is
where channel insertion loss budgets are very tight and
key to preventing common mode noise from being converted
channel performance issues have an immediate and
to differential mode noise that corrupts communication (see
negative impact on the bottom line. The PANDUIT®
Figure 4.1-3). If the balance is perfect, then the differential
QuickNet™ copper pre-terminated solution exceeds
mode measurements will be equal on both conductors of the
standards for 10 GB/s performance, which leaves
twisted pair and thereby cancel out imposed noise. Not all
designers extra headroom in the channel for channel
manufacturers design their connectors for optimized balance
upgrades and modifications.
so it is important to review this critical specification when
choosing a connector as well as patch cable vendor.
• Pre-terminated components also are 100% factory
terminated and tested to deliver assured quality and
In practice, a completely balanced system is unachievable
consistent, reliable performance. Highly controlled,
and a level of imposed noise is observed on one of the two
precision termination processes for copper take place in
conductors. The CMRR (Common-Mode Rejection Ratio)
a clean factory environment to offer a strong advantage • Finally, pre-terminated solutions are engineered for
over the variability that can result from terminating many high design flexibility and scalability. These
control room links under adverse field conditions. modular solutions help achieve high densities per unit
of rack space and promote efficient use of floor space.
• Quick-snap connections reduce copper link install times The modularity of pre-terminated solutions also allows
by 75% for a very high speed of deployment. Cassette- the control room to quickly and easily scale up as
based copper assemblies that plug in quickly throughout needed, which is especially valuable in high-growth
the data center drastically reduce installation time and cost. storage areas. And the speed and ease of deployment
When you consider the hundreds or thousands of perma- translates into a similar ease to upgrade and maintain
nent links in today’s control rooms, the time and money the system, as it takes very little time to make necessary
saved using pre-terminated solutions adds up quickly and moves, ads and changes.
helps designers and installers to keep on schedule (and
even more importantly, on budget).
Building the Copper Channel

Category 6 Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™
Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS UTP Jack Module UTP Jack Module
Shielded Jack Module Specifications: Category 6/C Specifications: Category 6A,
Specifications: 8-position lass E eight-position jack 8-position jack module shall
jack module shall terminate 4-pair 22 – 26 module shall terminate unshielded twisted terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26
AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted pair cable 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require
and shall not require the use of a punch- shall not require the use of a punchdown the use of a punchdown tool.
down tool. tool.
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch
Jack Module Cords Cords
Specifications: Augmented Specifications: Category Specifications: Category 6A
Category 6 eight-position jack 6/Class E UTP patch cords UTP patch cords shall be
module shall terminate shielded twisted shall be constructed of 24 AWG unshielded constructed of 24 AWG solid copper cable
4-pair 22-26 AWG 100 ohm cable and shall twisted pair stranded copper cable and an with an enhanced performance modular
not require the use of a punchdown tool. enhanced performance modular plug at plug at each end.
each end
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded TX6000™ UTP Copper TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP
Patch Cords Cable Copper Cable
Specifications: Category 6A Specifications: Category 6 Specifications: Category 6A
shielded patch cords shall be constructed cable shall exceed ANSI/TIA cable shall meet the ANSI/EIA
of shielded 26 AWG stranded copper cable /EIA-568-B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 Category /TIA-568-B.2-10 and IEC 61156-5 compo-
and an enhanced performance shielded 6 component standards. nent standards.
modular plug at each end.
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded TX6500™ UTP Copper DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel
Cable – U/FTP Cable Specifications: Category 6
Specifications: Augmented Specifications: Category 6 Class E punchdown patch
Category 6 Shielded Copper cable shall far exceed ANSI/ panels shall terminate
Cable shall be constructed of 4-pair twisted TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801 unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG,
insulated 23 AWG conductors. Class E standards. The conductors shall be 100 ohm pair cable and shall mount to stan-
23 AWG construction with FEP (CMP) or dard EIA 19” or 23”racks. Industry standard
polyolefin (CMR) insulation. single wire 110 punchdown tool shall be
used for terminations
Building the Copper Channel (cont.)

Mini-Com® TX5e Shielded Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP Data-Patch™ 10/100BASE-T Patch Panel
Jack Module Jack Module Specifications: 10/100BASE-T patch
Specifications: Eight-position Specifications: Category panels shall feature RJ45 ports on the front
jack module shall terminate 4 5e/Class D eight-position jack of the panel. Panel PC board is wired for
pair 22-26 AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted module shall terminate unshielded twisted 10BASE-Tand 100BASE-T Ethernet utilizing
pair cable and shall not require the use of a 4-pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and pins 1, 2 and 3, 6. The back of the patch
punchdown tool. shall not require the use of a punchdown consists of female telco 50-pin/25-pair con-
tool. nectors wired per RJ21 industry standards
for backward compatibility.
TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cord TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords QuickNet™ Copper Cabling
Specifications: Category 5e Specifications: Category System The PANDUIT Quick
patch cords shall be con- 5e/Class D UTP patch cords Net™ Copper Cabling System
structed of 26 AWG shielded shall be constructed of provides a custom, pre-termin-
stranded copper cable and shielded high unshielded twisted pair stranded copper ated cabling solution which meets unique
performance modular plugs at each end. cable and a high performance modular plug requirements. QuickNet™ Angled and Flat
at each end. Patch Panels accept QuickNet™ Pre-Ter-
minated Cassettes, Patch Panel Adapters,
and Blacks, which snap in and out, with one
hand, for quick installation.
S/FTP TX5500™ Shielded Cable – S/FTP TX5500™ UTP Copper Mini-Com® Ultimate ID®
Specifications Cable Hybrid Box
The S/FTP Shielded cable shall be con- Specifications Specifications: The hybrid
structed of 4-pair insulated AWG conduc- Category 5e cable shall far box shall be a merging point
tors. The twisted pairs shall be wrapped in exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 for fiber and copper installations and shall
an overall metallic foil with an overall braid and IEC 61156-5 Category 5e component accept all modules. The hybrid box shall
within a LSZH or PVC jacket. standards. offer independent access to each type of
media providing easy installation and main-
tenance. A retention block shall include a
DP5e™ Patch Panel built-in spool that holds a total of 12 meters
Specifications: Category 5e/ of fiber buffered cable and shall accept a
Class D punchdown patch single gang faceplate for up to 6 modules.
panels shall terminate A cover extension shall provide additional
unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, security and bend radius protection to the
100 ohm cable and shall mount to standard connections. The hybrid box shall comply
EIA 19” or 23” racks. with labeling standards by including a sta-
tion ID pocket and a 6 port ID pocket for all
base mounted modules.
Rockwell Automation Ethernet Media Rockwell Automation’s M12 to RJ45 bulkhead connector
As Ethernet becomes increasingly utilized in industrial provides an elegant transition for network architecture from
control, survival of physical media in rugged or harsh envi- an IP20 setting to an IP67 environment. The adaptor can
ronments is becoming a necessity. Rockwell Automation’s be used to connect remote junction boxes or implement an
Cat5e Ethernet cable was designed to supply a reliable On-Machine™ solution with Armor™ I/O products. Rock-
network connection in harsh surroundings. By optimizing the well Automation’s Ethernet media portfolio provides reliable
balance of twisted pair conductors inside a robust Thermo- connectivity to maintain network integrity and prevent costly
plastic Elastomer (TPE) jacket, data is protected from noise, downtime.
chemicals and mechanical issues. The cable is available in
RJ45 patchcords for IP20 applications or in four-pin D-coded See Rockwell Automation’s Network Media catalog informa-
M12 patchcords for IP67 applications where high vibration, tion at the following link:
fluids and other contaminants can threaten the reliability of
a network. M12 D-code field attachable insulation displace- http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/
ment connectors (IDC) are available in both shielded and documents/ca/1585-ca500_-en-p.pdf
unshielded housings with male or female connectors. Male
eight-pin RJ45 connectors are available in both a crimp ter-
mination and a toolless IDC connector for custom cabling.
Sample Rockwell Automation Ethernet Media Part Numbers

Part Number Description
1585D-M4DC-H Field Installable M12 Polyamide Small Body unshielded, Insulation Displacement
Connector (IDC)
1585-F4TBDF-2 M12 Patchcord 4-conductor, Teal TPE, Flex-rated, 2 Meter (Female to Female)
1585D-M4TBDF-1A M12 Patchcord 4-conductor, Teal TPE, Flex-rated, 1 Meter (Female to Male)
1585A-DD4JD Female M12 Receptacle to RJ45 Female Adapter Right Angle; Polyamide and Brass with
Nickel Plating
1585J-M8TBJM-1 RJ45 Patchcord 8-conductor, teal flex-rated robotic TPE , 1 meter
1585J-M8CC-H Field Installable Cat6 RJ45 Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)
4.1.2 Installation 4.1.2.1 Pathways and Spacing Management

Copper cabling systems must be installed in accordance to
the cable management requirements set forth in ANSI/TIA/ • Pathways should be located to allow easy access to
EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling cabling for non-disruptive maintenance and upgrades.
Standard) and in ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B (Commercial Building
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces). • For initial installation, the maximum fill capacity for
To aid compliant installation, guidelines for installing copper pathways (i.e. conduit, raceways, trays, baskets) is 40
cabling systems are provided below. percent (see Table 4A-3).
Number cables = Pathway Internal Area X 40%

Cable Area
Table 4A-3. Copper Cable Areas for Pathway Fill Calculations

Panduit Cable Type Part Number Cable Area
Category 6A / 7
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Plenum P/N PUP6A04** 0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Riser P/N PUR6A04** 0.0683 inches2 (44mm2)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL6A04** 0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ CM/PVC P/N PUC6A04** 0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Plenum Shielded P/N PSP6004** 0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Riser Shielded P/N PSR6004** 0.0744 inches2 (48 mm2)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUFL6X04** 0.0610 inches2 (40 mm2)
Shielded
TX7000™ Category 7 Low Smoke Zero P/N PSL7004** 0.0707 inches2 (46 mm2)
Halogen Shielded
Category 6
TX6000™ Category 6 Plenum P/N PUP6004** 0.0426 inches2 (27.5 mm2)
TX6000™ Category 6 Riser P/N PUR6004** 0.0452 inches2 (29.2 mm2)
TX6000™ Category 6 Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL6004** 0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)
TX6000™ Category 6 CM P/N PUC6004** 0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)
TX6000™ Category 6 Low-Smoke Zero- P/N PFL6004** 0.0688 inches2 (45 mm2)
Halogen Shielded
TX6000™ Category 6 CM Shielded P/N PFC6004** 0.0688 inches2 (45 mm2)
Category 5e
TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum P/N PUP5504** 0.0292 inches2 (18.8 mm2)
TX5500™ Category 5e Riser P/N PUR5504** 0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)
TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero P/N PUL5504** 0.0294 inches2 (18.9 mm2)
Halogen
TX5500™ Category 5e CM P/N PUC5504** 0.0277 inches2 (17.9 mm2)
TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum Shielded P/N PSP5504** 0.0433 inches2 (27.9 mm2)
TX5500™ Category 5e Riser Shielded P/N PSR5504** 0.0494 inches2 (31.9 mm2)
TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero PFL5504** 0.0468 inches2 (30.2 mm2)
Halogen Shielded
TX5500™ Category 5e CM Shielded P/N PFC5504** 0.0468 inches2 (30.2 mm2)
(NOTE: Refer to the TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling conduit fill capacity guideline table in Appendix A-1 of this document to
determine the maximum number of cables per conduit trade size.)
• The maximum fill capacity of 60 percent is allowed to

accommodate future additions after initial installation.
• Proper cable bend radius control must be maintained

throughout the pathways. The bend radius needs to be
four (4) times the cable diameter (see Table 4.1-4).
Table 4.1-4. Copper Cable Bend Radius Requirements

Panduit Cable Type Part Number Minimum Bend Radius
Category 6A / 7
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Plenum P/N PUP6A04** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Riser P/N PUR6A04** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL6A04** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
TX6A™ 10Gig™ CM/PVC P/N PUC6A04** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Plenum Shielded P/N PSP6004** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Riser Shielded P/N PSR6004** 1.23 inches (31 mm)
TX6™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUFL6X04** 1.11 inches (28 mm)
Shielded
TX7000™ Category 7 Low Smoke Zero P/N PSL7004** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
Halogen Shielded
Category 6
TX6000™ Category 6 Plenum P/N PUP6004** 0.772 inches (19.6 mm)
TX6000™ Category 6 Riser P/N PUR6004** 0.9 inches (22.8 mm)
TX6000™ Category 6 Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL6004** 0.9 inches (22.86 mm)
TX6000™ Category 6 CM P/N PUC6004** 0.9 inches (22.86 mm)
TX6000™ Category 6 Low-Smoke Zero- P/N PFL6004** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
Halogen Shielded
TX6000™ Category 6 CM Shielded P/N PFC6004** 1.18 inches (30 mm)
Category 5e
TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum P/N PUP5504** 0.772 inches (19.6 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e Riser P/N PUR5504** 0.9 inches (22.8 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL5504** 0.774 inches (19.6 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e CM P/N PUC5504** 0.752 inches (19.1 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum Shielded P/N PSP5504** 1.18 inches (29.5 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e Riser Shielded P/N PSR5504** 1.23 inches (31.25 mm)
TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero PFL5504** 0.975 inches (24.8 mm)
Halogen Shielded
TX5500™ Category 5e CM Shielded P/N PFC5504** 0.975 inches (24.8 mm)
• For control room applications, it is recommended to use

4.1.2.2 Cable Separation Management
PANDUIT® FIBERRUNNER™ or GridRunner™ Underfloor
Cable Routing Systems for cable raceway management.
• There are no specific limitations with sharing pathways with
The fittings provide minimum 1.5-inch bend radius to protect
other category copper cables throughout the whole cable run.
against signal loss due to excessive cable bends.
• Separation and physical barriers between copper and

• Pathways should be designed to allow for future expansion
power cables must be maintained within raceways. If cop-
(minimum two cables per work area, with pathways support-
per and power cables need to cross, install perpendicular to
ing three cables per work area). Therefore when designing
each other. Please reference the National Electric Code for
a pathway, the pathway needs to accommodate 150% of
local installation guidelines.
the initial cable installation. For example, if the initial design
requires 2 cables each for ten work areas, the pathway shall
• The maximum channel distance for copper cabling in the
be designed to accommodate 30 cables.
backbone and/or horizontal is 328 feet (100 meters). The
total length of equipment cords, patch cords and work area
• Conduit should be run in the most direct route possible
cords shall not exceed 33 feet (10 meters)
with no more than two 90 degree bends between pull boxes
and serve no more than three outlet boxes. Conduit bends
• The maximum permanent link distance for copper cabling in
should be at least six times the conduit diameter.
the backbone and/or horizontal is 295 feet (90 meters)
Cable trays are to be installed per manufacturing guidelines
and loading capacities must be considered during cabling
4.1.2.3 Cable Pulling & Installation Management
installation.
• The maximum pulling tension is not to exceed 25 lbf. Cable
• Cable trays used in the ceiling should allow for at least 12
installation should not in any way deform the cable jacket.
inches (305 mm) of clearance above the tray. Cable trays
used in the floor should allow for at least 2 inches (51 mm)
• The cable should not come in contact with any water or
of clearance between the top part of the tray and the bottom
chemicals (ex. paint, lubricants), or be exposed to any high
of the floor tile.
humidity during or after installation.
• J-mod® or J-PRO® Cable Support System should be lo-

• Avoid any cable kinks and maintain proper bend radius con-
cated at 5 foot intervals maximum and have at least 3 inches
trol during cabling pulling. If any kinks should occur, kinked
(76 mm) of clearance above suspended ceilings.
cable should be removed and replaced.
• Please reference Panduit website for J-mod® or J-PRO®

• Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties, Contour-Ty® Cable Ties,
Cabling Support System fill capacity information for various
Belt-Ty™ In-Line Cable Ties or Pan-Ty® Cable Ties should
sizes available.
be applied loosely and at random intervals to cable bundles
to avoid any pinching or crushing of the cable jackets.
• For aesthetics and ease of bundling, the Cable Bundling

and Organizing Tool (ie: P/N CBOT24K) is recommended
4.1.2.4 Cable Management in the 4.1.2.5 Cable Management in the

Telecommunications Room Production Office Area
• Organize and manage cables for quick and easy moves, • For surface raceway applications, the PanWay® TG Surface
adds and changes Raceway system is the optimal solution in the work area for
routing copper cables. The TG Raceway system provides
• Use the rack vertical manager fill cable capacity table in adequate space to maintain proper cable bend radius control.
Appendix A-2 of this document to determine the maximum
number of cables per telecommunication rack. • Allow for at least one outlet per work area with a minimum
of two cable terminations.
• Termination procedures at the patch panel include:
• Feed cables from both sides of the panel • Pathways should be designed to allow for future expansion.
• Maintain acceptable bend radius levels For example, work areas with two cables must be served by
• Do not kink cables pathways that can accommodate a minimum of three cables.
• Do not cinch cable ties so tightly as to deform the cable
in any way • Allow for at least 12 inches (305 mm) of slack at the work
• To enhance wire management in the back of the panel, area. Pull slack up into the ceiling or back into the raceway
it is recommended that a strain relief bar (ie: P/N and store it there, where it can later be pulled into the box if
SRBM19BLY) be mounted to the rack. The strain relief re-termination is necessary.
bar includes Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties for • Terminate PANDUIT Mini-Com® Jack Modules per the ap-
additional cable management. propriate installation instruction sheet referenced below.
• Termination procedures for patch panels include: • To improve bend radius control copper cable in junction
• Follow PANDUIT installation instruction sheet PN379. boxes, it is recommended that PANDUIT sloped faceplates
• Outer cable jacket should be as close as possible to (i.e. P/N UICFPSE2**) be used in the work area.
point of termination
• Last twist should be no further than 0.5 inches from the • With PANDUIT sloped faceplates, the following junction
point of termination. boxes can be used with copper cable (ie: P/N JBX3510**-
A, JB1**-A, JBP1**-A, JBP1I**-A, JB1FS**-A, JBP2**-A,
JB1D**-A, JBP1D**-A, JBP2D**-A).
• With PANDUIT flush faceplates, the following junction boxes

can be used copper cable (ie: P/N JB1D**-A, JBP1D**-A,
JBP2D**-A).
5. Push wire cap into jack

4.1.2.6 Copper Jack Installation
• Enhanced GIGA-TX TM Technology

• Enhanced wire-cap that places all four pairs into
quadrants
• Forward motion termination, no punch-down tool required
6. Snap jack onto wirecap with EGJT tool.
• Fast, easy, consistent performance
UTP and STP same process, only difference in
cable prep.
1. Verify parts: Jack and WireCap
4.1.2.7 Installation Reference Documents
• DP6TM 10GigTM, DP6™ PLUS, and DP5eTM Patch Panel

installation instruction sheet PN379.
2. Feed pairs into quadrants of wire cap

• Mini-Com® TX6ATM 10GigTM UTP Jack Modules installa-
tion instruction sheet PN511.
• Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Modules installa-

tion instruction sheet PN366.
• Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS and TX5e™ UTP Jack Modules

installation instruction sheet PN403.
• Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS and TX5e™ Shielded Jack Mod-

ules installation instruction sheet PN399.
3. Pull pairs through to seat wire cap on insulation

4.1.3 Testing
Copper cabling transmission performance depends on cable

characteristics, connecting hardware, patch cords and cross-
connect wiring, the total number of connections, and the
care with which they are installed and maintained.
The following channel test configuration should be used by

4. Trim excess wire with CWST tool
system designers and users of data communications sys-
tems to verify the performance of the overall copper channel
(see Figure 4.1-4). Channel performance is the most critical
to the end user, as this is how their network will perform.
The channel includes up to 90 m (295 ft) of horizontal cable,
a work area equipment cord, a telecommunications outlet/
connector, an optional transition/consolidation connector,
and two connections in the telecommunications room.
Figure 4.1-4.
Schematic representation of copper cabling channel
(in accordance with TIA/EIA-568B.2-1).
TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 recommends and ISO 11801 requires that 2. Perform a Set Reference proce-
the consolidation point be located at least 5 m (16.4 ft) from dure in the special functions prior
the telecommunications room to reduce the effect of multiple to testing. Fluke Networks recom-
connections in close proximity on NEXT loss and return mends that a Set Reference proce-
loss. Per the TIA standard, the total length of equipment dure be performed every 30 days to
cords, patch cords or jumpers and work area cords shall not ensure the maximum accuracy of
be more than 10 m (32.8 ft). If total patch cords are longer the test results.
than 10 meters, the entire channel length must be de-rated
by the length exceeding 10 meters depending either by 20% For detailed instructions on Set
or 50% depending on the patch cord cable type used. The Reference procedure, refer to Fluke
connections to the equipment at each end of the channel are Network’s DTX-1800 Series Users
not included in the channel definition. The channel definition Manual page 20, on “Setting the
does not apply to those cases where the horizontal cabling Reference for Twisted Pair Cabling”. The link for the User’s
is cross-connected to the backbone cabling. Manual is:
http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/techdocs/Manuals.
Panduit has evaluated the Fluke DTX-1800 Series Digital htm?pid=50004
Cable Analyzer and approves the use of this tester for the
certification of installed 10 Gb/s cabling channels. In order Note: Fluke Networks also recommends factory calibration
to verify that the installed cabling will meet or exceed the once a year to ensure that the test tool meets or exceeds the
performance requirements of the designated classification published accuracy specifications.
defined in the IEEE 802.3an Standard, it is important that the
following steps are followed. 3. Select the Fluke Channel Adapter (# DTX-CHA001A
(AxTalk)) and attach them to the DTX-1800 Series Main and
4.1.3.1 Channel Testing Remote unit.
1. Verify that your DTX-1800 Series tester has the most up-
to-date software (software version 2.12 or better is required).
The latest software updates can be found on the Fluke
website at:
http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/supportAndDown-
loads/downloadsAndUpdates/?pid=50004
4. Select from the following Fluke Autotests:

4.1.3.2 Alien Crosstalk Testing (Optional)
• 10GBASE-T
• TIA Category 6A Ch
For testing Alien crosstalk the Alien crosstalk “DTX-10GKIT”
• TIA Category 6A PL
for the Fluke DTX1800 is required.
• ISO ClassEA Ch AMD1
• ISO ClassEA PL 25N1513
• TIA Category 6 Channel
• ISO Channel Class E
• TIA Category 5e Channel
• ISO Class D Channel
The alien test kit
contains the
5. For channel testing, install all patch cords prior to testing.
following items:
• DTX-PLA002
Note: Panduit recommends for installers to install and test a
Permanent Link
few channels before completing the entire system.
adapters
• AxTALK Analyzer Software- (software version 3.0 or
6. Begin testing your installed channels with the Fluke DTX-
newer is required). The latest software updates can be
1800 Series Digital Cable Analyzer and save all test results.
found on the Fluke website at:
7. Troubleshoot and repair any failing channels. Channels

http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/supportAndDown-
resulting in a PASS* are considered a PASS and will be ac-
loads/downloadsAndUpdates/?pid=50004
ceptable for warranty.
• DTX-ATERM Link Terminators (2)

Note: The Fluke HDTDX analyzer and HDTDR test are very
• RJ45 to RJ45 Couplers (2) for channel testing
helpful when troubleshooting failing channels. Both can be
• DTX- CHA001A channel test heads
found on the SINGLE TEST menu and will also run auto-
• DTX-AXTK1 (2) Alien Crosstalk Modules
matically when a failure occurs.
Items needed in addition to the kit:

8. Submit electronic channel test reports to the Panduit
• Patch cords (2)
Warranty Department with all required warranty paperwork.
• Laptop computer
A channel warranty will then be given based on passing test
results.
Process description:
1. Determine bundles and cables to test:
Note: Panduit recommends for installers to install and test a
few channels before completing the entire system.
For 10GBASE-T (Category 6 TSB-155):
• To certify a complete installation, choose 1% or 5 links
whichever is greater. Start with the victim links as the
longest since the highest insertion loss links are of the
highest risk of failing
• Include links that are terminated in neighboring

positions in the patch panel if not in the bundle
• Typically a 10 meter shorter link will achieve 1.5 or 2 dB

improved margin
• Include all of the links in the bundle as disturber links
If links are in the same bundle and are the same length: 7. When finished select end 2 and repeat.
• For victims, choose 10% of the links in each bundle
and round partial links down to the nearest link. For 8. When finished, select PSAACR-F. Repeat as for
example, for a bundle of 12, test 1 link. PSANEXT but now the main and remote units will be on
• Next move down to the next longest bundle. As the opposite ends as shown below. If the patch cord is not long
lengths get shorter the results improve. Once 3 bundles enough, use 2 patch cords and a separate link as the syn-
of worst case margin 5 dB or better is achieved testing chronization link.
is finished.
9. When finished, select end 2 and repeat.
For Category 6A:
• Select the longest and shortest links
• Apply rules for 10GBASE-T
2. For alien testing, Fluke recommends performing a Set

Reference at least once a day.
3. Perform permanent link internal testing to the appropriate

standard and save all internals of the bundle under test to a
separate folder. All links must pass internals.
4. Open the AxTalk Analyzer application and click on the new Pass/fail determination:
icon to start a new victim file. Browse for the folder contain- • For 10GBASE-T (Category 6 TSB-155) the overall
ing the bundle internal tests. Select the file to be used as the pass or fail is determined from Alien Cross talk Margin
victim link. By saving, the application will automatically title Computation (ACMC) in the results detail. As long as
as the victim file as titled from the internal file selected. the ACMC average is positive, the overall status is a
pass.
5. Select the appropriate standard from the test limit menu.
• For Category 6A, ACMC does not exist, and any single
6. Select end 1 and PSANEXT from the radio buttons. Run failure of any pair will result in an overall fail.
test and follow the directions. Connect the main and remote
as shown below. The Main will always be the victim and the For additional information, see Alien Crosstalk User Manual
Remote the disturber. For PSANEXT both units are on the located under the help tab in the AxTalk Analyzer application.
same end and the opposite end will have terminated plugs.
Run a separate disturber test for each non-victim link of the
bundle for end 1, while making the appropriate connection
changes. This involves moving the remote and termination
plug to the next disturber.
4.1.3.3 Standards Limits
TIA Category 6A Channel

Freq. Insertion NEXT PSNEXT Return ACR-F PS ACR-F ACR-N PSACR-N
(MHz) Loss (db) (dB) (dB) Loss (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)
1 3 65.0 62.0 19.0 63.3 60.3
4 4.2 63.0 60.5 19.0 51.2 48.2
8 5.8 58.2 55.6 19.0 45.2 42.2
10 6.5 56.6 54.0 19.0 43.3 40.3
16 8.2 53.2 50.6 18.0 39.2 36.2
20 9.2 51.6 49.0 17.5 37.2 34.2
25 10.2 50.0 47.3 17.0 35.3 32.3
31.25 11.5 48.4 45.7 16.5 33.4 30.4
62.5 16.4 43.4 40.6 14.0 27.3 24.3
100 20.9 39.9 37.1 12.0 23.3 20.3
200 30.1 34.8 31.9 9.0 17.2 14.2
250 33.9 33.1 30.2 8.0 15.3 12.3
350 40.6 30.3 27.3 6.6 12.4 9.4
500 49.3 26.1 23.2 6.0 9.3 6.3
ISO Class EA Ch AMD1

1 4 65.0 62.0 19.0 63.3 60.3 61.0 58.0
4 4.2 63.0 60.5 19.0 51.2 48.2 58.9 56.4
8 5.8 58.2 55.6 19.0 45.2 42.2 52.4 49.8
10 6.5 56.6 54.0 19.0 43.3 40.3 50.1 47.5
16 8.2 53.2 50.6 18.0 39.2 36.2 45.0 42.4
20 9.2 51.6 49.0 17.5 37.2 34.2 42.5 39.8
25 10.2 50.0 47.3 17.0 35.3 32.3 39.8 37.1
31.25 11.5 48.4 45.7 16.5 33.4 30.4 36.9 34.2
62.5 16.4 43.4 40.6 14.0 27.3 24.3 28.0 24.2
100 20.9 39.9 37.1 12.0 23.3 20.3 19.0 16.2
200 30.1 34.8 31.9 9.0 17.2 14.2 4.7 1.8
250 33.9 33.1 30.2 8.0 15.3 12.3 -0.8 -3.7
350 40.6 30.6 27.6 6.6 12.4 9.4 -10.0 -13.0
500 49.3 27.9 24.8 6.0 9.3 6.3 -21.4 -24.5
TIA Category 6 Channel

1 3 65.0 62.0 19.0 63.3 60.3 62.0 59.0
4 4.0 63.0 60.5 19.0 51.2 48.2 59.0 56.5
8 5.7 58.2 55.6 19.0 45.2 42.2 52.5 49.9
10 6.3 56.6 54.0 19.0 43.3 40.3 50.2 47.7
16 8.0 53.2 50.6 18.0 39.2 36.2 45.2 42.6
20 9.0 51.6 49.0 17.5 37.2 34.2 42.6 39.9
25 10.1 50.0 47.3 17.0 35.3 32.3 39.9 37.2
31.25 11.4 48.4 45.7 16.5 33.4 30.4 37.0 34.3
62.5 16.5 43.4 40.6 14.0 27.3 24.3 26.9 24.1
100 21.3 39.9 37.1 12.0 23.3 20.3 18.6 15.8
200 31.5 34.8 31.9 9.0 17.2 14.2 3.3 0.3
250 35.9 33.1 30.2 8.0 15.3 12.3 -2.8 -5.8
ISO 11801 Channel Class E

1 4 65.5 62.0 19.0 63.3 60.3 61.0 58.0
4 4.2 63.0 60.5 19.0 51.2 48.2 58.9 56.4
8 5.9 58.2 55.6 19.0 45.2 42.2 52.3 49.7
10 6.6 56.6 54.0 19.0 43.3 40.3 50.0 47.4
16 8.3 53.2 50.6 18.0 39.2 36.2 44.9 42.3
20 9.3 51.6 49.0 17.5 37.2 34.2 42.3 39.7
25 10.5 50.0 47.3 17.0 35.3 32.3 39.6 36.9
31.25 11.7 48.4 45.7 16.5 33.4 30.4 36.7 34.0
62.5 16.9 43.4 40.6 14.0 27.3 24.3 26.5 23.7
100 21.7 39.9 37.1 12.0 23.3 20.3 18.2 15.4
200 31.7 34.8 31.9 9.0 17.2 14.2 3.1 0.1
250 35.9 33.1 30.2 8.0 15.3 12.3 -2.8 -5.8
TIA Category 5e Channel

1 3 60.0 57.0 17.0 57.4 54.4 57.0 54.0
4 4.5 53.5 50.5 17.0 45.5 42.4 49.1 46.1
8 6.3 48.6 45.6 17.0 39.3 36.3 42.3 39.3
10 7.1 47.0 44.0 17.0 37.4 34.4 39.9 36.9
16 9.1 43.6 40.6 17.0 33.3 30.3 34.5 31.5
20 10.2 42.0 39.0 17.0 31.4 28.4 31.8 28.8
25 11.4 40.3 37.3 16.0 29.4 26.4 28.9 25.9
31.25 12.9 38.7 35.7 15.1 27.5 24.5 25.9 22.9
62.5 18.6 33.6 30.6 12.1 21.5 18.5 15.0 12.0
100 24.0 30.1 27.1 10.0 17.4 14.4 6.1 3.1
ISO 11801 Channel Class D

1 4 60.0 57.0 17.0 57.4 54.4 56.0 53.0
4 4.5 53.5 50.0 17.0 45.4 42.4 49.0 46.0
8 6.4 48.6 45.6 17.0 39.3 36.3 42.2 39.2
10 7.2 47.0 44.0 17.0 37.4 34.4 39.8 36.8
16 9.1 43.6 40.6 17.0 33.3 30.3 34.5 31.5
20 10.2 42.0 39.0 17.0 31.4 28.4 31.8 28.8
25 11.5 40.3 37.3 16.0 29.4 26.4 28.9 25.9
31.25 12.9 38.7 35.7 15.1 27.5 24.5 25.8 22.8
62.5 18.6 33.6 30.6 12.0 21.5 18.5 15.0 12.0
100 24.0 30.1 27.1 10.0 17.4 14.4 6.1 3.1
• Extended
4.1.4 Documenting
• HDTDX/HDTDR
* Pass /Fail only (minimum)
The following Permanent Link data should be documented
• All AUTOTESTS (better)
as a result of copper testing:
• Test limit
• Date of link testing
i.e. TIA, EN, ISO standards
• Names of personnel conducting the test.
• Cable type
• Test Equipment details
• UTP, FTP, SSTP, or using Manufacturer
(manufacturer, model, and serial number)
• NVP
• Test direction and end point locations
• Outlet configuration
• T568A or T568B
Using Fluke DTX 1800 field tester, the following should be
set before testing:
• Date and time
• Operator, Site, Company
• Store Plot Data
Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media
which has the outer jacketing colored orange and a 10Gig

4.2 Fiber Optic Media
Optimized cable which has the outer jacketing colored aqua.
The standard multimode cable is designed to be used with
4.2.1 Selection
LED (laser emitting diode) technology where the optimized
multimode fiber is designed to be used with VCSEL (Vertical
When choosing Ethernet fiber optic cabling solutions, the
Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) or laser type technologies.
following criteria should be taken into consideration prior to
• The types of multimode fiber used in today’s networks
installation to ensure system performance, reliability, and
include:
scalability.
• 62.5/125-μm (OM1) fiber, designed to achieve 10Base
and 100Base data rates, and now largely a legacy
4.2.1.1 Media Type
fiber;
• 50/125-μm (OM2) fiber, used to achieve 1-Gbit/sec
Two different types of fiber are available: single mode and
data rates and higher; and
multimode.
• 50/125-μm (OM2+, OM3, and OM3+) fiber, used to
achieve 10-Gbit/sec data rates and higher. OM2+ and
Single mode.
OM3+ fiber grades offer nearly double the bandwidth of
Singlemode fiber cable (commonly referred to as OS1 or
their parent fibers (“+” represents extended-reach OM2
OS2 cable) is a 125μm diameter fiber with a 9μm core that
and OM3 fiber).
is capable of carrying very high data rates over very long
lengths. The outer jacketing
4.2.1.2 Bandwidth and Reach
is colored yellow to distin-
guish it from other fiber ca-
Most fiber choices are based on an application-specific con-
ble types. OS1/OS2 fibers
sideration of bandwidth and reach (see Table 4.2-1).
should meet or exceed nu-
merous standards for optical
• Bandwidth is the information-carrying capacity of the fiber.
fiber, including ITU-TG.652
High-bandwidth fiber media allows longer-length channels,
(Categories A, B, C and D),
higher loss-budget margin, and greater design flexibility.
IEC 60793-2-50, ISO 11801 OS2, and TIA-492-CAAB and
Telecordia GR-20. Such fibers ensure performance over
• Reach (length) is a site-specific physical parameter that can
the entire 1260-1625nm spectrum and are compatible with
be used to immediately narrow your fiber options. In general,
legacy fiber and the geometric properties contributing to
as the data rate goes up, the reach goes down. Once reach
minimizing splice loss and increasing splice yield.
is established, you can narrow your fiber options by identify-
ing your users’ current and/or future bandwidth needs.
Multimode.
The preferred Physical Medium Dependent (PMD), or
Multimode cable is a 125μm diameter fiber with either a
transceiver, for 10-Gbit/sec fiber cabling systems is the short-
62.5μm or 50μm core that is capable of carrying a high data
wavelength (850-nm) VCSEL (vertical-cavity surface-emit-
rate over very short lengths when compared to the single-
ting laser)-based serial modular transceiver. These low-cost
mode cable. Multimode
electronics have captured the LAN market, are optimized
cable is categorized in six
and standardized for use with OM3 fiber up to 300 m, and
different categories: OM1,
are also compatible with OM2 fiber grades. Fiber media
OM2, OM2+, OM3, and
for these devices are optimized for the 850-nm wavelength
OM3+. OM1 cable has a
window, but maintain a minimum bandwidth of 500 MHz·km
core diameter of 62.5μm
for the 1310-nm window.
while the other cables (OM2
through OM4) have core
The most economical 10-Gbit/sec network channels are
diameters of 50μm. Each
those that deploy 50/125-μm fiber with serial transceiver
of these cable types are manufactured differently to allow for
electronics. The IEEE 802.3ae 10GBase-S standard speci-
better performance. There is the standard multimode cable
fies that only OM3 laser-optimized fiber can support 10-Gbit/ mance issues have an immediate and negative impact on
sec up to 300 meters (m). The standard recognizes that the bottom line. The PANDUIT® QuickNet™ fiber pre-termi-
other multimode cabling systems may support that rate over nated solution exceeds standards for 10 GB/s performance,
varying distances. For this reason, and as data center man- which leaves designers extra headroom in the channel for
agers look toward “future-proofing” their cabling solutions, channel upgrades and modifications.
OM3 has become the 50-μm fiber of choice for 10-Gbit/sec
premises and data center applications. • Pre-terminated components also are 100% factory termi-
nated and tested to deliver assured quality and consis-
The typical life of the physical infrastructure can reach 10-15 tent, reliable performance. Highly controlled, precision
years, and with regular maintenance the facilities infrastruc- termination processes for fiber take place in a clean factory
ture and structured cabling are both expected to support environment to offer a strong advantage over the variability
multiple generations of IT equipment. It also is generally pre- that can result from terminating many data center links under
dicted that most (if not all) links in the data center will need adverse field conditions.
to carry 10 Gb/s in the near future with certain critical “core”
links supporting even faster data rates. For these reasons, • Quick-snap connections reduce fiber link install times for
a 10-Gigabit ready cabling infrastructure is recommended, a very high speed of deployment. Cassette-based fiber as-
with data center speed and reach requirements favoring the semblies that plug in quickly throughout the data center dras-
deployment of OM3 fiber optic links. tically reduce installation time and cost. When you consider
the hundreds or thousands of permanent links in today’s
Table 4.2-1. control rooms, the time and money saved using pre-termi-
Multimode Fiber Types and Reach / Bandwidth Characteristics nated solutions adds up quickly and helps designers and
installers to keep on schedule
(and even more importantly,
on budget).
• Finally, pre-terminated
solutions are engineered for
high design flexibility and
scalability. These modular
solutions help achieve high
densities per unit of rack
space and promote efficient
use of floor space. The
modularity of pre-terminated
4.2.1.3 Pre-Terminated Solutions solutions also allows the control room to quickly and easily
scale up as needed, which is especially valuable in high-
Pre-terminated cabling solutions are ideally suited for quick growth storage areas. And the speed and ease of deploy-
deployment in dense control room areas. The pre-tested ment translates into a similar ease to upgrade and maintain
modular construction of these cable assemblies offer several the system, as it takes very little time to make necessary
key advantages over using multi-connector cables that moves, ads and changes.
require time-consuming punchdown and testing:
• The primary benefit of using pre-terminated solutions is

that they offer consistently high and precisely known levels
of performance for improved network integrity. This
level of reliability is crucial in all environments, where chan-
nel insertion loss budgets are very tight and channel perfor-
4.2.1.4 Harsh Environments 4.2.1.5 Hybrid Patch Cords (SC-to-LC, etc.)
Optical fibers are housed in jackets of many different kinds, New technologies have brought LC (small form factor type)
for deployment under a variety of environmental conditions. connectors into the industry. Although they are becoming
The three most common cable types are non-armored, ar- predominant, there are still many older legacy systems that
mored, and IP-rated. still utilize SC, FC or ST type connectors that need to transi-
tion to this newer form factor. There are many different offer-
• Non-armored is a standard cable that runs in cabling ings of hybrid type patch cords that will enable this transition
basket or cable ladder internal to a control, protected very easily.
environment. This cabling type also can be installed
in a duct system or pipe system depending on the
environment.
• Armored cabling has a protected aluminum or metal

housing around the fiber cable that protects the cabling
from crushing or animal intrusion if it is buried
underground.
• IP-rated cabling is rated for high-temperatures, is

chemically resistant, and can be used in harsh
environments.
Of these options, non-armored fiber optic cabling is the

most cost-effective choice, as it can withstand temperatures
between -40° to 167°F (-40° to 75°C) and therefore can be
deployed in a majority of cases.
Building the Fiber Optic Channel

Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Cable OptiCam® Pre-Polished Cam Fiber
Specifications Optic Termination Kits
10 GbE fiber optic, Standard singlemode and Features
multimode indoor cable are available. Larger • Virtually eliminates operator error by
distribution cable features a 6-fiber sub-unit design that providing visual indication of proper termination after the
simplifies fiber identification, provides easy access and cam step has been completed
routing of the fibers, and increases cable durability with a • No adhesive or electricity required for termination
dielectric central strength member. • Include installation instructions and stripping templates for
all PANDUIT® OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor LC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors
Cable – Pre-Polished Cam Termination
Specifications Specifications
This LSZH rated cable provides water-block- LC small form factor (SFF) pre-polished
ing, high density, and easy installation in duct applications connectors with rear pivot latch shall be TIA/EIA-604 FO-
and entrance facilities. Fiber optic indoor/outdoor cable CIS-10 compatible and contain a factory-terminated fiber,
meets the IEC 60794-1 standards. 10 GbE fiber optic eliminating field polishing and adhesive. LC pre-polished
indoor/outdoor cable as well as multimode and singlemode connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB
indoor/outdoor cables are available. per mated pair for multimode fiber. LC pre-polished
connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action
allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation
in performance.
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor SC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors
Interlocking Armored Cable – Pre-Polished Cam Termination
Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the need for inner SC pre-polished fiber optic connectors shall be TIA/EIA-604
duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush resistant pathway. FOCIS-3 compliant and contain a factory-terminated fiber,
Available in 6- 144 fiber counts. Multimode (OM3, OM2, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. SC pre-polished
and OM1) and singlemode (OS1/OS2) fiber available opti- connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB
mized) fiber available. Opti-Core® 10Gig™ OM3 Cable is per mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber. SC pre-
designed to support network transmission speeds up to 10 polished connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one
Gb/s for link lengths up to 300 meters with an 850nm source action allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degra-
per IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard; backward compatible dation in performance.
for use with all 50/125μm system requirements
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/ Outdoor Armored Cable Grounding Kit
Interlocking Armored Cable Specifications
Specifications Crimped jumper wire assembly; 24”
Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the (609.6mm) length; LCC6-14, #10
need for inner duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush mechanical clamp; provided with two each #12-24, M6 slot-
resistant pathway for improved design flexibility and lower ted hex head zinc-plated thread-forming screws, and black
installed cost. OPTI-CORE ® 10GIG™ Fiber Optic Indoor polypropylene terminal cover.
Interlocking Armored Cable features the highest quality
OM3 laser optimized fiber to support 10Gb/s applications
while maintaining compatibility with existing 50μm multi-
mode systems. RoHS compliant singlemode and multimode
cable is available in fiber counts from 6 to 48 fibers.
Building the Fiber Optic Channel

10Gig® 50/125um (OM3) Multimode Fiber Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs)
Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications
Specifications Fiber adapter panels are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS
Patchcords shall include LC, SC, ST or Snap quickly into the front of all components.
MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs Phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split
or jacks on both ends. Pigtails shall include simplex or sleeves to fit specific network requirements;
duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode
plugs or jacks on one end and open (unterminated) on the applications.
other end.
Multimode 62.5/125um (OM1) or 50/125 Opticom® Rack Mounted Fiber
(OM2) Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Enclosures
Patch cords shall include simplex or duplex Rack mounted fiber enclosures house, organize, manage
LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or and protect fiber optic cable, terminations, splices, connec-
keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. Pigtails shall include tors and patch cords. The enclosures accommodate fiber
simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ adapter panels (FAP) and fiber mount panels (FMP) plus
or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (untermi- associated trunk cables, connectors and patch cords.
nated) on the other end.
Singlemode 9/125um (OS1/OS2) Fiber Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels
Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications
Specifications Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels mount to
RoHS compliant fiber optic patch cords shall any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack and accept all Mini-Com®
include simplex or duplex LC or keyed LC, Adapter Modules and Jack Modules including LC, SC, and
SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or MTP* fiber adapter modules. Modular patch panels are
jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant fiber optic pigtails shall available in a variety of sizes and styles in both flat and
include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, angled patch panel versions. Individual adapter module
or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unter- identification is provided via pre-numbered ports and provi-
minated) on the other end. sions for field generated port ID labels.
LC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter SC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter
Modules Modules
LC Sr./Sr. and Sr./Jr. small form factor (SFF) SC fiber optic adapter modules are
fiber optic adapter modules are TIA/EIA-604 TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible. They shall be compat-
FOCIS-10 compatible. LC adapters and adapter modules shall ible with Mini-Com® products for complete modularity. They
include phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applica- shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves
tions or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applica- to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split
tions. They shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic sleeves are required for singlemode applications.
split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia
ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications.
Opticom® Fiber Adapter Patch Panels
Specifications Fiber adapter patch
panels mount to any 19” wide EIA-310
style rack. Standard version holds QuickNet™ MTP* Cassettes and Opti-
com® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Angled version holds Opticom® Fiber
Adapter Panels and matches Mini-Com® Angled Patch Panel profile. Used
with Opticom® Fiber Mount Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and terminations.
tors (FC, ST, SC, etc). PANDUIT solutions include pre-pol-

4.2.2 Building the Fiber Optic Cable
ished, pre-tested LC solutions that can be field installed
Channel with Stratix Switches
without adhesives or heat, and pre-tested “hybrid” patch
cords that can transition from legacy connections to the LC
Fiber-based media for Stratix switch systems offer advantages
connector required for the Stratix switch.
in distance and noise immunity over copper-based systems.
The selection of both SFP module and fiber media must be
PANDUIT solutions also can be utilized to easily transition
made together for an optimized solution that delivers on the
between connector types when upgrading switches or cable
distance, environmental and performance requirements for the
infrastructures. For example, an existing cabling infrastruc-
application, also keeping an eye on future needs.
ture with ST connections can remain in place when upgrad-
ing to the new Stratix (LC connector) switch. An ST-to-ST
Stratix SFP modules are available in four models that sup-
adapter can be mounted in a surface mount box or bracket
port multimode (shorter reach) and singlemode fibers (longer
to accept the existing ST cabling. Then, an ST-to-LC hybrid
reach) at both 100Mb (100BASE) and 1Gb (1000BASE)
patch cord can then be used to connect the new Stratix
communication rates. PANDUIT provides fiber solutions
switch to the existing cabling infrastructure. In this way, net-
that achieve high performance at the maximum rates and
work stakeholders can avoid costly replacement of horizon-
channel distances supported by these modules in a range of
tal cabling and minimize or eliminate network disruption due
environmental hardening for indoor and outdoor use.
to the switch upgrade. This section includes selection guide
and examples for fiber channels that include adapting legacy
The diagram below shows elements of a basic fiber optic
cable to the LC connectors on the Stratix switch.
channel from Stratix switch to the control room. This section
of the Guide provides an overview of fiber media cabling and
PANDUIT solutions include the related products that provide
patch cord options available for building a fiber optic channel.
secure mounting, slack fiber management, critical bend
radius control, and identification. Keyed connector solutions
PANDUIT offers an extensive range of solutions to accom-
allow segregation of redundant or multiple rings or infrastruc-
modate both new installations, where the channel compo-
ture levels or to lock in critical links or block out open ports.
nents can be fully specified to a standard, as well as retrofits
where patching must be done from other standard connec-
4.2.2.1 SELECTING STRATIX SFP MODULES AND

SPECIFYING FIBER MEDIA
The following table correlates available Stratix SFP switch

modules to fiber media options for horizontal cabling, with
PANDUIT part numbers listed in right-hand columns.
It is generally predicted that most (if not all) cabling links in

the data center will need to carry 10 Gb/s in the near future.
For the factory floor or control room physical infrastructure,
specifying 10 Gig 50 μm fiber optic links will cost effectively
connect with the current 1000Base-SX SFP of the Stratix
but also be ready for higher rates as 10 Gb/s communication
is extended to the factory floor.
4.2.2.2 Specifying Fiber Patch Cables for

Stratix Cables for Stratix SFP Modules
The Stratix SFP modules use LC connectors, which are

acknowledged as offering superior performance compared
to other fiber connectors. However, for retrofit applications,
there is often a need to transition from LC connectors to
other connector types.
PANDUIT offers a wide range of “hybrid” patch cords that

allow for patching from legacy cabling to the Stratix SFP
modules.
4.2.3 Adapters for Legacy Fiber
The following adapter parts are used to connect legacy fiber

cable to LC patch cables that mate with the Stratix switch line.
4.2.4 End-to-End Channel Building
Multimode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 1783-SFP100FfX

or 1783-SFP1GSX
The diagram above shows a fiber link for Stratix modules

1783-SFP100FfX or 1783-SFP1GSX.
• In the control panel, the Stratix switch will connect to • In the control room a rack mount enclosure will house
the surface mount box with a multimode SC to ST a SC fiber adapter panel which will be utilized to
patch cord. The multimode horizontal cabling (pre- connect the horizontal cabling to the switch via an SC
terminated SC to pigtail solution shown) can be to SC patch cord.
terminated in the control panel utilizing either field
polish connectors, OptiCam™ pre-polished connectors,
or a pre-terminated pigtail solution if fiber splicing is an
option (ST OptiCam™ connector option is shown).
(continued on next page)
Part ordering for fiber link constructed for the 1783-SF-

P100FfX or 1783-SFP1GSX includes:
4.2.4.1 End-to-End Channel Building
Singlemode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 1783-SFP100LX

or 1783-SFP1GLX
The diagram above shows a fiber link for Stratix modules

1783-SFP100LX or 1783-SFP1GLX.
In the control panel, the Stratix switch will connect to the In the control room a rack mount enclosure will house a
surface mount box with singlemode LC to LC Keyed patch keyed LC fiber adapter panel which will be utilized to con-
cords (LC Lock-In and keyed solution shown as a secu- nect the horizontal cabling to the switch via a Keyed LC to
rity feature). The singlemode horizontal cabling (armored LC patch cord.
cabling shown with grounding kit) can be terminated in the
control panel and control room utilizing field polish connec-
tors, OptiCam™ connectors or a pre-terminated pigtail solu-
tion if fiber splicing is an option (keyed OptiCam™ connector
option is shown). Ordering information for the option shown:
4.2.4.2 End-to-End Channel Building
Singlemode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 8000 8-Port Fiber The line is used to drag the cable back through the conduit.
Expansion Unit Using 100FX LC-Style Connectors on If the cable is not installed in a conduit, the cable is placed
Stratix 1783-SFP100LX or 1783-SFP1GLX along the designed cable route and secured with manufac-
turer recommended cable ties or cable clamps, dependent
The Stratix 8000 can accommodate a maximum of one upon the cable route.
expansion unit with integrated 100FX LC-style fiber optic
connectors. The following diagram shows the fiber optic ele- During installation, the cable is under tension. For this
ments utilized under this scenario to complete a fiber optic reason, manufacturers provide cable tension information
channel from the Control Room to factory equipment. This with their cables so damage will not incur during install.
channel runs from a switch in the Control Room to a Stratix One way to minimize cable tension is to install pull boxes.
switch and expansion module located in a Control Panel, Pull boxes should be located so that cables are not pulled
and then to equipment on the factory floor. through a continuous run with bends that exceed 180º (for
example: two 90°
bends, four 45° bends,
or one 90° bend and two
45° bends). In addition
to this, cable pulling
lubricants can be applied
to the cable as it is being
pulled through the run to
reduce friction and ease
pulling tensions.
Cable bend radius is

another important pa-
rameter involved in cable
installation. . This is the
maximum bend that can
be introduced into a fiber cable before the transmit signal
4.2.5 Installation within the cable begins to refract or escape through the fiber
cladding. Excessive bending will lead to micro fractures in
Both outside plant and in-building communications cable are the cable resulting in a higher overall cable attenuation and
often placed in conduit or duct. This is dependent upon the possible irreversible damage.
construction of the fiber cable. If it has an armoring manu-
factured into the cable, then the cable can usually be placed Table 4B-2 summarizes the bend radii for Panduit non-ar-
without additional protection with the exception of areas with mored distribution cable. The bend radius of the Interlocking
the cable would be exposed to extreme conditions such as armored cable has been specified within the cable specifica-
heat, heavy construction traffic, etc. tions sheets in Appendix B.
4.2.5.1 Cable Pulling Fiber cable is shipped on a spool. Un-spooling of the fiber
cable during installation also assists in relieving cable ten-
The most common method of installing cable is called cable sions by relieving the curving introduced in the cable created
pulling. If the cable is placed in conduit, a line is threaded by the cable spooling process. Figure 4.2-1 shows how the
through the conduit which will act as a pull device. Once cable reel would be placed on jack stands and un-spooled in
pulled through the entire run the line is attached to the cable. a figure eight configuration.
Fiber cable is shipped on a spool. Un-spooling of the fiber

cable during installation also assists in relieving cable ten-
sions by relieving the curving introduced in the cable created
by the cable spooling process. Figure 4.2-1 shows how the
cable reel would be placed on jack stands and un-spooled in
a figure eight configuration.
After the fiber is un-spooled, the whole figure eight can be

flipped (or rolled) to allow easy cable pulling from the figure
eight. If space does not allow for this installation procedure,
the fiber can be installed right off the reel, but it will not have
the opportunity to relax from the spooling process and some
twisting of the fiber may occur, causing higher attenuation
values.
Table 4.2-2. Bend Radius of Panduit Non-Armored

Distribution Fiber Cable
Figure 4.2-1. Fiber Cable Un-spooling For Installation.
4.2.5.2 Terminating OPTICAM® Fiber Optic Connectors
Pre-Polished Cam Termination

• Provide field termination in less than half the time of
field polish connectors
• Patent pending re-termination capability provides yield
rates approaching 100%
• A single OPTICAM® Termination Tool (OCTT) provides
fast and easy terminations
• User-friendly tool utilizes an integrated visual fault
locator (VFL) for visual indication of proper termination
after the cam step has been completed
• System virtually eliminates operator error and delivers
yield rates approaching 100% for lower installed costs
Prepare OptiCAM termination tool.
Verify Opticam connector
OPTICAM® Termination
LC Connector Mounting
Hold the connector body with the latch facing up and slide
the connector body into the LC Cradle. The connector is
inserted fully when the backbone threads rest completely on
the cradle flange as shown.
SC Connector Mounting
Remove both dust caps from the connector inner housing
assembly; then place the inner housing assembly into the
OCTT cradle as shownat right:
Reference Setting – Method B

4.2.6 Testing
Connect one reference lead from tester terminal labeled Out-
put (A) to the power meter terminal labeled Input (B). Refer
1. Setting a Reference Value
to TIA/EIA 526-14A Std. Method B.
There are two methods for setting a reference value pre-
sented below.
Note: This method can only be used when the connector
types of the LUT and connectors on the reference leads are
Precaution:
of the same type. This method is used in conjunction with
Make sure that the tester is fully charged and within current
the One Jumper test method described later in the document.
calibration date before testing.
Method B for Setting Reference

Note: In the event the tester has been stored in a cold en-
vironment, make no attempt to test or set reference values
until the tester comes up to an ambient temperature – this
will eliminate fluctuations in accuracy.
It is important to clean all connector enfaces (reference

Even though Method “B” is proven to be slightly more ac-
jumpers and Link Under Test (LUT) connectors) with alcohol
curate when setting a Ref Value, not all fiber techs have the
and lint-free wipes prior to testing. Ensure that the reference
same connector types as the Link Under Test. Therefore,
leads are in good condition and meet specifications in sec-
most rely on Method “A” above.
tion 12.0 Test Lead Performance Verification before test-
ing. Note that mandrels are not required for links with OS1
Follow test unit manufacturer’s instructions for setting refer-
(Singlemode) fiber.
ence values for the applicable wavelengths, numbers of
adapters, splices, etc. Once the test system is referenced,
Reference Setting – Method A
the launch and receive leads may not be removed from the
Connect one reference lead to tester terminal labeled
test equipment. Doing so will require re-referencing.
Output (A) and the other reference lead to the tester termi-
nal labeled Input (B). Mate the other ends of the reference
NOTE: On less sophisticated light source/power meters, the
leads together in an adapter (Refer to TIA/EIA 526-14A Std.
normal method to establish a reference value is as follows:
Method A. This method is used in conjunction with the Two
Jumper and Three Jumper test methods described later in
1. Connect Launch and Receive leads with a mating adapter.
the document.
2. Record the loss shown on the power meter. This will be
your reference value.
Method A for Setting Reference
3. Connect Launch and Receive leads to their respective
ends of the link under test.
4. Measure the loss. Record this value.
5. Subtract the value recorded in Step 2 from the value in step 4.
6. This is your actual link loss.
Follow test unit manufacturer’s instructions for setting refer-

This is only necessary when the tester being used does not
ence values for the applicable wavelengths, numbers of
have the same adapter as the LUT.
adapters, splices, etc.
Good reference values average around -19.0dB for

62.5/125μm, - 24.0dB for 50/125μm and around
-8.0dB for 9/125μm fiber.
2. Testing a Permanent Link ible method. In utilizing this method, you have to set a refer-
Unless otherwise stated, all permanent link loss testing of a ence value using Method B.
segment shall be performed with a handheld power meter/
source. This equipment will measure link attenuation, which Store/record permanent link loss measurement for future
is the most important performance parameter when install- reference.
ing components. Maximum allowable attenuation of Ethernet
applications is shown in Table 4.2-3. Figure 4.2-2. One Jumper Method
OTDR testing is not a requirement in fiber certification. In

fact, this basic fiber certification (Tier 1) with a power me-
ter and light source is the only type of testing required by
TIA-568B for premises cabling. This test method measures
end-to-end insertion loss by using a power meter and light
source. If the attenuation is within the limits of the allotted
power budget, the system will work. PANDUIT does not
recommend testing links via the OTDR method.
Table 4.2-3. Acceptable Link Loss for Ethernet Applications
Link Loss = LBX + LXY + LYC
Where LBX is the loss value of

the adapter on the transmit side,
LYC is the loss value of the
adapter on the receive side and
LXY is the total link under test.
As shown in Figure 4.2-2 above,

start by setting a reference as
described previously in this
Link-Loss Test Recommended Methods document. Once the reference is set, we are ready to move
There are two standard methods of completing a link loss on to test the LUT.
test that Panduit recommends:
• One Jumper Method (Method B) It is best to test the LUT from the fiber adapter panel to fiber
• Two Jumper Method (Method A) adapter panel. This ensures that all splices, connections,
and fiber cables in the link are included in the test. These
Note that in all of the methods that will be discussed “refer- two points are labeled as X and Y in the above illustration.
ence quality” patch cords and adapters need to be used to
ensure accurate, repeatable and reproducible measurements. The source side remains at one end of the link while the me-
ter side is moved to the far end receive side of the link. Link
One Jumper Method (Method B) loss will be calculated by the test equipment. If not, it can
The one jumper method calculates the link loss as the loss of be calculated by subtracting link loss minus the Reference
the two adapters and the link under test. This is the preferred value measured.
method as outlined in TIA/EIA 568-B.1 and the secondary
method outlined in ISO/IEC 11801. Here the power meter
test lead must have the same connector type as the LUT.
This has been proven to be the most accurate and reproduc-
Two Jumper Method (Method A) 3. Interpreting Test Results

The two jumper method calculates the link loss as the loss of Most fiber loss test sets provide a Pass/Fail indication. Each
the adapter in the original reference setup subtracted from tester has a means of manually defining the link under test
the sum of the two adapters and the link under test. This (LUT) so the test results will be given based upon the amount
method is preferred by contractors even though it is not of light loss and knowing those optical characteristics which
referenced in ISO/IEC 11801 because the power meter test have a direct affect on the total optical loss of the LUT. The
lead does not have to have the same connector type as the link characteristics you need to define to the tester include:
LUT. This method also assumes that a majority of the loss is
in the fiber cable itself and not the connectors. • Core Size: 50/125μm, 62.5/125μm, or 9/125μm.
• Number of adapters in the link (normally two)
Figure 4B-3. Two Jumper Method • Number of splices (mechanical or fusion)
Note: The link length does not need to be defined; the tester
will determine the link length. If the Fluke DTX-1800 is used,
it measures the length by gathering the values from the fiber
characteristics (such as Index of Refraction) combined with
the time it takes the light source to reach the remote unit
and this allows the unit to calculate the length of the fiber
run. Given that the index of refraction is the speed the light
travels through the fiber, all we need is the time it takes at
that speed to determine the distance the light has traveled.
Based upon the Ref Value you have set plus the Link
Link Loss = LBX + LXY + LYC - LBC characteristics defined to the tester, it will provide you with
a PASS or FAIL based upon the Industry Standards stored
Where LBX is the loss of the adapter on the transmit side, within the tester’s firmware. The most current tester firmware
LXY is the loss of the link under test, LYC is the loss of should be available from the vendor’s website and should
the adapter on the receive side and LBC is the loss of the always be up to date on the tester.
adapter in the reference setup.
PASS / FAIL:
As shown in the Figure 4.2-3 above, start by setting a refer- Some testers automatically determine whether a link
ence as described previously in this document. Once the passes or fails depending on a number of given
reference is set, we are ready to move on to test the LUT. specifications internal to the tester that are selected
before testing. If the tester does not automatically
It is best to test the LUT from the fiber adapter panel to fiber determine PASS / FAIL then use the calculation
adapter panel. This ensures that all connections, patch presented in Section 6.0 to determine the maximum
cables, and fiber cables in the link are included in the test. allowable link loss (Reference TIA/EIA 568-B.1 Std.,
These two points are labeled as X and Y in the above illus- Section 11.3.3.4).
tration.
PASS or FAIL is a matter of measuring permanent link
The source side remains at one end of the link while the optical power loss against accepted industry standards per
meter side is moved to the far end receive side of the link. IEC/TIA 568-B.1. If a link fails immediately, it is possibly a
Link loss will be calculated by the test equipment, if not it can polarity issue where the transmit and receive patch cords
be calculated by subtracting the Loss of the Link measures are flipped. Consider using a visual light source to manually
during the link test minus the Reference value measured. observe whether light can travel from one end of the link to
the other. This is a safe and practical means of troubleshoot-
ing. This will save time as testing post-installation will likely
reveal some polarity problems, which are much easier to Assuming the initial core-to-core alignment was off-center,
correct than other light loss or light obstruction problems. taking the reference value now will indicate a higher amount
of loss than normally found. Continuing with the test and
Tester Link Loss Formula: connecting both ends of the reference leads to the LUT can
Optical Link Headroom = Permanent Link Loss Budget actually improve the loss amount since the core-to-core
– Permanent Link Loss Measured alignment can be made better without the offsets of the
reference leads. Tests completed in this scenario will surely
If the test results show that your Optical Link Headroom show erroneous light gains, commonly known as “gainers”.
is equal or greater than the Permanent Link Loss Budget,
the tester will show a PASS. If the Optical Link Headroom 4.2.7 Documenting
displayed is in the negative direction, your Permanent Link
Loss Budget is experiencing too much optical loss and will In compliance with TIA/EIA-526-14A “Optical Power Loss
not meet IEC/TIA 568-B.1 requirements and show a FAIL. Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant”
and TIA/EIA-526-7 “Measurement of Optical Power Loss
With the tester set up to correctly reflect the optical char- of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant”, the following
acteristics of the Permanent Link, test the link to see if the permanent link data should be documented as a result of
losses encountered are within the allowable limits set by the link loss testing:
IEC/TIA that have already been loaded into the tester.
• Date of link testing
Sometimes the test results may show that more light was • Names of personnel conducting the test
“gained” in the link. This result is erroneous and called a • Test equipment details (manufacturer, model,
“gainer” or an increase in optical power from the referenced serial number)
value to the total loss of the LUT. • Center wavelength(s) and spectral width(s) of the test unit
• Fiber details (type)
For example, if the reference value for a given link is –25dB • Test direction and end point locations
but in testing a LUT your meter now reads only –19.5 dB, • Reference power measurement (if applicable)
your link has gained power! This is not possible and should • Segment link loss results
alert you to a problem within the link. • Link loss budget
There are two possible causes for “gainers.”
(1) Your reference leads connectors enfaces were initially

dirty and when you disconnected the reference leads to
attach to the LUT, the dirt/debris is displaced and now
you have significantly more light being received at the
far end
(2) The second way to gain light is when the core-to-core

alignment of the reference leads is not well centered
with one another. This can be improved, insuring that
proper reference cords are being used and not just
“bucket” cords and by using zirconia ceramic split
sleeves found in the blue singlemode adapters rather
than the phosphor bronze split sleeves found in the
electric ivory multimode adapters. Zirconia ceramic split
sleeves maintain better core-to-core alignment than
phosphor bronze split sleeves.
Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding
Ground/Earth– A conducting connection, whether intention-

4.3 Grounding and Bonding
al or incidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is
connected to the ground/earth, or to some conducting body
From the control room or data center, to the manufacturing
of relatively large extent that serves in place of the earth.
floor and to facilities operations --in all of these areas, there
are critical systems that require proper grounding and bond-
High Frequency Bonding – Creating equal potential be-
ing. Protecting those systems, equipment and personnel
tween electrical devices and its infrastructure components
helps to ensure equipment reliability and, thus, availability of
in a system to minimize the effects of electrical noise and
services and lower operational expense. Network equipment,
electromechanical interference.
such as switches, routers, and storage devices can cost up
to hundreds of thousands of dollars. The loss of network
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - When the build-up of static
equipment can be very costly, but the real danger is the
electricity on an object is transferred to a grounded object or
downtime that can be caused by the failure of this network
an object of lower potential.
equipment, especially with today’s automated systems and
processes. Downtime can have serious consequences.
ACRONYMS
GEC – Grounding Electrode Conductor
A well engineered grounding and bonding system is critical
GES – Grounding Electrode System
to the safety and performance of power distribution, control,
MCBN – Mesh Common Bonding Network
communications, security and IT systems. It is vital that the
TBB – Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
network equipment in Industrial Automation environments be
TEBC – Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor
properly bonded and grounded to protect workers and equip-
TGB – Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
ment from electrical surges, transient voltages, electrical
TMGB – Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar
noise and electrostatic discharge (ESD). While the National
Electric Code provides good grounding and bonding guid-
STANDARDS and CODES
ance for the safety of personnel and the robust equipment
within an electrical distribution system, extra attention must
ANSI/TIA-1005 / ANSI/TIA-1005-1
be paid to the protection of the sensitive electronic equip-
Publication of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Stan-
ment found in today’s networks.
dard for Industrial Premises and its first addendum, cover-
ing Industrial Pathways and Spaces, is forthcoming is 2009.
This section of the Guide provides an overview of the differ-
The documents are based on the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and
ent grounding and bonding systems, standards and codes
TIA-569-B series of standards, and they include appropriate
and definition of key terms, acronyms to help you make
allowances and exceptions to those standards for industrial
better decisions in the selection of proper grounding and
premises. They also contain techniques to mitigate me-
bonding techniques and equipment for industrial automation
chanical, ingress, climate/chemical, and electromechanical
spaces and applications. Sometimes the amount of informa-
(M.I.C.E.) effects across multiple areas.
tion can seem overwhelming even to seasoned profession-
als, especially in the area of grounding and bonding. Howev-
TIA/EIA-942
er it is more important than ever to keep up-to-date with the
TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
industry standards, best practices, highest quality products
for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for
and partners that know and understand what is required to
the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and
install and maintain these systems.
computer rooms.
DEFINITIONS
ANSI/J-STD-607-A-2002
Bonding – The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an
ANSI/J-STD-607-A-2002 (Commercial Building Ground-
electrically conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and
ing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications)
the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
specifies the minimum requirements for the telecommunica-
tions grounding and bonding infrastructure for buildings with • Provides equalization paths and ports for ESD
telecom rooms, communication rooms, data centers, control protection wrist straps
rooms, network rooms and wherever sensitive electronic • Supports the proper operation of surge protective
equipment is found. devices for ITE and power circuits
• Promotes electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) within
IEEE Std. 1100-2005 the data center environment
IEEE Std. 1100-2005 (IEEE Recommended Practice for • Must adhere to all local electrical codes, and should be
Powering and Grounding of Electronic Equipment) recom- listed with a nationally recognized test lab (such as
mends a buildings power and grounding minimum require- Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.).
ments for sensitive electronic equipment.
In addition to meeting these standards, all grounding and
IEEE Std. 142-1991 bonding components should be listed with a nationally
IEEE Std. 142-1991 (IEEE Recommended Practice for recognized test lab (such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems) and must adhere to all local electrical codes. The PAN-
recommends grounding practices for the various power dis- DUIT® StructuredGround™ System for data center ground-
tribution system topologies and the equipment within those ing provides robust connections that have low resistance,
systems. are easy to install, and are easily checked during the
inspection process.
IEEE Std. 837-2002
IEEE Std. 837-2002 (IEEE Standard for Qualifying Perma-
nent Connections Used in Substation Grounding) recom-
mends the minimum requirements for connectors used in the
grounding electrode system such as connections to ground
rods, rings, meshes, ufer grounds and conductor electrodes.
NFPA 70®
NFPA 70® (2008 National Electrical Code) is the minimum
requirements for electrical installations.
NECA/BICSI 607
NECA/BICSI 607 (National Electrical Contractors Associa-
tion/Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.)
recommends minimum requires for telecommunications, IT
and network type of grounding and bonding systems.
According to standards TIA-942, J-STD-607-A-2002, and

IEEE Std. 1100 a properly designed grounding system as
shown in Figure 4C-1 has the following characteristics:
• Has an intentional design – each connection must be

engineered and installed to properly handle the
anticipated currents
• Bonds all metallic components to the grounding system
(e.g., equipment, racks, cabinets, access floors, ladder
racks, cable trays, water pipes, conduit, building steel, etc.)
• Is visually verifiable and generally arranged for ease of
inspection and testing
4.3.1 End-to-End Grounding & Bonding

System Elements
Figure 4.3-1. Example Grounding and Bonding System in a Control Room with Access
The following are the basic elements of an end-to-end
grounding and bonding system for industrial buildings and
environments. Each requires proper design and installa-
tion by trained and qualified personnel, and is discussed in
further detail below.
• Grounding electrode system
• Utility entrance facility / grounding and bonding
infrastructure
• Telecommunications system grounding for the
Control Room
• Control system grounding
cal Code. Components that are used in the GES should be

4.3.1.1 Grounding Electrode System (GES)
listed with a testing agency (UL). For a higher quality GES
it should be constructed of high grade copper conductor and
The most critical part of any grounding system is the connec-
connections that are IEEE 837-2002 approved. Each build-
tion to earth which is the function of the grounding electrode
ing and each application can be different so each situation
system (see Figures 4C-2 and 4C-3). Design and installa-
has unique requirements that need to be considered.
tion of the grounding electrode system should be performed
by qualified and trained personnel. The GES is compro-
Selection of the GES components must be done during the
mised of grounding electrodes which may be present in an
planning phase of any project. The ground electrode system
installation depending on particular applications. Grounding
is the first part of the electrical system that gets installed
electrodes include ground rods and pipes, ground rings, Ufer
when constructing a new building. Since the GES is buried
grounds, structural steel, water pipes and ground meshes.
directly into the soil, high quality, tested connections help
lead to higher reliability. Every ground connection is impor-
The schematic diagram in Figure 4.3-2 shows a generic
tant all the way to the network equipment and it starts here
layout of a facilities grounding infrastructure including the
in the grounding electrode system. See Appendix C-1 for a
GES, the entrance facility bonding and the distribution of the
sample connector specification that can be used for writing
grounding system. Figure 4.3-3 shows a graphic represen-
project specifications.
tation of the elements of a GES. The requirements for the
GES are described in the NFPA 70®, 2008 National Electri-
Building the Grounding Electrode System

PANDUIT Part# Description
E-Style Grounding Connectors
GCE1/0-1/0 E Style Grounding Connector, Main/Tap #6 SOL - 1/0 STR
GCE250-1/0 E Style Grounding Connector, Main 1/0 STR - 250Kcmil, Tap #6 SOL - 1/0 STR, Ground
Rods 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar, 3/8’ - 1/2’
GCE250-250 E Style Grounding Connector, Main/Tap 1/0 STR - 250Kcmil, Ground Rods 1/2” - 5/8’,
Rebar 3/8” - 1/2”
GCE500-1/0 E Style Grounding Connector, Main 250 - 500 Kcmil, Tap #6 SOL - 1/0, Ground Rods 1/2’
- 3/4’, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4’
GCE500-250 E Style Grounding Connector, Main 250 - 500 Kcmil, Tap 1/0 STR - 250 Kcmil, Ground
Rods 1/2’ - 3/4’, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4’
Grounding Gross Connectors
GCC6X61/0-1/0 Grounding Cross Connectors, #6 SOL - 1/0 STR.
GCC6X6250-1/0 Grounding Cross Connector, (A) #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar 3/8”
- 1/2” (B) #6 SOL - 1/0 STR
GCC6X6250-250 Grounding Cross Connector, (A/B) #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil, Ground Rod 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar
3/8’ - 1/2”
GCC6X6500-1/0 Grounding Cross Connector, (A) 250 - 500 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 3/4”, Rebar 5/8”
- 3/4” (B) #6 SOL - 1/0 STR
GCC6X6500-250 Grounding Cross Connector, (A) 250 - 500 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 3/4”, Rebar 5/8”
- 3/4” (B) #2 SOL - 250 STR
Misc Components
GPC4H250-2 Grounding Plate Connector, #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil
GUBC500-6 Universal Beam Grounding Clamp, #6 AWG - 500Kcmil
Figure 4.3-2. Schematic View of a Generic Grounding Infrastructure
Figure 4.3-3. Grounding Electrode System Graphical Reference
vice panel. The following graphical representation of a build-

4.3.1.2 Utility Entrance Facility/Grounding
ing entrance facility serves as an example, keeping in mind
and Bonding Infrastructure
that every building presents unique challenges. Although
every entrance facility can look different, the basic require-
Once the connection is established to the ground or earth
ment of bonding the various components and/or systems
by the Grounding Electrode System, the next critical link is
together is the goal.
the bonding of that GES to the rest of the building systems.
That bonding should be done at the building’s utility entrance
ANSI/J-STD-607-A also requires a ground bar, called the
facility (see Figures 4.3-2, 4.3-4, and 4.3-5).The main con-
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) to be placed
nection from the GES outside the building to inside of the
in each equipment room to establish the grounding refer-
building is called the Grounding Electrode Conductor. The
ence. Each TGB will then be bonded back to the TMGB via
Grounding Electrode Conductor enters the building and
the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone or TBB. The
typically terminates at the main ground bus in the AC main
TBB should be a continuous conductor when possible to
service panel or to a main ground bus external to the AC
keep the resistance to a minimum. The TBB should bond to
main service panel. See Appendix C-2 for a sample ground-
each TGB by “tapping” off of the TBB as shown in Figure 4C-
ing and bonding specification that can be used for writing
7. It is important to properly size the TBB so it is adequate
project specifications.
to carry the current that is likely to be imposed on it. Table
4C-1 is from the standard and provides guidance for sizing
Once the main ground bus is established in the entrance
the TBB properly for the distance.
facility, grounding connections can be distributed to various
areas of the building. Those areas could be telecom rooms,
Some of the other important requirements from the standard
server rooms, data centers, control rooms and other similar
are related to the types of products and workmanship re-
type installations where sensitive electronic equipment is
quirements. The use of copper conductors, types of busbars
located. To establish a high quality, reliable and flexible
and the types of connectors are called out in the standard.
grounding and bonding infrastructure, ANSI/J-STD-607-A
One of the more important requirements of the standard
principles should be applied.
is the use of two-hole compression connectors for making
terminations at the TMGB and TGB. These types of connec-
The grounding system starts in the entrance facility with the
tors will provide a more reliable connection for the life of the
Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). The
installation. They will resist coming loose at the busbar and
TMGB is independent of the AC grounding system, but is
will not loosen up at the connector like a mechanical type of
bonded to the main ground bus in the AC main service panel
connector would over time.
or to another main ground bus external to the AC main ser-
Table 4C-1. Sizing the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TBB)

TBB Length in Linear meters (feet) TBB Size (AWG)
Less than 4 (13) 6 (16mm²)
4-6 (14-20) 4 (25mm²)
6-8 (21-26) 3 (25mm²)
8-10 (27-33) 2 (35mm²)
10-13 (34-41) 1 (35mm²)
13-16 (42-52) 1/0 (50mm²)
16-20 (53-66) 2/0 (70mm²)
Greater than 20 (66) 3/0 (95mm²)
Source: ANSI/J-STD-607-A
Building the Utility Entrance Facility Grounding System

GB4B0632TP-1 Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) 1/4” x 4” x 24”, Solid Copper, Tin Plated
HDW1/4-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers
HDW3/8-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers
HDW1/4-A-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers
HDW3/8-A-KT Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers
LCC250-38DW Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 250 MCM, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing
LCC4-12W Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 1/2’ stud hole, 1 3/4” spacing, NEMA
LCC6-14AW Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 6 AWG, 1/4’ stud hole, 5/8” spacing
GUBC500-6 Universal Beam Grounding Clamp
GPL-8 Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 1/2” to 3/4” pipe. #8 AWG to #4 AWG
GPL-16 Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 1” pipe. 2/0 AWG to 250 MCM
GPL-34 Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 2” pipe. 2/0 AWG to 250 MCM
KP1 Grounding Clamp for Water Pipes 1/2” to 1”, #10 AWG to #2 AWG
KP2 Grounding Clamp for Water Pipes 1 1/4” to 2”, #10 AWG to #2 AWG
LTYK Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Label Kit
GACB-1 Auxiliary Cable Bracket
GACBJ68U Auxiliary Cable Bracket Jumper Kit, 8”
GACBJ612U Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 12”,terminated at both ends
GACBJ618U Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 18”,terminated at both ends
Figure 4.3-4 Utility Entrance Facility
Figure 4.3-5. Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Requirements of the ANSI/J-STD-607-A
Figure 4.3-6. Data Center Grounding
Figure 4.3-7. Control Room Grounding
be deployed and bonded to the TGB. This process can be

4.3.1.3 Telecommunications System
broken into two smaller steps: (1) ensuring electrical continu-
Grounding (Control Rooms and Data Centers)
ity within rack and cabinet units, and (2) bonding these units
to the busbar.
Telecommunications grounding and bonding topologies are
based on standards, ANSI/J-STD-607, TIA-942 and IEEE
When assembling and installing racks and cabinets, TIA-
Std. 1100-2005. This is a typical practice found in enterprise
942 and the upcoming BICSI/607 require the installer to
data centers and telecom type service provider facilities (see
verify that electrical continuity exists between all structural
Figure 4.3-8). These same standards and practices can be
members. The paint used on racks and cabinets acts as an
applied to the industrial data centers, control rooms and
electrical insulator, preventing the flow of electricity from one
remote instrumentation enclosures (see Figures 4.3-2, 4.3-6,
section of the rack or cabinet to another. Therefore, attaching
and 4.3-7).
Figure 4.3-8. Schematic Diagram of Typical Grounding and Bonding of the Control Room
In general, once the AC power ground has been bonded to a grounding jumper from the rack to the TGB may not actu-
the TGB, installers can follow these basic steps in common ally ground the entire rack, which results in a safety hazard.
TR spaces to deploy a robust grounding and bonding system
that satisfies the intent of the standards and is professional Racks and cabinets are available that are fully bonded upon
in appearance: arrival from the manufacturer. Other rack designs contain
1. Verify that the AC panel board is bonded to the TGB provisions to create electrical continuity via grounding wash-
2. Bond the TGB to the telecommunications grounding ers as the units are assembled in the field (see Figures 4.3-9
and bonding infrastructure and 4.3-10). Otherwise, it is important to use paint-piercing
3. Create continuity within racks and cabinets hardware tested for its ability to create an electrical bond
4. Bond the racks and cabinets to the TGB as the rack or cabinet is being assembled or, a last option
5. Bond the equipment to the racks is to scrape the paint between the mating components (see
Figure 4.3-11).
Grounding Cabinets and Racks. Once all bonds from TGB
to building steel, raceways, and TBB have been made, the
telecommunications room is ready for racks and cabinets to
Figure 4.3-9. Cabinet Grounding
Figure 4.3-10. Rack Grounding
After the rack is assembled, install electrostatic discharge present a more complicated bonding situation. Under these
(ESD) wrist strap ports approximately forty-eight inches above circumstances, the installer should run a continuous TEBC
the floor in racks that house active equipment, such as switch- from the TGB down each row of racks, making a bond from
es. Having such ports available allows people who service that the TEBC to each rack. These jumpers should be bonded to
equipment to have a convenient place to plug in their ESD pro- the TEBC using compression HTAP connectors, and bonded
tection wrist straps, thus protecting the equipment from damage to the rack using a two-hole compression lug.
while it is being worked upon (see Figure 4C-12).
The use of this lug at the rack is quite important, as this is a
Figure 4.3-11. Ground-
series circuit (where only one connection is made between
ing washers can be
rack and TEBC) and a two-hole compression lug will main-
used to create electrical
tain the reliability of the connection at the same level as
continuity in racks and
connections to the TGB (see Figure 4.3-14). Compression
cabinets. In this photo
connectors are required by many grounding standards and
a bolt and washer is
specifications because the connector barrel will not loosen
removed, showing paint
from the conductor over time.
removal from the contact
area (bottom right).
The conductors used in bonding the racks to the TGB should
be insulated with an all-green jacket or a green jacket having
a distinctive yellow stripe to visually indicate them as being
used for grounding purposes. In most telecommunications
closets, use #6 AWG TEBC which will be sufficient due to
the limited length required within a closet space.
Figure 4.3-12. ESD wrist straps and ports enhance equip-

ment protection.
Different options exist for how to bond racks to the busbar

(see Figure 4.3-13). Which method is chosen often depends
upon the size and configuration of the installation. In TRs
with about a half-dozen racks or less, such as most industri-
al control rooms, the most convenient method of bonding the
racks to the busbar is to run a jumper known as a telecom-
munications equipment bonding conductor (TEBC) directly
from each rack to the TGB.
In larger installations, the number of lug mounting locations

on the busbar and the management of the grounding cables
Figure 4.3-13. Telecommunications room bonding topologies (no access floor). Top – several
TEBCs used to bond each rack directly to the TGB. Bottom – racks bonded to a single TEBC
which then bonds to the TGB.
Busbar Hardware Kit
Figure 4.3-14. Busbar Hardware and Armored Fiber Grounding Kits
When bonding the conductor to the rack, it is important to Rather than relying on the AC power cord ground wire, it is
remove insulating paint from the mating surface to complete desirable that equipment be grounded in a verifiable manner
the connection. For this purpose, most installers prefer as described in this Standard.”
to use thread-forming screws that remove paint from the
thread holes as they are installed, or to use suitable bonding The best strategy to meet the intent of this statement is to
hardware for cage nut rail applications. It is also acceptable use a discreet jumper wire that bonds from a lug mounting
to simply scrape the paint off the rack in the area that the pad (if provided by the manufacturer) on the active equip-
lug will bond, but is more time and labor intensive than using ment and terminates via a two-hole compression lug at a
thread-forming screws. busbar or vertical grounding strip attached to one of the
rack’s equipment mounting rails. The busbar or vertical
Bonding Equipment to Racks. The final step for an grounding strip should be used to provide a visually-verifi-
installer is to bond active equipment (such as switches and able, all-copper grounding path (see Figures 4.3-9 and
servers) to the rack or cabinet as it is installed. The forth- 4.3-10).
coming BICSI/607 standard will likely contain the following
statement when it is officially adopted: When equipment does not provide a lug mounting pad, the
next best option is to bond the equipment mounting flanges
“Grounding through the equipment AC (alternating cur- directly to the rack rails. If the equipment mounting flanges
rent) power cord does not meet the intent of this standard. It are painted or covered in a non-conductive coating, bonding
is intended that the ac power ground path and the telecom- screws can be used to make this bond (i.e., thread-forming
munications ground path offer redundant and specific ground screws with serrations under the head of the screw will re-
paths for the equipment. While the AC-powered equipment move coatings from the surface to which they are mounted).
typically has a power cord that contains a ground wire, the
integrity of this path to ground cannot be easily verified.
Bonding STP Shielded Cables in Control Systems.

Shielded twisted pair Ethernet cables provide an important
means of returning high frequency noise to the noise source
(see Table 4.3-2). The design of shielded cables and the
proper termination of these cables require careful study of
vendor recommendations and understanding of the system’s
bonding and grounding design to avoid ground loops.
The key issue with shielded cable systems is provide proper

bonding to prevent high frequency noise from coupling to
cable while reducing risk of ground loops and hazardous
voltage from causing equipment or personnel concerns.
There are several techniques and solution approaches that
have been developed to provide options, depending on the
magnitude and frequencies of the noise involved, that impact
the quality of the ground system and topology of cable channel.
Table 4.3-2. Key Techniques for Effective Shield Bond-

ing 360 degree Shield termination
360 degree Shield termination Avoid the high impedance caused by long pigtail drain wires by using shield clamps that
encircle the circumference of the shielded cable.
Ground loop avoidance Proper system bonding between machine and control cabinets can allow bonding both
ends of shield without concern of ground loop for maximum shield benefit for controlling
noise. Otherwise, consider hybrid bonding through RC circuit or else bonding only one
end of shielded able.
Motor Cable shielding Shielding motor cables can reduce this noise source risk but requires termination at the
motor and at the drive only. Do not terminate the motor cable to the subpanel to avoid
noise problems.
Ground Loop Concerns. A ground loop can form when
there is a different voltage potential between two ends of a
cable (see Figure 4.3-15). The concern is that even a small
voltage difference can result in high enough noise currents
to cause coupling to cables. In some cases, this voltage can
be quite high and cause real concern about communication
disruptions - even equipment damage. This fear leads to
common wisdom to only ground one end of a shielded cable.
However, this common wisdom falls down for high frequency
noise mitigation where inductive and capacitive effects
prevent a single point ground from effectively reducing noise
voltages.
For best noise mitigation, therefore, it’s desirable to extend

the ground plane by bonding both ends of the cable. How-
ever, this is not readily done without creating a ground loop.
This dilemma has led to development of hybrid bonding Figure 4.3-15. Example of Ground Loop caused by voltage differ-
solutions to provide bonding at both ends while blocking low ence between equipment grounds at two ends of a shielded cable.
frequency ground loops.
Hybrid Bonding. To allow for bonding both ends of a

shielded cable with some mitigation of the ground loop Shielded Cable Patching Options for Stratix switch
concern, a technique called based systems. To complicate the design of proper even
hybrid bonding is employed further, you need to consider the physical infrastructure
where an RC circuit only arrangements related to patch panels in rack/enclosure
allows high frequency noise systems in a control rooms, zone enclosures, and control
to pass through the loop and panels. The distribution of network cabling from control
blocking the lower frequencies rooms out to control systems greatly benefits from use
(e.g. 60 Hz) that may be pres- of consolidation and patching areas as discussed in Sec-
ent because of ground level tions 2.3 and 2.4 of this Reference Architecture Guide. The
differences. complication arises with shielded cable systems is avoiding
introducing ground loops at the patch points when installing
Figure 4.3-16. Hybrid bonding using RC circuit that blocks low shielded components.
frequency ground loop currents
Ground loop problem associated with a patch panel.
Ethernet/IP use of Hybrid bonding, overall channel Ground loop problems can arise in a control room even
design. Most Ethernet/IP devices built today employ hy- between a switch and a patch panel mounted in the same or
brid bonding built into the device. However, due to legacy a few feet away in an adjacent rack depending on the noise
and third party non-Ethernet/IP devices, a system designer frequencies involved. At high frequencies, noise can ca-
needs to examine each device and make appropriate deci- pacitatively or inductively couple through paths that are not
sions on when and where to bond to avoid ground loops. the intended ground path. Voltage differences can develop
The overall shielded cable channel design from switches between areas of rack or enclosure systems that appear to
through patching to devices needs to be analyzed from the be securely bonded. A patch panel for shielded cable that is
bonding perspective to gain important noise control benefits bonded may actually be at different voltage than the switch
brought by the shielded cable while avoiding ground loop in the same vicinity! This problem is illustrated in Figure 4.3-
problems. The following details patching options that can 17.
assist with mitigating noise and avoiding ground loops in
automation systems that employ switches and devices with
hybrid bonding or mixed approaches.
Figure 4.3-17. Ground Loop formed between patch panel and switch due to ground voltage differences.
The hybrid bond at the device prevents ground loop from patch to device for lower frequencies.
Standard data center practice for shielded patch panels is

to bond the patch panel and shielded connector together A patch panel or outlet assembly that is not bonded but that
which, in turn, is bonded to the rack. This bonding is effec- does allow continuity of the shield through the patch field
tive for the typical data center noise and ground loop issues. can effectively eliminate the patching ground loop con-
However, for industrial applications in control rooms, zone cern. Figure 4.3-18 shows an insulated patch approach.
enclosures and patch panels, direct bonding at the patch The shielded jack and shielded patch cord would pass the
panel can introduce a ground loop as in the diagram above. high frequency noise back to the switch but not introduce a
ground loop at the patch.
Method to prevent ground loops when using patching.
One recommended method to prevent ground loops forming
at the patch area or out to the field device is to use an elec-
trically isolated, insulated patching solution. This requires
that the shielded jack snap into plastic or other insulating
material rather than bonding to the patch panel and to the Figure 4.3-18. Insulated patch panel prevents ground l
rack which is typically bonded to the room ground system. oop at switch and patch panel
The following are PANDUIT parts that can aid in implementing

an insulated patch panel solution at the control room, zone
cabling enclosure or control panel.

CPPA24FMWBLY Angled 24-port flush mount patch QPPABL Accept QuickNet™ Copper Cable
panel For use with QuikNet Assemblies and QuickNet™ SFQ
Panels and or QuickNet Series MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes
0RU Bracket
CPP24FMWBLY 24-port flush mount patch panel CWPP12WBLY 12-port patch panel supplied with
supplied with rear mounted face- three factory installed CFFP4 snap-
plates. in faceplates with integrated wall
mount bracket.
UICMPPA24BLY 24-port angled patch panel with
six UICPPL4BL Mini-Com® Ulti-
mate ID® Faceplates.
In cases where there are no substantial ground loop con- Grounding the Cable
cerns (e.g. facility with well engineered mesh ground sys- Shield. During installation, a
tem), it may be desirable to bond shielded cables at the frequently asked question is
patch panel especially for cabling run within the control room whether the installer should
or other well bonded areas. The following procedure and ground one end or both
diagram outlines basic methods for this approach. ends of a shielded cable
channel. Generally, the ca-
As an example and outlined in Figure 4.3-19, the PANDUIT ble shield is bonded to the
four step process to properly bond the shield at the patch grounded equipment chas-
panel is as follows: sis or rack at each access Figure 4.3-20. PANDUIT Shielded
1. Bond all the shielding (foil and/or braid) of the data or patch location. In other Cable and Jack Module Termination
cable to the shielded jack module, which provides 360° words, if all ITE is grounded,
shielding termination, as shown in Figure 4.3-20. then any shielded cables used to connect equipment to
2. Snap the jack module into an all-metal patch panel to patch panels, or to other equipment, must be grounded.
create a bond between the module and the
unpainted tabs on the patch panel. A typical shielded structured cabling channel runs from a
3. Attach the patch panel to the rack using thread- switch to the workstation and is comprised of two patch cord
forming bonding screws; the thread on the screws links and the shielded horizontal link. One end of the chan-
removes paint from the thread holes on the rack and nel starts in the data center, where the switch, patch panel,
the serrations on the head of the screws remove paint and shielded patch cord linking them must be properly
from the patch panel, creating a high-performance bonded to the rack. The rack is tied to the telecommunica-
electrical bond between the patch panel and the rack. tions grounding system, which in turn is bonded to the AC
4. So long as electrical continuity exists throughout the power system (see Figure 4C-19).
rack, the last step is to bond the rack to the main
busbar or MCBN located under the data center raised The other end of the channel terminates outside the data
floor. To ensure long-term integrity of the system, center at a workstation outlet. An issue that must be consid-
always use compression connectors, not mechanical, ered is whether a shielded cabling link at this outlet location
so the connection does not loosen with vibration. can be properly bonded to a grounding system without in-
ducing a ground loop. A cable shield that is terminated at the
Once cabling to the patch field has been bonded, attention workstation may be bonded to the AC ground via connec-
can be turned to the rest of the bonding and grounding sys- tions within the workstation itself, but the outlet AC ground
tem. The rest of this article focuses on several best practices must be at the same potential as the telecommunication
that must be considered during the design and installation of grounding system.
the rest of your shielded structured cabling system.
The recommended method for grounding the shielded link is
to use the workstation-provided ground. Use of a shielded
patch cord grounds both ends of the shielded cable link and
completes the shielded channel. However, when both ends
of a shielded link are grounded, there is the possibility for a
ground current to be conducted across the shielding if the
grounds are not at the same potential. In this example, a
voltage difference may exist on the ground between the AC
Figure 4.3-19. The PANDUIT® StructuredGround™ System for

data center grounding provides robust connections that have
low resistance, are easy to install, and are easily checked during
inspections.
power source serving the workstation and the telecommuni- and doors to allow the high frequency current to conduct
cation ground within the data center. with less impedance.
Therefore, to reduce the magnitude of such ground currents, 3. Ground Plane Principle
all serving AC power systems must be bonded together to Printed circuit board designers were the first to use the
the same grounding electrode system (a building can have ground plane principle when designing high frequency cir-
only one grounding electrode system, as required by the cuits. Everything is at the same potential at the surface and
NEC). This approach will reduce any ground voltage dif- the impedance is practically zero at all frequencies.
ferences that may exist either between differing AC power The back plane or sub-panel makes an ideal ground plane
system grounds or between the AC power system ground to bond control panel components. Ideally, the ground plane
and the telecommunications ground. should extend to include the entire machine or process by
connecting to a mesh ground system or with large equipo-
4.3.1.4 Control System Grounding tent bonds run to external cabinets or machine bases.
Bonding and grounding is the foundation for controlling Tips for Using the Ground Plane Principle
EMI in control systems. Because grounding is a legal NEC • Use an electro galvanized sub-panel instead of the more
requirement for electrical safety, the sight of green and common painted panel. This avoids need to remove paint for
yellow ground straps, ground bars, and PE conductors are bonding with resultant long term corrosion potential risking
common and relatively well understood. However, you can poor performance.
have a fully compliant, ultra safe grounding system yet have • Bond multiple sub-panels together using 1” wide short flat
equipment that encounters serious disruptions, stoppages, braided bonding straps to create one large ground plane.
and even damage due to an inadequately installed and (See Figure 4C-22).
engineered low impedance ground/bonding system for high • Bond the incoming ground conductors to the sub-panel
frequency noise. where they enter the panel.
• Bond the equipment grounds from the components in the
Control Panel Grounding. Three concepts of best practice cabinets directly to the sub-panel using equipment
control panel layout and design (see Figure 4.3-21) for this manufacturer recommended conductors or short flat braided
high frequency noise are: bonding straps.
• Bond the enclosure door(s) with short flat braided
1. High Frequency Return Path bonding straps.
High frequency noise currents will return to their source to • Bond incoming cable shields (see Figure 4C-5), conduits and
complete a circuit. In some cases this can lead to noise cable trays to enclosure
being coupled into adjacent Ethernet cables. The goal is
to layout noise sources and cabling with their associated
grounds and cable shields so that the noise currents return
in a safe controlled path rather than inadvertently traveling
through sensitive circuit cables and devices. This requires
understanding the noise sources and the role of shielded
cables and equipment grounds.
2. Braided Bond Straps

A low-resistance 3-foot 14awg wire which serves quite
adequately as a safety ground for 60Hz power is totally
inadequate as a conductor for high frequency return cur-
rent since at 10 MHz it has 300 ohms of impedance. At high
frequencies of >1 MHz, multiple short 1” minimum width
braided bond straps should be used between sub-panels
Figure 4.3-21. Schematic Diagram of Control Panel Grounding and Bonding
\Motor Cable Termination Best Practice. Control system Figure 4.3-22 describes the best practices for motor cable
noise problems can cause intermittent communication prob- grounding, and Figure 4.3-23 shows how using shielded
lems that are difficult to diagnose and solve. One important cable presents a low impedance return path for motor noise
recommendation is to prevent potential noise problems currents with greatly reduced noise through the ground sys-
from high frequency noise that can be introduced from poor tems. This approach reduces the size of the ground return
termination practice with servo or VFD motor drive cabling loop and reduces the coupling of noise to adjacent commu-
systems. There are well established best practices for motor nication cables.
cable termination to avoid noise problems that are published
by vendors and in technical journals. However, mistakes are
still being made that cause communications and control dis-
ruptions because of a failure to change installation practice
in the field.
Figure 4.3-22. Motor Cable Grounding Best Practices
Selection of appropriate and robust power system grounding

4.3.2 Selection
schemes, equipment grounding methods, surge protection
equipment, lightning protection equipment, ground electrode
Most facilities are subjected to many electrical disturbances
systems and the protection of sensitive electronic equipment
including lightning strikes, voltage fluctuations, static electric-
are critical to the performance and reliability of industrial
ity and electrical noise, all of which are capable of affecting
systems.
production in virtually everyone’s business. A designer or
engineer of any of these systems needs to understand the
A full example specification documents for GES connections
requirements of the grounding and bonding system for each
and for a data center / control room environment are pro-
of their applications.
vided in Appendices C-1 and C-2, respectively.
Figure 4.3-23. Best Wiring Solution: Shielded input/output with insulated jacket completely
avoids ground noise problems in system.
4. Lugs, HTAPs, grounding strips, and busbars shall be UL

4.3.3 Installation
Listed and made of premium quality tin-plated electrolytic
copper that provides low electrical resistance while inhibiting
The ground/earth system must be designed for high reli-
corrosion. Antioxidant shall be used when making bonding
ability. Therefore, the grounding/earthing system shall meet
connections.
following criteria:
1. Local electrical codes shall be adhered to.
5. Wherever possible, two-hole lugs shall be used because
they resist loosening when twisted (bumped) or exposed to
2. The grounding/earthing system shall comply with J-STD-
vibration. All lugs shall be irreversible compression and meet
607-A, ANSI/TIA-942, IEEE Std 1100™, and in international
NEBS Level 3 as tested by Telcordia. Lugs with inspection
regions BS EN 50310:2000.
windows shall be used in all non-corrosive environments so
that connections may be inspected for full conductor inser-
3. All grounding/earthing conductors shall be copper.
tion (battery rooms are an exception where windowless lugs
may be used).
6. Die index numbers shall be embossed on all compression measure the resistance of any single bonding connection.
connections to allow crimp inspection. As such, it is important to combine a visual inspection with
measurements when verifying an installation. An inspection
7. Cable assemblies shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. should include the following steps:
Cables shall be a distinctive green or green/yellow in color
to signify that they are grounding conductors, and all jackets a) Check for excessive currents on the conductors
shall be UL, VW-1 flame rated. bonded to the TGB. Using a clamp-on ammeter check
to be sure AC RMS currents are between 0.0 A and
4.3.3.1 Visual Inspection 1.0 A and DC currents are between 0.0 A and 0.5 A.
b) Complete visual verification of the bonding and
To optimize the safety and performance of your network grounding system:
grounding and bonding system a visual inspection should be ---Confirm bond between AC panel board and TGB
performed upon installation and on an annual or semi-an- ---Verify continuity within racks/cabinets
nual basis thereafter. An inspection that follows a line-by-line ---Look for two-hole compression lugs on racks/
work order allows early detection of potential problems such cabinets and on busbars
as loosened or corroded connections, missing labels, con- ---Ensure that ESD wrist strap docking stations are
ductors that have been damaged, cut, or removed, and new convenient
metallic elements that require connections to the grounding ---Confirm that equipment is bonded to the rack/cabinet
system. Connections to Busbars, Racks, Cabinets, Enclo- c) Perform two-point continuity checks between surfaces
sures and Network Equipment should be inspected on a where a bond is desired.
yearly basis. An example of an inspection process and a
form for documentation of basic requirements and verifica- 4.3.4 Documenting
tions can be found in Appendix C-3.
A good documentation process goes hand in hand with a
To facilitate inspection of the grounding system, install con- good inspection program. Grounding inspections should be
nectors, busbars, and conductors in such a way to allow well documented. An example of an inspection process and
visual verification of the bond. There should be a logical flow a form for documentation of basic requirements and verifica-
as you follow the grounding path(s); for example, follow the tions can be found in Appendix C-3.
path(s) from the equipment chassis to the rack, from the
rack to the data center grounding
infrastructure, then over to the local
TGB. The TGB connects to the tele-
communication bonding backbone
(TBB), or grounding cable, that runs
back the telecommunications main
grounding busbar (TMGB), which is
bonded to earth ground via the elec-
trical entrance facility and links all the
TBBs together. Inspect all splices for
proper crimping, and inspect labels to
ensure that proper labeling has been
followed.
Attempting to measure the resis-

tance of any bond will actually result
in the measurement of all electrical
paths available, making it difficult to
Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures
ment issues need to be addressed in ways that differ from

4.4 Racks and Cabinet Enclosures
server cabinet applications.
As modern manufacturing continues to evolve, operations

have become intensive producers and consumers of data.
STANDARDS and CODES
The heart of any data management and storage system is
Industrial network stakeholders can leverage the expertise
the physical layer equipment: switches, routers, servers,
of Data Center standards in industrial automation areas
cabling/connectors, and patch panels. This equipment finds
(both in the Control Room and on the factory floor) to miti-
its home in the racks and enclosures that provide a robust
gate performance risks and enable system convergence.
environment, managing risks to equipment from physical
damage, temperature variations, and unauthorized access.
TIA/EIA-942
TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
Rack and cabinet enclosures are available in a variety of
for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for
configurations to address the variety of risks that manu-
the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and
facturing data systems are exposed to in the industrial
computer rooms.
environment. “Open” enclosure systems allow excellent air
flow for keeping equipment cool, and include 2- and 4-post
CEA-310-D
racks plus their accessories. Ironically, the main advantage
Consumer Electronics Association CEA-310-E, design
of open systems can also be their main disadvantage. In
requirements for Cabinets, Panels, Racks and Subracks
a manufacturing environment, fibers and dust can migrate
(formerly EIA-310-D).
from the plant floor and come into contact with physical
layer equipment, potentially disrupting network operations
TIA/EIA-568-B
and increasing maintenance costs.
TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both
Open systems, however, present security and safety risks
because anyone with access to the control room has direct
mercial buildings, and between buildings in campus envi-
access to all physical layer equipment. Cabinet enclosures
offer many of the advantages of an open 4-post rack sys-
distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable
tem with the added security of side panels, a top and bot-
termination standards and performance characteristics,
tom, and lockable doors at front and back. These features
cable installation requirements, and methods of testing
help manage risk associated with keeping office and control
installed cable.
networks linked yet segregated, and help prevent unau-
thorized access or inadvertent damage to control networks
4.4.1 Selection
from Internet users. (See Section 4.8 of this Guide for more
information on Safety and Security issues related to Indus-
Selecting an end-to-end enclosure system extends beyond
trial Ethernet networks.)
choice of racks and cabinets, and includes horizontal and
vertical cable managers. Together, these systems optimize
Outside the control room, smaller enclosures (often re-
thermal management in dense active equipment environ-
ferred to as “Zone Cabling Enclosure”) are available that
ments by routing cables away from exhaust fans and neatly
allow remote deployment in factory applications for either
managing them in horizontal and vertical pathways.
active equipment or for patching the factory Ethernet net-
work into manufacturing equipment.
PANDUIT offers specialized cabinets for server applica-

tions, such as those running FactoryTalk, RSView SE, or
other manufacturing application software. Cabinets are also
available for switching applications, where cabling manage-
Open Racks
CMR19X84 CMR4P84
19” EIA rack, aluminum. 4-post EIA rack with #12-24
Dimensions: threaded rails.
84.0”H x 20.3”W x 3.0”D Dimensions:
(2134mm x 514mm x 76mm). 84.0”H x 23.3”W x 30.2”D
(2134mm x 591mm x 767mm).
Standard 2-post open rack 4-post open equipment rack.
Cabinet Enclosures
CS1 CN1
Server cabinet frame with top panel. Switching and patching cabinet frame
Single hinge perforated front door. with top panel. Single hinge perforated
Split perforated rear doors open in the front door. Split perforated rear doors
middle to minimize door swing foot- open in the middle to minimize door
print. swing footprint.
Designed for servers and patch panels. Designed for switches and patch panels.
Cable Managers
NM2 PRV8
NetManager Horizontal Cable Manager Patchrunner Vertical Cable Manager
High Capacity Front and Rear 2 RU. Front & Rear 8” (203mm) for 84” High
Cat6A cabling. (2134mm) Racks.
Horizontal cable manager used with Vertical cable manager used with open
racks or cabinet enclosures 2- or 4-post racks
Zone Cabling Enclosure Blanking Panel

PZC12W DPFP8
12RU Wall mount cabinet with win- Filler Panel 8 RU
dowed front door; black. Used to blank out unused rack spaces
in open racks or enclosures. Also used
Used for remote installation of RU to mount panel equipment into open
based equipment. racks and cabinets.
NOTE: DIN rails can be mounted to these filler
panels for DIN rail based equipment.
Grounding and Bonding
RGEJ624PFY RGCBNJ660P22
6 AWG (16mm²) jumper; bent lug on #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper; 60” (1.52m) length;
grounding strip side to straight lug on 45° bent lug on grounding strip side; provided
equipment; provided with .16 oz. (5cc) with .16 oz. (5cc) of antioxidant, two each #12-24
of antioxidant and two each #12-24 x x 1/2”, M6 x 12mm, #10-32 x 1/2” and M5 x
1/2”, M6 x 12mm, #10-32 x 1/2” and M5 12mm thread-forming screws and a copper com-
x 12mm thread-forming screws pression HTAP* for connecting to the MCBN.
• Cable performance is based on:

4.4.2 Installation
- The locations of the twisted pairs inside the sheathing
- The spacing of the twisted pairs, (most cable will
Proper installation of cabinets and open 2 and 4 post racks
have plastic structures to maintain spacing and
rely heavily on the directions supplied by the manufacturer.
create air gaps between twisted pairs)
Some overriding best practices are common among all
- The twist rate, is crucial in managing the capaci-
manufacturers and weight load -- cabinets and open racks
tance, inductance and maintaining the high
are rated for their load supporting capability. It is important
frequency performance of data cables.
that the weight rating is not exceeded. Reputable manu-
facturers have their cabinets and racks weight capacity
certified by Underwriters Labs.
Stability: Especially for 2 post open racks, stability under

load should be evaluated. If stability is a concern, a 4 post
open rack or cabinet may be required. If the installation
environment is in an earthquake-prone area, extra steps
will need to be taken to insure stability and safety. Bellcore
Proper bend radius control reduces the risk of performance
GR-63-CORE standards cover seismic requirements.
degradation due to deformation of the structured cabling.
Electrical safety: Virtually all cabinets and open racks have
provisions for grounding and bonding the structure. Mod-
ern data center and control equipment need proper ground-
ing for electrical noise control and personnel safety. Proper
grounding should be established on installation.
• Cabinet CN1, CS1 installation instructions:

108487.pdf
4.4.2.2 Selection of Cabinets or Racks

• 4 Post Open Rack installation instructions:
104554.pdf
Cabinets
• Select for maximum security for equipment
• 2 Post Open Rack installation instructions:
• Select for server applications or switch and patching
069026.pdf
applications
• Recommended for enterprise switches and server applications
4.4.2.1 Physical Infrastructure Management
• 2500Lb rating
Cabling to and from the equipment in the cabinets or open

4 Post racks
2 and 4 post racks must be managed. Of primary impor-
• Recommended for enterprise switches and server applications
tance here is the care and management of modern high
• 2000Lb rating
performance data cabling. The mechanical construction
• 2 Post 6 inch channel
of the cable dictates much of its electrical performance.
• Suitable for enterprise switches
Therefore, it’s necessary that any physical equipment such
• 1500Lb rating
as cabinets, open 2 and 4 post racks have vertical and hori-
zontal cable management.
2 Post 3 inch channel
• Recommended for patching and smaller RU height
equipment
• 1000Lb rating
• Front and rear or front only

4.4.2.3 Selection of Vertical and Horizontal
- Select front and rear managers to provide
Cable Managers
support for back bone/horizontal cabling.
- Select front only for installations where the
Cable capacity charts are available for all Panduit verti-
backbone/horizontal cabling will be manually
cal and horizontal managers. Be sure to check them
tied down
before selecting a catalog number.
- ccable should not be allow to pull on
termination / punch downs
• Select the horizontal and vertical managers for the
- Select front only for 4 post rack installations
system cable being installed.
where horizontal cable support in back is not
• Select CEA-310 compliant
needed.
Cat6A Managers
- Bend radius to support Cat6A cable
Selecting Vertical Cable Managers
- Stated Cat6A compatibility.
Vertical cable managers are available in a variety of widths.
Typically deep with support for cable
The widths vary based on the number of cables the man-
transition from the horizontal to vertical
ager will carry. Knowing the number of cables to be man-
- Aesthetics suitable for the installation
aged, select the vertical manager from the selection charts
- Compatible with system wide components
available from the manufacturer.
Cat5e and Cat6
• Use cable capacity charts provided by the manufacturer
- Bend radius to support cable
• Vertical Managers
- Stated Cat5e and Cat6 compatibility.
- Panduit recommends a fill ratio of 35%.
Support for cable transition from the
- Allows space for slacking of cables and moves,
horizontal to vertical
adds and changes (MAC).
- Aesthetics suitable for the installation
- TIA -569-B covers tray capacities
Compatible with system wide components
Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosuresy
Selecting and Cabling Horizontal Cable Managers

Horizontal cable managers are available in a variety
heights based on Rack Units (RU). One RU is 1.75 inches.
The height in RU and depth of a horizontal manager vary
based on the number of cables the manager will carry.
Knowing the number of cables to be managed, select the
horizontal manager from the selection charts available from
the manufacturer
• Horizontal managers are used with flat patch panels

• Use cable capacity charts provided by the manufacturer
• Common horizontal manager sizes are 1, 2,3, and 4
Rack Unit (RU)
• Horizontal Managers
- Panduit recommends a fill ratio of 40%.
- Allows space for moves adds and changes (MAC)
- TIA -569-B covers tray capacities
Cabling Techniques for Horizontal Managers

Method 2: All One Side
Method 1: Split each way • One direction needed.
• Maximize the usage of manager cable capacity • One exit point for all cables may limit number
• More cables if both end exits are used of cables
4.4.2.4 Mounting Stratix Switches on DIN

Rail or in Blacking Panels
Stratix switches or panel mount equipment not configured

in the data center rack unit configuration can be mounted
in open racks or enclosures by using available blanking
panels. These panels are used to block off sections of open
rack space. The template for the equipment being used can
be transferred to the blanking panel. The necessary holes
can be drilled into the panel for mounting.
4.4.2.5 Patching
For testability and organization of cables through moves,

adds and changes, it would be recommended that for most
manufacturing centered installation that flat patch panels
and horizontal managers be used.
• Standard density patching - Applications:

- Use Flat Patch Panels and Horizontal Mangers • Leased office space
- Up to 450 ports per rack plus switch • Cubicle based office space
- Moves, adds and changes • Telecommunications rooms
(MAC) are occasional to frequent • Co-location sites
Table 4D-1. Dedicated Switch Rack and Patching Rack Recommendations
Recommended Description Maximum Ports Moves Adds & Recommended Recommended Rack
Application Changes (MAC) Vertical Horizontal
frequency
Rack cable Flat Patch Pan- 500 to 700 MACs are oc- PatchRun- FRME1 or 2 on Select 4 Post
manage- els with horizon- casional ner PRV10 or top for fiber to CMR4P84,96
ment solution. tal managers. PRVF10 Cat5e switch*. Patch- preferred for
Medium to high or Cat6, PRV12 Link WMP1E, equipment
density patching. or PRVF12 for WMPH2E for and 2 post
Cat6A Cat5e or Cat6. CMR19X84,96
High Capac- for Patching
ity NetManager
NM2 or NMF2
for Cat6A
Rack cable Flat Patch Pan- Up to 500 MACs are fre- PatchRunner FRME1 or 2 on
management els with horizon- quent PRV8 or PRVF8 top for fiber to
solution. Low to tal managers. for Cat5e,Cat6. switch*. Patch-
medium density PRV10 or Link WMP1E or
patching PRVF10 for WMPH2E with
Cat6A Cat 5e or Cat
6. High Capac-
ity NetManager
NM1 or NMF1
with Cat6A.
Rack Low Flat Patch Pan- Under 350 MACs are fre- PatchRunner FRME1 or 2 on
density patch- els with horizon- quent PRV6 or PRVF6 top for fiber to
ing or patching tal managers. for Cat5e,Cat6. switch*. Patch-
with some active PRV8 or PRVF8 Link WMPFSE,
equipment Plan- for Cat6A WMPLFSE,
ning for future WMPLSE or
expansion WMPSE with
Cat5e or Cat6.
High Capac-
ity NetManager
NM2 or NMF2
with Cat6A.
4.4.2.6 Thermal Management 4.4.2.7 Security
Managing heat in switch or server installation depends For security, cabinets provide the highest level of physical
on understanding the equipment being installed and how security to equipment and patch fields. For “Zone Cabling”
installation and cabling affects the equipments ability to enclosures, locking mechanisms, either built in or padlock
stay cool. Some enterprise switches cool themselves by are ready to secure its internals. In some instances the
pulling air from front to back, others move air from side to control room or area will have its own security policies,
side. The units that move air from side are more sensitive such as the following:
to cabling and the effect it has on the switches ability to
move air. A common technique for switches that require • Structuring the industrial network with smart
side-to-side airflow switch is to cable “fan avoidance” which switches or firewalls to prevent unauthorized
involves using a horizontal manager in the rack or cabinet access.
to take cables around the fan tray. • Securing individual data ports
Approval process that require enterprise IT
personnel and manufacturing data personnel to
approve patching changes.
• Using advanced patching management systems to
authorize and verify any enterprise to manufacturing
changes.
Section 4.5: Pathway Systems
• Riser - Evaluated for installation in risers in accordance

4.5 Pathway Systems
with the National Electrical Code as well as general pur-
pose applications.
Pathway systems are critical factors because they give
• General Use - Evaluated for general purpose applications
network stakeholders the ability to segregate, route, and
only.
protect communications cabling from other infrastructure
elements and from adverse impacts from environmental
NEMA VE1 / VE2
hazards. Both overhead and under-floor systems are avail-
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (partnered
able to maintain the integrity of the fiber and copper ca-
with CSA) Standard for Metal Cable Tray Systems / Instal-
bling plant. Cable management accessories also ease the
lation Guidelines
transition points from horizontal pathway spaces (overhead
or under-floor) to an equipment rack or cabinet to vertical,
IEC 61537
maintaining proper bend radius and relieving cable strain.
International Electrotechnical Contractors Standard for
Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder Systems for Cable
Overall, pathway systems provide greater system flexibility
Management
and they contribute to improved industrial Ethernet network
reliability. They also reduce the time and cost of installing
IEC 60204
your cabling infrastructure.
International Electrotechnical Contractors Standard for
Safety of Machinery/Electrical Equipment with Machinery
STANDARDS and CODES
NFPA 70 and 79
GR-63 CORE (NEBS) Level 3
National Fire Protection Association’s Standards.
This Generic Requirements document (GR) presents
minimum spatial and environmental criteria for all new tele-
communications equipment used in Central Offices (COs)
and other environmentally controlled telephone equipment
spaces. This document provides only those requirements
related to the physical aspects of equipment-building in-
terfaces, including physical dimensions and environmental
performance criteria. Issue 3 of GR-63 includes the follow-
ing updated information:
• Fire resistance requirements incorporating new ANSI
methods and specific carrier requirements
• An earthquake and vibration method for wall
mounted products
• New criteria for equipment airflow patterns
• New criteria and test methods for thermal margin
testing and operation with fan failure
ULC 2024A, Optical Fiber Cable Raceway

This standard covers the following types of optical fiber
cable raceways and fittings designed for use with optical
fiber cables in accordance with Article 770 of the National
Electrical Code (NEC):
• Plenum - Evaluated for installation in ducts, plenums, or other
spaces used for environmental air in accordance with the
National Electrical Code as well as general purpose applications.
4.5.1 Selection: Control Room
Figure 4.5-1. PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing System protects fiber
optic cables from damage to support network reliability.
FiberRunner ® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing Systems Transition Point: from FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway to
The PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™ Rout- Equipment Rack/Cabinet
ing Systems are overhead, solid pathway system designed When routing distribution or interconnect cables from Fiber-
specifically for fiber optic cables and patch cords. It is ideal Runner® pathways to an equipment rack or cabinet, an
for jacketed ribbon-style interconnect cables or small diam- appropriately sized spill-out should be used to assist in the
eter distribution cables (6, 12, or 24 fiber cables) that do not transition from the pathway to the equipment rack (see Fig-
have a separate strength member. ure 4.5-2). These spill-outs will also ensure proper cable
management and maintain minimum cable bend radius.
These systems consist of channels, fittings and brackets Some installations may use split corrugated loom tubing
designed to segregate, route and protect fiber optic and high to provide extra protection for the cable transition between
performance copper cabling. Typical applications include FiberRunner® pathway and the rack/cabinet (see Section
control rooms where cable is routed from distribution areas 4.5.2).
to equipment cabinets or racks (see Figure 4.5-1). They also
can be deployed in approved under-floor installations.
Figure 4.5-2. PANDUIT® FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway with Spill-Out
Once the fiber optic cables have transitioned from the Figure 4.5-4. Example
FiberRunner® pathways into the rack or cabinet, it is critical installation of FiberRunner®
to properly manage the cable routing prior to entry to the overhead pathway showing
rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels. This is transition to 4-post racks.
best accomplished using PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable is 12- fiber jacketed
Cable Ties. The use of PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable Ties ribbon interconnect.
should be avoided with jacketed ribbon-fiber interconnect
cables or small fiber-count distribution cable (6, 12, and 24
fiber cables) that do not have an internal strength member,
as the cable tie could be over-tightened and crush the opti-
cal fibers. See Figure 4.5-3 for routing and tie-off point de-
tails, and Figures 4.5-4 and 4.5-5 for application examples.
Secure
Points
Figure 4.5-5. Example installation of FiberRunner® overhead

pathway to PANDUIT® NetAccess™ cabinets. Cable is 12-
fiber trunk. Note copper cabling installed in wire basket above
FiberRunner® pathway system.
Figure 4.5-3. Schematic of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to
rack/cabinet transition.
Figure 4.5-6. The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System supports high-
density applications and provides integral bonding to the mesh common bond network (MCBN),
improving user safety and equipment protection.
GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System

The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Rout-
ing System is a wire basket pathway designed to route
and manage network data and power cabling beneath the
raised floor in a control room or data center (see Figure
4.5-6). This innovative system supports high cable capaci-
ties, protects cables from damage to improve network
performance, and is fully electrically bonded to facilitate
proper grounding.
Transition Point: PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Figure 4.5-8. Example instal-

Pathway to Equipment Rack/Cabinet lation of fiber optic trunk cable
In under floor pathway installations, high-performance cop- transitioning from under floor
per cables and fiber optic trunk cables transition upward pathway, through floor tile, to
from the under floor pathway (PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ 2-post rack with PANDUIT®
or similar) through an opening in a raised floor tile, and are PatchRunner ™ vertical cable
secured on the vertical cable manager or rack/cabinet post manager. Cable is 48- fiber
with PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable Ties. As the transition pre-terminated trunk.
from under floor wire basket to the rack or cabinet is often
an unguided route, cable transitions must flow gently and
minimum bend radius allowances must be observed at all
times (see Figure 4.5-7).
Some installations may use split corrugated loom tubing

to provide extra protection for fiber optic cable transition
from the under floor wire bask to the vertical cable manager
and/or rack/cabinet post. In these installations, the cor-
rugated loom tubing should be secured with PANDUIT®
Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to avoid over-tightening
and crushing of the small-diameter fiber optic cables.
Figure 4.5-7. Schematic of under-floor wire basket

pathway to rack/cabinet transition. Figure 4.5-9. Example installation of GridRunner™ under
floor wire basket pathway with 2-post rack and vertical
cable manager. Cable is 12- fiber jacketed ribbon intercon-
nect inside split loom tubing. Note PANDUIT® Cool Boot
™ Raised Floor Air Sealing Grommet (dark blue) installed
to minimize air leakage through opening in raised floor tile.
Transition Point: Overhead Wire Basket to Equipment Figure 4.5-12. Example

Rack/Cabinet installation of transition from
When routing distribution cable from an overhead wire bas- overhead wire basket. Cable
ket pathway to an equipment rack or cabinet, it is recom- is 24- fiber trunk routing
mended to utilize Panduit Waterfall Accessories to assist down to 4-post rack. Note
in the transition from the wire basket to the equipment rack use of PANDUIT® Tak-Ty®
(see Figure 4.5-10). These accessories will also assist with Hook & Loop Cable Ties to
managing of the cable bend radius. secure and manage cable.
Once cabling has transitioned from the overhead pathway

into the rack or cabinet, it is critical to “tie-off” and strain
relieve the cable to the vertical cable manager or rack/cabi-
net vertical post prior to cable break-out and/or cable entry
to the rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels. See Figure 4.5-13. Example
Figure 4.5-11 detailing the routing and tie-off points, and installation of overhead
Figures 4.5-12 and 4.5-13 for application examples. wire basket to 4-post rack
transition. Cable is 24- fiber
trunk routing along vertical
rack post to FCE1 enclosure.
Note use of PANDUIT®
Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable
Ties to secure trunk cable to
vertical rack post.
Figure 4.5-10. Overhead wire basket to four-post rack transition.
Figure 4.5-11. Schematic of overhead wire basket

to rack/cabinet transition
Transition Point: Overhead Ladder Rack to Equipment Figure 4.5-16. Example in-
Rack/Cabinet stallation of overhead ladder
When routing distribution cable from an overhead ladder rack to two-post rack transi-
racking system to an equipment rack or cabinet, it is recom- tion with PANDUIT® Patch-
mended to utilize PANDUIT Waterfall Accessories to assist Runner ™ Vertical Cable
in the transition from the ladder rack to the equipment rack Manager. Cable is 48-fiber
(see Figure 4.5-14). These accessories will also assist with trunk routing through PRV12
managing of the cable bend radius. vertical cable manager into
FCE4 enclosure. Note use of
PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable
Ties to secure trunk cable to
vertical cable manager.
Figure 4.5-17. Example

installation of overhead
ladder rack to two-post rack
transition with PANDUIT®
PatchRunner ™ Vertical
Cable Manager. Cable
is 12-fiber trunk routing
through PRV12 vertical
cable manager into FCE4
Figure 4.5-14. Overhead ladder rack with enclosure. Note use of
PANDUIT Waterfall Accessory PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook &
Loop Cable Ties to secure
Once the cable has transitioned from the overhead path- trunk cable to vertical cable
way into the rack or cabinet, it is critical to “tie-off” and manager.
strain relieve the cable to the vertical cable manager or
cabinet vertical post prior to cable break-out and/or cable
entry to the rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels.
See Figure 4.5-15 detailing the routing and tie-off points,
and Figures 4.5-16 and 4.5-17 for application examples.
Figure 4.5-15. Schematic of overhead ladder rack

to rack/cabinet transition.
4.5.2 Selection: Plant Floor
Plant floor pathways for-

merly required extensive
cable tray or conduit ar-
rangements. With indus-
Corrugated loom tubing also can be used to protect fiber
trial Ethernet networks, it is
optic media in light industrial environments. This tubing
much more common and
creates a cable pathway that is easy to pull through, and is
economical to run small
available in a variety of diameters, materials, and in split or
groups of Ethernet cabling
solid versions. This tubing can be suspended from J-Pro
between control rooms or
cable supports as a pathway solution.
enclosures using J-Hooks
to secure cable or fiber
4.5.3 Installation
media from the ceiling
joists.
FiberRunner ® GridRunner ™
The PANDUIT® J-Pro™ 1. Configure the pathway runs 1. Configure the pathway runs
Cable Support System is to the cabinets or racks. to the cabinets or racks.
designed to provide an 2. Design logical routes that 2. Design logical routes that
economical cable system optimize cable lengths and optimize cable lengths and
to route communication minimize turns. minimize turns.
cable along horizontal pathways, whether above suspend- 3. Snap-together assembly 3. Drop-in assembly reduces
ed ceilings or under raised floors, or across the ceiling of reduces installation time: installation time:
a factory floor. The J-Hook is made of strong and durable • QuickLock Coupler provides • Position and install pedestal
non-metallic material to prevent cables from coming in con- fast mechanical assembly support bracket on pedestals.
tact with metal, and the low friction nylon surface facilitates • No tools required to make • Secure one captured
pulling cable (and eliminates “shiners” created by metallic reliable connection fastener.
hooks). • Brackets attach system to • Drop wire basket section
common infrastructure between stringers.
This system provides complete horizontal and vertical 1” elements (ladder rack, strut, etc.) • Secure wire baskets to
bend radius control, preventing pinch points that could • Loosen clips, slide into pedestal support brackets
cause damage to cable, and is available in four sizes (¾”, position, and re-tighten to with pedestal clamp.
1-5/16”, 2” & 4” bundle capacities). The large channel size mount channel to bracket.
allows the use of TAK-TY® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to 4. Size the main runs and 4. Size the main runs and
retain and manage the cable bundle. branches for the anticipated branches for the anticipated
fills. Generally, plan the initial fills. Generally, plan the initial
A variety of mounting options, including pre-riveted mount- cable channel fill at a 40% fill cable channel fill at a 40% fill
ing assemblies, provide the ability to attach to walls, ceilings, density. density.
beams, threaded rods, drop wires, and under floor supports 5. Determine the amount of 5. Determine the amount of
to meet the requirements of a variety of applications. cables to be spilled out into cables to be spilled out into
racks/cabinets and select racks/cabinets and select
choice of spill-over or choice of spill-over or
transition accessory. transition accessory.
4.5.4 Documentation
FiberRunner Design tools GridRunner Design tools

Panduit provides design tools for AutoCAD and VISIO that Panduit provides design tools for AutoCAD and VISIO that
speed system design, specification and documentation. speed system design, specification and documentation.
AUTOCAD** AUTOCAD**
FiberRUNNER™ GRIDRUNNER™
Design Tool for Design Tool for
AutoCAD** AutoCAD** includes:
includes: • Drag & Drop
• Available on free Functionality
CD - SA-FRCD02 • Ability to design in
• Drag & Drop 2D and 3D
• Design in 2D or 3D • Versions compatible
• BOM Generator with AutoCAD** and
• Allows FIBERRUNNER to be incorporated into work- AutoCAD LT**
ing drawings • Automated BOM Generator
• Available on CD, SA-FRCD02 free through Customer Service
VISIO*
VISIO* Layout Tool VISIO*
includes: Data Center VISIO*
• Free download Layout Tool includes:
from panduit.com • Drag & Drop
• Drag & Drop Functionality
• BOM Generator • Ability to design in
• Great for incorp- 2D (stencils for three
orating visuals into different views are
proposals provided)
• Automated BOM Generator
*VISIO is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United • Free download from: www.panduit.com/gridrunner/visio
States and/or other countries.
**AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. *VISIO is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
**AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Section 4.6: Wire Management
UL 1565 – Wire Positioning Devices

4.6 Wire Management
This standard applies to those metallic and nonmetallic
devices used for positioning – which may include bundling
One of the most critical layers for the physical infrastructure
and securing – or to a limited extent supporting cable, wire,
is the management of wires encountered throughout the
conduit, or tubing of a wiring system in electrical instal-
various environments. The physical infrastructure must be
lations, to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury
specified with enough support, environmental rating, and
to persons. This standard applies to, but is not limited to,
protection features to ensure that components will perform
cable ties, cable tie mounting blocks, cable clamps, cable
consistently and reliably. Wire management can often
and conduit clips, and non-raceway ducts.
times be overlooked, but as the industry transitions to more
integration of sensors and automation components out onto
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
machines and into harsher environments, it will be an es-
This Code covers the installation of electrical conductors,
sential area for consideration.
equipment, and raceways; signaling and communications
conductors, equipment, and raceways; and optical fiber
Environmental factors in the space can range from extreme
cables and raceways for installations used by the electric
cold or hot temperatures outdoors or in a process line
utility, such as office buildings, warehouses, garages, and
to humidity. In addition, chemical exposure can degrade
machine shops.
insulation to vibration or shock that can cause mechani-
cal connection failures. The MICE rating system allows
UL 94 – Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
these factors to be categorized and analyzed for mitigation.
Parts in Devices and Appliances
Wires and cables must be protected in different ways within
These requirements cover tests for flammability of poly-
these various environments. Cable bend radius control and
meric materials used for parts in devices and appliances.
excessive deformation through over tensioning of cable ties
They are intended to serve as a preliminary indication of
and mounts are additional items you need to consider.
their acceptability with respect to flammability for a particu-
lar application.
STANDARDS and CODES
UL 224 VW1 – Vertical Wire Flame Test
TIA/EIA-568-B
Samples of fully recovered tubing are placed over a length
TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications
of fine spring steel music wire. The test requires the pre-
Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both
cise placement of a controlled flame that contacts the heat
shrink tubing. The flame is applied in five 15-second inter-
mercial buildings, and between buildings in campus envi-
vals with a time period between applications. If the flame
extinguishes immediately after the first flame removal,
distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable
subsequent flame applications are made to the tubing.
termination standards and performance characteristics,
Duration of specimen flaming is noted. A piece of surgical
cable installation requirements, and methods of testing
cotton is placed under the specimen. If a flaming or
installed cable.
glowing piece of tubing drips and ignites the cotton, this is
also noted.
TIA/EIA-569-A
TIA/EIA-569-A (Commercial Building Standards for Tele-
communications Pathways and Spaces) provides design
specifications and guidance for building facilities relating
to telecommunications cabling systems and components.
Bend radius control of conductors also warrant consider-
ation in this area.
4.6.1 Selection
4.6.1.1 Abrasion Protection
Full Coverage. Choose from heat shrink, braided sleev-

ing, CLT, Pan-Wrap™ Split Harness Wrap, spiral wrap, and
grommet edging. All product lines are available in various
sizes and materials to meet the application needs.
Selecting the Appropriate Heat Shrink. Generally, the

largest tube that shrinks down tightly onto an object should
be chosen. This allows the heat shrink tubing maximum
stress relief and this will yield the longest service life.
Example: A multi-conductor cable needs to be covered

with HSTT Type Heat Shrink. The area to be covered has
a measured outside diameter of .700” (17.8mm). The two
possibilities are HSTT75-48-5 and HSTT100-48-5.
Part Number Expanded I.D. Recovered I.D.

In. (mm) In. (mm)
HSTT75-48-5 .750 (19.0) .375 (9.5)
HSTT100-48-5 1.00 (25.4) .500 (12.7)
The proper choice is HSTT100-48-5 since the tube will

recover more than HSTT75-48-5. The HSTT75-48-5 and
HSTTAF100-48-5 will fit over the .700” (17.8mm) outside
diameter; however, this is not the proper choice since the
recovered I.D. is smaller than the HSTTAF100-48-5. In
Figure 4.6-1. Approximate Wire Outside Diameter Chart
general, heat shrink should recover at least 10% - 20% to
reduce stress and yield the longest service life.
Table 4.6-1 indicates the approximate outside diameter of

various electrical wires. Utilize this table when selecting
abrasion protection or cable accessory products, such as
heat shrink or fixed diameter cable clamps.
Building an Abrasion Solution
Braided Sleeving Highly flexible open weave for

abrasion protection; fray resistant
available
Corrugated Loom Provides protection for cables; slit or
Tubing solid wall
Grommet Edging Protect cables from sharp edges;
solid or slotted; adhesive lined
available
Heat Shrink (4: 1) Heatshrink insulates and protects
cables; 4:1 shrink ratio for terminated
wires; adhesive lined
Heat Shrink Thin Standard thin wall heatshrink
Wall insulates and protects cables;
2:1 shrink ratio
PAN-WRAP™ Maintains uniform bundle with
Split Harness improved flexibility and abrasion
Wrap protection
Spiral Wrap Harness multiple cables into a single
bundle while allowing breakouts; mul-
tiple colors available for identification
purposes
4.6.1.2 Cable Ties and Installation Tooling
Cable tie products are used to bundle, mount and identify The PANDUIT Material Selection Guide (Table 4.6-2) will
in countless indoor, outdoor and harsh environment appli- help you select the most appropriate specialty cable tie
cations. Panduit offers a wide breadth of cable tie designs, material based on industrial application / MICE require-
sizes and specialty materials to address customer wire ments. Table 4.6-3 lists recommended PANDUIT products
management challenges throughout the industrial space. for Control Panel and On-Machine Applications.
Cable tie installation tools range from high speed automatic

systems to hand operated tools; all with consistent, reliable
performance that provide a flush cable tie cut-off limiting
exposure to sharp edges. Panduit installation tools are light
weight, ergonomic, designed for ease of use and reduce
repetitive stress injuries. These tools also provide speed in
installation to reduce installed cost.
Control Panel and On-Machine Applications. Environ-

mental factors on the factory floor can range from extreme
cold or hot temperatures to humidity or chemical exposure
that can degrade insulation, to vibration or shock that can
cause mechanical failures of connections.
Figure 4.6-2a. PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide
Table 4.6-2b PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide (continued)
Figure 4.6-2c. PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide (continued)
Figure 4.6-3. Cable Ties Recommended for Control

Panel and On-Machine Applications
PANDUIT Part # Description PANDUIT Part # Description

PLT**-M PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, PLT**-M0 PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Weather
1”-4” Bundle Diameter (M,I,S Cross Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1”-4” Bundle
sections) Diameter, (M,I,S Cross sections)
PLC2S-S10-M* PAN-TY® Clamp Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” PLWP**-** PAN-TY® Push Mount Tie - Weath-
Bundle Diameter, S Cross section er Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1”-2” Bundle
(Heat stabilized also available) Diameter, (M,S Cross sections),
(Heat stabilized and weather resis-
tant also available)
PLM2S-M* PAN-TY® Marker Tie - Nylon 6.6, PFX-0 Black Marking Pen
2” Bundle Diameter, S Cross section
(Heat stabilized also available)
PLT**-M30 PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Heat Stabi- PLT**-C186 PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Metal Detect-
lized Nylon 6.6,1”-4” Bundle Diam- able Polypropylene, 1”-4” Bundle
eter (M,S Cross sections) Diameter , (M,S Cross sections)
PLT**-M109 PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Polypropyl- PLT**-*76 PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Tefzel, 1”-4”
ene, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter (M,S,H Bundle Diameter, (M,I,S,H Cross
Cross sections) sections)
PLT*S-M702Y PAN-TY® Cable Tie - HALAR, Ple- GTS Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-
num Rated, Flame Retardant, 2”-3” SM,M,I,S
Bundle Diameter, S Cross section
GTH Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install- PTH Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic Install-
S,HS,LH,H S,HS,LH,H
Control Room, Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling • Elastomeric Cable Ties. The Elastomeric Cable Tie is an
Enclosure Applications. PANDUIT has a comprehen- innovative design with elastic material that provides safe
sive offering of cable ties that deliver reliability by protect- and reliable cable bundling preventing over tensioning. The
ing against over tensioning of high performance fiber and soft material has no sharp edges, promoting worker safety.
copper cables. Table 4.6-4 lists recommended PANDUIT These flexible ties cinch the cable bundle preventing lateral
products for control room, network distribution, and zone movement along the bundle. The UL94V-0 flammability rat-
cabling Enclosure applications. ing and Halogen free construction ensures compliance with
environmental and industry requirements. The releasable
• TAK-TY® Hook & Loop Cable Ties. The Hook & Loop design accommodates frequent moves, adds and changes.
fabric maintains network data integrity by protecting against These ties are weather and UV resistant, suitable for bun-
over-tensioning, unraveling and de-lamination. These ties dling sensitive fiber and copper cables in both outdoor as
are adjustable, releasable and reusable up to hundreds well as indoor applications.
of times – ideal for applications requiring frequent moves,
adds or changes. A wide range of designs, sizes and colors
provides flexibility and an aesthetically pleasing appear- • TAK-TAPE™ Hook & Loop Rolls. Strong, low profile
ance. Also available is custom printing text and logos on material is thin and flexible to quickly wrap around bundles.
Hook & Loop ties for identification and promotional pur- TAK-TAPE™ is a cost-effective solution for general purpose
poses. bundling. The continuous rolls can be cut to size, and the
fabric is adjustable, releasable and reusable.
• ULTRA-CINCH™ Hook & Loop Ties. Exclusive Hook &

Loop material with hooks and loops on same side allows
user to secure a greater range of bundle diameters, in-
cluding smaller bundles. A low profile contoured cinch ring
reduces overall bundle size. These ties are adjustable,
releasable and reusable hundreds of times. A tapered tip
speeds installation and a strong brass grommet on select
styles assure reliable installations that resist pullout. A wide
range of colors is available for color-coding requirements.
PANDUIT’s Cable Bundle Organizing Tool efficiently ar-

ranges up to 24 data cables to optimize bundle size and
improve installed appearance prior to installing Panduit
hook and loop or Elastomeric cable ties. This user friendly
tool accommodates a wide range of cable diameters and
reduces cable bundling time by 50% compared to manual
methods.
Another important product is the Power Outlet Unit Plug

Retention Device which reduces the risk of equipment
downtime due to accidental plug disconnection from select
PANDUIT power outlet units. This product helps manage
risk in network installations by enabling safe and secure
power connections for greater reliability of the physical
infrastructure. The retention device is compatible with IEC
320 C13/C14 outlet socket and plug models, accommodat-
ing various plug strain relief heights and cable insulation
diameters. The releasable design is UL 94V-0 flammability
rated and includes an integrated label area to identify outlet
sockets and cords.
TAK-TY ® Loop Ties TAK-TY ® Strip Ties TAK-TY ® Rolls TAK-TY ® Stacked Strips
Slot allows for pre-wrapping Rolls perforated in convenient Continuous rolls of 15’ and 75’ Eliminate cutting and staging
of bundles 6”, 8” or 12” strips for use with can be cut to any length 7” strips (100 pieces)
pre-determined bundle sizes
TAK-TY ® Cable Ties – Ultra-Cinch™ Ties Elastomeric Cable Ties TAK-TAPE ™ Rolls
Plenum Rated UL approved Cinch ring accommodates UL 94V-0 flammability rating General purpose fastener
for use in air handling spaces tighter bundles Safe and releasable
Hook & Loop Wrap Marker Ties Cable Bundle Organizing Tool Custom Imprinting Service POU Plug Retention Device
Write-on identification area Arrange 24 data cables prior to Used for identification, labeling Reduce the risk of equipment
Custom Imprinting Available installing cable ties and promotional purposes downtime due to accidental
plug disconnection
Fig. 4.6-4. Cable Ties Recommended for Control Room, General Mount Guidelines. PANDUIT pressure sensitive
Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling Enclosure Applications adhesive (foam tape) mounts are intended to secure wire
Part Numbers Description bundles or other light objects to smooth surfaces. These
HLM-15R0 HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, mounts are not designed to support excessive loads and
Black should not be used when the maximum expected load
HLS-75R0 HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, exceeds the rated capacity of the mount.
Black
Choosing the Right Adhesive. PANDUIT offers two
HLB2S-C0 100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip
standard pressure sensitive foam tapes which are avail-
Tie,
able on most adhesive backed wiring accessories products.
0.75” Width, Black
The general purpose tape is produced with a rubber based
HLS3S-X0 HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black
adhesive and is identified by an “-A” in the part number.
HLT*I-X0 HLT Series 8-12” Loop Tie, Black
This tape develops its strength extremely fast and can be
HLTP2I-X12 HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum used in environments with temperatures ranging from -40°F
UL94V-2 - Maroon (-40°C) to +120°F (49°C). We recommend that rubber-
HLSP3S-X12 HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum based adhesive mounts dwell 2 hours after installation,
UL94V-2 - Maroon prior to loading. Rubber-based adhesive tape is the best
CBOT24K Cable Bundle Organizing Tool choice for most adhesive mount applications, including
PRPC13-69 Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention power coated surfaces.
PRPC13-60 Device - Only used with select Panduit
Power Outlet Units (Natural and BLK Acrylic-based adhesive tape is also available and is identi-
colors) fied by an “-AT” in the part number. This tape is for use in
ERT*M-C20 8.5-11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network environments where continuous exposure to temperatures
Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, as high as 180°F (82°C) is possible. Acrylic-based adhe-
UL94V-0 Flammability Rating sive develops its maximum strength over a longer period
of time than rubber-based adhesive. It is recommended
4.6.1.3 Adhesive Backed Mounts that acrylic adhesive mounts dwell 8 hours after installa-
tion, prior to loading. Acrylic based adhesive tape is a good
PANDUIT adhesive mounts provide a quick, economical, choice for environments with prolonged exposure to UV
and dependable method of supporting, routing, and protect- rays or temperatures about 120°F (49°C).
ing wires and cables. Some are used with PANDUIT cable
ties and others can be used without cable ties. Adhesive Proper Storage Conditions. All PANDUIT adhesive
backed mounts adhere to a variety of surfaces. This products have an expiration date printed on the package
alternative to mechanical fasteners offers the advantage of label. For rubber and acrylic based foam tape adhesives,
lower installed cost with safe, easy-to-use, quality products. store in temperatures of 70°F (21°C) and 45% Relative
Humidity (R.H.).
Applications include:
• To route wires in control panels and switchboards
• To support bundles of wires away from moving me
chanical devices
• Routing and harnessing cables, both indoors and
out, to prevent safety hazards
• To organize flat cables in many locations with low
profile construction
• Ideal for supporting wire bundles where holes cannot
be made in the substrate
• To separate groups of wires for identification
Adhesive Backed Latching Latching cover withstands Latching Wire Clip Latching wire clip with
Clips vibration convenient releasable latch
Adhesive Backed Mounts Adhesive backed cable tie Marker Plates Install as flags, tags, or wrap-
mounts; rubber or acrylic around labels to clearly identify
adhesive harnesses
Adhesive Cord Clip Adhesive cord clip that easily Metal Adhesive Cord Clip Metal adhesive backed cord
allows cables to snap into place clip; opens and closes to add/
remove cables
Beveled Entry Clip Beveled entry allows for easy Multiple Bridge Adhesive Multiple bridge adhesive
insertion of cable bundles Backed Mounts backed mount; has four cable
tie mount bridges
Cable Holder Releasable latch allows cables Push Mount Assemblies Unique barb design with u
to be added/removed; adhe- mbrella tensioning; pre-assem-
sive/screw mount bled with standard cable tie
Cable Spacers Used to separate and/or hang Push Mounts with Unique barb design with
cables Umbrellas umbrella tensioning
Cable Tie Mounts Low profile, cradle design Standard Fixed Standard size cable clamps;
keeps cables close to mounting Diameter Clamps install with #8 (M4) screw
surface; screw mount
Control Panel Mounts Installed behind control panel Standard Multiple Low profile design used to sep-
switches Tie Plates arate closely bundled cables
Dynamic Cable Manager Dynamic cable manager for Swivel Mounts Separates bundles to avoid
panel strain relief; adhesive abrasion; swivels 360 degrees
backed mount
Heavy-Duty Fixed Heavy-duty cable clamps; Tie Anchor Mounts 4-way cable tie orientation;
Diameter Clamps install with #10 (M5) screw small overall size
Rounded Edge Multiple Heavy-duty design used to sep- Vertical Cord Clip Funnel entry design allows for
Tie Plates arate closely bundled cables easy installation of cables
J-PRO™ Cable Durable non-metallic J-hooks
Support System can manage/support large
numbers of cables
Building an Adhesive-Backed Mounting Solution
4.6.1.4 Cable Accessories Product Lines
A Cable Management System shall be used to provide a Vertical D-Rings. A vertical cable management solution of
neat and efficient means for routing and protecting fiber flexible Vertical D-rings shall be used on standard commu-
and copper cables and patch cords on telecommunication nication racks. The Vertical D-rings used for open access
racks and enclosures. The system shall be a complete shall be manufactured from a Polycarbonate material and
cable management system comprised of vertical cable shall be black in color. The vertical cable management
managers, horizontal cable manager, and cable manage- D-rings shall be a one-piece design. The front arm of the
ment accessories used throughout the cabling system. The product shall be able to rotate ninety degrees to allow en-
system shall protect network investment by maintaining tire cable bundles to be inserted. The vertical cable man-
system performance, controlling cable bend radius and agement solution of flexible D-rings shall be installed with
providing cable strain relief. two screws less than 0.25” in diameter.
Part Number Outside Dimensions Capacity Capacity Capacity

(LxW) (.187” UTP) (.25”ScTP) (3mm Fiber)
CMVDR1 5.7”x2” 96 48 252
CMVDR1S 3.3”x2” 52 32 132
CMVDR2 5.7”x3” 192 96 504
CMVDR2S 3.3”x3” 96 48 252
CMVDRC 5.6”x8” 400 200 1000
TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Tie Mounts. A mounting

device shall be used with ¾” maximum TAK-TY ® Cable
Ties to secure bundles of communication cabling in cabi-
nets, closets or other environments where cable manage-
ment is a concern. Adhesive backed products can be
utilized to bundle up to .38 lbs. of communication cable. If
more than .38 lbs. of holding force is required, a fastener
such as a #6 screw shall be used.
Part Number Mounting Method Color
ABMT-A-C Rubber Adhesive Natural
ABMT-A-C20 Rubber Adhesive Black
ABMT-S6-C #6(M3) Screw Natural
ABMT-S6-C20 #6(M3) Screw Black
ABMT-S6-C60* #6(M3) Screw Black
ABMT-S6-C69* #6(M3) Screw Natural
* Flame retardant products are manufactured from a material that is rated UL94V-0.
Waterfall Accessories. Cable Management Waterfall Ac-

cessories shall be utilized to transfer communication cable
from ladder racks to enclosures or equipment racks below.
These cable management waterfall systems shall main-
tain 1” bend radius control in both vertical and horizontal
directions. The system shall be modular in order to allow for
multiple widths.
Part Number Description Color

CMW-KIT Waterfall Kit Black
CMW-KIT10 Waterfall Kit White
CMWB Waterfall Base Black
CMWB10 Waterfall Base White
CMWW Waterfall Wing Black
CMWW10 Waterfall Wing White
Stackable Cable Rack Spacers. Stackable Cable Rack

Spacers shall be utilized to route bulk fiber optic cable or
high performance copper communication cable bundles.
Stackable Cable Rack Spacers shall be utilized in commu-
nication closets and other interior locations where cables
and cable bundles are routed along traditional ladder racks
that consist of rungs and stringers. The Stackable Cable
Rack Spacers shall be applied on every rung up to a recom-
mended maximum stack height. Dovetail slots and a positive
latching mechanism shall provide a secure locking feature.
Part Number Cable Bundles Bundle Diameter Recommended Stack Ht.

CRS6-X 6 .8” 5
CRS1-X 1 .8” 5
CRS4-125-X 4 1.25” 4
CRS1-125-X 1 1.25” 1
Threaded Rod Cover. The Threaded Rod Cover shall

be utilized to protect communication cable from abrasion
caused by contact with threaded rod. The Threaded Rod
Cover shall be manufactured from a gray flame-retardant
polyethylene material that is UL94V-0 rated. The material
shall be pliable to allow for easy installation.
Part Number For Threaded Rod Size Length

TRC18FR-X8 1/2”x5/8” 18”
J-MOD ™ Cable Support System. Open top cable sup-

ports shall be utilized as a pathway for communication
cabling. The J Hook cable supports shall be manufactured
from a non-conductive material suitable for use in air-han-
dling spaces. The cable support must maintain complete
horizontal and vertical 1” bend radius control and must
manage up to 50 four-pair UTP cables. The system must
allow for the ability to add future cable routing capacity. The
cable support must provide the ability to retain the cable
bundle with TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Ties.
Part Number Description Material* Maximum Static Load

(Lbs.)
JMJH2W-X20+ J Hook for wall moutn applictions Nylon 30
JMJH2-X20+ J Hook for use with brackets Nylon” 30
JMCB-X Ceiling Bracket Galvanized Steel 120
JMCMB25-1-X Ceiling Mount Bracket (1 level) Galvanized Steel 180
JMCMB25-3-X** Drop Wire Bracket (3 level) Galvanized Steel 180
JMDWB-1-X Drop Wire Bracket (1 level) Galvanized Steel 20
JMDWB-3X** Drop Wire Bracket (3 level) Galvanized Steel 40
JMTRB38-1-X Threaded Rod Bracket (1 level) Galvanized Steel 180
JMTRB38-3-X** Threaded Rod Bracket (3 level) Galvanized Steel 180
JMSBCB87-1-X Screw=on Beam Clamp Bracket Galvanized Steel 180
(1 level)
JMSBCB887-3-X** Screw-on Beam clamp Bracket Galvanized Steel 180
(3 level)
** Not for use with chaining brackets

+ Available in natural and black
* Suitable for use in air handling spaces per UL 2043. Listed in accordance with CAN/ULC 8102.2 when mounted as single units on/in pairs.
Minimum spacing of 1 ft. (1220mm) required between mount points. (Flame Spread Rating - 0, Smoke Developed Classification - 30”)
J-PRO ™ Cable Support System. Open top cable sup-

ports shall be utilized as a pathway for communication
cabling. The J Hook cable supports shall be manufactured
from a non-conductive material suitable for use in air-han-
dling spaces. The pre-riveted J Hook assemblies must
maintain complete horizontal and vertical 1” bend radius
control. The cable support must provide the ability to retain
the cable bundle with TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Ties.
Part Number Part Description Bundle Capacity Material* Static Load Rating
(In) (Lbs.)
JP75W-120 J Hook for wall mount application 0.75 Nylon 6.6 15
One 1/4” (M6) mounting hole for user
supplied screw
JP131W-L20 J Hook for wall mount application 1.31 Nylon 6.6 20
supplied screw
JP2WT-20 J Hook for wall mount application 3 Nylon 6.6 30
supplied screw”
JP4W-X20 J Hook for wall mount application 4 Nylon 6.6 100
supplied screw
4.6.2 Installation Proper Installation Techniques for Pressure Sensitive

Adhesive Mounts. For proper installation of adhesive
4.6.2.1 Mount Spacing mounts with foam tape, simply remove the release liner and
place the mount in the desired location. Avoid touching the
To determine the number of mounts to use in a given ap- adhesive prior to positioning the mount. Apply firm pres-
plication, the following formula can be used as a guideline: sure to the mount for 5 seconds to insure proper adhesion.
(Cable or weight (Lbs. /ft.)/Static Load rating of Mount
(Lbs./mt.) = Spacing (Mounts/Ft.) 1. Clean surface with a clean cloth and isopropyl alcohol
4.6.2.2 Adhesive Backed Mounts 2. Allow surface to air dry
Surface Preparation. For best results, PANDUIT adhesive 3. Remove the release liner, being careful not to touch
mounts should be applied to clean, dry, grease-free sur- the adhesive
faces. We recommend that the surface be cleaned prior to
mount installation. For rubber and acrylic based foam tape 4. Apply full thumb pressure for at least 5 seconds
adhesives, a blend of isopropyl alcohol and water 50/50
may be used to clean most surfaces. 5. Allow mount to properly dwell
4.6.2.3 Dynamic Cable Manager

• Unsupported bundle length should be no more than
• For best results, PANDUIT rubber adhesive mounts 1.27 lbs. (see illustration below, unsupported bundle
should be applied to clean, dry, grease-free sur length is shown as figure “A”)
faces. It is recommended that the surface be
cleaned prior to mount installation with a blend of • There must be no rigid mounts in line with the
isopropyl alcohol and water 50/50. dynamic cable manager. These mounts would
restrict bundle motion.
• For proper installation, simply remove the release
liner and place the mount in the desired location. • The mounts should not be placed directly next to the
Avoid touching the adhesive prior to positioning the hinge. A suggested minimum of 1” between edge of
mount. Apply firm pressure to the mount for 5 part and hinge is recommended.
seconds to insure proper adhesion. Allow the
mount to properly dwell. • Please see below for a comparison of typical current
installations using static mounts and suggested
• Ball-and-socket tether must hang down from the installation using dynamic cable manager mounts.
mount with bundle installed below the mount.
Typical current installations using static mounts
Suggested installation using dynamic cable manager mounts
.v
vzgadfsgd
gd
g df
.vzgadfsgdf
Section 4.7: Identification
4.7 Identification 4.7.1 Selection
Proper identification is crucial to the successful design, 4.7.1.1 Control Room Infrastructure
installation, and management of the industrial automation
infrastructure components. Identification provides these The control room environment is much like a data center
important benefits: in that it provides all the computing, storage, and network
resources for data communication across the industrial
• Determining locations of components automation space. The identification of infrastructure in this
• Defining the system connections area is based on the TIA/EIA-606A, Addendum 1 Standard
• Communicating safety hazards for Data Centers. The basis of this standard is the physical
location of connection ports.
It is this determining, defining, and communicating that
provide quick, clear direction that is necessary to accurately Grid Labeling.
and safely install, maintain, and repair critical industrial Component locations in the control room are determined by
automation infrastructure components resulting in efficient using an X-Y coordinate system that is usually based on the
and reliable performance. floor tile system in the control room space. If there is not a
raised floor then a 24 inch x 24 inch (61cm x 61cm) grid may
STANDARDS and CODES be applied to the room.
Although no standards currently define labeling practices in By using alphabetical designations on one axis of the room
the industrial automation space, several existing standards and numerical designations on the other axis of the room,
can be used as a guide. These standards are developed by you can create a series of alphanumeric designations that
organizations committed to the best practices for network can be established for each floor tile or grid in a control
and electrical infrastructure. room space. These floor tile designations are the basis for
determining the location of control room devices.
TIA/EIA-606A
Identification and Administration of Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructure
TIA/EIA-606A, Addendum 1
Identification and Administration of Equipment Rooms and
Data Centers
National Electric Code – NFPA 70
UL 508A – Industrial Control Panel
Cabinet/Rack Labeling This identifier would define that the top left mounting screw
.
The floor tile or grid designations are used to identify each of the panel is located at the 24th rack unit position in the
cabinet or rack in the control room. The cabinet/rack location cabinet/rack located grid AB04 in the control room.
is based on which floor tile the right front corner of the
cabinet/rack rests upon. Cabinets and racks should have Port Labeling.
location labels applied to the top and bottom of both the Now that cabinets/racks and panels in each rack are
front and rear of the device. These labels should be visible identified, the next task is to establish identifiers for each
whether or not doors are closed or opened on the cabinets. port on a panel. Port identifiers are very important because
A typical cabinet/rack label would have the following scheme: they define the connectivity of cabling within the control
room infrastructure. Many patch panels come from suppliers
AB04 with numbers already screen-printed above the ports; if this
is the case there is no need to re-label those patch panels.
If the patch panels are not pre-printed with port numbers,

labels will need to be created to identify the port numbers.
The numbering sequence should proceed from left to right
and top to bottom for all ports on a patch panel. The number
of digits used for all numbers on a patch panel should be
consistent with the total number of ports on that patch panel.
For example, a 48-port patch panel should be labeled 01
This identifier would define that the cabinet/rack is located
through 48 and a 144-port patch panel should be labeled
with its right front corner at the intersection of row AB and
001 through 144.
column 04.
In a data center, a typical port label would have the
Panel Labeling. following scheme:
Once the cabinet/rack identifiers are established, the
various panels in the cabinet/rack should be identified. The AB04-24:01
designation for the panel positions in a cabinet/rack can
be either an alphabetic designation or a two-digit number
that represent the rack unit number (RU) where the top-left
mounting screw lands in the cabinet/rack. Using the RU method
provides the control room manager with greater flexibility since
it allows for panels and equipment to be added or removed
later without disrupting the designation of panel identifiers.
A typical panel label would have the following scheme:
AB04-24 This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01

located on panel 24 in cabinet/rack AB04.
However, in a control room environment, this information is

somewhat redundant given that the cabinet/rack and panel
are clearly identified and are not usually required information
on the port label, as the cabinet/rack and panel are apparent
to the viewer who is standing at the location of the port.
Therefore, a typical control room port label would Patch Cord/Equipment Cord Labels.
have the following scheme: Patch cord/equipment cord labels are identified with
01 information that defines the connection between the near

end patch panel front connections and the far end patch
panel front connections or equipment connections. A near
This identifier defines that this is port 01. end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/
rack location, panel location, and port location. The far
Cable Labeling and Patch Cord Labeling. end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack
The cabling on the back and front of the cabinet/rack must location, panel location, and port location.
be identified. Labeling of cables on the back of the panel
is considered cable labeling and the labeling of cables A typical patch cord label would arrange near end / far
connected to the front of the panel is considered patch cord/ end information in the following scheme:
equipment cord labeling.
AB04-24:01/AB04-36:13
Cable Labels
Cables labels are identified with information that defines the
connection between the near end panel connection and the
far end panel connection. A near end connection identifier
would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location,
and port location. The far end connection identifier would
consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port
location.
This identifier would be decoded to define the patch cord
A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01
information in the following scheme: going to the same cabinet panel 36 port 13. The far end
of the cable would have a label that would have the same
AB04-24:01/AB07-36:13 information but in the reverse order.
A typical equipment cord label would information in the

following scheme:
AB04-24:01/AB04-Server2:A
This identifier would be decoded to define the equipment
cord connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port
01 going to the same cabinet port A on equipment
named Server2. Rack unit location could be substituted
This identifier would be decoded to define that the cable
for equipment name if necessary.
connects between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going
to cabinet AB07 panel 36 port 13. The far end of the cable
would have a label that would have the same information
in the reverse order.
Patch Panel Connectivity.
Patch Panel connectivity is considered the most important The typical scheme for a grounding busbar would be:
area of network infrastructure labeling because it defines
the critical connections between ports on patch panels 2-R201-TGB
and equipment. This information defines the connections This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the tele-
between the near-end ports and the far-end ports. This communications grounding busbar on floor 2 in space R201.
labeling can define the connection of a range of ports on a
panel or just define the connection for two individual ports. The typical scheme for the busbar connections would be:
A typical patch panel connectivity label would arrange 1-B301-TMGB/2-R201-

near end / far end information in the following scheme:
TGB
AB04-24:ports 01-12/ This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the
AB07-36:ports 25-36 conductor that connects the main telecommunications

grounding busbar located on floor 1 in space B301 to the
telecommunications grounding busbar on floor 2 in
space R201.
Power Cables.
Labeling of the power system involves the labeling of the
cables feeding power outlet units (POU) with information
which define the source of power to the POU. This
information would include the distribution panel and the
circuit that feeds the POU.
This identifier would be decoded to define that the ports A typical scheme for the power labeling would be:
01 through 12 on panel 24 of cabinet AB04 connect to
ports 25 through 36 on panel 36 of cabinet AB07. AB03A-PP21-15
Grounding and Bonding. Labeling of the grounding This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the
and bonding system involves the identification of the power cable that connects POU A located in rack/cabinet
main grounding busbar, grounding busbars, conductors AB03 to circuit breaker 15 in power panel 21.
connecting busbars, conductors connecting devices to
busbars, and equalizing conductors. 4.7.1.2 Network Infrastructure
The typical scheme for the main grounding busbar would be: The Network Infrastructure can be identified using the
1-B301-TMGB guidance of TIA/EIA-606A.
This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the Cable Labels
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) Cable labels are identified with information that defines
located on floor 1 in space B301. the connection between the near end connection and the
far end connection. A near end connection identifier would
consist of the location of the enclosure, the panel location in
the enclosure, and the port location. The far end connection
identifier would consist of the location of the enclosure, the
panel location in the enclosure, and port location. For cables
that do not connect between patch panels the machine
name or location and the port number can be used.
A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end Firestopping.
information in the following scheme: Each firestopping location shall be labeled at each
location where firestopping is installed, on each side of the
penetrated fire barrier, within 12 inches (300mm) of the
AB04-24:01/1ZB.01-2:01 firestopping material.
(Origination Port / Destination Port)
A typical firestopping label would arrange information in
the following scheme:
1-FSL01(2)
This identifier would be decoded to define the cable

connects between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 in the
control room going to port 01 in patch panel 2 located
in zone box #1 on the first floor of the facility. The far end
of the cable would have a label that would have the same
information but in the reverse order.
This identifier would be decoded to define that this is

Pathways.
firestopping location number 01 on the first floor and that
Cable Pathways are identified with information that
the firestopping has a two hour rating.
defines routing of the cables contained in a pathway.
This information is useful for determining which pathway
Grounding and Bonding.
connects between industrial automation areas. Locating the
Labeling of the grounding and bonding system throughout
proper pathway is necessary to remove, add, or repair a
the network involves the identification of the grounding
cable in the infrastructure.
busbars, conductors connecting busbars, conductors
connecting devices to busbars, and equalizing conductors.
A typical pathway label would arrange near end / far end
information in the following scheme:
The typical scheme for a grounding busbar would be:
AB04/1ZB.01 2-R201-TGB
This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the
telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) on floor 2 in
space R201.
This identifier would be decoded to define that the

pathway connects between cabinet AB04 in the control
room and zone enclosure #1 on the first floor of the facility.
Panel Labeling
4.7.1.3 Zone Cabling
Enclosure Labeling The designation for the panel positions in a zone enclosure
can be either an alphabetic designation or a two-digit
Labeling in the Zone Cabling Enclosure can be identified number that represent the rack unit number (RU) where the
using the guidance of TIA/EIA-606A. Ideally the physical top-left mounting screw lands in the zone enclosure. Using
location of the zone cabling enclosure within the facility the RU method provides greater flexibility since it allows for
should be used on the label to identify the zone enclosure. panels and equipment to be added or removed later and not
This is provides a quick method of locating connections to disrupt the designation of panel identifiers.
zone cabling enclosures using information on far end cables.
A typical panel label would arrange near end / far end
Often there is not a good method to assigning a physical information the following scheme:
location so then a unique number and the type of
telecommunication space is used. These labels should be
visible whether or not doors are closed or opened on the
1ZB.01-2
enclosures.
A typical zone cabling enclosure label with a physical

location would have the following scheme:
AA10
This identifier would define that the top left mounting

screw of the panel is located at the 2nd rack unit position
in the zone box # 1 located on the first floor of the facility.
This identifier would define that the enclosure is located with
at the intersection of wall marker AA and wall marker 10. Port Labeling.
Many patch panels come from the factory with numbers
A typical zone cabling enclosure label without physical already screen-printed above the ports. If this is the case,
location would have the following scheme: there is no need to re-label those patch panels. If the patch
panels are not pre-printed with port numbers then labels
1ZB.01 will need to be created to identify the port numbers. The
This identifier would define that the enclosure is located numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and
on the first floor and is zone cabling enclosure number 1 top to bottom for all ports on a patch panel. The number
in the facility. of digits used for all numbers on a patch panel should be
consistent with the total number of ports on that patch panel.
For example a 48-port patch panel should be labeled 01
through 48 and a 144-port patch panel should be labeled
001 through 144.
A typical port label would have the following scheme:

4.7.1.4 Control Panel Infrastructure
1ZB.01-2:01 Enclosure Labels

Ideally, the physical location of the control panel within the
facility should be used on the label to identify the control
panel. This provides a quick method of locating connections
to control panels using information on far end cables. Often,
there is not a good method to assigning a physical location. In
this case, a unique number and the type of telecommunication
space are used. These labels should be visible whether or not
doors are closed or opened on the enclosures.
This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port A typical control panel label with a physical location would
01 located on panel 2 in zone box # 1 on the first floor arrange information in the following scheme:
of the facility.
BE24
This is somewhat redundant information given that the This identifier would define that the enclosure is located with
cabinet/rack and panel are clearly identified and are not at the intersection of wall marker BE and wall marker 24.
usually required information on the port label since the
cabinet/rack and panel are apparent to the viewer who is A typical control panel label without physical location
standing at the location of the port. would arrange information in the following scheme:
Therefore a typical port label would have the following scheme: 1CP.05
01
This identifier defines that this is port 01.
Production Offices
In the office area, each individual telecommunications outlet/
connector shall be labeled with the horizontal link identifier.
The labeling shall appear on the connector or faceplate in a
way that clearly identifies the origination of the horizontal link.
A typical office outlet connection would arrange

information in the following scheme: This identifier would define that the enclosure is located
on the first floor and is control panel number 5 in the facility.
1ZB.01-2:01 Port Labeling
This identifier can be decoded to define that this
Industrial Automation control panels can have ports located
connection originates in port 01 located on panel 2 in
on any surface of the control panel. To delineate the location
zone box # 1, in the following scheme:
of each port in a control panel the mounting surface should
1ZB.01-2:01 be specified.
The following designations can be used to clearly

This identifier can be decoded to define that this
communication the location in the control panel of each port.
connection originates in port 01 located on panel 2 in
zone box # 1.
Control Panel Part Designation Inside Surface (Optional) Outside Surface (Optional)
Back Plane BP IBP OBP
Panel Door PD IPD OPD
Panel Right Side PR IPR OPR
Panel Left Side PL IPL OPL
Panel Top Side PT IPT OPT
Panel Bottom Side PB IPB OPB
In addition to the control panel surface each port in the This is somewhat redundant information given that the
control panel should be labeled with a unique number. The control panel and surface are clearly identified and are
numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and not usually required information on the port label since the
top to bottom for all ports in a control panel. The number of control panel and surface are apparent to the viewer who is
digits used for all numbers in the control panel should be standing at the location of the port. Therefore a typical port
consistent with the total number of ports in that control panel. label would have the following scheme:
For example a control panel with 48 ports should be labeled
01 through 48 and a control panel with 120 ports should be 01
labeled 001 through 120.
This identifier defines that this is port 01.
A typical port label would arrange information in the
following scheme: Cable Labels
Cable labels are identified with information that defines the
1CP.08-BP:01 connection between the near end connection and the far end
connection. A near end connection identifier would consist of
the location of the enclosure and the port location. The far
end connection identifier would consist of the location of the
enclosure, the panel location in the enclosure, and port location.
A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end

information in the following scheme:
1CP.08-BP:01/1ZB.04-2:01
(Origination Port / Destination Port)
This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01

located on the back plane of the control panel #8 on the
first floor of the facility.
This identifier would be decoded to define that the cable

connects between port 1 on the back plane of control panel
#8 located on the first floor of the facility going to port 1 on
the patch panel 2 in zone box #4 on the first floor. The far
end of the cable would have a label that would have the
same but with the information reversed.
Enclosure Markings.
Labels and warning are required to communicate safety
information without the use of words.

Protective Conductor Dangerous Electrical
Voltage
Safety Function Ground Earth Ground
UL 508A Warning Sign
NEC 70A Arc Flash Warning Sign
4.7.2 Installation
The following label creation and generation products will

help you clearly identify all industrial network components
according to the schemes described in this section.
4.7.2.1 Label Creation
4.7.2.2 Label Generation
Section 4.8: Safety and Security
Safety
4.8 Safety and Security
Network technicians are not always knowledgeable of the
Increasingly, electrical and network systems are converging potential hazards around control panels; therefore, proper
throughout the physical infrastructure. In industrial identification of hazards, such as Arc Flash and shock is
environments this trend toward unifying the infrastructure critical. It is estimated that the average total cost of an
has introduced new safety and security concerns, arc flash incident is around $15 million. With this in mind,
particularly at control panel locations. Acce-ssing the control having a comprehensive safety program which includes
panel has inherent hazards such as arc flash, shock, and the identification and control of hazardous energy can be an
inadvertent or unauthorized disconn-ection of communication inexpensive form of risk mitigation. This safety program can
cables. All these risks have a potentially adverse impact on include items such as proper Lockout/Tagout, proper arc
reliability and performance. flash labeling, Short Circuit Current Rating labeling, and the
use of Data Ports so that industrial control panels can stay
In addition, the presence of networking physical layer closed as much as possible.
hardware and cabling has the potential to introduce new
safety risks. Why? Network technicians who are less STANDARDS and CODES: Safety
familiar with control panel environments may be working
in these spaces. The network infrastructure also must be NFPA 70E
secure from intruders and unauthorized changes to protect The primary National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) code
sensitive data and to ensure that system uptime and that is critical for safety is NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in
productivity goals are met. the Workplace. NFPA 70E addresses the electrical safety
requirements for employees’ workplaces which are essential
Security to ensure employee safety. As physical infrastructure
The physical infrastructure must be secured to maintain the systems converge, an increasing number of workers are not
highest possibly network reliability. All connections should familiar with electrical or other hazards, so applying NFPA
be secured with restricted access to unused and open ports 70E is key to having a safe workplace for all employees.
Costs associated with network downtime or security breach
can be tremendous. One of the key areas of NFPA 70E in Industrial Automation
is Arc Flash hazard identification. An important change
The connections in a crowded control room rack or enclosure
was made in the 2009 version of NFPA 70E where article
system are important to document and control from a security 130 states that “Equipment shall be field marked with a
perspective. Demilitarized zones (DMZ) and their firewalls label containing the available incident energy or required
depend on segregating connections for enterprise and level of PPE.” Whereas it was previously mandated that a
manufacturing layers yet mistakes or security breaches can comprehensive arc flash analysis shall be used to determine
develop if patching connections are not made properly. A the arc flash boundary and the personal protective
manual system to identify and audit can be time consuming equipment (PPE) that people within the arc flash boundary
and difficult to maintain. must use, it is now also mandated that such information
be posted on the equipment so that it is clearly available to all
Physical Infrastructure Management (PIM) technology can
employees.
automate this process by monitoring these connections and
serving this data to higher level systems. This management
software also provides tools for improved efficiency when
planning and executing changes to patching or additions to
the system. A managed system with logging and configuration
tracking makes your infrastructure more transparent and
controlled which can be an important piece of the security
strategy for a critical process plant or control system.
NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) current-carrying parts and other components protected by
this device should be examined and replaced if damaged.
The other important code is NFPA 70, which is also called If burnout of a current element of an overload relay occurs,
the National Electric Code, is a standard for the safe the complete overload relay must be replaced”
installation of electrical wiring and equipment. One particular
section concerning safety is Article 409, which requires that STANDARDS and CODES: Control of Hazardous Energy
a Short Circuit Current Rating be marked on all Industrial
Control Panels. OSHA 1910.147
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Article 409.2 defines an Industrial Control Panel as: (OSHA) released a standard called the Control of
“An assembly of two or more components Hazardous Energy (Lockout-Tagout) which is referred
consisting of one of the following: to as 1910.147. This standard spells out the steps that
(1) Power circuit components only, such as motor employers must take to prevent accidents associated
controllers, overload relays, fused disconnect with hazardous energy and its control during servicing
switches, and circuit breakers. and maintenance of equipment or machinery.
(2) Control circuit components only, such as
pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches, timers, NFPA 70E
switches, control relays NFPA 70 E also addresses “Establishing an Electrically
(3) A combination of power and control circuit components.” Safe Work Condition” in Article 120. It is similar to the
OSHA 1910.147 standard except that it is more targeted
For safety purposes, Section 409.110 of the National Electric at electrical energy and not all types of energy. The
Code mandates that the Industrial Control Panel be marked requirements of both standards for controlling hazardous
with: energy are addressed in the Installation portion of this
“Short-circuit current rating of the industrial control section of this guide.
panel based on one of the following:
a. Short-circuit current rating of a listed and
labeled assembly 4.8.1 Selection: Security
b. Short-circuit current rating established utilizing
an approved method” The challenge to maintain security and manage risk along
all connection points is becoming a top priority for network
It is also important to note that a footnote refers to the UL stakeholders. Each point of connection within a network
508A standard, Supplement SB (see below). represents a risk for a potential security breach and must
be safeguarded against intruders, both purposeful and
UL 508A accidental. This requires tight security controls to protect
UL 508A, the UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control sensitive data running over multiple data systems and
Panels, addresses some of the safety identification networks.
requirement for control panels in industrial automation.
Section SB5.2 of UL 508A is titled “Cautionary markings”. It
reads:
“An industrial control panel with a short circuit current

rating based on the high fault short circuit current ratings
of one or more components as specified in SB4.2.3
shall be marked with the word “WARNING” and the
following statement: “Risk of Fire or Electric Shock – The
opening of the branch-circuit protective device may be
an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. All
structured cabling connections can be automatically tracked

4.8.1.1 Physical Infrastructure
through the patch field. By continuously monitoring all
Management
patch field connections, a PIM system instantly identifies
any interruption or disconnection and immediately notifies
The use of integrated server and switch architectures a network administrator of the event or can provide SNMP
promotes a consolidation model which incorporates data that can link to higher level software systems. These
a defined upgrade path, whether through capacity actions help to ensure that any inadvertent disconnections
increases within existing enclosures and patch fields or via are remedied, minimizing downtime. Likewise, disruptions
straightforward addition of more enclosures, patch panels, caused by potential security breaches are instantly identified
racks, and/or cabinets without costly physical migration, for quicker response.
cut-over activities, or “rip-and-replace” schemes. Upgrades
are made easier with the use of Physical Infrastructure Information recorded in the PIM configuration database
Management (PIM) software and the complementary may be leveraged in several ways. First, the automated
PANDUIT® PANVIEW iQ™ System (see Figure 4H-1), documentation of all configuration events can be used to
which provide real-time monitoring and visibility into dense track hardware assets (servers, switches) for commissioning/
physical layer connectivity. decommissioning purposes. The data also may be used to
meet the reporting requirements of industry regulations or to
PIM systems are designed to increase the speed of meet established SLAs, and to provide a “snapshot” of the
configuring consolidated assets and applications, and to newly consolidated network to restore connectivity as part of
identify and resolve problems or security threats in real-time an emergency or disaster recovery measures.
for quick resolution. LC fiber optic and RJ45 copper
Figure 4.8-1. PIM systems optimize a consolidation strategy and improve business agility by achieving better
port utilization through superior management of network ports and IT assets.
Building a PIM Solution
PanView iQ™ Physical Infrastructure Management Solution
Hardware Patch Cords Patch Panels Accessories Software
PanView™ Physical Layer Management Solution
Hardware Patch Cords & Patch Panels Accessories Software

Attachment cords
4.8.1.2 Keyed Connector Solutions

PANDUIT Keyed LC cable assembly, adapter and quick-
It is important to select a structured cabling system that termination connector components all feature both positive
uses a modular system of proprietary connector and adapter (key) and negative (keyway) elements that mechanically
products to support end-to-end separation of data networks. distinguish connections to maximize network security (see
Innovative keyed system components are available to con- Figure 4.8-2). This combination of keys and keyways results
nect all cabling elements in an enterprise running from the in up to 18 different keying options, allowing a high num-
main equipment room to the desk, delivering best value to ber of discrete and secure networks to coexist in the same
organizations seeking to increase security and minimize risk. facility while preventing all un-alike keyed connectors and
adapter ports from mating.
Other keyed systems in the marketplace have been defeated
by permitting an alien connector – either a differently keyed 4.8.1.3 Physical Network Security Devices
(or non-keyed) connector from the same manufacturer,
or another manufacturer’s connector – to be substantially Another efficient tool in maximizing physical network reli-
inserted into a keyed port. This can result in a complete ability and security is the use of Physical Network Security
optical connection and thus compromise network security. In devices. These devices should be universal so that they can
contrast, the PANDUIT Keyed LC System is tamper-resistant be retrofitted in the network infrastructure and be tamper-
and robust against intrusion, securing networks against any resistant, using a tool so that only authorized personnel can
other connector except the appropriate matching and color- get access to the unused ports or connections they help to
coded PANDUIT keyed connector. secure. They should also be used on both copper (RJ45)
and fiber (LC) network connections to secure the integrity of
the entire network infrastructure.
Fig. 4.8-2. The PANDUIT Keyed LC System provides a superior level of security to fiber optic channels because its system of both keys and keyways
prevents un-alike keyed PANDUIT connectors, as well as other manufacturers’ connectors, from being inserted into a PANDUIT Keyed LC Adapter port.
The Panduit Physical Network Security devices are the

leading solution available in the market today to protect
the physical layer of the network and are available for both
copper and fiber connections. As an additional benefit, they
are available in many colors, which can also be used for
visual identification. For Copper, the RJ45 Lock-In device is
available in standard and recessed versions to address vari-
ous depths of RJ45 jacks. For example, maximum physical
security is achieved on the Stratix switch by using a combi-
nation of standard and recessed devices with the downlink
and uplink ports.
The Panduit Physical Network Security devices are the

leading solution available in the market today to protect
. The PANDUIT Keyed LC System provides a superior level of
the physical layer of the network and are available for both
security to fiber optic channels because its system of both keys
copper and fiber connections. As an additional benefit, they
and keyways prevents un-alike keyed PANDUIT connectors, as
are available in many colors, which can also be used for
well as other manufacturers’ connectors, from being inserted into a
visual identification. For Copper, the RJ45 Lock-In device is
PANDUIT Keyed LC Adapter port.
available in standard and recessed versions to address vari-
ous depths of RJ45 jacks. For example, maximum physical
security is achieved on the Stratix switch by using a combi-
nation of standard and recessed devices with the downlink
and uplink ports.
For the LC physical network security devices, the lock-

in duplex clip for the cable assembly connector prevents
adapter latches from disengaging from the connector unless
an installation/removal tool is used. The tool also enables
blockout devices to be snapped in or out of LC adapters or
receptacles. These tools are available from PANDUIT to limit
installation or removal of lock-in and blockout devices to only
authorized users.
4.8.2 Selection: Safety
4.8.2.1 Data Access Port
Electricians, engineers, and network support staff often

need to access the network connections internal to a control Figure 4.8-3. RJ45 Plug Lock-In device installed on patch
panel for configuration, programming or troubleshooting. cords secures connections to reduce network downtime,
Safety risks arise because many of these activities must data security breaches, and hardware replacement due to
be performed with the panel power on so that the machine theft. The RJ45 Jack Blockout Device installed in unused
controller and network switch are powered. Opening a ‘live’ ports provides a simple and secure method to control ac-
control panel presents shock and arc flash dangers that can cess to data and deter vandalism to jacks.
severely injure or even kill.
A dedicated access port that is designed for secure, safe

access to data connections along with a power receptacle
suitable for a laptop can greatly improve the compliance with
the safety mandates concerning opening live control panels.
A service person can now simply open this access port and
configure or program devices internal to the panel without
opening the panel door.
A key advantage of PANDUIT’s Data Access Port (see

Figure 4.8-5, next page) is a modular construction that can
accommodate a number of available interfaces for Ethernet,
RS232, and other standard network connections. This adapt- Figure 4.8-4. LC Connector Lock-In (left) and LC Duplex
ability is important because control systems can evolve over Adapter Blockout (right) devices further prevent uninten-
time requiring additional connectors to support connectivity tional moves, adds, and changes to PANDUIT Keyed LC
to added devices in the panel. This modular approach allows deployments, mitigating the risk of connectors becoming
configuring to customers’ existing needs then expanding or accidentally dislodged or otherwise compromised.
modifying so that this important safety feature stays useful
over time as business requirements change.
4.8.2.2 LOTO Devices
Devices selected for Lockout / Tagout should be as universal

as possible to cut down on the total number of devices needed
to safely control the hazardous energy present in the infrastruc-
ture. They should also be easy-to-use so that there is no reason
for employees to bypass Lockout / Tagout when performing
service or maintenance on equipment or machinery.
4.8.2.3 Safety Labels
It is important to keep in mind the environment when select-

Figure 4.8-5. Data Access Ports manage risk in industrial
ing labels to identify hazards. For example, it is a best-practice
settings by providing access to the network without opening
to use Polyester labels with high-tack adhesive to ensure the
the control panel.
longevity of the labels and offer the widest temperature range
available. Also, it is best to use one supplier for labels so that
the colors and appearance of the labels are consistent through-
out the workplace.
Figure 4.8-7. PANDUIT recommends this label to meet the

identification requirement of UL508A, as it provided space to
write in the necessary Short Circuit Current Rating information
Figure 4.8-6. Arc Flash labels from PANDUIT are recom-

mended for use: (top) label includes space to meet NFPA
70E requirements by writing the available incident energy of
the required level of Personal Protective Equipment; (bottom)
label contains all of the necessary information for Arc Flash
and Shock hazards
4.8.3 INSTALLATION: Security RJ45 Jack Blockout Device
4.8.3.1 Keyed Systems
Fiber and copper keyed connectivity systems are comprised of

all necessary elements (connectors, adapters, patch cords) to
deploy a physically secure network infrastructure. These systems
employ specialized connectors and adapters that physically pre- Step 1: To install: Step 2: To release: Step 3: To remove:
vent access to all but the network for which a user is authorized. snap the blockout insert the special retract the device
The idea is similar to requiring a key to unlock a door. device into the jack removal tool, which
module attaches to the
Color-Coded, Mechanical Keying Functionality. Color-coding blockout device
ensures visual separation of networks by visually distinguishing RJ45 Lock-In Device
connections for user convenience. IT Personnel assign each
discrete network its own color, and only connectivity of that color
may be used across the channel from outlets and wall plates to
zone enclosures and consolidation points.
Positive and negative keying features on each connector match

only with corresponding features on similarly colored adapters Installing Lock-In device
and/or patch cords. Unwanted connections are prevented by onto RJ45 Plug: Step 3:
the unique mechanical geometry associated with connectors Step 1: Push plug into device until it
for each color, keeping multiple networks separate and secure Align white line on tool with snaps into place. Check that
throughout the facility. white line on device. plug is fully seated in the device.
These combined features provide true keying security by: Step 2: Step 4:
• Limiting network access to specific functional key types Insert tool into device and Rotate tool counter-clockwise
• Preventing the insertion of other keyed and non-keyed rotate tool clockwise 90°. 90° and remove tool
connector products that would compromise the secured from device.
keyed network
• Ensuring that only authorized personnel perform moves,
adds, and changes to the network
Quick Verification of Secure Network Separation. Keyed con-

nectivity systems provide secure data networks with quick
visual verification of secure network separation at all points
across the channel. These systems ensure that different
personnel cannot violate the DMZ through accidental cross-
patching, preventing not only a compromise of mission but also
a compromise of established physical layer security protocols.
In addition, for installers and similar network technicians work-

ing in dense patch field areas, the color-coding on keyed con-
nectivity systems makes it easy to identify correct ports for fast
and easy troubleshooting. With best-in-class keyed systems,
the chance that a well-meaning user will successfully connect to
the wrong network is greatly minimized.
Installing RJ45 Plug Into Jack Removing RJ45 Plug From Jack 4.8.4 Installation: Safety
Insert plug into jack until plug Step 1:
locks into place. Lightly Align white line on tool with Several mandatory steps must be taken to deploy an effective
pull on the cable to confirm that white line on device. lockout/tagout program.
plug is locked into Step 2:
the jack. Insert tool into device and The first step is to conduct a hazard assessment by identify-
rotate tool clockwise 180°. ing all equipment that is used, serviced, maintained or stored.
Step 3: All energy sources must be documented, including the type of
Remove plug from jack. hazard, the location on the equipment, proper isolation proce-
Step 4: dure, and lockout device. Next, document the methods used to
Rotate tool counter-clockwise dissipate the stored energy and verify the isolation.
180° and remove tool
from device. The second step is to develop a detailed written energy control
procedure, which contains the information identified above and
also steps to de-energize and re-energize, equipment-specific
Removing Lock-In Device drawings and diagrams, a list of employees exposed to hazards
From RJ45 Plug and qualified to perform lockout/tagout, and the employee in
Step 1: charge of the program.
Align white line on tool with
white line on device. The third step is to ensure that a robust training program is in
Step 2: place. OSHA mandates that training be given at least annually,
Insert tool into device and but also to new employees or employees with new respon-
rotate tool clockwise 90°. sibilities or when new equipment is acquired or a change in
Step 3: machines, equipment or processes presents a new hazard or a
Use a screwdriver or fingernail change in the energy control procedures.
to release locking tab on bot-
tom of device. While holding Levels of lockout/tagout training can be split into two main em-
release tab, push plug out of ployee categories:
the device
Step 4: • Authorized employees lock-out and/or tag-out machines
Rotate tool counter-clockwise or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance.
90° and remove tool from Their training should make them proficient in the recognition of
device. hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of energy
available in the workplace, the methods and means necessary
for energy isolation, control and verification of isolation.
• Affected employees are all workers who operate equipment

which may be locked out/tagged out during servicing or mainte-
nance, or whose job requires them to work in an area in which
such servicing or maintenance is being performed. Their train-
ing should instruct them in the purpose and use of the energy
control procedure while making it clear that they should never
attempt to restart or re-energize equipment which is locked out
or tagged out, and that warning tags must be respected.
OSHA lists Other Employee as a third category, but for simplic- PSL-P: Plug Lockout Device
ity, Other Employees can be trained in the same fashion as
affected employees.
The final step is to perform an annual inspection, which

includes not only reviewing the company energy control
procedure but also observing an instance of lockout/tagout in
progress.
PSL-CB: Circuit Breaker Lockout
PSL-CBL: Large Circuit Breaker Lockout

(for molded-case circuit breakers)

Step 1: Verify Circuit breaker is
de-energized. Place PSL-CBL
over breaker with handle cen-
tered in lockout opening.
Step 2: Turn the toggle set

screw knob and tighten firmly
against breaker handle.
Step 3: Rotate/flip the toggle

set screw knob down
Step 4: Install lock and tag and

test for security. Verify that the
lockout device secures the
breaker handle in an off posi-
tion.
PSL-WS: Wall Switch Lockout Device PSL-GLB: Group Lock Box

1. Place the switch in the desired position. If the circuit
is controlled by more than one switch, make sure that all
switches are in the desired position and have a PSL-WS
installed on them.
2. Place the PSL-WS lockout over switch.
3. Tighten the set screw securely with a 1/8” or smaller flat-

head screwdriver. Typically,one – to – two (1 – 2)) com-
plete revolutions of the set screw are required after the
screw first touches the switch. Do not over tighten the set
screw or apply to lighted switches. The switch may fracture.
4. Verify that the lockout is adequately secured to the switch.
5. Insert a padlock through both holes. This will prevent ac-

cess to the set screw. The PSL-WS lockout is designed
for use with 9/32” diameter shackle padlocks. Smaller
diameter padlocks may not adequately block access to
the set screw
6. Verify that the switch cannot be moved to the unde-

sired position.
7. Attach a safety tag.
PSL-1 / PSL-1A / PSL-1.5 / PSL-1.5A: Hasps
PSL-PEL: Pneumatic Lockout Device PSL-MLD: Multiple Lockout Device

Step 1: Verify valve is de- (Used as a gate valve lockout device)
energized. Thread end of cable Step 1: Disconnect the
through gate valve handle and pneumatic supply line
then through loophole of cable. from
the equipment. Protect
yourself from any release
of

pressure in the machine
Step 2: Place the opening of
line.
the PSL-PEL onto the
locking groove of the pneu-
matic fitting. Use the Step 2: With loophole
opening on the PSL-PEL that tight against the gate
fits tightest on the valve and lockout open,
pneumatic fitting. continue threading end
of cable through the
Step 3: Rotate the PSL-PEL
pre-notched opening of
discs to fully enclose the pneu-
lockout device.
matic fitting. Note arrows that
indicate direction of rotation.
Step 3: Cinch up plastic

lockout body onto cable,
forming a secure bond.
lockout device fits securely on
the pneumatic fitting and that
the pneumatic supply line can-
not be attached to the equip-
Step 4: Insert up to six
ment.
padlocks and tags into
holes of the hasp.
Verify that the lockout
device secures the gate
valve in a safe or off
position.
PSL-MLD: Multiple Lockout Device

(used as a disconnect switch lockout device)
Step 1: Verify discon-
nect is de-energized.
Thread cable through
holes on each discon-
nect handle. Insert end
of cable through loophole
and tightly hold firm near
lockout point.
Step 2: Thread end

of cable through pre-
notched opening of
lockout device.
Step 3: Cinch up plastic

lockout body onto cable,
forming a secure bond.
Step 4: Insert up to six

padlocks and tags into
holes of the hasp.
Verify that the lockout de-
vice secures the discon-
nect switches in a safe or
off position.
OSHA lists Other Employee as a third category, but for simplic- PSL-P: Plug Lockout Device
ity, Other Employees can be trained in the same fashion as
affected employees.
The final step is to perform an annual inspection, which

includes not only reviewing the company energy control
procedure but also observing an instance of lockout/tagout in
progress.
PSL-CB: Circuit Breaker Lockout
PSL-CBL: Large Circuit Breaker Lockout

(for molded-case circuit breakers)

Step 1: Verify Circuit breaker is
de-energized. Place PSL-CBL
over breaker with handle cen-
tered in lockout opening.
Step 2: Turn the toggle set

screw knob and tighten firmly
against breaker handle.
Step 3: Rotate/flip the toggle

set screw knob down

lockout device secures the
breaker handle in an off posi-
tion.
Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies
IEEE 802.11a / b / g
4.9 Wireless Technologies
Wireless access points on the market today are required to
comply with current IEEE 802.11 standards. Several types of
Integrated wired and wireless networks are an essential
multi-standard access points are available, including single-
element of successful enterprise and industrial environments.
band (802.11b/g) and dual-band (802.11a/b/g) devices.
The Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a broad term
that denotes a wireless network which allows Ethernet data
• The 802.11b standard was released in 1999 and defines
communications as well as other rapidly developing applica-
wireless operation in the 2.4 GHz unlicensed frequency
tions. The WLAN can be connected easily to a wired network
band at a basic data rate of 11 Mb/s.
to allow communication from a wireless client to anywhere
• The 802.11a standard was also released in 1999 and de-
within the defined LAN or beyond.
fines the wireless operation in the 5 GHz frequency band at
a basic data rate of 54 Mb/s.
The entry point for the wireless client is the wireless ac-
• The 802.11g standard released in 2003 also operates in the
cess point (AP), which is a bi-directional transceiver that
2.4 GHz frequency band, but at a basic data rate of 54 Mb/s.
interfaces from conventional structured cabling of the wired
network to radio frequency communications required for
Actual data throughput often averages to less than half of the
wireless client devices. The access point is located at a
theoretical data rate maximum, depending on the distance
convenient point –perhaps in the ceiling of the factory floor
of the user to the access point, the number of users sharing
or another open, public space – and is typically connected
the same access point, and the bandwidth required by the
to the enterprise computing facilities by means of structured
applications in use.
cabling links. This frees client devices on machines and at
work stations from being tethered to data outlets, instead us-
IEEE 802.11n (in draft)
ing wireless technology to transmit to and receive Ethernet
The IEEE currently is developing the 802.11n standard,
traffic from the closest access point.
which states a basic data rate of 600 Mb/s in both the 2.4
and 5 GHz frequency bands, with an expected actual data
Distributed network topologies are increasingly bringing pow-
throughput between 100 and 200 Mb/s. The standard is due
er, switching, and data transfer functions closer to industrial
for release in late 2009, but many “Draft N” products are
endpoint devices for improved network manageability and
already available. It is expected that 802.11n products will
scalability. Network stakeholders can use wireless tech-
be backward compatible with 802.11a/b/g products; however,
nologies to deliver additional freedom and mobility to users
the overall data rate of a mixed network will be limited by the
accessing industrial Ethernet networks, as well as added
top speed of legacy equipment.
flexibility in deploying wireless-enabled endpoint devices to
track assets throughout the warehouse and factory floor.
Several new technologies are being implemented in 802.11n
STANDARDS and CODES access points, including Multiple Input, Multiple Output
(MIMO) antenna technology and channel bonding. MIMO
While operation of the wireless network in the United States technology uses more than one antenna both in the client
is unlicensed, it is regulated by the Federal Communica- and within the access point to generate multiple data paths
tions Commission (FCC). The Institution of Electrical and between the client and access point in order to optimize
Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 series of standards signal reception. With channel bonding, the 802.11n access
defines wireless transmission parameters, including speeds, point uses two separate non-overlapping channels at the
channels, and operating frequencies for the wireless LAN. same time to increase data throughput, improving over legacy
Wireless access points operate on a defined channel within systems which are able to use only one channel at a time.
the allowable frequency band of operation to reduce direct
interference. Typically, equipment will be set to a default
channel, but can self-select an alternative channel of opera-
tion if excessive interference is detected.
ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162; ISO/IEC TR24704 Access points require data traffic backhauling to the wired
In 2004 the International Organization for Standards (ISO) network. The format of this traffic is 802.3 10/100/1000Ba-
ratified telecommunications report ISO/IEC TR24704, “Infor- seT Ethernet traffic, which travels over Category 5e cable
mation Technology – Customer Premises Cabling for Wire- or greater. Installing Category 6 cable is recommended,
less Access Points,” that outlines a method of integrating depending on equipment evolution, to extend the life of the
APs with the structured cabling infrastructure. The standard network cabling infrastructure. Cabling infrastructure should
defines a cabling grid system for wireless coverage areas, comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA-569-B, and forth-
and is popular outside the United States. coming TIA-1005.
In 2006 the ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 committee developed Tele- 4.9.1.1 Network Architecture Options
communications Services Bulletin (TSB) 162, “Telecommu-
nications Guidelines for Wireless Access Points,” for use in Two common logical architectures are used to deploy wire-
North America. This bulletin proposes two ways to design a less networks: individually managed wireless access points
coverage area (see Figure 4.9-1): a generic wireless cover- are known as “autonomous” or “distributed”, and centrally
age area tailored for North American buildings and a custom- managed wireless access points are termed “lightweight”
sized coverage area per the building characteristics. or “centralized”. In an autonomous architecture, each AP
supports all necessary switching, security, and advanced
4.9.1 Installing networking functions necessary to route wireless traffic (see
Figure 4.9-2). In this sense, autonomous APs are similar to a
Because APs are commonly positioned in public areas traditional Ethernet switch that provides data connectivity to
outside the telecom room or closet, they can be subject to end users, since a wireless controller is not required.
tampering or theft. Therefore APs should be mounted either
on the wall or ceiling in secure and aesthetically pleasing In contrast, lightweight WLAN architecture hardware consists
enclosures that minimally affect the RF signal propagation. of APs that operate in conjunction with a centralized wireless
Such enclosures offer protection from harsh industrial en- controller. The difference between the physical infrastruc-
vironments, and must integrate with the rest of the network tures of lightweight and autonomous WLAN architectures is
infrastructure by offering provisions for conduit or raceway, a minimal; the only additional component in a lightweight archi-
demarcation outlet, and grounding. tecture is the wireless controller. The APs reside at the edge
(access layer) of the network to support the Physical Layer
(PHY or OSI Layer 1) as well as the real-time portions of Me-
dia Access Control management, and the controller resides
deeper in the LAN network at the distribution or possibly at
the core layer (see Figure 4.9-2).
Figure 4.9-1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162 - Generic (left ) and Custom (right) Wireless Cell Size
Larger industrial AP deployments usually use lightweight wireless coverage is expanded with the addition of APs,
architectures due to the operational cost efficiencies that the solution can be converted into a centralized lightweight
can be achieved via group management of lightweight architecture. Migration from an autonomous to a lightweight
APs. Autonomous APs require individual management: any solution is possible with the addition of the wireless control-
configuration changes can be accomplished via the console ler and an operating system upgrade to selected Cisco APs.
port session, a telnet session, a Web connection, or SNMP A lightweight WLAN solution will in turn ease network-wide
commands. If a change must be made across the entire policy and security implementations that are of critical impor-
WLAN network, every autonomous AP must be individually tance for large scale deployments.
reconfigured. Also, autonomous APs usually have no vis-
ibility or control of neighboring APs, and thus cannot perform 4.9.1.2 Power
self-healing, client load balancing, or other advanced radio
resource services. Typically APs will operate at 48 volts of DC power. There are
several ways to provide power to access points:
• Brick” Type. A “brick” type power supply is used in the

proximity of the access point to convert from 110 volts AC to
the required 48 volts DC and supply this to the access point.
This then means that the power supply and access point is in
the vicinity of a power outlet. This may not be the case for a
ceiling mounted access point and the center of a room in an
office – and the cost associated with installing a new power
outlet can be prohibitive.
• Power Injector. This is an electronic device that is fed

either from a power supply above or from the 110 volt outlet
directly, and that provides the appropriate DC voltage on the
access point side of the structured cabling. In this way the
access point can be powered, but the power supply can be
Figure 4.9-2. Physical Layout Showing AP Deployments Powered located at a more physically convenient point in the network.
by PoE Technologies
4.9.1.3 Power over Ethernet
In contrast, a lightweight architecture eases management of
large deployments by controlling all APs from a single device. Power over Ethernet (PoE) technologies enable WLAN
Because the lightweight APs also have visibility and aware- managers to power access points over the network and real-
ness of their neighboring APs, they can supervise and alert ize the benefits of ease and speed of deployment, ease of
the wireless controller if one of their neighbors becomes management, and enhanced security (see Section 4K of this
faulty. Lightweight WLANs can be self-healing because the document). PoE solutions to power APs are very common
controller commands neighboring APs to adjust their power in industrial networks as access points often are installed
levels to compensate for a failed counterpart. In addition, the long after the building is finished. This compels network
wireless controller can offload wireless clients to a neigh- stakeholders to find a power solution that avoids the cost of
boring AP if a single AP becomes overloaded. These load running new AC outlets and eliminates the expense of power
balancing and self-healing capabilities mitigate production adapters.
downtime risks by preventing disruptions to mission-critical
applications and processes. The IEEE 802.3af PoE standard allows for a maximum of
15.4 W to be delivered by Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE)
For smaller wireless deployments requiring only a few APs, to powered devices. Upcoming standard IEEE 802.3at (ex-
the WLAN can be designed using autonomous APs. As pected to be ratified in 2009) would increase power delivery
to a minimum of 25 W at up to 45°C maximum ambient tem- Private

perature over Category 5e, 6, and 6A copper cabling. Some Network (VPN).
802.11n access points may draw more power than provided WLAN security also exists at the physical layer – specifically,
under 802.3at; in these situations, single-port power injec- sturdy yet aesthetic metal enclosures should be used to
tors may be used to accommodate the additional power provide security and physical protection to access points. IP-
requirements of these devices. rated industrial enclosures include such features as sealed
antenna bulkheads, gland plate(s), and vibration-mitigating
4.9.1.4 Effective Range backplates. Apertures must be drilled in these enclosures
to accommodate conduit, cables, and antennas associated
A significant amount of published specification information with the access point.
from the access point vendors states that the access point
can operate reliably typically up to 300 ft. This distance ap- WLAN security can be enhanced by remote management
plies in an open, unobstructed environment. In reality, the capabilities. During the workday, for example, RFID-enabled
effective range is very dependent on the type of building badges can allow the location of human resources to be
construction materials used and the specific deployment of monitored across the facility, an application which can be
obstacles within the building. For example, in a typical build- critical in sensitive or high-security business or government
ing with concrete walls with steel reinforcing bars and light environments. Then overnight, remote management of the
drywall panels for offices or light office furniture, the cover- wireless system permits selective shutdown of access points
age distance will be less than 300 ft. in order to discourage unauthorized users from attempting to
log on to the WLAN while providing coverage for the limited
TSB-162 balances the needs of coverage from the wireless number of authorized users and keeping mission-critical
perspective consistent with meeting performance require- security applications functional (badge-in/badge-out,
ments in the structured cabling system that is used to link asset tracking).
the access points to the wired network. The bulletin focuses
on a distance of 60 ft as a starting point for consideration of 4.9.2 Testing
the distance between access points in commercial buildings.
However, industrial environments can contain metal surfaces Per ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB 162, cabling should be installed
that could reflect RF signals and affect their propagation. and tested in accordance with TIA/EIA-568B (see Sec-
Therefore, we recommend that network stakeholders use tion 4.1 of this document for testing procedures).
an RF planner and conduct a site assessment (and in some
circumstances an actual site survey) to determine the exact
coverage areas and requirements.
4.9.1.5 Security
Wireless technology has developed effective security stan-

dards to provide user authentication and authorization. The
IEEE 802.11i standard outlines authentication and encryp-
tion mechanisms to secure wireless connections. Authen-
tication is accomplished in the same way on a WLAN as it
is on a wired LAN, as outlined in the IEEE 802.1X standard.
802.1X provides a framework for mutual authentication (cli-
ent and network equipment) before a connection becomes
active. Data confidentiality is protected with encryption
mechanisms such as Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)
or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). Confidentiality
across multiple networks can be ensured with a Virtual
4.9.3 Documenting 3. Current configuration, IP address, and security

(i.e., WEP/WPA) settings for each access point
The process of documenting your industrial wireless 4. Up-to-date maintenance log documenting all moves,
network is to aid in troubleshooting and reduce the time adds, and changes
required for routine maintenance and moves, adds, and 5. Up-to-date labeling information on physical
changes. The following are considered essential ele- infrastructure (cables, enclosures, etc.) in accordance
ments and processes to document: with TIA-606A.
1. All site surveys conducted to determine access point Building a Wireless Solution
placement and coverage areas Note: Part numbers given in these tables are illustrative only.
2. Blueprint or floor plan showing current physical A detailed review of required part numbers must be carried
location of each access point and associated cabling out specific to each deployment.
Standard / Technology Wireless Access Point PanZone ® Enclosure
Panduit Part Number Panduit Part Number
802.11 a/g Distributed, P-AP1131AG-A-K9 PZWIFIEW

Internal Antennas
802.11 a/g Centralized, P-LP1131AG-A-K9 PZWIFIEW
Internal Antennas
802.11 a/g Distributed, P-AP1242AG-A-K9 PZWIFIED
External Antennas
802.11 a/g Centralized, P-LP1242AG-A-K9 PZWIFIED
External Antennas
802.11 a/g/n Draft Distributed, Exter- P-AP1252AG-A-K9 PZWIFIEN
nal Antennas
802.11 a/g/n Draft Centralized, Exter- P-LP1252AG-A-K9 PZWIFIEN
nal Antennas
Panduit Part Number Types for the Outdoor / Industrial Environments
Standard / Technology Wireless Access Point PanZone ® Enclosure

Panduit Part Number Panduit Part Number
802.11 a/g Distributed, P-AP1131AG-A-K9 PZNWE12

Internal Antennas
802.11 a/g Centralized, P-LP1131AG-A-K9 PZNWE12
Internal Antennas
802.11 a/g Distributed, P-AP1242AG-A-K9 PZNWE12
External Antennas
802.11 a/g Centralized, P-LP1242AG-A-K9 PZNWE12
External Antennas
802.11 a/g/n Draft Distributed, P-AP1252AG-A-K9 PZNWE12
External Antennas
802.11 a/g/n Draft P-LP1252AG-A-K9 PZNWE12
Centralized, External Antennas
Section 4.10: Power over Ethernet
4.10 Power over Ethernet against power outages and spikes. These benefits have
helped PoE gain rapid traction in industrial environments for
Power over Ethernet (PoE) is an established technology that the deployment of wireless access points (WAPs) placed in
extends the utility of Ethernet connectivity by providing reli- locations that are difficult to access manually (i.e., attached
able low-voltage DC power delivery to network devices over to high ceilings or above active machinery), which minimizes
the same Category 5e and Category 6 cabling infrastructure production downtime and simplifies WAP
that traditionally have only carried data. reconfiguration tasks.
To implement PoE in a new or existing Industrial Ethernet Industrial security applications such as network surveillance
network, organizations have a choice of varied solutions cameras, electromagnetic door locks, and radio frequency
that include PoE-enabled network switches, midspan power identification (RFID) systems are beginning to see wider in-
sourcing equipment (PSE), powered patch panels, and tegration with PoE due to reduced power demand from client
single port injectors. devices and greater availability of pre-standard PoE
Plus equipment.
STANDARDS and CODES
IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at

Since acceptance of the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet
standard in 2003, equipment vendors have been design-
ing standards-based products that leverage the numerous
advantages and benefits offered by PoE technologies (see
Figure 4.10-1). The newer PoE Plus standard is being
written to accommodate more power hungry devices such
as PLC devices, HVAC units, specialized industrial lighting,
motorized (i.e., point-tilt-zoom, or PTZ) network cameras,
proximity sensors, or other security apparatus.
Figure 4.10-1. Applications currently driving the adoption of PoE • Under IEEE 802.3af, 15.4 W of power are available for each
include Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) phones, wireless access powered device with a maximum DC current of 350 mA per
points (WAPs), and IP security and surveillance cameras. pair, which is adequate for most current PoE applications.
PoE offers two benefits that are consistent across appli- • New standard IEEE 802.3at (commonly referred to as PoE
cations: cost savings and flexibility of device placement. Plus) is expected to be ratified in mid-2009. The standard
Because PoE runs data and power together over the same would increase power delivery up to a minimum of 25 W at a
cable to each device attached to the local area network maximum DC current would be 720 milliamps (mA) per pair
(LAN), devices can be installed without the need for a dedi- (or 360 mA per conductor), up to 45°C maximum ambient
cated AC outlet. This saves money by eliminating the cost temperature over Category 5e, 6, and 6A copper cabling.
and time associated with AC outlet installations, while provid- PoE also helps protect network investments, as it is an
ing the flexibility to locate PoE devices where performance extension of the established 802.3 Ethernet protocol and is
is optimum. supported under 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1Gbps and
eventually 10Gbps.National Electric Code (NEC) – Safety
Also, by using a centralized power source, PoE offers the Extra Low Voltage (SELV) PoE conforms to Underwriters
ability to remotely power and manage connected devices Laboratories (UL) Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) classifi-
in the event of service disruptions or reconfigurations, and cation.An SELV circuit provides extra-low voltage define as
helps manage power sources and battery backups to protect <120V DC by the International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) which has a low risk of accidental contact with a higher PoE is pushing into the automated factory environment by
voltage and lacks a return path through earth (ground) that providing distributed power and networking for typical de-
electrical current could take in case of contact with a human vices found in commercial areas such as wireless access
body. An SELV circuit typically involves an isolating trans- points (APs) and video cameras (see Figure 4.10-2). The
former, guaranteed minimum distances between conductors exciting new application for PoE is to use this approach to
and electrical insulation barriers. SELV circuits via PoE are power I/O devices which meet the PoE power budget. For
designed to transmit power over Ethernet cabling and termi- example, Ethernet-based vision sensors currently exist that
nate to an RJ45 connector which would not normally mate will work with existing PoE-level power. It is anticipated that
with non-SELV circuits. a greater range of devices available as the PoE standard
evolves to support higher power levels, and as endpoint
devices are engineered for lower power. Distance limita-
tions are being overcome through fiber distribution through
4.10.1 Developing Industrial Applicaitons the zone cabling consolidation points and edge switching
into the areas of the factory where control and automation
is required.
IP SURVEILLANCE
When combined with Power over Ethernet (PoE) systems,

IP surveillance devices offer unique opportunities to lower
an organization’s total cost of network ownership through
scalability, flexibility of device placement, and cost-effective
deployment. Remote manageability of PoE-enabled devic-
es gives organizations the ability to access, manage, and
control power to cameras that are placed in inaccessible
or hard-to-reach areas on the factory floor. Functions such
as camera resets and calibration of connected devices can
be performed either at an internal management workstation
or from an external web access point, without the need to
physically touch a device that is placed out of reach.
Figure 4.10-2. Hybrid PoE / Logic Control The use of these devices can broaden enterprise security
initiatives without the expense of proprietary hardware and
software, or traditional CCTV equipment purchases such
as multiplexers, repeaters, and signal splitters. With a digi-
tal signal, camera views can be monitored over a virtually
unlimited number of screens by utilizing almost any work-
station with a common web-browser. In addition, digitizing
the camera signal enables the use of IP multicast solutions
and enhanced hard-disk based recording devices and stor-
age options not available with traditional CCTV systems
(see Figure 4.10-3).
PoE systems also increase the reliability of security networks

by providing cost-effective centralized backup power to all
connected IP surveillance devices. Surveillance cameras
are essential to the security of many organizations, and match for PoE. Cost savings achieved through reduced
keeping these devices reliably operational is critical. During installation times and reduced multiple cable pulls make PoE
local power interruptions, a single UPS unit supporting a enabled RFID systems a logical choice for improves asset
PoE powered patch panel can provide seamless, reliable management as new systems are being installed.
power for all surveillance cameras connected to it. Central-
ized backup power through PoE offers the additional benefit
of increased reliability, lower total cost of ownership through
simpler maintenance procedures, easier monitoring, and
higher efficiency than a traditional system would offer.
Also, unlike WiFi which has a relatively large coverage radius,

Figure 4.10-3. With the ongoing digitalization of security RFID readers must be spaced strategically and closer to-
and surveillance systems organizations today can take gether along the entire inventory flow route for accurate asset
advantage of Ethernet, Internet, or wireless technologies tracking. Proprietary tracking systems typically require system
as the backbone of their security infrastructure to gain the elements to be hard wired according to number of monitored
advantages of greater device capabilities, network conver- nodes. However, PoE-enabled RFID readers become part of
gence, interoperability, and remote or local accessibility. the network fabric and can be increased or reconfigured as
the needs of the business change by increasing or decreasing
Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) Systems corresponding PoE ports. Unused PoE ports may be utilized
RFID is gaining popularity as another application which can le- for other functions such as network surveillance cameras
verage the advantages of PoE, with some analysts projecting which when combined with RFID asset tracking maximize
the deployment of up to 2 million PoE-enabled RFID readers security in warehousing and enterprise applications.
by 2010. A fully implemented, warehouse-wide RFID system
can track shipping containers or a pallet’s movement from Retailers benefit by reduction of inventory shrinkage, elimi-
the time the pallet enters the warehouse to the time it leaves. nation of incorrect deliveries (at the receiving dock), and an
These systems rely on fixed RFID readers placed throughout improvement in distribution logistics. End customers achieve
the warehouse and at other points between receiving and greater satisfaction as retailers benefit in reduced stock out-
shipping (see Figure 4.10-4). Each reader must be powered ages as the result of being able to track a pallet’s movement
as well as able to transmit data: an immediate and natural through the warehouse.
Figure 4.10-4. PoE enabled RFID readers track assets through shipping & receiving via Electronic Product
Code (EPC) tags which respond with detailed product, container and location information. PoE cameras
provide additional security to correlate asset movement and human interactions.
4.10.2 Installing
Distance requirements for PoE deployments are currently However, devices such as room sensors, electronic door
limited to 100m, in accordance with TIA/EIA specifications locks, and other building controls may require up to 25 W
for Category 5e and Category 6 copper cabling limits. per device to operate. These devices would be powered
over twisted pairs in conformance with the upcoming PoE-
Wiring schemes for RJ45 connectors on cables carrying Plus standard, and the amount of heat generated in cable
PoE are not affected by PoE deployments, and should be bundles at these higher power levels must be addressed.
terminated under conventional RJ-45 procedures and in
accordance with TIA/EIA-568A and -568B. Under PoE Plus, the maximum power transmitted over any
individual cable bundle should not exceed 5,000 W up to
For existing PoE installations, the specified current and an ambient temperature of 45°C. At temperatures from
power limits were designed to maintain cabling tempera- 45-60°C it is recommended to reduce the power output and
ture rise of less than 10°C degrees and a maximum cabling or power consumption (i.e., de-rate the system) until the
temperature lower than 60°C (i.e., the sum of ambient tem- ambient temperature falls back to 45°C.
perature and expected temperature rise in cabling). Most
fixed-direction network surveillance cameras and RFID The de-rating process can include several strategies such
readers can run on the 15.4 W of power provided under the as reducing the number of cables in the bundle, or im-
current IEEE 802.3af standard using existing Category 5e proving the mix of PoE / PoE Plus powering to reduce the
or 6 cabling. Therefore, in most cases, these lower power number of powered endpoints on a particular cable span.
levels do not present significant concerns regarding the Also, higher performing cables with lower DC resistance
heat rise over twisted-pair bundles. (e.g., Category 6 and 6A) tend to generate a lower tem-
perature rise and therefore have fewer associated bundling
constraints.
With the V1.41 firmware installed, go to SETUP >> high-

4.10.3 Testing
light Twisted Pair, hit Enter >> on following screen, hit the
right arrow to go to tab 2>> highlight AC Wire Map, hit
Fluke has updated the firmware in their DTX-1800 series
Enter >> highlight Enable, hit Enter.
cable tester to support PANDUIT DPoE™ 1GIG™ Power
Patch Panels. The new DTX V1.41 firmware supports two-
pair (1,2) & (3,6) PoE channel and permanent link testing
over Category 5e and Category 6 twisted-pair cabling as
well as AC Wire Map testing, and is available on the Fluke
website at: http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/prod-
ucts/DTX+CableAnalyzer+Series/Downloads.
Unlike traditional DC testing methods, testing capabilities

are being introduced that utilize AC signals to perform Wire
Map measurements that are not blocked by Power over
Ethernet (see Figure 4.10-5). This technique provides vis-
ibility of each wire in the cable to ensure that the wire pairs
are correctly connected and that power will be properly
supplied to powered devices.
Category 5e and Category 6 channel and permanent link

testing for the DPoE™ 1GIG™ Power Patch Panel can
be done by configuring the Fluke DTX-1800 series cable
analyzer as follows. Once the configuration settings are set,
the DTX-1800 series cable tester is ready to perform any
necessary testing. Two examples of expected test results
are shown in Figure 4.10-6.
Figure 4.10-5. AC Wireman Testing Procedure
(NOTE: The DPoE™ 1GIG™ Power Patch Panel should
NOT be powered during testing.)
The Agilent WireScope Pro N2640A also is capable of test-

ing through midspan PoE devices.
Figure 4.10-6. Example PoE Test Results from Fluke DTX-

1800 Series Cable Analyzer
4.10.4 Documenting
Building a PoE Solution
Section 4.11: Connected Building Solutions
3. Remote access for system status, control, alarming,

4.11 Connected Building Solutions
logging, trending.
Enterprises today require the spaces they occupy to be

4. Card Access control and security. The card access
designed to support a wide variety of building systems and
system can be set up so that an employee has to
cutting-edge communications technologies. Traditional
scan their ID on a machine in order to have the
building systems such as lighting, security, HVAC, structural
machine power up. These ID credentials can ensure
health monitoring, and energy management now must co-
that the employee has been trained and authorized
exist with IP-based voice, data and video communication
to use this equipment.
technologies.
Installation
The terms “Intelligent” or “Connected” Building have
The phases to a successful installation of information tech-
evolved to reflect these changes in building systems design
nology cabling in industrial environments include:
and construction. Once used to denote structures with
Phase 1: Design – the selection of cabling components and
automation features that offered improved control over
their configuration. A Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI)-
various building systems, today’s Connected Buildings are
based solution should be considered.
designed with extensive system convergence and interop-
Phase 2: Specification – the detailed requirement for the
erability in mind.
cabling, its accommodation and associated building servic-
es addressing specific environment(s) identified within the
A connected building has the ability to share or leverage
premises together with the quality assurance requirements
data between disparate systems to achieve a more efficient
to be applied.
process. This is accomplished by reducing energy opera-
Phase 3: Implementation – the physical installation in ac-
tion cost and providing a comfortable safe work environ-
cordance with the requirements of the specification.
ment. Linked facility and network systems are now built
Phase 4: Operation – the management of connectivity and
directly into the building fabric, generating and sharing data
the maintenance of transmission performance during the
over a single platform to enhance the efficiency and effec-
life of the cabling.
tiveness of the building as a whole.
Some examples of an industrial connected building include

the following:
1. In the event that a plant’s main power-feed
experiences a phase loss, the alarm message can
be communicated through the switchgear control via
a communication protocol like modbus. This
message can be sent to a middleware platform
where a software policy can be written to send an
e-mail alarm messages to the facilities group, local
service provider, and even the industrial machines’ HMI.
2. Facilities HVAC systems can share temperature

and humidity information between the HMI or to the
facilities control operators interface, which can
be beneficial for critical machining processes. Other
data points such as start/stop/status of a machine or
machine maintenance schedules can be maintained.
Multi-Technology Cable Bundle to Physically Converge The physical layer provides the foundation for key building
Systems and enterprise systems to communicate both locally and
Connected Building Solutions are based on running a multi- remotely. PANDUIT Connected Building Solutions comple-
technology cable bundle along shared pathways in order to ment Cisco and Rockwell Automation logical network archi-
extend the reach of a physically converged infrastructure to tecture solutions by allowing building systems to converge
all devices and systems. By capturing and transporting all and extend the reach of the IP-based network to all devices
operational and services data over a physically converged within an enterprise. Connected Buildings can interface and
infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement facility-driven share information through a common gateway or middle-
policies that support business requirements and tenant/cus- ware (see Figure 4.11-1); the gateway uses various drivers
tomer demands. Most systems can be physically converged to normalize the data to be converged or integrated for a
through shared conduit, cable trays, and building pathways; more efficient process.
others will converge through a switched IP network.
Figure 4.11-1. By capturing and transporting all operational and services data over a
physically converged infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement facility-driven poli-
cies that support business requirements and tenant/customer demands.
Common processes that might be integrated include: parate pathways, leading to inefficiencies in specification,
• Facilities Common communication protocol LON or installation, and maintenance. Network cabling becomes
BacNet easier to locate, manage and maintain as each additional
• Fire/Life/Safety Common communication protocol building system is routed within the same pathways and en-
RS485/232 closures. Managed cabling also helps eliminate abandoned
• Industrial Controls Common communication protocol cable in ceilings, making the workplace run more efficiently
Modbus or SCADA RS-485/232 and safely.
• Energy Management Common communication
protocol LON or BacNet Physically converged infrastructures also contribute toward
• Card Access Common communication protocol larger corporate sustainability initiatives. Basic green
RS232 or TCP/IP
Traditional (Home Run) Cabling Infrastructure Converged ("Zone Cabling”) Infrastructure
Figure 4.11-2. Connected Building Solutions deploy all building systems along common path-
ways to multiple zones where systems connectivity is required.
“Zone Cabling” Architecture
A highly effective way to layer intelligence throughout a objectives include reducing consumption of non-renewable
building is to logically distribute cabling runs using “zone resources and creating healthy environments. To support
cabling” architecture for all building networks. Zone cabling these objectives smart lighting subsystems, indirect light-
enables automated building systems to be converged with ing, daylight harvesting, and modern under-floor HVAC are
Ethernet cabling pathways as they are being designed. used to improve occupant comfort and achieve energy ef-
This converged multi-technology backbone is comprised ficiencies throughout the building thus shrinking the orga-
of Category 5e/6/6A copper, optical fiber, coaxial, RS-485, nization’s carbon footprint. These solutions also add value
and other fieldbus cabling. These systems are converged by enabling green performance and LEED certification for
within a common pathway and then terminated within zone building stakeholders, which differentiates buildings from
enclosures distributed throughout the building the competition in a business climate where environmental
(see Figure 4.11-2). stewardship is increasingly valued.
The zone cabling enclosures become network consolida- Further information on the PANDUIT Connected Building
tion points, allowing all cables to be managed and patched Solution is available in the following documents:
in a single enclosure. This architecture differs from dedicat- • Introduction to Connected Building Solutions
ed cabling runs typically used in building systems, in which • Unified Physical Infrastructure: Introduction to the UPI Vision
multiple lengthy and redundant cabling routes along dis- • Managing Physical Security Risk in the Infrastructure
Section 5
Network and Security Services
Network and Security Services are designed to support a configuration scheme will meet the functional requirements.
project or system throughout its lifecycle while assisting the The deliverable is a summary of observations, issues, and
customer with reaching necessary reductions in design and resolutions. This can be used to ensure that all vendor de-
implementation costs, increase uptime and reduce future signs will interconnect without any issues, to verify that the
maintenance costs. design is within your specific requirements or to offer third-
party review.
5.1 Network Services
On-site General Assessment is a one day review of the
The Network lifecycle phases include the following: network’s installation, configuration and information. The
• Assess deliverable is a summary of findings with a rated criticality
• Design and Plan and high level path forward.
• Implement
• Audit On-site Comprehensive Assessment focuses on customer
• Manage and Monitor needs (issue, upgrade, expansion). It can include opera-
tional tests, physical media testing, or issue identification.
5.1.1 Assess The deliverable is a summary of observations, issues, and
resolutions that will assist in preventing downtime by bring-
Network Assessments are a group of offerings that evaluate ing your network up to optimal condition.
the current condition of a designed or implemented network
via documentation review or on-site network analysis. As- 5.1.2 Design and Plan
sessments can help the customer determine whether the
network is able to meet the functional requirements needed Good network design and planning form the foundation upon
to achieve production and business goals. It accomplishes which performance and reliability are built. That founda-
this by evaluating the network, documenting design or tion can help customers realize the value of manufacturing
implementation issues, and offering resolutions to prevent or convergence and negate the potential impacts of improper
fix these issues. An assessment can be used to learn about implementation. Network design services enable them to
potential problems that could result in future unplanned achieve production and business goals and foster manufac-
downtime. turing convergence by enabling the following:
• Integration of business and manufacturing systems
Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and • Remote access and support
Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Visibility and integration of technologies and
• Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by communications
discovering inefficient and problem-ridden designs or • Fewer networks to maintain
implementations before problems escalate to • Foundation for more innovative business models
devastating downtime
• Reducing Project Costs by ensuring that networks are The design process begins with customer collaboration
correctly designed to meet the highest performance which includes assessing the network design expectations,
capabilities business objectives, and identifying functional and informa-
• Improving Productivity through efficient network tional requirements. Once the specific expectations and
architecture and design requirements are determined, a detailed specification is cre-
ated. This is the basis for the network topology design and it
Network Design Assessment offers a review of exist- will ensure that the network design best meets the needs for
ing design documentation (network layout, Bill of Material the system.
(BOM), cable schedules, configuration plans) to ensure that
the specified components, network architecture and network (continued on next page)
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Page 5-1

Section 5 : Network and Security Services
Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and • Integration of business and manufacturing systems
Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Remote access and support
• Reducing project costs by ensuring that networks are • Visibility and integration of technologies and
correctly designed to meet current and future communications
performance and information sharing requirements • Fewer networks to maintain
• Increasing network availability and uptime to ensure • Foundation for more innovative business models
production application and control system stability
• Improving productivity by ensuring that networks are The implementation process can consist of turnkey solutions
designed to meet production goals and are available working with our partners that offer guaranteed network
when production is scheduled installation to simple system configurations.
Network Design Development offers a range, from a Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and
design framework document that can be implemented by a Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
network or IT specialist, to a full design package - any sub- • Reducing project costs by ensuring that networks are
set in between. The required deliverables are determined by correctly implemented to meet current and future
customer collaboration at the onset. performance and information sharing requirements
• Increasing network availability and uptime to ensure
Network Migration Development offers design assistance production application and control system stability
that focuses on upgrading an existing network which typi- • Improving productivity by ensuring that networks are
cally begins with an assessment. The deliverable includes implemented to meet production goals and are avail
a hardware and media path forward based on customer able when production is scheduled
requirements and current status of the network.
Network Installation includes a range of offerings from
Network Standards Development offers assistance to cus- equipment procurement to complete media and hardware
tomers requiring plant-wide or corporate-wide standards for installation services.
network consistency. The deliverable includes recommenda-
tions to be incorporated in a standards document based on Network Configuration includes hardware and software
blend of industry standards and customer requirements setup for network devices. Optional deliverables can include
configuration data and/or backup and restore procedures.
5.1.3 Implementation
5.1.4 Audit
Network implementation services help customers realize the
benefits of manufacturing convergence through improved A Network Audit confirms whether networks are installed
network efficiency, reduced operational costs and increased according to governing body and/or customer standards.
manufacturing productivity. Network infrastructure Imple- State-of-the-art network diagnostic tools are used to con-
mentation is the foundation for a highly operational network duct installation and operational tests to validate system
and includes not only the media that transmits the traffic implementation and to ensure that performance is within
but the hardware that controls the flow of traffic as well as standards outlined by TIA/EIA, ODVA, CNI or an appropriate
the software that sends, receives and manages the traffic. governing body. Installation testing validates the installa-
A network implementation that follows industry standards tion of new networks and prevents commissioning problems.
increases the opportunity of achieving the necessary perfor- Operational testing is an operational evaluation that tests
mance and reliability and can negate the impacts of improper system performance to ensure reliable communications
implementation. and verify critical operating parameters. All test results and
performance data are completely documented as a baseline
Network implementation services, similar to design services, for future reference.
help customers to achieve production and business goals and
foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following:
Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Onsite Support includes annually or regularly scheduled
Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: network assessments to analyze any changes to the system
• Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by and their effects.
discovering inefficient networks and preventing a
problem that would cause a shut-down 5.2 Security Services
• Reducing Project Costs by ensuring that networks are
correctly designed and implemented to meet the Network & Security Services are designed to support a
highest performance capabilities project or system throughout its lifecycle and to assist the
• Decreasing Downtime by discovering potential customer to reach necessary reductions in design and
problems within your network before problems escalate implementation costs, increase uptime and reduce future
maintenance costs. The security lifecycle phases include
Network Design Audit consists of comprehensive in- the following:
stallation and operational network tests, measurements • Assess
and analysis based on governing body standards (ODVA, • Design & Plan
TIA/EIA, and ControlNet International). The deliverable is • Implement
a report documenting all findings, measurements, analysis, • Audit
and remediation suggestions. • Manage and Monitor
5.1.5 Manage and Monitor 5.2.1 Assess
Manage and Monitor Services are a group of offerings that Security Assessments can improve automation asset reliabil-
help customers maintain the network to achieve their ex- ity by determining potential risks to the production process
pected production and business goals. Offerings range from and by developing procedural and technical countermea-
continuous monitoring or ad hoc diagnostic monitoring to sures to reduce these risks. Industrial Automation and con-
periodic visits or emergency response. These network man- trol assets, similar to traditional IT systems, are vulnerable
agement offerings can help improve network uptime when to many security issues such as unauthorized modifications,
customers do not have the resources, tools and technical intellectual property theft, and malware such as viruses,
knowledge internally. worms and trojans. Any compromise of these systems can
impact production, quality, regulatory compliance, and even
Customer can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and safety. To reduce risks to the business, Rockwell Automa-
Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: tion’s Security Services focus on identifying potential threats
• Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by to automation assets and developing cost-effective counter-
discovering inefficient and problem ridden designs or measures to protect the production process
implementations changes before problems escalate to
devastating downtime Customers can improve your Return on Net Assets (RONA)
• Improving Productivity by efficiently managing the net and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
work architecture and design • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures
• Improving availability by quickly determining the issue and security compromises
and resolving • Increasing Performance by protecting against
unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency
Remote Monitoring ranges from continuous surveillance to • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability
ad hoc diagnostic monitoring of your network infrastructure improvements and reducing risks of modifications that
and activity. affect product quality
• Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of
Incident Response is a customer-initiated engagement that current assets and providing additional security controls
can include network trouble shooting, repair, or analysis. to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership
Policy Assessments are conducted via interviews with key • Integration of business and manufacturing systems
personnel to identify vulnerabilities associated with existing • Remote access and support
security policies, procedures or overall program. The deliver- • Visibility and integration of technologies and
able will include a “path forward” plan to continuously im- communications
prove security by introducing human-based security controls. • Fewer networks to maintain
• Foundation for more innovative business models
Design Assessments are a full architecturally-based analy-
sis of customer’s infrastructure with documentation provided Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and
by the customer. With this analysis, their infrastructure will Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
be compared to their existing security requirements and vari- • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures
ous industry security standards, which will result in recom- and security compromises
mendations for their network and information infrastructure in • Increasing Performance by protecting against
the controls environment unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency
• Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability
On-site Operational Assessments are an analysis of improvements and reducing risks of modifications that
customer’s manufacturing infrastructure including interfaces affect product quality
to the business infrastructure. Security will be evaluated • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of
with respect to industrial control networks and integration current assets and providing additional security controls
strategies with business infrastructures. The deliverable will to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership
be a report detailing observed vulnerabilities, issues, and
resolutions. Security Program Development is the overall encompass-
ing offering that steps customers through the development
On-site Risk Assessments help identify customer assets of a Security Program which can include some or all of the
and their values, vulnerability and threats. The deliverable following services.
will quantify the probability and business impact of those
threats and provide possible solutions and the cost of the Security Policy Development is a collaborative effort with
countermeasure. the customer to assist in creating their security policy. The
deliverable includes recommendations to be incorporated in
On-site Vulnerability Assessment will identify system a standards document based on blend of industry standards
vulnerabilities. The deliverable will be a report detailing and customer requirements.
observed vulnerabilities, issues, and resolutions.
Security Design Development offers a range from a design
5.2.2 Design and Plan framework document that can be implemented by a network
or IT security specialist to a full design package or any sub-
Security design and planning services can help customers set in between. The required deliverables are determined by
realize the value of manufacturing convergence and negate customer collaboration at the onset.
the impacts improper design. While manufacturing conver-
gence has many benefits, it can cause negative impacts due Business Continuity Planning (BCP) helps minimize the
to environmental, architectural, maintenance, and conse- effects of necessary resources that are no longer available
quence of failure differences between manufacturing and IT or functional to a customer trying to conduct business. The
enterprises. BCP engagement entails collaboration with the customer to
develop new business continuity plans or review the existing
Security design services enable them to achieve production business continuity plans stemming from an existing busi-
and business goals and to foster manufacturing conver- ness impact analysis; to identify continuity risks, evaluate ex-
gence by enabling the following in a secure manner and isting preventive controls; to develop mitigation and recovery
reducing the associated risks: strategies and to develop and document roles, responsibili-
ties and actions within the contingency plans.
Disaster Recovery Planning and Incident Response Security Configuration is the configuration of network
Planning for the controls environment will fall under and devices and security appliances including firewall and switch
support the larger BCP supporting the overall Security security configurations (firewall rule sets, ACLs, etc)
Program. While Disaster Recovery Planning entails how
to recover, Incident Response Planning entails what to do Non-Production Penetration Testing can only be done in
when it occurs. a lab or an offline production environment. It includes recon-
naissance, asset identification, vulnerability discovery and
5.2.3 Implementation exploitation and attacking in scope targets.
Security Implementation services can help customers realize System Hardening reviews Vulnerability Assessment data
the value of manufacturing convergence and negate the and implements system changes to prevent network and ap-
impacts of improper implementation. While manufacturing plication-based attacks, essentially addressing risks identi-
convergence has many benefits, it can cause negative im- fied in the assessment stages.
pacts due to environmental, architectural, maintenance, and
consequence of failure differences between manufacturing Security Policy Training creates awareness throughout
and IT enterprises. the organization of the desired security changes and helps
enforce accountability for new security policies.
Security implementation services enable them to achieve
production and business goals and foster manufacturing 5.2.4 Audit
convergence by enabling the following in a secure manner
and reducing the associated risks: Security Audits are based on customer and/or known stan-
• Integration of business and manufacturing systems dards and verify whether a security program is implemented
• Remote access and support as expected, whether implemented by Rockwell Automa-
• Visibility and integration of technologies and tion or not. Industrial Automation and control assets, similar
communications to traditional IT systems, are vulnerable to many security
• Fewer networks to maintain issues such as unauthorized modifications, intellectual prop-
• Foundation for more innovative business models erty theft, and malware such as viruses, worms and trojans.
Any compromise of these systems can impact production,
Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and quality, regulatory compliance, and even safety.
Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
• Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures To reduce risks to the business, Rockwell Automation’s
and security compromises Security Services focus on identifying potential threats to
• Increasing Performance by protecting against automation assets and developing cost-effective counter-
unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency measures to protect the production process. While auditing,
• Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability Rockwell Automation offers remediation to meet standards
improvements and reducing risks of modifications that that are currently not met.
affect product quality
• Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and
current assets and providing additional security controls Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures
and security compromises
Security Program Implementation takes the design and • Increasing Performance by protecting against
development documents to the next level – implementation. unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency
The overall program implementation includes implementing • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability
the security design, policies and procedures. improvements and reducing risks of modifications that
• Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of Remote Monitoring can be offered in conjunction with our
current assets and providing additional security InSite team or can be implemented in an ad-hoc, non real-
controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of time fashion to diagnose long-term potential security and
ownership network issues.
• Regulatory compliance
Incident Response includes management, coordination
Security Audits evaluate existing infrastructure against and resolution services that entail assessing / verifying
customer security design or policy or against a known and security incidents and providing guidance on further action
accepted standard or government requirement. Compliance as necessary.
examples include items such as the NERC CIP standards,
ISA SP-99, NIST 800-53, NIST 800-82, etc. On-site support and disaster recovery assistance offers
support when a customer’s Disaster Recovery Plan has
5.2.5 Managed Security Services been implemented once a business continuity impacting
event has occurred. This response could range from techni-
Managed Security services can help customers realize the cal support to managing the disaster recovery actions.
value of manufacturing convergence and can also negate
the impacts of improper implementation. While manufactur-
ing convergence has many benefits, it can cause negative
impacts due to environmental, architectural, maintenance,
and consequence of failure differences between manufactur-
ing and IT enterprises.
Security implementation services enable them to achieve

production and business goals and foster manufacturing
convergence by enabling the following in a secure manner
and reducing the associated risks:
• Integration of business and manufacturing systems
• Remote access and support
• Visibility and integration of technologies and
communications
• Fewer networks to maintain
• Foundation for more innovative business models
Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and

Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by:
• Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures
and security compromises
• Increasing Performance by protecting against
unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency
• Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability
improvements and reducing risks of modifications that
• Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of
current assets and providing additional security controls
to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership
Appendix A
PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information
A-1: Conduit Fill Capacity Tables
A-2: Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal

Cable Fill Capacity Tables
A-3: Approved Test Leads for

PANDUIT Patch Panels
A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System

Product Specification Details
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Page A-1
Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information
Appendix A-1
PANDUIT® TX6ATM 10GigTM UTP

Copper Cabling System
Conduit Fill Capacity Table
PANDUIT® TX6™ 10Gig™

Shielded Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX6™ PLUS UTP

Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS Shielded Copper Cabling

PANDUIT® TX5e™ UTP Copper Cabling Conduit Fill Ca-

pacity Table
PANDUIT® TX5eTM Copper Cabling

PANDUIT® TX5e™ Shielded Copper Cabling System

Appendix A-2
Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal
Cable Fill Capacity Tables
PANDUIT® TX6™ 10GigTM Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX6™ 10GigTM Copper Cabling System

(continued)
PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling
PANDUIT® TX6™ PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX5e Shielded Copper Cabling System
PANDUIT® TX5e Shielded Copper Cabling System
Practical Fill:
Estimate assumes a 40% fill factor (i.e. Sum of the cable
cross sectional areas equals 40% of the vertical channel.)
The 40% factor is intended to account for cable routing.
Appendix A-3
Approved Test Leads for PANDUIT Patch Panels
* PANDUIT has not physically tested the FrameScope 350. Agilent maintains the FrameScope and
WireScope have identical software and hardware for cabling testing.
Appendix A-4
PANDUIT Copper Cabling System • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots
Product Specification Details simplify termination
Category 5e • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all

Mini-Com® TX5e Mini-Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and
Shielded Jack Module
• Surface Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and
Specifications changes
Eight-position jack module shall
terminate 4 pair 22-26 AWG 100 • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long
ohm shielded twisted pair cable term installed performance
and shall not require the use of
a punchdown tool. Jack module • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control
shall use forward motion termination to optimize perfor- number for traceability
mance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating
conductor untwist. The red termination cap shall be color • Integral shield – No additional assembly required and
coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. provides 360 conductive path for grounding
Technical Information Applications

• Class D/Category 5e channel and component Mini-Com® TX5e™ Shielded Jack Module is a component
performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition of the TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The
and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standard PANDUIT TX5500™ Shielded System provides end-to-end
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond
• FCC Compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; 100 MHz. With certified performance to the ISO 11801 Class
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standards, this system
• IEC Compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 will support the following applications:
• Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
Key Features and Benefits • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
• 100% NEXT & Return Loss performance tested – • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
Confidence that each jack module exceeds NEXT and • Token Ring 4/16
Return Loss industry standard requirements • Voice/data systems
• Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
• Utilizes Enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes
performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces
installation expense
Part Number Part Description No. of Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Module Quantity Quantity
Spaces
CJS5E88TGY Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black 1 1 50
module with integrated shield.
CJS5E88TGY Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire, universal shielded black 1 24 240
module with integrated shield, bulk packaged.
Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP installation expense

Jack Module • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots
simplify the termination clearly identified on universal
Specifications label
Category 5e/Class D eight-position • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all
jack module shall terminate unshield- Mini-Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and
ed twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 Surface Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and changes
ohm cable and shall not require the • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long-
use of a punchdown tool. Jack modules shall use forward term installed performance
motion termination to optimize performance by maintain- • Individual serialized – Marked with quality control
ing cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. number for traceability
The red termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-
T568B wiring schemes. users; backwards compatible
Technical Information Applications

• Category 5e/Class D channel and component Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP Jack Module is a component of the
performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category TX5500™ Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™
5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard Copper Cabling System provides end-to-end Gigabit Ether-
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz net performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz.
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold 5e and ISO 11801 Class D Standards, this system will sup-
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 port the following applications:
• Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
Key Features and Benefits • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
module will deliver the critical electrical performance • Token Ring 4/16
requirements • Voice/data systems
• Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces
Part Number Part Description No. of Color* Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.
Spaces
CJ5E88TGIW Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal 1 Off White 1 50
module.
CJ5E88TGIW-24 Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal 1 Off White 24 240
module, bulk packaged
*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (international Gray),
BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red), BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet).
TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cord • Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and
provides easy release, saving time on frequent moves,
Specifications adds and changes
Category 5e patch cords shall be con- • Identification – Provides identification of performance
structed of 26 AWG shielded stranded level, length, and quality control number for future
copper cable and shielded high per- traceability
formance modular plugs at each end. • Variety of boot colors and cable lengths – Meets
Patch cords shall be used in all work individual length and color coding requirements for
area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be offered greater system flexibility
in gray cable and a variety of boot colors and lengths. Patch • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing
cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A and additional color coding options
T568B wiring schemes. • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into
jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord
• Category 5e/Class channel and component Applications
performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cords are a component of the
Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standard TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System delivers end-to-
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; end Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the ISO
superior performance 11801 Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standards,
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 this system will support the following applications:
• UL rated – No. 1863 • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
• 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
Key Features and Benefits • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each • Token Ring 4/16
patch cord delivers specified performance • Voice/data systems
• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
consistency by reducing untwist at plug
Part Number Part Description Boot Cable Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.
Color Color Quantity Quantity
STPCH*MBBL Category 5e, shielded patch cord with Pan- Black Int’l. Gray 1 10
Plug® Modular Plugs on each end..
*For standard lengths 1 to 10 meters (increments of 1 meter) and 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 meters change the length
designation in the part number to the desired length. For boot colors other than Black, replace suffix BL (Black) with BU (Blue),
GR (Green), RD (Red) or YL (Yellow). For example, the part number for a 15 meter patch cord with blue boots is STPCH15MBBU.
TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords • Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and
Category 5e/Class D UTP patch • Identification – Provides identification of performance
cords shall be constructed of level, length, and quality control number for future
unshielded twisted pair stranded traceability
copper cable and a high per- • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual
formance modular plug at each length and color coding requirements for greater
end. Patch cords shall be used system flexibility
in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing
be wired to be compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring additional color coding options
schemes. • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into
jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord
• Category 5e/Class D channel and component Applications
performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords are a component of the TX5500™
and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Cop-
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz per Cabling System provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e
superior performance and ISO 11801 Class D standards, this system will support
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 the following applications:
• UL rated – No. 1863 • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
Key Features and Benefits • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each • Token Ring 4/16
patch cord delivers specified performance • Voice/data systems
• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
consistency by reducing untwist at plug
Part Number Part Description Cable Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Color Quantity Quantity
UTPCH*Y Category 5e, UTP patch cord with Pan-Plug® Modular Off White 1 10
Plugs at each end.
*For lengths 1 to 20 feet (increments of 1 foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to desired length.
For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL
(Violet) before the Y in the part number. For example, the part number for a blue 15-foot patch cord is UTPCH15BUY.
TX5500™ Shielded Cable – S/FTP Key Features and Benefits

• Foil shield – Reduces ingress of EMI interference to
Specifications ensure cable performance at high frequency levels
The S/FTP Shielded cable shall be constructed of 4-pair in- • Braided shield – Provides superior structural integrity
sulated AWG conductors. The twisted pairs shall be wrapped and reduces low frequency external interference to
in an overall metallic foil with an overall braid within a LSZH ensure exceptional cable performance at all swept
or PVC jacket. frequencies
• Bulk packaging – 1,640 ft. (500M) per reel
Technical Information “ • Descending length” cable markings – Easy
• Class E/Category 5e channel performance – Exceeds identification of remaining cable reduces installation
all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 time
Category 5e channel standard requirements at swept
frequencies up to 100 MHz Applications
• Class E/Category 5e component performance – TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cable is a component of the
Exceeds all ISO 1801 2nd Edition Class D and TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT
TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e component standard TX5500™ Shielded System provides end-to-end Gigabit Eth-
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz ernet with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified
• Cable conductors – Polyethylene (PE) insulation performance to the ISO 11801 Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2
• Cable jacket – LSZH – low smoke zero halogen plastic Category 5e standards, this system will support the following
(dark gray) PVC – low smoke flame retardant PVC applications:
(light gray) • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
• Cable diameter – 0.31 inches (7.87mm) • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
• Flame rating – LSZH – IEC 60332-1 rated PVC – NEC • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 MB/s ATM
type CM (UL) and FT4 rated • Token Ring 4/16
• Temperature rating – 32 degrees to 140 degrees (0 to • Voice/data systems
60 degrees C) during installation, -4 to 140 degrees • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
(-20 to 60 degrees C) during operation
• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110N) maximum
Part Number Part Description Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Quantity Quantity
PFP5504IG-UY Category 5e plenum (CMP) shielded copper cable 1000 ft. 39000 ft.
PFR5504IG-UY Category 5e riser (CMR) shielded copper cable 1000 ft. 39000 ft.
TX5500™ UTP Copper Cable • Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant
PVC
Specifications – Riser - flame retardant PVC
Category 5e cable shall far exceed • Cable weight – Plenum – 21 lbs./1000 ft. (9.6 kg/305m)
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and IEC – Riser – 22 lbs./1000 ft. (9.9 kg/305m)
61156-5 Category 5e component • Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.193 in. (4.9mm) nominal
standards. The conductors shall – Riser – 0.225 in. (5.7mm) nominal
be 24 AWG construction with FEP • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), in an easy payout box,
(CMP) or polyolefin (CMR) insulation. The copper conduc- tested to ISTA Procedure 1 A
tors shall be twisted in pairs and covered in a low smoke Weight: Plenum – 24 lbs./1000 ft. (10.9 kg/305m)
flame retardant PVC (CMP) jacket or a flame retardant PVC – Riser – 25 lbs./1000 ft. (11.3 kg/305m)
(CMR) jacket.
Key Features and Benefits
Technical Information Easy payout box – Ensure proper performance and provides
Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in quick installation
a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edi- remaining cable reduces installation time and cable scrap
tion Class D standards at swept frequencies up to 100 MHZ. Applications
Certified component performance up to 100 meters and TX5500™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PAN-
exceeds the component requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568- DUIT TX5500™ UTP Copper Cabling System. This end-to-
B.2 and IEC 61156-5 Category 5e component standards at end system provides Gigabit Ethernet performance with us-
swept frequencies up to 100 MHz. able bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance
• Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 24 AWG bare copper to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801
wire covered by FEP insulation Class D standards, this system will support the following
• Riser – 24 AWG bare copper wire covered by polyolefin applications:
(PE) insulation • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
• Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
Riser – UL 1666 • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
• Installation tension – 25 lbs (110 N) maximum • Token Ring 4/16
• Temperature rating – Plenum - 32°F to 122°F (0°C to
50°C) during installation, 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)
during operation
– Riser - 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
during installation, 14°F to 140°F (-10°C
to 60°C) during operation

PUR5504BU-UY Category 5e riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Cop- Blue 1000 ft. 39000 ft.
per conductors are 24 AWG construction with HDPE
insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs and placed in
a flame-retardant PVC jacket.
Category 5e riser Category 5e plenum (CMP) 4-piar UTP copper cable. Blue 1000 ft. 39000 ft.
PUP5504BU-UY Copper conductors are 24 AWG construction with FEP
insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs and placed in
a low smoke, flame retardant PVC jacket.
**For standard cable colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow), or IG (International Gray).
DP5e™ Patch Panel

Specifications • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each
Category 5e/Class D punchdown port will deliver the critical electrical performance
patch panels shall terminate requirements
unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 • Each port individually serialized – Can be quality traced
AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall to sub-components
mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” • Common termination tooling – Terminates with industry
racks. Industry standard single wire standard 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy and
110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations. Patch fast installation
panels shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring con- • Port and panel identification – Write-on areas follow
figurations. Ports and panels shall be easy to identify with TIA/EIA-606-A labeling standard
pre-printed numbers and write-on areas. • Universal wiring schemes – T568A and T568B wiring
scheme clearly identified on universal label
Technical Information • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-
• Category 5e/Class D channel and component users; backwards compatible
performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category • Replaceable port module – Ability to easily replace
5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard damaged port for full panel use
requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz
• Dimensions – 12 port flat: 2.10”H x 10.0”W x 1.17”D Applications
(53.3 x 253.9 x 29.7mm), 89D bracket DP5e™ Patch Panel is a component of the TX5500™ Cop-
per Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Systems
- 24 port flat: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 1 RU provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet performance with us-
- 48 port flat: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 2 RU able bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance
- 24 port angled: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 1 RU to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 Class D
- 48 port angled: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 2 RU standards, this system will support the following applications:
• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” or 23” • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
racks (23” requires use of extender bracket); 12-port • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet)
suitable for wall mount with 89D bracket • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM
• Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 mounting • Token Ring 4/16
screws • Voice/data systems

Rack Quantity Quantity
Spaces
DPA245E88TGY 24-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-posi- 1 1 10
tion, 8-wire ports
tion, 8-wire ports
DPA485E88TGY 12-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 12 RJ45, 8-posi- 1 10
tion, 8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.
tion, 8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.
tion, 8-wire ports
Category 6 • Utilizes Enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Optimizes

Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces
Shielded Jack Module installation expense
• Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots
Specifications simplify termination
8-position jack module shall termi- • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all Mini-
nate 4-pair 22 – 26 AWG 100 ohm Com® faceplates, modular patch panels and surface
shielded twisted pair cable and shall mount boxes for fast moves, adds and changes
not require the use of a punchdown tool. Jack module shall • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long
use forward motion termination to optimize performance by term installed performance
maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control
untwist. The white termination cap shall be color coded for number for traceability
T568A and T568B wiring schemes. • Integral shield – No additional assembly required and
provides 360 conductive path for grounding
• Class E/Category 6 channel performance – Exceeds Applications
all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS Shielded Jack Module is a compo-
Category 6 channel standard requirements at swept nent of the TX6000™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. In-
frequencies up to 250 MHz teroperable and backward compatible, this system provides
• Class E/Category 6 component performance – design flexibility to protect network investments well into the
Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E and future. With certified performance to the ISO 11801 Class E
TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 component standard and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standards, this system is
requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz ideal for today’s high performance workstation applications.
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; Applications of the TX6000™ Shielded Copper Cabling
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold System include:
IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
Key Features and Benefits • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
• 100% NEXT and Return Loss performance tested • Token Ring 4/16
– Confidence that each jack module delivers NEXT and • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video
Return Loss performance • Voice over internet protocol (VoIP)

Space
CJS688TGY Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded 1 1 50
black module with integral shield.
CJS688TGY-24 Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded 1 24 240
black module with integral shield, bulk packaged
Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS UTP Jack • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots
Module simplify termination
• Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of Mini-
Specifications Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and Surface
Category 6/Class E eight-position jack Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and changes
module shall terminate unshielded • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long
twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm term installed performance
cable and shall not require the use of • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control
a punchdown tool. Jack module shall use forward motion number for traceability
termination to optimize performance by maintaining cable • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-
pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The white users; backwards compatible
termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B
wiring schemes. Applications
Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS UTP Jack Modules is a component
Technical Information of the TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems.
• Category 6/Class E channel and component Interoperable and backward compatible, these end-to-end
performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category systems provide design flexibility to protect network invest-
6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standard ments well into the future. With certified performance to
requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; standards, these systems are ideal for today’s high perfor-
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior mance workstation applications. Usage of the TX6500™ and
performance TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems include:
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • Ethernet 10BASE0T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10
Key Features and Benefits Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack the industry 10GBASE-t standards)
module will deliver the critical electrical performance • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
requirements • Token Ring 4/16
• Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video
performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
installation expense
Spaces
CJ688TGIW Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire uni- 1 Off White 1 50
versal module
CJ688TGIW-24 Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire uni- 1 Off White 24 240
versal module, bulk packaged
*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray),
TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch Cords • Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and
Category 6/Class E UTP patch cords • Identification – Provides identification of performance
shall be constructed of 24 AWG un- level, length and quality control number for future trace
shielded twisted pair stranded copper ability
cable and an enhanced performance • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual
modular plug at each end. Patch length and color coding requirements for greater sys
cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. tem flexibility
Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing
and T568B wiring schemes. additional color coding options
• RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into
Technical Information jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord
• Category 6/Class E channel and component Applications
performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch Cords are components of the PAN-
6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standard DUIT TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems.
requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz Interoperable and backward compatible, these end-to-end
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; systems provide design flexibility to protect network invest-
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior ments well into the future. With certified performance to the
performance TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E stan-
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 dards, these systems are ideal for today’s high performance
• UL rated – No. 1863 workstation applications. The TX6500™ and TX6000™ Cop-
per Cabling Systems will support the following applications:
Key Features and Benefits • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10
patch cord will deliver the critical electrical performance Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in
requirements the industry 10GBASE-T standards)
• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
consistency by reducing untwist at plug • Token Ring 4/16
• Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video
high-density applications • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Part Number Part Description Cable Srd. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

UTPSP*Y Category 6, UTP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Modular Off White 1 10
Plugs on each end.
*For lengths 1 to 20 feet (increments of 1 foot) and 25, 30, 36, 40 feet change the lengths designation in the part number to
desired length. For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red),
YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) before the Y at the end of the part number.
TX6000™ UTP Copper Cable • Cable weight – Plenum – 28 lbs./1000 ft. (12.7 kg/305m)
– Riser – 31 lbs./1000 ft. (14.1 kg/305m)
Specifications • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), reel-in-a-box
Category 6 cable shall exceed ANSI/ – Plenum – 32 lbs./1000 ft. (14.5 kg/305m)
TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 – Riser – 35 lbs./1000 ft. (15.9 kg/305m)
Category 6 component standards. The – Package tested to ISTA Procedure 1A
conductors shall be 23 AWG construc-
tion with FEP (CMP) or polyolefin Key Features and Benefits
(CMR) insulation. The copper conductors shall be twisted in pairs, • Third party tested – Cable had been tested as part of
separated by a cross-divider and covered by a low smoke, flame the TX6000™ Copper Cabling System by an
retardant (CMP) jacket or a flame retardant (CMR) jacket. independent laboratory and complies with the electrical
channel requirements of the following standard:
Technical Information ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6
Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in • Integrated pair divider – Separates pairs for the
a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceed exceptional cable performance
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E • Reel-in-a-box – Ensures proper performance and
Category 6 standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. provides quick installation
Certified component performance up to 100 meters and • Descending length cable markings – Easy identification
exceeds the component requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568- of remaining cable reduces installation time and cable
B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 Category 6 component standards at scrap
swept frequencies up to 250 MHz Applications
• Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 23 AWG bare copper TX6000™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PAN-
wire covered by FEP insulation DUIT TX6000™ UTP Copper Cabling System. Interoperable
– Riser – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides
polyolefin (PE) insulation design flexibility to protect network investments well into the
• Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 future. With certified performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-
– Riser – UL1666 B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E standards, this
• Installation tension – 25 lbs (110 N)maximum system will support the following applications:
• Temperature rating – 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet),
during installation 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10GABSE-T (10
– 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C) during operation Giga-bit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in
• Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant PVC the industry 10GBASE-T standards)
– Riser – flame retardant PVC • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
• Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.236 in. (5.9mm) nominal • Token Ring 4/16
– Riser – 0.240 in. (6.1mm) nominal
Part Number Part Description Cable Srd. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

PUR6004BU-UY High performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper Blue 1000 ft. 27000 ft.
cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with HDPE
insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an inte-
grated pair divider, and placed in a flame retardant PVC jacket.
PUP6004BU-UY High performance Category 6 plenum (CMP) 4-pair UTP copper Blue 1000 ft. 27000 ft.
cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with FEP
insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an in-
tegrated pair divider, and placed in a low smoke, flame retardant
PVC jacket.
*For standard colors other than Blue, replace suffix BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow), or IG (International Gray).
TX6500™ UTP Copper Cable • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), reel-in-a-box

– Plenum – 39 lbs./1000 ft. (17.7 kg/305m)
Specifications – Riser – 36 lbs./1000 ft. (16.3 kg/305m)
Category 6 cable shall far exceed ANSI/ – Packaging tested to ISTA Procedure 1A
TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801
Class E standards. The conductors shall Key Features and Benefits
be 23 AWG construction with FEP (CMP) • Third party tested – Cable has been tested as part of
or polyolefin (CMR) insulation. The cop- the TX6500™ Copper Cabling System by an independent
per conductors shall be twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated laboratory and complies with the electrical channel require-
pair divider and shall be covered by a low smoke, flame retardant ments of the following standard: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1
(CMP) jacket or a flame retardant (CMR) jacket. • Integrated pair divider – Separates pairs for exceptional
cable performance
Technical Information • Reel-in-a-box – Ensures proper performance and provides
Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in a quick installation
4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds ANSI/ • Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of
TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E remaining cable reduces installation time and cable scrap
standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. Certified component • Reduced attenuation – Maximizes the amount of signal
performance up to 100 meters and exceeds the component require- that reaches the receiver and increases bandwidth
ments of ANSI/TIA.EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and IEC 61156-5 and
component standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. Applications
• Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 23 AWG bare copper wire TX6500™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PANDUIT
covered by FEP insulation TX6500™ Copper Cabling System. Interoperable and backward
– Riser – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by compatible, this end-to-end system provides design flexibility to
polyolefin (PE) insulation protect network investments well into the future. With certified
• Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO
– Riser – UL 1666 11801 Class E standards, this system will support the following
• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum applications:
• Temperature rating - 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) during • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T
installation, 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C) during operation (Gigabit Ethernet), 10GABSE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over
• Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant PVC limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T
– Riser – flame retardant PVC standards)
• Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.264 in. (6.7mm) nominal • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
– Riser – 0.265 in. (6.8mm) nominal • Token Ring 4/16
• Cable weight – Plenum – 35 lbs./1000 ft. (15.8 kg/305m)
– Riser – 32 lbs./1000 ft. (14.5 kg/305m)
Part Number Part Description Color* Srd. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Quantity Quantity
PUR6504BU-UY Enhanced high-performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP Blue 1000 ft. 27000 ft.
copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with
HDPE insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an
integrated pair divider and placed in a flame-retardant PVC jacket.
PUP6504BU-UY Enhanced high-performance Category 6 plenum (CMP) 4-pair Blue 1000 ft. 27000 ft.
UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction
with FEP insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated
by an integrated pair divider and placed in a low smoke, flame-
retardant PVC jacket.
*For standard colors other than Blue, replace suffix BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray).
DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel Key Features and Benefits

• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each port will
Specifications deliver the critical electrical performance requirements
Category 6/Class E punchdown patch • Each port individually serialized – Can be quality traced to
panels shall terminate unshielded twist- sub-components
ed 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm pair • Common termination tool – Terminates with industry standard
cable and shall mount to standard EIA 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy and fast installation
19” or 23”racks. Industry standard single • Port and panel identification – Write-on areas follow TIA/EIA-
wire 110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations. Patch pan- 606-A labeling standards
els shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring configurations. • Universal wiring schemes – T568A and T568B wiring
Ports and panel shall be easy to identify with pre-printed numbers schemes clearly identified on universal label
and write-on areas. • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-users;
backwards compatible
Technical Information • Replaceable port modules – Snaps in and out of patch panel
• Category 6/Class E channel and component performance for fast moves, adds and changes
– Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801
2nd Edition Class E standard requirements at swept Applications
frequencies up to 250 MHz DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel is a component of the TX6500™ and
• Dimensions – 12 port flat: 2.10”H x 10.0”W x 1.17”D (53.3 x TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems. Interoperable and backward
253.9 x 29.7mm), 89D bracket compatible, these end-to-end systems provide design flexibility
- 24 port flat: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 1 RU to protect network investments well into the future. With certi-
- 48 port flat: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 2 RU fied performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO
- 24 port angled: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 1 RU 11801 Class E standards, these systems are ideal for today’s high
- 48 port angled: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 2 RU performance workstation applications. Usage of the TX6500™ and
• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” pr 23” racks TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems include:
• Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 mounting screws • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T
(Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over
limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T
standards)
• 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM
• Token Ring 4/16
• Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video
• Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Part Number Part Description No. of Srd. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Spaces
DPA24688TGY 24-port, angled, Category 6, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-position, 1 1 10
8-wire ports.
DPA48688TGY 48-port, angled, Category 6, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-posi- 2 1 10
tion, 8-wire ports.
DP12688TGY 12-port, Category 6, patch panel with 12 RJ45, 8-position, 1 10
8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.
DP24688TGY 24-port, Category 6, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-position, 1 1 10
8-wire ports.
DPA48688TGY 48-port, Category 6, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-position, 2 1 10
8-wire ports.
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Module installation time and expense

• Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify
Specifications terminations
Augmented Category 6 eight-position jack • Integral 360° shield – No additional assembly required
module shall terminate shielded twisted 4-pair and provides a 360° conductive path to ground; shield provides
22-26 AWG 100 ohm cable and shall not re- seamless bonding of the jack module with a Mini-Com® All
quire the use of a punchdown tool. Jack mod- Metal Modular Patch Panel
ule shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all Mini-Com®
maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels, and Surface Mount Boxes
The blue termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B for fast moves, adds and changes
wiring schemes. The TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Module must • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term
be installed as part of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling installed performance
System to achieve IEEE 10GBASE-T certified performance. • Individually serialized – Marked with a quality control number
for traceability
• Augmented Category 6/ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1 Applications
– Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Modules are a component of the
up to 100 meters and exceeds the draft requirements of TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. This end-to-end
TIA/EIA 568-B.2-AD10, ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1, system provides a cost-effective medium for ensuring that network
and IEEE 802.3an-2006 ratified standard for supporting bandwidth needs are easily met today and tomorrow. This shielded
10GBASE-T transmission over copper twisted pair cabling cabling system provides high performance, excellent EMI suppres-
when used as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded sion, and aids in secure data transmission. The PANDUIT solution
Copper Cabling System helps ensure organizations efficiently and reliably meet their data
• Category 6/Class E performance – Exceeds all Category transmission needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper
• 6/Class E component and channel standard requirements Cabling System includes high bandwidth applications within data
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F centers and connections to high-end workstations such as:
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • Stacking switches and switch-to-switch links
• Storage area networks
Key Features and Benefits • Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels
• 100% performance tested for wire-map, NEXT, and return • Real-time intensive financial transactions
loss – Guarantees that each jack module delivers specified • Streaming video
performance • Animation
• Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Optimizes • Scientific modeling
performance by eliminating conductor untwist and reduces • Medical imaging
Part Number Part Description No. of Srd. Pkg. Std. Ctn.

Spaces
CJS6X88TGY Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire universal 1 1 50
shielded black module with integral shield
CJS6X88TGY-24 Category 6A, RJ45 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire universal 1 24 240
shielded black module with integral shield, bulk packaged
Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™ • Utilizes Flex technology – Shortens the tuning length of the
UTP Jack Module jack module enabling higher performance
• Alien crosstalk suppression – Innovative foil technology
Specifications provides superior alien crosstalk performance enabling high
Category 6A, 8-position jack module shall density applications (48 ports in 1 RU)
terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26 • Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Wire cap
AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist and
the use of a punchdown tool. The jack module shall use a forward reduces installation time and expense; simplifies termination
motion termination method to optimize performance by maintaining and maintains conductor twists for reliable and consistent
cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The blue terminations
termination cap shall be color-coded for T568A and T568B wiring • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term
schemes. installed performance
• Modular – Jack modules snap in and out of Mini-Com® Face
Technical Information plates, Modular Patch Panels and Surface Mount Boxes for
Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance – Cer- easy moves, adds and changes
tified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control number
meters and exceeds the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 for future traceability
Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting • Jack module blockout device (optional) – Provides a simple
10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part and secure method to control access to data ports
of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System. Applications
Certified component performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10
Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting The Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module is a component
10GABSE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interop-
• FCC compliance – Meets ANSI/TIA-968-A; contacts are erable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides
plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future.
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 Key applications include:
• PoE compliance – Meets IEEE 802.3af and draft • 10GBASE-T Ethernet
requirements of IEEE 802.3at for PoE Plus • Data center 1/O consolidation
• UL rated – No. 1863 • Data center server virtualization
• Conductor termination range – Accepts primary conductor • Consolidation of network interconnects
O.D. between 0.037 in. to 0.062 in. • Back-bone aggregation
• Parallel processing and high speed computing
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack
module delivers specified performance
• Advanced electrical compensation technology – Headroom
over industry standards for lower risk and higher bandwidth
network availability \
Spaces
CJ6X88TGIW Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 1 Off White 1 50
8-wire universal module.
CJ6X88TGIW-24 Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8- 1 Off White 24 240
wire universal module, bulk packaged.
*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray),
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Patch Cords adds and changes

Specifications • Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in
Category 6A shielded patch cords shall be high-density applications
constructed of shielded 26 AWG stranded • Robust construction – Plug contact plated with 50
copper cable and an enhanced performance micro inches of gold and rated to 2500 mating cycles
shielded modular plug at each end. Patch • Flexible stranded cable – Copper cable made of 0.23
cord cable shall be offered in colored S/STP inch S/STP stranded 26 AWG allows for high density
cable with a black boot. Patch cords shall be used in all work area and superior panel cable management
outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be wired to be com- • Identification – Provides identification of performance
patible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The TX6™ level, length, and quality control number for future
10Gig™ Shielded Patch cords must be installed as part of a com- traceability
plete PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System in • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual
order to achieve 10GBASE-T certified performance. length and color coding requirements for greater sys
Technical Information tem flexibility
• Category 6A/ISO 11801 Class EA channel performance • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing
tested to 650 MHz – Certified channel performance in additional color coding options
a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into
exceeds the draft requirement of ISO 11801 Class EA jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord
Edition 21, and IEEE 802.3an-2006, TIA/EIA568-B.2-10 Applications
ratified standards for supporting 10GBASE-T trans- TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Patch Cords are a component of the
mission over copper twisted pair cabling when used PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. This
as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded end-to-end system provides a cost-effective medium for ensuring
Copper Cabling System that network bandwidth needs are easily met today and tomorrow.
• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 subpart F; This shielded cabling system provides high performance, excellent
contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior EMI suppression, and aids in secure data transmission. The PAN-
performance DUIT solution helps ensure organizations efficiently and reliably
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 meet their data transmission needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™
• UL rated – No. 1863 Shielded Copper Cabling System includes high bandwidth applica-
Key Features and Benefits tions within data centers and connections to high-end workstations
• 100% performance tested for wire-map, NEXT and such as:
return loss – Confidence that each patch cord delivers • Stacking switched and switch-to-switch links
specified performance • Storage area networks
• Centered de-embedded plug – Performance in center • Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels
of ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2-1 component range, ensuring • Real-time intensive financial transactions
interoperability and optimum performance • Streaming video
• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance, • Animation
consistency and reliability by reducing untwist at plug • Scientific modeling
• Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and • Medical imaging

STP6X*IG Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Int’ll Gray 1 10
Modular Plugs on each end.
*For lengths 2 to 20 feet (increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to the
desired length. For standard cable colors other than IG (International Gray) replace IG suffix with BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green),
RD (Red), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) to the end of the part number.
TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords • Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance,
consistency, and reliability by reducing untwist at plug
Specifications • Patented tangle-free latch – Prevents snags and provides
Category 6A UTP patch cords shall be easy release, saving time and providing reliability on
constructed of 24 AWG solid copper frequent moves, adds and changes
cable with an enhanced performance • Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in
modular plug at each end. Patch cords high-density applications
shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. • Robust construction – Plug contacts plated with 50
Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A micro inches of gold and rated to 2500 mating cycles
and T568B wiring schemes. The TX6™ 10Gig™ Patch • Identification – Provides identification of performance
Cords must be installed as part of a complete PANDUIT level, length and quality control number for future trace
TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System in order to ability
achieve 10GBASE-T certified performance. • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual
length and color coding requirements for greater sys
Technical Information tem flexibility
• Category 6A/ISO 11801 Class EA channel • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing
performance tested to 650 MHz – Certified channel additional color coding options
performance in a 4-connector configuration up to
100 meters and exceeds the draft requirements of ISO Applications
11801 Class EA Edition 2.1, and IEEE 802.3an-2006, TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords are a component of the
TIA/EIA568-B.2-10 ratified standards for supporting PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System.
10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling This end-to-end system provides a cost effective media for
systems as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP ensuring that the most challenging network bandwidth needs
Copper Cabling Systems are easily met today and tomorrow. Businesses are placing
• FCC Compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; increased reliance on their networks to efficiently pass vital
contacts plates with 50 micro inches of gold for superior and time sensitive information throughout the enterprise. The
performance TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System will support the
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 following applications:
• UL rated – No. 1863 • Data Center high bandwidth applications for switch-to-
switch links, storage area networks, and aggregation of
Key Features and Benefits data
• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each • 3-D modeling and work group file transfer
patch cord delivers specified performance • Web-enabling applications such as Voice over Internet
• Centered de-embedded plug – Performs in center of • Protocol (VoIP)
TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 component range ensuring
interoperability and excellent performance

STP6X*IG Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Int’ll Gray 1 10
Modular Plugs on each end.
*For lengths 3 to 20 feet (increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to the desired
length. For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), RD (Red), GR (Green), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange)
or VL (Violet) before the Y at the end of the part number. For example, the part number for a blue 15-foot patch cord is UTP6X15BUY.
TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Cable – • Cable outer diameter – Plenum: 0.29” (7.36mm),
U/FTP Riser: 0.31” (7.87mm)
• Packaging – 1,000’ (305M) per reel, CMR – 50 lbs.
Specifications (22.6kg), CMP – 45 lbs. (20.4kg)
Augmented Category 6 Shielded Copper
Cable shall be constructed of 4-piar twisted Key Features and Benefits
insulated 23 AWG conductors. Each individual • Individual screened pairs – Exceptional suppression of
pair shall have a metallic foil shield and all four pairs shall be cov- internal and external (Alien) cross-talk which exceed
ered with a flame retardant PVC jacket. The shielded cable shall IEEE 802.3an-2006 specifications and EMI protection
provide superior alien cross-talk performance. The TX6™ 10Gig™ • Internal drain wire – Facilitates means of grounding the
Shielded Cable must be installed as part of the TX6™ 10Gig™ cable and provides for efficient performance and
Shielded Copper Cabling System to achieve certified 10GBASE-T protection of network investment
performance. • Descending length” cable markings – Easy identification of
remaining cable reduces installation time and scrap
• Augmented Category 6/ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1 Applications
– Certified channel performance in a 4 –connector TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Cable is a component of the TX6™ 10Gig™
configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds the draft Shielded Copper Cabling System. This end-to-end system provides
requirements of TIA/EIA 568-B.2-AD10, ISO 11801 a cost effective medium for ensuring that network bandwidth needs
Class EA Edition 2.1 and IEEE 802.3an-2006 ratified are easily met today and tomorrow. This shielded cabling system
standard for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over provides high performance, excellent EMI suppression, and aids
copper twisted pair cabling when used as part of the in secure data transmission. The PANDUIT solution helps ensure
PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System organizations efficiently and reliably meet their data transmission
• Category 6/Class E performance – Exceeds all needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling
Category 6/Class E component and channel standard System includes high bandwidth applications within data centers and
requirements connections to high-end workstations such as:
• Cable jacket – Riser and Plenum: 100% low-smoke, flame • Stacking switches and switch-to-switch links
retardant PVC • Storage area networks
• Flame rating – Plenum: meets NEC type CMP (UL) • Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels
– FT6 rated, Riser: meets NEC type CMR (UL) – FT4 rated • Real-time intensive financial transactions
• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum • Streaming video
• Temperature rating – 32 to 140 degrees F (0 to 60 degrees • Animation
C) during installation, 14 to 140 degrees F (-10 to 60 C) • Scientific modeling
during operation • Medical imaging

PSR6004BU-UGY Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair U/FTP shielded copper cable. Blue 1000 ft. 15000 ft.
Copper conductors are 23 AWG with HDPE insulation. Conductors
are twisted in pairs, each individual twisted pair includes a metallic
foil shield and is protected by a flame retardant PVC jacket.
PSP6004BU-UGY Category 6A plenum (CMP) 4 pair U/FTP shielded copper Blue 1000 ft. 15000 ft.
cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG with FEP insulation.
Conductors are twisted in pairs; each individual twisted pair
includes a metallic foil shield and is protected by a low smoke,
flame-retardant PVC jacket.
*For standard colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray).
TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cable • Cable jacket – Plenum (CMP): Flame retardant PVC
Specifications – Riser (CMR): Low smoke flame retardant PVC
Category 6A cable shall meet the ANSI/EIA/ • Cable weight – Plenum (CMP): 44 lbs./1000 ft. (20 kg/305m)
TIA-568-B.2-10 and IEC 61156-5 component – Riser (CMR): 35 lbs./1000 ft. (16 kg/305m)
standards. The conductors shall be 23 AWG • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m) on a reel, Package tested to
construction with FEP (CMP) or PE (CMR) ISTA Procedure 1A
insulation. The copper conductors shall be – Plenum (CMP): 48 lbs./1000 ft. (22 kg/305m)
twisted in pairs and separated by a cross web. All four pairs shall – Riser (CMR): 39 lbs./1000 ft. (18 kg/305m)
be surrounded by matrix tape and a flame retardant jacket. The Key Features and Benefits
patent pending matrix tape shall suppress the effect of alien cross- • Innovative matrix tape technology – Provides superior
talk allowing 10 Gb/s transmission. This innovative cable design suppression of both PSANEXT and PSAACRF; improves the
shall provide installation flexibility as cables can be routed in tight installation flexibility by allowing cable combing in existing
bundles through pathways and spaces. pathways without compromising performance
Technical Information • Round cable design – Improves fill capacity, cable manage-
Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance – Cer- ment, reduces required bend radius and allows efficient use
tified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 of pathways and spaces
meters and exceeds the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 • Extended temperature range – Allows operation in 75°C
Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting ambient environment providing error-free performance in high-
10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part density cabinets and large cable bundles running PoE+
of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System. applications
Certified component performance up to 100 meters and exceeds • Cross-divider – Separates pairs for exceptional cable performance
the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and IEC 61156-5 Cat- • Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of
egory 6A standards for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over remaining cable to reduce installation time and cable scrap
twisted-pair cabling systems. Applications
• Cable diameter – 0.295 in. (7.5mm) nominal The TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the
• PoE compliant – Meets IEEE 802.3af PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interoperable
and draft requirements of IEEE 802.3at and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design
for PoE Plus flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. Key
• Conductors/insulators – 23 AEG solid applications include:
copper insulated with FEP (CMP) or • 10GBASE-T Ethernet
flame retardant PE (CMR) • Data center I/O consolidation
• Flame rating – Plenum (CMP): NFPA 262 • Data center server virtualization
– Riser (CMR): UL 1666 • Consolidation of network interconnects
• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum • Back-bone aggregation
• Temperature rating - 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C) during • Parallel processing and high speed computing
installation, -4°F to 167°F (-20°C to 75°C) during operation

PUR6A04BU-UG Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper con- Blue 1000 ft. 18000 ft.
ductors are 23 AWG. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by
an integrated divider, surrounded by a patent-pending matrix tape
and protected by a flame-retardant jacket.
PUP6A04BU-UG Category 6A plenum (CMP) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper con- Blue 1000 ft. 18000 ft.
ductors are 23 AWG. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by
an integrated pair divider, surrounded by a patent-pending matrix
tape and protected by a low smoke, flame-retardant jacket.
*For standard colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray).
DP6A™ 10Gig™ Patch Panels Key Features and Benefits

• 100% performance tested – Confidence that each port
Specifications delivers specified performance
Category 6A/Class EA patch panel shall • Advanced electrical compensation technology – Head
terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 room over industry standards for lower risk and higher
– 26 AWG, Category 6A cable and shall bandwidth network availability
mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks. • Each port individually serialized – Marked with quality
Patch panels shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring control number for future traceability
schemes. Ports and panels shall be easy to identify with • Common termination tooling – Terminates with indus
pre-printed numbers, write-on areas, and optional label kits. try standard 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy, and
Industry standard single wire 110 punchdown tool shall be fast installation
used for terminations. • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-
users; backwards compatible
Technical Information • Identification – Pre-printed ports and write-on areas
Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance available for port and panel identification; optional label
– Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configu- kits available for TIA/EIA-606A compliance
ration up to 100 meters and exceeds the requirements of • Angled design (optional) – Facilitate proper bend radius
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class control and minimizes the need for horizontal cable
EA standards for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over managers
twisted-pair cabling systems as part of the PANDUIT TX6A™ • Blockout device (optional) – Provides a simple and
10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System. Certified component secure method to control access to data ports
performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A • Replaceable port module (optional) – Ability to replace
and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting 10GAB- field damaged ports for full panel use
SE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems Applications
• UL rated – No.1863 The DP6A™ 10Gig™ Patch Panel is a component of the
• FCC compliance – Meets ANSI/TIA-968-A; contacts PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interop-
are plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior erable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system
performance provides design flexibility to protect network investments well
• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 into the future. Key applications include:
• PoE compliance – Meets IEEE 802.3af and draft • 10GBASE-T Ethernet
requirements of IEEE 802.3at for PoE Plus • Data center I/O consolidation
• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks • Data center server virtualization
• Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 • Consolidation of network interconnects
mounting screws • Back-bone aggregation
• Parallel processing and high speed computing

Spaces
DPA246X88TGY 24-port, angled, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 24 RJ45 1 1 10
8-position, 8-wire ports.
DPA486X88TGY 48-port, angled, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 48 RJ45 2 1 10
DPA486X88TGY 24-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 24 RJ45 1 1 10
DPA486X88TGY 48-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 48 RJ45 2 1 10
Data-Patch™ 10/100BASE-T Patch Key Features and Benefits

Panel • Port and panel identification – Pre-numbered ports,
write-on areas and optional label holders follow TIA-
Specifications EIA-606-A labeling standards
10/100BASE-T patch panels shall feature • RJ21 connector – Female Industry Standard, meets
RJ45 ports on the front of the panel. Pan- EIA standard environmental and electrical performance,
el PC board is wired for 10BASE-Tand UL recognized, CSA approved
100BASE-T Ethernet utilizing pins 1, 2 and 3, 6. The back of • Hook and loop/screw connector – Accommodates 180,
the patch consists of female telco 50-pin/25-pair connectors 110 or 90 degree male patch cord connectors on back
wired per RJ21 industry standards for backward compatibili- of patch panel
ty. Patch panels shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks.
Patch panel does not require the use of a punchdown tool. Applications
10/100BASE-T patch panels provide a Category 5e chan-
Technical Information nel when used with PANDUIT Category 5e 25-pair cable
• Performance – Category 5e designed to maintain assemblies. Panels should be used with the PANDUIT cable
network cabling system reliability (UL 1863 Listed and management system to achieve the most organized and
CSA Certified) efficient telecommunications room cabling. Patch panels
• Dimensions – 24-port = 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.39”D provide maximum density to meet high density requirements
(43.7mm x 4.82.6mm x 35.3mm), 1 RU by conserving space.
48-port = 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.39”D (88.1mm x
482.6mm x 35.3mm), 2 RU
• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” rack or
23” rack when used with optional panel extender
brackets
• Packaging – Packaged with four #12 – 24 x .5” round
head screws to allow fastening to racks

Spaces
DP24584TV25Y 224-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 24 RJ45 ports wired 1 1 10
to two RJ21 Telco connectors.
DP24584TV25Y 48-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 48 RJ45 ports wired 2 1 10
to four RJ21 Telco connectors.
QuickNet™ Copper Cabling System Key Features and Benefits

• Pre-terminated – Controlled factory environment
The PANDUIT QuickNet™ Copper provides consistent network performance while
Cabling System provides a custom, reducing installation time and on-site waste as compared
pre-terminated cabling solution which to field-terminated installations
meets unique requirements. Fast and • 100% factory tested – Eliminated the time and cost
simple to install, the system enables associated with on-site testing and ensures verified
quick network deployment, increased performance (permanent link test data supplied with
reliability, and lowest total cost of own- each cable assembly)
ership as compared to field terminated • Wide range of cable types and performance levels
installations. Engineered for maximum – Category 6 UTP and Category 6A UTP/STP
design flexibility and high rack density performance levels available in plenum or riser cable
utilization (up to 48 ports in one rack fire ratings
space), the system offers 100% factory • Wide range of termination configurations and custom
tested pre-terminated cable assemblies in custom lengths lengths – Cable assemblies allow customization
and configurations. QuickNet™ Angled and Flat Patch including pre-terminated cassettes, jack modules,
Panels accept QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes, Patch modular plugs, plug packs, and/or unterminated cable
Panel Adapters, and Blacks, which snap in and out, with one options to provide design flexibility for all installations in
hand, for quick installation. lengths from 10’ to 295’ (1’ increments)
• Pre-terminated cassettes – Snap in and out of switches
Technical Information and utilize an integral release tab to ensure easy
• Each QuickNet™ Cable Assembly is factory tested to on-site moves, adds and changes
electrical permanent link specifications • Plug Packs – Snap in and out of switches and utilize
• TX6™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System exceeds draft an integral release tab to ensure easy on-site moves,
requirements of TIA/EIA-568-2-AD10, ISO 110801 adds and changes
Class EA Edition 2.1 and IEEE 802.3an ratified standard • Patch panel adapter – Snaps in and out of QuickNet™
for supporting 10GBASE-T requirements Patch Panels and accepts Mini-Com® Modules for
• TX6™ Copper Cabling System exceeds TIA.EIA-568-B.2-1 UTP, fiber optic and audio/visual applications
and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standards Jack • Standard and high-density solution – QuickNet™ Patch
modules utilize patented Giga-TX™ Technology which Panels in angled and flat designs enable 24 and 48
optimizes performance by maintaining cable pair ports in one rack unit for efficient rack space utilization
geometry and eliminating conductor untwist • Assembly identification – Each cable assembly label
includes part number, performance level, and serialized
Modular plugs meets all applicable FCC Part 68 Subpart quality assurance number for future traceability; custom
requirements and exceed IEC 60603-7 cable assembly and/or individual cable labels available
upon request.
Specifications
1 – Q = QuickNet K = Jack Modules staggered right

2 – Performance Level L = Jack modules staggered left
A = Category 6A (10Gig™) UTP Q = Modular plugs staggered right
B = Category 6 Enhanced UTP S = Modular plugs staggered left
C = Category 6 UTP U = Unterminated
E = Category 6A (10Gig™) STP O = Unterminated with cassette & jack modules for on-site termination
3 – Flame /Smoke Rating 8 – Termination End 2 Color Options
R = Riser or P = Plenum Cassette, Jack Module and Unterminated Color Options
4 – Cable Color B = Blue, E = Electric Ivory, G = Green, H = Off White,
B = Blue or W = White I = International Gray, L = Black, O = Orange, R = Red,
5 – Termination End 1 V = Violet, W = White, Y = Yellow. Shielded jack modules
A = Plug Pack choose option X, all Shielded Jack Modules are Black.
C = Cassette Plug Pack Color Options
J = Jack Modules B = Blue, W = White, R = Red, L = Black
P = Modular Plugs Modular Plug Color Options
K = Jack modules staggered right X = No color option available, all modular plugs are clear
L = Jack modules staggered left Unterminated Color Option
Q = Modular plugs staggered right X = No color option available
S = Modular plugs staggered left 9 – Assembly Options
6 – Termination End 1 Color Options P = Pulling eye
Cassette and Jack Module Color Options: X = No Assembly options requested
B = Blue, E = Electric Ivory, G = Green, H = Off White, 10 – Custom Labeling*
I = International Gray, L = Black, O = Orange, R = Red, L = Custom assembly label
V = Violet, W = White, Y = Yellow. Shielded Jack C = Custom cable labels
Modules choose option L, all Shielded Jack Modules are Black. B = Custom assembly and cable labels
Plug Pack Color Options: X = No custom labels required
B = Blue, W = White, R = Red, L = Black 11 – Assembly Length**
Modular Plug Color Options: 10 – 295 feet
X = No color option available, all modular plugs are clear *Custom cable assembly labels are available up to 18 characters; individual
7 – Termination End 2 cable labels are available up to 15 characters
A = Plug Pack **QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cable Assemblies are available in one foot in-
C = Cassette crements in lengths 10 – 295 feet. All connectivity is wired T568B Category
J = Jack Modules 6 Enhanced Performance level utilizes PANDUIT® TX6500™ Category 6
P = Modular Plugs UTP Cable. Permanent link test results shipped with each cable assembly.
QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies • Variety of lengths – Enables greater design flexibility
• Modular design – Snaps modular plugs directly into
PANDUIT QuickNet™ Plug Pack switches and utilizes an integral release tab to ensure
Assemblies facilitate quick and easy easy on-site moves, adds and changes
connection and disconnection of patch • Low profile design – Allows plug pack assemblies to be
cords to a variety of switches, reducing installed side by side or stacked on top of each other
time and cost associated when installing providing maximum port density in high density installations
and maintaining structured cabling links. Innovative design • Removal tool (optional) – Allows individual patch cords
features of the plug pack allow multiple patch cords to be to be removed without disrupting other network connections
installed simultaneously with one hand for speed of deploy- • Lock-in device (optional) – Prevents unauthorized
ments, while providing flexibility and ease to identify and removal of patch cords from the switch for an additional
remove individual cable links without disrupting service to level of security
the other network connections. • Marker ties – Enables easy identification in high density
installations; provides additional level of security when
QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies are constructed of 100% combined with optional lock-in device
performance tested PANDUIT patch cords and assembled in • Identification labels – Includes part number,
a factory-controlled environment for more consistent connec- performance level, and quality assurance number for
tions with optimum reliability. Engineered for design flexibility future traceability; custom labels available upon request
and high-density utilization, QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assem-
blies are available in Category 6A, 6 and 5e performance Application Information
levels. An optional lock-in security device prevents unauthor- Switch blades periodically need to be replaced or exchanged
ized removal of plug packs form the switch, providing an due to system upgrades or repair/replacement. Due to
additional level of security. high port density and increasing cable diameter (as cabling
requirements shift from Category 5e to Category 6A cable),
Key Features and Benefits removing and re-connecting each individual patch cord is
• Compatible with Cisco Catalyst 6500 or 4500 series time consuming.
switches – utilizes precision for quick connection to
select switches Each QuickNet ™ plug Pack Assembly house 6, 8 or 12
• Integrated finger latch – Enables quick, one-handed patch cords, allowing them to be quickly installed, discon-
installation and removal of QuickNet™ Plug Pack nected, and re-connected in significantly less time than
Assemblies form the switch traditional methods.
• Wide range of performance levels – Provides optimum
flexibility with Category 6A, 6 and 5e performance Labels on each plug pack provide easy identification further
levels reducing the time associated with identifying and re-connect-
• Variety of configurations – Available in 6, 8 or 12 cable ing each individual cable. As a result, you can be assured
assemblies for optimal switch compatibility that each patch cord is installed quickly and accurately.
1 – QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assembly (QPP) All UTP cable is available in CM Flame/Smoke Rating.
2 – Performance Level
A = Category 6A (10Gig™) UTP *All STP cable is dual rated for CM and LSZH applications
E = Category 6A (10Gig™) STP* **Non-standard plug pack colors are available in red and black.
C = Category 6 UTP
D = Category 5e UTP
3 – Flame/Smoke Rating
C = CM (UTP only)
D = Dual rated CM and LSZH (shielded only)
4 – Cable Color
B = Blue
W = White
5 – Plug Pack Configuration
A = 6 pack
B = 12 pack
D = 8 pack
6 – Plug Pack Color**
B = Blue
W = White
7 – Assembly Length
03 = 3 feet
05 = 5 feet
07 = 7 feet
10 = 10 feet
14 = 14 feet
Mini-Com® Ultimate ID® Hybrid Box • ultimate ID ® labeling system – Easy identification to
help troubleshooting and maintenance, meets 606-A
Specifications standard
The hybrid box shall be a merging point • Optional cover extension – Provides additional security
for fiber and copper installations and to fiber connections and offers bend radius protection
shall accept all modules. The hybrid • Modularity – Multimedia flexibility simplifies moves,
box shall offer independent access to adds and changes
each type of media providing easy installation and mainte- • Retention block – Will manage up to 12 meters of
nance. The box shall provide various mounting options. A buffered fiber cable
retention block shall include a built-in spool that holds a total • Raceway breakout – Provides routing flexibility, easy to
of 12 meters of fiber buffered cable and shall accept a single install for low installed cost
gang faceplate for up to 6 modules. A cover extension shall
provide additional security and bend radius protection to the Applications
connections. The hybrid box shall comply with labeling stan- Schools, hospitals and government/military are among many
dards by including a station ID pocket and a 6 port ID pocket organizations that are considering fiber optic/copper solu-
for all base mounted modules. tions to reduce the amount of network upgrades required to
satisfy increasing demands for higher bandwidth. Fiber, in
Technical Information closer proximity to the source, will ensure there is adequate
• Dimensions - .98”H x 4.24”W x 7.89”L (25mm x bandwidth installed to support high-demand, multi-user
107.6mm x 200.4mm) environments.
.98”H x 4.24”W x 9.56”L (25mm x 107.6mm x 242.9mm)
• Color options: Available in Electric Ivory, International As the demand for higher bandwidth increased, applications
White and White such as military secured networks, corporate research and
• Mounting option: Mounts to single or double gang development projects and digital imaging equipment in hos-
openings, compatible with DIN openings, mounts with pitals will require functional high capacity products to support
adhesive tape to flat surfaces high end networks.
• Packaging: Hybrid box and hybrid box with cover
extension will both include retention block, mounting The Mini-Com® Ultimate ID ® Hybrid box can bring fiber to
screws, adhesive tape and clear label covers the work area today, and can also serve as a future migra-
tion path, providing a merging point that will support installa-
Key Features and Benefits tions requiring both fiber and copper connections.
• Copper/Fiber in one outlet – One outlet will merge fiber
and copper connections
Part Number Part Description Color* Labels Used with Std. Pkg. Std. Ctn.
Required** Pan-Way® Quantity Quantity
Raceway
UICBXH6IW-A Hybrid box with cover accepts up to 6 Off White One 1-Port, LD3, LD5 1 10
Mini-Com® Modules in a single gang One 6-Port
Mini-Com® Faceplate, and up to six Mini-
Com® Fiber Optic Modules in the base.
DPA486X88TGY Hybrid box with cover and cover extension Off White One 1-Port, LD3, LD5 1 10
accepts up to 6 Mini-Com® Modules in a One 6-Port
single gang Mini-Com® Faceplate, and up
to six Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Modules in
the base.
DPA486X88TGY Cover extension for hybrid box. Off White 1 10
DPA486X88TGY 24-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch 1 1 10
panel with 24 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire
ports.
DPA486X88TGY 48-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch 2 1 10
panel with 48 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire
ports.
Appendix B
PANDUIT Fiber Opticr Cabling System Technical Information
B: Fiber Optic Cabling System

Appendix A-1
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Page B-1
Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Cable compatibility with existing 50μm mul-
Specifications timode systems. Standard single-
Fiber optic indoor cable is an integral part of the end-to-end mode and multimode indoor cable
fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s data needs is available in fiber counts from 4 to
while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing network require- 72 fibers. Larger distribution cable
ments. Fiber optic indoor cable is used within buildings to features a 6-fiber sub-unit design
provide high-density connectivity and ease of installation. that simplifies fiber identification,
Applications include intra-building backbones, routing provides easy access and routing
between telecommunications rooms and connectorized ca- of the fibers, and increases cable durability with a dielectric
bles that require LSZH ratings. 10 GbE fiber optic intercon- central strength member.
nect cable features the highest quality OM3 laser optimized
fiber to support 10 Gb/s applications while maintaining
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor coating protects fibers during han-

Interlocking Armored Cable dling and allows for easy identifica-
Specifications tion and stripping. Cable design
Used in intra-building backbone, building backbone, and and flexible buffer tubes allow for
horizontal installations for riser (OFCR), plenum (OFCP), quick breakout and ease of routing.
and harsh environments. Interlocking aluminum armor Opti-Core® 10Gig™ OM3 Cable
eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a is designed to support network
smaller crush resistant pathway for design flexibility and a transmission speeds up to 10 Gb/s
lower installed cost. Available in 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 for link lengths up to 300 meters with an 850nm source per
and 144-fiber counts. Multimode (OM3, OM2, and OM1) IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard; backward compatible for
and singlemode (OS1/OS2) fiber available optimized) fiber use with all 50/125μm system requirements
available. 900μm standards-based color-coded buffer
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/ Outdoor and lower installed cost. Applications
Interlocking Armored Cable include intra-building backbones,
Specifications building backbones, and horizontal
PANDUIT ® OPTI-CORE ® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor installations for riser (OFNR), plenum
Interlocking Armored Cable is an integral part of the PANDUIT (OFNP), and harsh environments.
end-to-end fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s OPTI-CORE ® 10GIG™ Fiber Optic
data needs while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing network Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable
requirements. OPTI-CORE ® Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking features the highest quality OM3 la-
Armored Cable is used within buildings to provide high-density ser optimized fiber to support 10Gb/s applications while main-
connectivity and ease of installation. Interlocking aluminum ar- taining compatibility with existing 50μm multimode systems.
mor eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a RoHS compliant singlemode and multimode cable is available
smaller crush resistant pathway for improved design flexibility in fiber counts from 6 to 48 fibers.
Ordering Information
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Cable systems. Standard RoHS compliant

Specifications multimode and singlemode indoor/
Fiber optic indoor/outdoor Cable is an integral part of the outdoor cables are available in fiber
end-to-end fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s counts up to 24 fibers as a “central
data needs while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing tube” design, and up to 72 fibers as
network requirements. This LSZH rated cable provides a “stranded tube” design.
water-blocking, high density, and easy installation in duct
applications and entrance facilities. Fiber optic indoor/out-
door cable meets the IEC 60794-1 standards. 10 GbE fiber
optic indoor/outdoor cable features the highest quality OM3
laser optimized fiber to support 10 Gb/s applications while
maintaining compatibility with existing 50μm multimode
** Substitute for fiber count: 04, 08, 12, 24, 36, 48 72
Armored Cable Grounding Kit

Specifications
Crimped jumper wire assembly; 24”
(609.6mm) length; LCC6-14, #10
mechanical clamp; provided with two
each #12-24, M6 slotted hex head
zinc-plated thread-forming screws, and
black polypropylene terminal cover.
LC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Technical Information

Pre-Polished Cam Termination Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds
Specifications requirements TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements
LC small form factor (SFF) pre-pol- Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
ished connectors with rear pivot 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
latch shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 OS1/OS2
compatible and contain a factory-ter- Fiber cable type 900μm tight-buffered cable only
minated fiber, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. LC Fiber cable size 1.6mm – 2.0mm and 3.0mm jacketed cable
pre-polished connectors shall have an average insertion loss with optional boots
of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode fiber. LC pre-polished Ferrule type Zirconia ceramic with a pre-polished fiber stub
connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action Insertion loss Ceramic: 0.3dB average (multimode and
allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation singlemode)
in performance. Return loss Ceramic: >20dB (multimode), >26dB (10Gig™
multimode), >50dB (singlemode)
LC Fiber Optic Connectors – Technical Information

Field Polish Termination Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds
LC small form factor (SFF) field pol- Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
ish connectors with rear pivot latch are 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. LC OS1/OS2
simplex and duplex connectors are field Fiber cable type 900μm tight-buffered cable recommended
terminable. The fibers shall terminate in 1.25mm ceramic ferrules Fiber cable size 1.6mm – 2.0mm jacketed cable
with non-optical disconnect functionality and an average insertion Ferrule type Zirconia ceramic ferrule
loss of 0.1dB per mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber. Insertion loss 0.1dB average (multimode and singlemode)
Ordering Information Return loss >20dB (multimode), >40dB (singlemode)
SC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Technical Information

Pre-Polished Cam Termination Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant; exceeds
SC pre-polished fiber optic connectors Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compli- 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
ant and contain a factory-terminated OS1/OS2
fiber, eliminating field polishing and Fiber cable type 900μm tight-buffered cable only
adhesive. SC pre-polished connectors shall have an aver- Fiber cable size 1.6mm – 2.0mm and 3.0mm jacketed cable
age insertion loss of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode and with optional boots
singlemode fiber. SC pre-polished connectors shall captivate Ferrule type Zirconia ceramic or composite ferrule with a
fiber and buffer in one action allowing for up to two re-termina- pre-polished fiber stub
tions with no degradation in performance. Insertion loss Ceramic: 0.3dB average (multimode and
singlemode)
Composite: 0.3dB average (multimode)
Return loss Ceramic: >20dB (multimode), >26dB (10Gig™
multimode), >50dB (singlemode) Composite:
Ordering Information >20dB (multimode)
SC Fiber Optic Connectors – Technical Information

Field Polish Termination Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant; exceeds
SC field polish connectors are TIA/EIA- Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
604 FOCIS-3 compliant. SC simplex 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
and duplex connectors are field ter- OS1/OS2
minable. The fibers shall terminate in Fiber cable type 900μm tight-buffered cable recommended
2.5mm ceramic ferrules with non-optical disconnect functionality Fiber cable size 3.0mm or 1.6mm – 2.0mm jacketed cable
and an average insertion loss of 0.1dB (multimode) and 0.15dB Ferrule type Zirconia ceramic ferrule
(singlemode) per mated pair. Insertion loss 0.1dB average (multimode), .15dB (singlemode)
Ordering Information Return loss >20dB (multimode), >40dB (singlemode)
LC Fiber Optic Adapters

Specifications Technical Information
LC small form factor (SFF) fiber optic Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds-
adapters with integrated panel reten- requirements TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements
tion clips are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
compatible. Each LC simplex adapter 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
shall connect one LC connector pair OS1/OS2
in one module space. Each LC duplex adapter shall connect Compatibility Small form factor (SFF) duplex adapter fits
two LC connector pairs in one module space. LC adapters and into single module space
adapter modules shall include phosphor bronze split sleeves Split Sleeve type Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze
for multimode applications or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for
singlemode applications.
LC Adapter Type Description Application Type

Sr./Sr. Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface Typically used for patch panel and outlet
(Senior/Senior) (without keyway) at each end. applications, including behind the wall
applications.
Both ends accept FOCIS-10 compatible senior
LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded
ferrules)
Sr./Jr. Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface Shorter profile of junior end accommodates
(Senior/Junior) (without keyway) at one end and a FOCIS-10 tighter applications behind the wall, allow-
compatible junior adapter interface (with ing easier access to FOCIS-10 compatible
keyway) at the other end. junior (shorter) LC connectors terminated
on 900μm buffered fiber.
Both ends accept all FOCIS-10 compatible
senior LC connectors (non-keyed; spring PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels
loaded ferrules). and QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes
Junior end also accepts FOCIS-10 compatible include Sr./Jr. Adapters.
junior LC connectors (keyed; fixed ferrule/
springless).
Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs) Technical Information

Specifications Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS compatible for all MPO/
Fiber adapter panels are TIA/EIA-604 requirements MTP*, LC, SC, ST, MT-RJ or FC adapters
FOCIS. Snap quickly into the front of Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 50/125μm
all components. Phosphor bronze 10Gig™ and 9/125μm OS1/OS2
or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit Compatibility Compatible with Opticom® Enclosure and
specific network requirements; zirconia Patch Panel products for complete modularity
ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications. Split Sleeve type Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze
Opticom® Rack Mounted Fiber Enclosures

Rack mounted fiber enclosures Compatibility Houses any PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber
house, organize, manage Adapter Panel, or Opticom® Fiber Mount
and protect fiber optic cable, Panel (FMP). Also compatible with PANDUIT®
terminations, splices, connec- Opticom® Fiber Optic Splice Module (FOSM)
tors and patch cords. The for fusion splice installations
enclosures accommodate Adapter Types Supports MTP, LC, SC, ST, FC, and MT-RJ
fiber adapter panels (FAP) and fiber mount panels (FMP) plus adapters
associated trunk cables, connectors and patch cords. Integral Sizes 1RU, 2RU, 3RU, and 4RU versions
cable management and bend radius control for transition to verti- Mounting Universal brackets (included) allow enclosure
cal cable managers is provided. Rack mounted enclosures are to fit in 19” wide EIA-310 style or 23” wide EIA-
constructed of steel with molded front and rear doors that are re- 310 or WECO style racks
movable for cabling and connector access and installation. A flat Accessories Mounting hardware and accessory kit with
front door enables direct access to fiber optic patch cords. The slack spools, fiber routing clips, bend radius
1RU and 2RU enclosures feature a forward and backward sliding control guides, and port labeling and identifica-
drawer for access to all fiber connections and terminations. The tion card included
3RU and 4RU enclosures use a fixed bulkhead design. Multiple
knockouts allow a variety of trunk cable entry points.
Opticom® Fiber Adapter Patch Panels Technical Information

Specifications Compatibility Houses any PANDUIT® QuickNet™ Pre-Ter-
Fiber adapter patch panels minated MTP* Cassette or Opticom® Fiber
mount to any 19” wide EIA-310 Adapter Panel. Use with Opticom® Fiber
style rack. Standard version holds QuickNet™ MTP* Cassettes Mount Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and termi-
and Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Angled version nations.
holds Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels and matches Mini-Com® Sizes 1RU and 2RU sizes, flat panel and angled
Angled Patch Panel profile. Used with Opticom® Fiber Mount panel versions
Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and terminations. Mounting Mounts to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack
Accessories Mounting hardware included
SC Fiber Optic Adapters

SC fiber optic adapters with integrated Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible; exceeds
panel retention clips are TIA/EIA-604 requirements TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements
FOCIS-3 compliant. Each SC simplex Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
adapter shall connect one SC connec- 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
tor pair in one module space. Each OS1/OS2
SC duplex adapter shall connect two SC connector pairs in two Compatibility Compatible with Mini-Com® products for
module spaces. SC adapters and adapter modules shall include complete modularity
phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applications or zirco- Split Sleeve type Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze
nia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applications.
LC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit
Adapter Modules specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are
Specifications required for singlemode applications.
LC Sr./Sr. and Sr./Jr. small form factor
(SFF) fiber optic adapter modules are
TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible.
Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds-
They shall be compatible with Mini-
requirements TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements
Com® products for complete modularity. LC small form factor
Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
(SFF) fiber optic adapters with integrated panel retention clips are
50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. Each LC simplex adapter
OS1/OS2
shall connect one LC connector pair in one module space. Each
Compatibility Small form factor (SFF) duplex adapter fits
LC duplex adapter shall connect two LC connector pairs in one
into single module space.
module space. LC adapters and adapter modules shall include
Split Sleeve type Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze
phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applications or
zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applications. They
LC Adapter Type Description Application Type

Sr./Sr. Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface Typically used for patch panel and outlet
(Senior/Senior) (without keyway) at each end. applications, including behind the wall
applications.
Both ends accept FOCIS-10 compatible senior
LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded fer-
rules).
Sr./Jr. Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface (without Shorter profile of junior end accommodates
(Senior/Junior) keyway) at one end and a FOCIS-10 compatible ju- tighter applications behind the wall, allow-
nior adapter interface (with keyway) at the other end. ing easier access to FOCIS-10 compatible
junior (shorter) LC connectors terminated
Both ends accept all FOCIS-10 compatible senior on 900μm buffered fiber.
LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded ferrules).
PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels
Junior end also accepts FOCIS-10 compatible junior and QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes
LC connectors (keyed; fixed ferrule/springless). include Sr./Jr. Adapters.
SC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Technical Information

Adapter Modules Standards TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible; exceeds
SC fiber optic adapter modules are Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™
TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible. 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm
They shall be compatible with Mini- OS1/OS2
Com® products for complete modular- Compatibility Compatible with Mini-Com® products for
ity. They shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split complete modularity
sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split Split Sleeve type Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze
sleeves are required for singlemode applications.
Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels

Mini-Com® Modular Patch Compatibility Compatible with all PANDUIT® Mini-Com®
Panels mount to any 19” wide products for complete modularity
EIA-310 style rack and accept all Adapter Types Supports MTP*, LC, SC, ST, FC, and MT-RJ
Mini-Com® Adapter Modules and Jack Modules including LC, adapter modules
SC, and MTP* fiber adapter modules. Modular patch panels are Sizes 1RU and 2RU sizes, flat panel and angled
available in a variety of sizes and styles in both flat and angled panel versions with 24, 48, and 72 ports
patch panel versions. Individual adapter module identification is Mounting Mounts to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack
provided via pre-numbered ports and provisions for field gener- Mounting Mounting hardware included
ated port ID labels.
*MTP is a registered trademark of US Conec Ltd.

** CPP48HDWBLY and CPPA48HDWBLY high-density patch
panels have provision for pre-printed port ID numbers (1-48)
only
Opti-Core® Traditional Trunk Cable Assemblies Technical Information

Specifications Application Tailors configuration and breakout construc-
Traditional trunk cable assemblies specific design tion to application requirements to minimize
allow for rapid deployment of high- waste, optimize cable management, speed
density permanent links in a single deployment, and improve flexibility and man-
assembly for data center applications ageability for lower installation costs
requiring quick infrastructure deploy- Termination data Assures verified optical performance for im-
ment, such as main, horizontal, supplied proved network integrity
and zone distribution areas. Traditional trunk cable assemblies Plenum rated Meets NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame rating for
optimize cabling routing requirements to ensure efficient use of jacket standard compliant safety
pathway space and significantly reduce installation time and cost. LSZH rated jacket Meets IEC-60332 (LSZH) flame rating for
Traditional trunk cable assemblies, built with traditional simplex standard compliant safety
and duplex connectivity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee compat- High-density Uses pathway space more efficiently to
ibility, flexibility, and system performance in all permanent link cable improve manageability and reduce installation
applications. All traditional trunk cable assemblies are factory costs
terminated and tested to deliver verified optical performance and Range of fiber Supports 10 Gb/s, multimode, and singlemode
reliability for improved network integrity. 10 GbE versions provide configurations pre-terminated permanent link elements in the
10 Gb/s network performance up to 300M per IEEE 802.3ae 10 data center to provide design flexibility for all
GbE standard while maintaining compatibility with legacy sys- connectivity types
tems. 150M and 550M link length options are also available.
Fan-Out Cords Technical Information

Specifications Standard All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500
Fan-out cords allow quick high Requirements mating cycles
performance field fusion splice dur- Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-B.3
ing installation to provide the lowest TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5)
installed cost. Fan-out cords are built UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame
with traditional simplex connectiv- ratings
ity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee Insertion loss 0.25dB per connector
compatibility, flexibility, and system Endface Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR-
performance in all permanent link applications. All Fan-out cords 326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure
are factory terminated and tested to deliver verified optical perfor- high performance
mance and reliability for improved network integrity. Riser or plenum Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)
rated jacket flame ratings for standard compliant safety
Test data Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Es-
tablishes a performance reference to stream-
line maintenance
Q.C. identification Quality control reference provides lifetime
label traceability of test data
Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Technical Information

Standard All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500
10Gig® 50/125um (OM3) Multi- Requirements mating cycles
mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-B.3
and Pigtails TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5)
Specifications UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame
Fan-out cords allow quick high perfor- ratings
mance field fusion splice during installation to provide the lowest Insertion loss 0.25dB per connector
installed cost. Fan-out cords are built with traditional simplex Endface Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR-
connectivity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee compatibility, flexibility, 326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure
and system performance in all permanent link applications. All high performance
Fan-out cords are factory terminated and tested to deliver verified Riser or plenum Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)
optical performance and reliability for improved network integrity. rated jacket flame ratings for standard compliant safety
line maintenance
Q.C. identification Quality control reference provides lifetime
Multimode 62.5/125um (OM1) Technical Information

or 50/125 (OM2) Fiber Optic Patch Standard All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500
Cords and Pigtails Requirements mating cycles
Specifications Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-B.3
RoHS compliant fiber optic patch TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or
cords shall include simplex or duplex NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings
LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or Insertion loss Per connection: 0.10dB typical, 0.30dB max.
FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant (multimode), 0.50dB max. (MT-RJ multimode);
fiber optic pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, 0.25dB typical, 0.75dB max. (singlemode),
or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one 0.35dB max. (LC singlemode)
end and open (unterminated) on the other end. Patch cords and Return loss 20dB min. (multimode); 26dB min. (10Gig™
pigtails shall include laser optimized OM3 fiber or OM1, OM2 or multimode); 55dB min. (singlemode)
fiber in 900μm tight-buffered fiber, 1.6mm or 3.0mm simplex or Riser or plenum Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)
duplex zipcord jacketed cable, or 1.8mm duplex zipcord jacketed rated jacket flame ratings for standard compliant safety
cable. Jacketed cable shall be compliant with UL1666 (OFNR) or Test data Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Es-
NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings. Patch cords and pigtails shall tablishes a performance reference to stream-
meet or exceed requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. The fiber line maintenance
connectors shall be FOCIS compliant or compatible, and exceed Q.C. identification Quality control reference provides lifetime
the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles. label traceability of test data
*Indicates length in meters. Patch cords are available in 1m – 10m

lengths in 1m increments and 15m, 20m, 25m and 30m lengths.
Add the letter B to the end of the part number for pair wise flip.
Pigtails are available in 1m, 2m, and 3m lengths.
Singlemode 9/125um (OS1/OS2) Technical Information

Fiber Optic Patch Cords Standard All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500
and Pigtails Requirements mating cycles
Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-B.3
Specifications TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or
RoHS compliant fiber optic patch NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings
cords shall include simplex or duplex Insertion loss Per connection: 0.75dB max. (singlemode),
LC or keyed LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or 0.35dB max. (LC singlemode)
keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant fiber Return loss 55dB minimum
optic pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or Single Mode Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR-
MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one Enface 326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure
end and open (unterminated) on the other end. Patch cords high performance
and pigtails shall be OS1/OS2fiber in 900μm tight-buffered Endface Polish UPC finish to ensure high quality endface for
fiber, 1.6mm or 3.0mm simplex or duplex zipcord jacketed higher return loss to meet application standards.
cable. Jacketed cable shall be compliant with UL1666 (OFNR) Low Water Eliminates high attenuation in the high E-band
or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings. Patch cords and pigtails Peak Fiber and allows operation over the entire 1280-
shall meet or exceed requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. The 1625nm wavelength range; excellent for
fiber connectors shall be FOCIS compliant or compatible, CWDM and DWDM applications.
and exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 Riser or plenum Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)
mating cycles. rated jacket flame ratings for standard compliant safety
line maintenance
Q.C.identification Quality control reference provides lifetime
Connector Cleaning Tools
Features
• All tools feature a dry cloth cleaning
system with an ultra clean micro-fiber cloth
that captures debris and contamination
• Anti-static cloth minimizes additional
debris from being attracted to connector surfaces
• Densely woven, robust cloth doesn’t fray or leave fibrous
materials behind
• All tools and refills can be used to clean 400 connectors
Part Number Description For
FMTPFCT Reel type connector cleaning tool Cleaning MTP* female connectors (without pins)
FMTPRR6 Cleaning reel refill (includes six reels) FMTPFCT and FMTPMFCT reel type MTP* connector
cleaning tools
Fiber Optic Termination Kits • No adhesive or electricity required for termination

• Include installation instructions and stripping templates for all
OptiCam® Pre-Polished Cam PANDUIT® OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors
Fiber Optic Termination Kits
Features Part Number Description
• For termination of all PANDUIT® FCAMKIT Opti-Cam Pre-Polished Cam Termination Kit
OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors FCLEANKIT Cleaning Consumables Replenishment Kit
• OptiCam® Termination Tool simplifies FIELDKITUPG Field Polish Kit Upgrade for OptiCam® Con-
tooling and termination, and virtually eliminates operator nector Termination
error by providing visual indication of proper termination after
the cam step has been completed
Field Polish Fiber Optic Ordering Information

Termination Kits Part Number Description
FIELDKIT Field Polish Termination Kit (110VAC, 60Hz)
Features FIELDKIT-G CField Polish Termination Kit (230VAC, 50Hz)
• For termination of all PANDUIT FIELDKITRFB Field Polish Consumables Refurbishment Kit
Field Polish Connectors FCLEANKIT Cleaning Consumables Replenishment Kit
• Fast acting adhesive; no long curing FCAMKITUPG OptiCam Kit Upgrade For Field Polish
epoxy required for termination Connector Termination (110VAC, 60Hz)
• Kit provides consumables for terminating up to 200 field FCAMKITUPG-G OptiCam Kit Upgrade For Field Polish
polish connectors Connector Termination (230VAC, 50Hz)
• Include installation instructions and stripping templates for
all PANDUIT Field Polish Connectors; also available on
www.panduit.com
Fiber Optic Splice Module
Features Ordering Information

The fiber optic splice module Part Number Description
(FOSM) shall house and protect fiber FOSMF Splice Module Fusion
optic splices, guarantee proper fiber FOSMM Splice Module Mechanical
cable management and bend radius
control, and allow for clear labeling
and logical organization of the fiber optic splices. The FOSM
shall support 24 fusion splices or 12 mechanical splices in
one module and shall be compatible with all PANDUIT rack
mounted fiber enclosures. Slacking and spooling shall be self-
contained within the FOSM. The FOSM shall be self-stacking
with a hinged clear cover
Metal Splice Tray
Features
Fiber splice tray kit for up to twelve
mechanical or fusion splices.
Fits in PANDUIT FMT, FWME4, and
FWME8 series enclosures.
Stack up to four high using FSTHE
stacking unit in rack mount enclosures or using FST6H4
stacking unit in wall mount enclosures.
FST6 Fiber Splice tray for up to twelve mechanical
or fusion splices
Fiber Optic Protector Sleeves
Features
Fiber splice protectors help protect
the fibers after fusion splicing to en-
sure integrity and safety in the fiber
splice tray. Protection and support is
provided by a stainless-steel strength
member which ensures fiber rigidity after splicing.
FOSP61 60mm splice protector sleeve
FOSP45 45mm splice protector sleeve
Appendix C:
PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information
C-1: Example Specification Document

for GES Connections
C-2: Example Specification Document for

Communications Systems
C-3: Example Visual Inspection and

Documentation Process
©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0 Page C-1
Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information
Appendix C-1: Installation

Example Grounding and Bonding System • Connectors shall be installed as per manufactur-
Specification Document for GES Connections er’s instructions, including surface preparation, in
stallation tools, crimping dies, and the required
Direct Burial Compression Grounding number of crimps
System Specification Sheet • Connectors shall be installable in any weather,
including wet or extreme cold (-40º F) conditions
Scope • Completing the connections shall require that no
The scope of this specification includes the materials, hazardous material be brought into the work site
design, marking, installation, inspectability, and
performance of grounding connectors used for direct Inspectability
burial in earth or concrete. All connectors shall meet • When crimped, die index numbers shall be em
the requirements of this specification. bossed upon the part. The embossed die index
numbers shall match the die index numbers
Materials printed on the part
Connector body shall be of wrought or cast copper • Installation process shall indicate that the perfor-
mance requirements of IEEE Std 837™-2002 are
Design met. The markings shall be an integral part of the
All connectors shall: crimping process, and must indicate that all steps
• Utilize irreversible compression technology have been met. Example of acceptable indication
• Be factory-filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound includes that the die index numbers are embossed
• Utilize vacuum-sealed packaging to guarantee that on the part once for UL/CSA only, and twice for
the oxide-inhibiting compound is not rubbed off IEEE Std 837™-2002
the part during shipping or before installation
Performance
Marking Connections shall comply with the following standards:
• Connector and matching installation die shall be • IEEE Std 837™-2002 – Standard for Qualifying Per
color-coded to ensure proper die selection manent Connections Used in Substation Grounding
• Clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, • NFPA 70™ – National Electrical Code
conductor size, and required compression tool die • UL 467 – Grounding and Bonding Equipment, for
index number • CSA C22.1 – Canadian Electrical Code, Part I
• Marked with “DB” to indicate that the parts are for • MIL-STD-202G (METHOD 201A) – Department of
direct burial Defense: Test Method Standard: Electronic and
• Labeled with the specific types, sizes, and combina Electrical Component Parts (Vibration)
tions of conductors and other items connected
approved by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL)
• Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code – NEC)
Appendix C-2:
Example Grounding and Bonding System
Specification Document for Communications Systems
CSI SECTION 270526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
The purpose of this document is to provide documentation to ca-

bling professionals interested in providing their customer a standard
specification applicable to commercial building structured cabling
applications.
The documentation includes: Product specifications, minimum

product performance, structured cabling design considerations and
installation guidelines.
The information contained in this document is based on our ex-

perience to date and is believed to be reliable. It is intended as a
guide for use by persons having technical skill and is to be used
with their own discretion and risk. We do not guarantee favorable
results or assume any liability in connection with its use. Dimen-
sions contained herein are for reference purposes only. For specific
dimensional requirements consult the factory. This publication is not
to be taken as a license to operate under, or a recommendation to
infringe any existing patents. This supercedes and voids all previ-
ous literature, etc.
It is highly recommended and the issuer’s responsibility to have

any RFQ documents, including those based on this general format,
reviewed by the issuing company’s professional advisors before it
is released to the public. In no way may this document be used in
a manner that is detrimental to the interests of Panduit and/or its
subsidiaries.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1 Work Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Scope of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Regulatory References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Approved Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.8 Workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1 Equivalent Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2 Grounding/Earthing and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3 Components, Kits and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.4 Construction of the Grounding/Earthing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5 Rack Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6 Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 Cabinet Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.8 Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.9 Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1 Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
SECTION 271116 1.3 Regulatory References
Part 1 - General A. The following industry standards are the basis for the
grounding/earthing and bonding system described in
1.1 Work Included this document.
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment 1. NFPA

required for the complete installation of work called for • NFPA-70 National Electric Code (NEC)
in the Construction Documents 2. IEEE
• Std 1100 IEEE Recommend Practice for
1.2 Scope of Work Powering and Grounding Electronic
Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book)
A. This document describes the products and execution 3. TIA/EIA
requirements relating to furnishing and installing • TIA-942 Telecommunications Infrastructure
Grounding/Earthing and Bonding for Communications Standard for Data Centers
Systems. • J-STD-607-A Commercial Building
Grounding/Bonding Requirements
B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: • TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications Infrastructure
• Grounding/Earthing System of Commercial Buildings
• Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) International Standard
• Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) • BS EN 50310:2000
• Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) Application of equipotential bonding
• Rack Grounding/Earthing and Bonding and earthing in Buildings with
• Cabinet Grounding/Earthing and Bonding information technology equipment
• Shield Grounding/Earthing and Bonding
B. The most recent versions of all documents apply to this
C. All cables and related terminations, support and project. If there is a conflict between applicable
grounding/earthing hardware shall be furnished, in- documents, the order above shall dictate the order of
stalled, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforce
telecommunications contractor as detailed in this document. able local or national code is in effect.
D. Product specifications, general design considerations, 1.4 Quality Assurance

and installation guidelines are provided in this document.
Quantities grounding/earthing products, typical installa- A. See the Panduit Electrical Product Warranty on www.
tion details and cable routing will be provided as an panduit.com/warranty
attachment to this document. If the bid documents are
in conflict, this specification shall take precedence. The 1.5 Approved Products
successful vendor shall meet or exceed all require-
ments for the cable system described in this document. A. Approved grounding/earthing system
manufacturer: PANDUIT
B. Approved telecommunications grounding busbar

manufacturer: PANDUIT
C. Approved rack grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT
Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing – The application of
D. Approved retrofit rack grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT grounding/earthing products and technology where equip-
ment is already deployed and functioning within the equip-
E. Approved cabinet grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT ment cabinet.
F. Approved retrofit cabinet grounding kit manufac- 1.7 Overview

turer: PANDUIT
A primary purpose of the grounding/earthing and bonding
G. Approved shielded cabling grounding kit manufac- system is to create an adequate capacity path for electri-
turer: PANDUIT cal surges and transient voltages to return to their source
(which may include the earth). Lightning, fault currents,
1.6 Definitions circuit switching (motors turning on and off), activation of
surge protective devices (SPDs) and electrostatic dis-
Bonding – The permanent joining of metallic parts to form charge are common causes of these electrical surges and
an electrically conductive path that will assure electrical transient voltages. An effective grounding/earthing and
continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current bonding system minimizes the detrimental effects of
likely to be imposed. these electrical surges and transient voltages, which
include degraded network performance and reliability and
Mesh Common Bonding Network (MCBN) – The mesh increased safety risks.
CBN (MCBN) can be readily utilized for efficient direct
bonding of equipment and other apparatus to the ground- A properly constructed protection system includes a num-
ing system. Such an arrangement provides efficient ber of subsystems including:
grounding and inter/intra-unit bonding of metal cabinets,
racks and miscellaneous metal objects (especially when • Grounding electrode system
they are not powered). Additionally, the MCBN ensures • Lightning protection system
grounding reliability of the equipment in the event the • Surge suppression
equipment grounding conductor of the serving power • AC/DC power systems grounding
circuit is compromised or disconnected during mainte- • Telecommunications supplemental grounding and bonding
nance. Electrostatic charge buildup and dissipation is also
greatly aided by the multiple grounding paths of the CBN. While each subsystem is designed with a specific intent in
See Figure 1. mind, the systems interact and enhance the overall ca-
pability of the entire protection system. This specification
Ground/Earth (Earth/Earthing is an international term focuses primarily on the telecommunications supplemen-
equivalent to grounding) – A conducting connection, tal grounding and bonding subsystem, hereafter referred
whether intentional or incidental, by which an electric cir- to as the grounding, bonding, or grounding/earthing system.
cuit or equipment is connected to earth, or to some con
ducting body of relatively large extent that serves in place The grounding/earthing system must be intentional, visu-
of the earth. ally verifiable, adequately sized to handle expected
currents safely, and directs these potentially damaging
Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing – The application of currents away from sensitive network equipment. As such,
grounding/earthing products and technology where equip- grounding/earthing must be purposeful in its design and
ment is already deployed and functioning within the installation. Four issues require special consideration:
equipment rack.
A. Although AC powered equipment typically has a D. Lugs, HTAPs, grounding strips, and busbars shall be
power cord that contains a ground/earth wire, the UL Listed and made of premium quality tin-plated elec-
integrity of this path cannot be easily verified. Thus, trolytic copper that provides low electrical resistance
many equipment manufacturers require grounding/ while inhibiting corrosion. Antioxidant shall be used
earthing above and beyond that which is specified by when making bonding connections in the field.
local electrical codes, such as the National Electrical
Code, etcetera. Always follow the grounding/earthing E. Wherever possible, two-hole lugs shall be used
recommendations of the manufacturer when because they resist loosening when twisted (bumped)
installing equipment. or exposed to vibration. All lugs shall be irreversible
compression and meet NEBS Level 3 as tested by
B. While the building steel and metallic water piping must Telcordia. Lugs with inspection windows shall be used
be bonded to the grounding/earthing system for safety in all non-corrosive environments so that connections
reasons, neither may be substituted for the telecommu- may be inspected for full conductor insertion (battery
nications bonding backbone (TBB). rooms are an exception where windowless lugs may
be used).
C. Electrical continuity throughout each rack or cabinet is
required to minimize safety risks. Hardware typically F. Die index numbers shall be embossed on all compres
supplied with bolt-together racks is not designed for sion connections to allow crimp inspection.
grounding/earthing purposes. Additionally, most racks
and cabinets are painted. Paint is an insulator. Unless G. Cable assemblies shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified.
rack and cabinet members are deliberately bonded, Cables shall be a distinctive green or green/yellow in
continuity between members is incidental, and in many color, and all jackets shall be UL, VW-1 flame rated.
cases, unlikely.
D. Any metallic component that is part of the data center, Part 2 - Products
including equipment, racks, cabinets, ladder racks,
enclosures, cable trays, etc. must be bonded to the 2.1 Equivalent Products
grounding/earthing system.
A. PANDUIT shall manufacture all products, including but
1.8 Workmanship not limited to grounding/earthing and bonding for
communications systems. There will be no substitu-
The ground/earth system must be designed for high reli- tions allowed.
ability. Therefore, the grounding/earthing system shall meet
following criteria: 2.2 Grounding/Earthing and Bonding
A. Local electrical codes shall be adhered to. A Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall
be located at the service entrance. A Telecommunications
B. The grounding/earthing system shall comply with Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be located in each telecom-
ANSI/TIA-942, J-STD-607-A, IEEE Std 1100™ munications space. The TGB will be grounded/earthed to the
(IEEE Emerald Book), and in international regions BS Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB).
EN 50310:2000.
C. All grounding/earthing conductors shall be copper.
The TMGB shall be bonded to building steel and grounded/ Route the TBB to each TGB in as straight a path as possible.
earthed to the electrical service ground according to J-STD- The TBB should be installed as a continuous conductor,
607-A guidelines. Each TGB shall be bonded to building avoiding splices where possible. Use PANDUIT part number
steel and the electrical panel serving equipment in the tele- series HTWC to tap into the TBB where necessary. When
communications space. See figure 1 below. more than one TBB is used, bond them together using the
TGBs on the top floor and every third floor in between with a
conductor known as a grounding equalizer (GE). Use the
J-STD-607-A guidelines for sizing of the TBB when sizing the
GE (shown in the table above).
2.3 Components, Kits and Hardware
PANDUIT® STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Grounding System

(STRUCTUREDEARTH™ Earthing System) kits, compo-
nents, and hardware shall be used to construct the ground-
ing/earthing system.
Use PANDUIT GB4 series BICSI/J-STD-607-A telecommu-

nications grounding busbars for the TMGB, which is ideally
Figure C-1 – Service Entrance Grounding located at the AC service entrance. Use a PANDUIT GB2
series busbar for the TGB in each of the other telecommu-
The gauge of the connecting ground/earth cable, known as nications/equipment spaces throughout the building. Use
the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) will follow PANDUIT
J-STD-607-A guidelines, as is shown in the table below. LCC-W series lugs when connecting conductors to the
TMGB and TGB.
Sizing of the TBB
TBB Length in Linear TBB Size AWG 2.4 Construction of the Grounding/Earthing System
meters (feet)
Less than 4 (13) 6 (16mm²) Avoid routing grounding/earthing conductors in metal con-
duits. If the grounding/earthing conductor must be routed
4-6 (14-20) 4 (25mm²)
through a metal conduit, bond each end of the conduit to the
6-8 (21-26) 3 (25mm²)
grounding/earthing conductor. Use PANDUIT GPL series
8-10 (27-33) 2 (35mm²)
grounding clamps to bond to the conduit, a PANDUIT HTWC
10-13 (34-41) 1 (35mm²) HTAP with clear cover to bond to the grounding/earthing
13-16 (42-52) 1/0 (50mm²) conductor, and a #6 AWG copper conductor to connect the
16-20 (53-66) 2/0 (70mm²) GPL grounding clamp to the HTWC HTAP.
Greater than 20 (66) 3/0 (95mm²)
In telecommunications spaces with a small number of racks
or cabinets, it may be most convenient to bond the ground-
ing/earthing jumper cable directly to the TGB. Larger spaces
require a mesh Common Bonding Network, as described
below.
Cable Sizes for Other Grounding/Earthing The under the floor MCBN shall be constructed of a #2 AWG
Applications Not Specifically Described (35mm²) or smaller gauge bonding
Elsewhere in This Document conductor, but never smaller than a #6 AWG (16mm²)
conductor. The MCBN should be connected to the Telecom-
Purpose Copper Code Cable Size munications Grounding busbar (TGB) using a 1/0 AWG
Aisle ground (overhead) Minimum #2 AWG (35mm²) (50mm²) or larger conductor.
of the common bonding
network MCBN grid shall be installed on every other pedestal, this
Aisle ground (under floor) of Minimum # 6 AWG (16mm²) allows for bonding of one pedestal from each access floor
the mesh common bonding tile to the MCBN. A grounding clamp shall create a bond
network between conductors at each intersection and to the access
Bonding conductor to each Size per NEC 250.122 & floor by bonding the pedestals to the MCBN conductors.
PDU or panel board serving manufacturer recommenda- PANDUIT part number GPQC1/0 shall be utilized for ¾”
the room. tions (19.1mm) and 1” (25.4mm) round or square pedestals and
Bonding conductor to HVAC #6 AWG (16mm²) where MCBN conductors range from #6 AWG (16mm²) – 1/0
equipment AWG (50mm²). MCBN grid shall be bonded no further than
Building columns #4 AWG (25mm²) every 5th pedestal to be compliant with TIA-942 standard.
Cable ladders and trays #6 AWG (16mm²)
Use HTCT HTAP connectors for series bonds (such as from
Conduit, water pipe, duct #6 AWG (16mm²)
the rack to the mesh CBN) and either HTCT or CTAPF con-
nectors to provide parallel connections within the auxiliary
Raised Floor (Access Floor) mesh Common Bonding Net-
grounding system (such as when bonding conductors to the
work - The following requirements shall
outer ring that encompasses the raised floor).
apply when constructing the MCBN under the floor:
MCBN connection to TGB

1/0 AWG (50mm²)
Bond the frame of the CRAC unit to
MCBN conductors are the MCBN using #6 AWG (16mm²)
bonded to every other floor jumper and HTCT HTAP
pedestal using PANDUIT part
GPQC1/0
Bond each cabinet/rack
to MCBN using #6 AWG
(16mm²) jumper and HTCT
HTAP
CTAPF connectors
provide parallel
connections
Bond wire basket to Bond water pipes to the

MCBN using #6 AWG MCBN with GPL Clamp and
SBCT3-C to bond wire (16mm²) jumper and #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper with
basket to MCBN HTCT HTAP HTCT HTAP
Figure 2 – Mesh Common Bonding Network and Wire Basket Bonding
Overhead Common Bonding Network and 2.5 Rack Grounding/Earthing

Ladder Rack Bonding
Equipment and racks shall be bonded in accordance with the
The overhead common bonding network shall be construct- p
methods prescribed g 4 below.
in ANSI/TIA-942, as is shown in figure
ed of a minimum of a #2 AWG (35mm²) or larger gauge wire.
The CBN shall be bonded to the TGB using a 2-hole copper
compression connector, PANDUIT part series LCC-W or
metric equivalent.
Ladder racks shall be bonded per the manufacturer’s instal-

lation instructions. The bond shall be made in accordance
with Figure 3 below to the mesh Common Bonding Network.
Figure 3 – Overhead Common Bonding Network and Figure 4 - Properly Grounded/Earthed Rack (Back of Rack Shown)
Ladder Rack Bonding
To provide electrical continuity between ladder rack seg- To provide electrical continuity between rack elements, PAN-
ments use PANDUIT® STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Auxiliary DUIT paint piercing grounding washers, series RGW, shall
Cable Bracket, PANDUIT part number be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides,
GACB-1. When installed, the paint piercing teeth on the under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack.
bracket remove paint from the ladder rack sections providing
an electrical bond. There shall also be a grounding jumper, All racks shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT
PANDUIT part number GACBJ618U, that connects to the series RGS, attached to the rear of the side rail with the
auxiliary cable brackets to bond the sections of the ladder thread-forming screws provided to ensure metal-to-metal
rack together. contact.
Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT

series RGESD, directly to the rack grounding strip on the
back of the rack at approximately 48 inches (122cm) from
the floor. Mount a second RGESD directly to the vertical
mounting rail of the rack in the front at approximately the
same height. Use the thread-forming screws provided to
form a bond to the rack. Place the ESD protection identifica-
tion stickers directly above the ESD ports.
When the equipment manufacturer provides a location for 2.6 Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing
mounting a grounding connection, that connection shall be
utilized. Use the appropriate PANDUIT RG series jumper for If the racks already have network equipment installed, it
the equipment being installed and the thread-forming screws may not be feasible to install the rack ground strip without
provided in the kit. disrupting data cables. Further, it may be undesirable to
disassemble rack hardware to install paint piercing ground-
Use PANDUIT part number series RGCBNJ (Common ing washers, or in some cases, the construction of the rack
Bonding Network Jumper) to attach the rack ground strip to may make grounding washer installation impossible. In these
the mesh CBN. This kit includes the #6 AWG cable with one circumstances, the PANDUIT Retrofit Rack Grounding Kits,
factory installed two-hole lug and hardware to connect to the PANDUIT part family RGR, are to be installed.
busbar and one HTCT HTAP to connect to the mesh CBN. In
addition, all components can be utilized if your mesh com- For retrofit rack grounding/earthing installations, use PAN-
mon bonding network is below or overhead. Do not bond DUIT part number RGRKCBNJY to ground/earth the rack
racks or cabinets serially. Use the HTCT HTAP that comes to the mesh common bonding network. Use PANDUIT part
with the kit to bond the conductor directly to the mesh com- number RGREJ696Y (provided with #6 AWG grounding con-
mon bonding network. ductor) or PANDUIT part number RGREJ1096Y (provided
with #10 AWG grounding conductor) to ground/earth equip-
Patch panels will be bonded to racks using the appropriate ment chassis to the rack grounding busbar provided with the
PANDUIT bonding screws, series RGTBS. Mounting rails RGRKCBNJY as is shown in figure 5 below.
may utilize cage nuts, threaded holes or thru hole mounting
fasteners to secure patch panels to the rails.
Figure 5 - Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing
2.7 Cabinet Grounding/Earthing All cabinets shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT
series RGS, attached to one of the four mounting rails using the
Non-PANDUIT Cabinet Grounding/Earthing hardware provided to ensure metal-to-metal contact.
All non-PANDUIT equipment and cabinets shall be bonded All cabinets shall utilize a copper busbar, PANDUIT part
in accordance with the methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942, number RGRB19U, as a main collection point before con-
as is shown in figure 6 below. necting to the mesh common bonding network (MCBN).
The busbar can be mounted at the top or the bottom of the
cabinet depending on where the MCBN is located.
The copper busbar will then be connected to the MCBN

utilizing the PANDUIT common bonding network jumper kit,
part number series RGCBNJ. This kit includes the #6 AWG
cable with one factory installed two-hole lug and hardware
to connect to the busbar and one HTCT HTAP to connect to
the MCBN. In addition, all components can be utilized if the
MCBN is below or overhead.
Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT

series RGESD, directly to the grounding strip on the back of
the cabinet at approximately 48 inches (122cm) from the floor.
Mount a second RGESD directly to the grounding strip at the
front at approximately the same height. Place the ESD protec-
tion identification stickers directly above the ESD ports.
Cabinet equipment mounting rails may utilize cage nuts,

threaded holes or thru-hole type mounting fasteners to
secure equipment to the rails. Each kit is supplied with the
unique thread-forming screws and bonding studs to provide
the bond to the equipment mounting rails.
Figure 6 - Properly Grounded/Earthed Cabinet (Back of Cabinet Shown) Grounding/Earthing PANDUIT Cabinets
To provide electrical continuity between cabinet rails, All PANDUIT® NET-ACCESS™ Cabinets shall be bonded in
PANDUIT rail jumper kit, series CGJ, shall be used to bond accordance with the methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942.
the front and rear equipment mounting rails. It may not be
feasible or may be undesirable to disassemble the cabinet to Since the NET-ACCESS™ Cabinet features a fully inte-
install the paint piercing washers. Using the rail jumper kits grated, electrically bonded structure, there is no need to
is a more cost effective way to bond the equipment mounting bond the rails together with front to back jumpers and the 19”
rails together. horizontal busbar. See figure 7 below.
2.8 Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing
If the cabinets already have network equipment installed, it

may not be feasible to install the rack ground strips without
disrupting data cables. In these cases the rack ground strip
would not be used and equipment jumpers would be used to
make the bond between network equipment and the busbar.
See figure 6 for details.
All other grounding/earthing requirements apply to retrofit

installations without exception.
2.9 Shield Grounding
A key element of a shielded copper cabling system is proper

grounding. PANDUIT TX6™ 10GIG™ Shielded Copper Ca-
bling System shall be bonded as shown in figure 8.
The cable shield shall be run continuously from port-to-port.

As the shield becomes bonded to the equipment chassis
when the plug is inserted into the jack on the equipment,
this effectively bonds the shield conductor at both ends of Figure 7 - Properly Grounded/Earthed PANDUIT® NET-ACCESS™
the cable, and at patch panels in between. Such a system is Cabinet (Back of Cabinet Shown)
most effective at reducing noise coupling to the data signal
so long as the power sources feeding the equipment in-
volved are bonded together.
Figure 8 – Properly grounding shielded copper cabling system
2.10 Zone Box Grounding Part 3 - Execution
All active equipment in the enclosure and the enclosure itself 3.1 Grounding System
(including door) shall be bonded to a dedicated ground via a
grounding bracket. The grounding bracket shall incorporate The communications grounding system shall be designed
a space-saving design without stacking lugs, and it shall and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that
prevent lugs from twisting loose. An electrostatic discharge
the work is to be performed. The communications grounding
(ESD) port shall be mounted directly to the grounding
system shall adhere to the recommendations of the ANSI/
bracket. PANDUIT part number PZAEGK shall be utilized.
TIA-942 and J-STD-607-A standards, and shall be installed
See figure 9 below.
in accordance with best industry practice. International
regions shall adhere to the recommendations of the BS EN
50310:2000 standard.
A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and

termination of the main bonding conductor to the building
service entrance ground.
3.2 Inspection of the Grounding System
The communications grounding system should be inspected

at time of installation and then on yearly basis thereafter.
Refer to Panduit document, “ITE Supplemental Grounding
and Bonding Inspection” for inspection process and
Figure 9 – Exploded view of STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Enclosure Kit documentaiton procedures.
Appendix C-3: Example Grounding and Bonding System

Visual Inspection and Documentation Process
Example of a Grounding Visual Inspection and

Documentation Process
Date:
Company:
Contact:
This document describes the process of properly inspect-

ing information technology equipment (ITE) supplemental
grounding and bonding systems.
An answer of “yes” for each question on the inspection list

indicates that the components of the ITE supplemental
grounding and bonding system have been installed to com-
monly referenced industry standards.
Use the room/rack/cabinet number space on each sheet to

provide each measurement set with a unique identification
number so that issues found during the inspection can be
addressed later.
Bonding inspections for each telecommunications space
Room Number:________
Is a Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) present?  Yes  No

Have the following bonds been made to the TGB?
The AC electrical panel  Yes  No
Accessible building steel  Yes  No
The Mesh Common Bonding Network1  Yes  No
The Telecommunications Bonding Backbone2  Yes  No
1. The Mesh Common Bonding Network (MCBN) is the

conductor or group of conductors that extend from the TGB
to each bay in the room. The MCBN can be installed above
the bays or under the access floor.
2. The Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) is

the conductor that bonds every TGB in the bonding network
together. The TBB may not be present in every installation.
Using a clamp-on amp meter, check for AC and DC current on each of the bonds listed above. A  Yes  No
reading of zero amps AC and DC may be indicative of an open connection. A reading of greater than
one amp AC and 0.5 amps DC may be indicative of fault conditions somewhere in the power system.
Clamp the meter around the grounding conductor in question

Are the AC and DC currents at acceptable levels?  Yes  No
Are the bend radii of all these conductors greater than twelve inches?  Yes  No
Are all the bonds to the TGB made with two-hole compression lugs?  Yes  No
Is each conductor bonded to the TGB labeled or tagged as a grounding conductor as shown below?  Yes  No
Bonding inspections for each rack:

Rack Number:_______
Are electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap ports available on the front and back of each rack?  Yes  No
Are two-hole compression lugs compression HTAPs used wherever possible?  Yes  No
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the common bonding network  Yes  No
(CBN) to rack jumper and the HTAP connecting the jumper to the mesh common bonding network
as shown below.
One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the HTAP:

Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω?

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between each section of the rack and  Yes  No
the common bonding network to rack jumper as shown below.
One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the washer:
Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each section of rack?

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the mounting flange of each  Yes  No
piece of powered equipment and the common bonding network to rack jumper.
Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each piece of equipment?
Bonding inspections for each cabinet

Cabinet Number: ______
Are electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap ports available on the front and back of each rack?  Yes  No
Are two-hole compression lugs compression HTAPs used wherever possible?  Yes  No
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the common bonding network  Yes  No
(CBN) to rack jumper and the HTAP connecting the jumper to the mesh common bonding network
as shown below.
One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the HTAP:

Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω?
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the rack/cabinet’s equipment  Yes  No
mounting rails and the common bonding network jumper.
One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the rail:
Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each section of rack?

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the mounting flange of each  Yes  No
piece of powered equipment and the common bonding network to rack jumper.
Bonding inspections for each piece of equipment:

Equipment Identification Number: ______
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the equipment grounding  Yes  No
jumper (when present) or the mounting flange of each piece of powered equipment and the com-
mon bonding network to rack jumper as shown below.
One probe on the equipment grounding jumper:
One probe on the CBN jumper:
OR
One probe on the equipment mounting flange:
Bonding inspections for shielded cables

Rack/Cabinet Number: ______
Has the bay passed all the rack or cabinet bonding inspections?  Yes  No
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between each cable shield and the com-  Yes  No
mon bonding network (CBN) to rack jumper as shown below.
One probe on the shield: One probe on the CBN jumper:

Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω between each module and the CBN rack jumper?
Bonding inspections for shielded cables

Rack/Cabinet Number: ______
Using a two-point multimeter, measure the voltage between the module and the ground wire of the
electrical outlet used to provide power to the equipment as shown below.
One probe on the module: One probe in the ground receptacle:  Yes  No

Reference Architecture Design Guide Part 1-4

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Reference Architecture Design Guide Part 1-4

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

building a smarter, unified business foundation

Connect. Manage. Automate.

Panduit Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure

About PANDUIT Disclaimer

PANDUIT is a world- THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS INTENDED

• Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.

Finally this Design Guide must also recognize the ongoing

1.1 GOALS OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Section 2: Organization of Control System Networks

2.1 THE IMPORTANCE OF THE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Section 3: Physical Infrastructure Project Phases

3.1 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR PROJECT PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Section 4: Physical Infrastructure Implementation

4.1 Copper Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3 Grounding and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.8 Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

Section 5: Network & Security Services

5.1 Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Appendix A: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System

A.1 Conduit Fill Capacity Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding/Bonding System

C.1 Example Grounding & Bonding System Specification Document for

Figure 1.1-1 Industrial Ethernet continues to move forward

Figure 2.2-1 The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture

Figure 3.1-1 OSI 7-Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Figure 4.3-1 Example Grounding and Bonding System in a

Figure 4.10-1 Applications currently driving the adoption of PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Manufacturing convergence helps companies reach their goals

In order to address these issues, PANDUIT has collaborated

1.1 Goals of this Guide

• Industrial Ethernet on the Plant Floor: A Planning and

1.3 What is Industrial Ethernet? 1.4 What is Reference Architecture”?

By integrating production, data acquisition, purchasing,

• Monitoring the manufacturing operations and processes

• Zone Cabling Enclosure

Fig. 1.1-2. Typical manufacturing infrastructure is comprised of distinct areas with

• Discrete (e.g. Assembly and

• Process (e.g. Mixing )

• SCADA (e.g. Material Storage)

1.7 Zone Cabling Architecture Advantages 1.7.1 Office Example

Zone Cabling Topology provides a cost-effective alternative

• Reduced home-run wiring

• Ease zone adjustments or expansions

• Reduces size of central closet

1.7.2 Industrial Physical Network Zones

For industrial application, a zone cabling architecture can

PNZ Physical Network Zone Fig 1.1-6: The diagram

tt • M1I1C1E1 describes a worst-case environment

• Shielded for rejecting EMI noise.

Telecommunications Room Enclosures

Typical MICE Ranges 1-2 from

1.9 Organization of this Guide

Level 2 – Area Supervisory Control

• Define electronic information exchange between the

• ANSI/ISA-95.00.01-2000, Enterprise-Control System

The Committee s focus is to improve the confidentiality,

Figure 2.3-1. Schematic Overview of Common Areas of Industrial

Manufacturing Zone. The manufacturing zone comprises

Figure 2.3-2. Manufacturing Zone Network Layers

2.3.2 Connecting Manufacturing to Enterprise

2.3.3 Enterprise Connectivity Options

A. Isolated No connection to the enterprise

100% isolation No real time data transfer or remote access